Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Report
PROJECT MANUAL FOR ' Clean Water Services DURHAM FACILITY SOLIDS BUILDING PHASE 2 ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 6755 March 2016 i �o.° PRO,c I` I �• �� 1 �5GINE Fs% `E� • e. v 61' �• r, 4I A' 7837 P 9. 1 �� I • 11,2A ���•� 1' I FY M. 'A,9 "`''l. 19, '4'0 111 'EXPIRATION DATE:1213ti)17 'EXPIRATION DATE:17431'14 �` A. ��P 1 . KENNEDY/JENKS CONSULTANTS 421 SW Sixth, Suite 1000 Portland, Oregon 97204 (503) 423-4000 JOB NO. 1376013.70 1 1 I CLEAN WATER SERVICES DURHAM FACILITY SOLIDS BUILDING PHASE 2 ODOR CONTROL IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 6755 PROJECT MANUAL ' TABLE OF CONTENTS Title Page Table of Contents DIVISION 0: BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, CONTRACT CONDITIONS 1 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS ' 00030 Advertisement to Bid 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Forms 00480 Noncollusion Affidavit CONTRACT FORMS 00500 Agreement 00610 Performance Bond ' 00620 Payment Bond 00630 Statutory Public Works Bond CONTRACT CONDITIONS 00700 General Conditions 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00810 Oregon Prevailing Wage Rates 1 I Durham Facility Solids Building Phase 2 TOC- i Table of Contents Odor Control Improvement No. 6755 ' Permit Set 1376017*70 ©2016 Kennedy/Jenks Consultants q:\projects\2013\1376013.70_solids_bldg_odor_phase2\10-engdesign\10.01-spec\100%submittal\permit setlitoc 100%.doc 1 I DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 01010 Summary of Work 01014 Work Sequence and Schedule of Constraints 01060 Safety and Health 01190 Seismic Requirements 01300 Submittals 01450 Quality Requirements 01500 Contractor's Facilities and Utilities 01505 Mobilization and Demobilization 01517 Owner's Potential Construction Sequencing Plan 01560 Environmental Controls 01605 Shipment, Protection and Storage 01650 Commissioning and Facility Startup 01700 Restoration of Improvements 01720 Record Drawings 01730 Operation and Maintenance Information 11101999 Reference Forms DIVISION 2: SITEWORK 02050 Demolition DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 03200 Reinforcing Steel 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 5: METALS 05090 Structural Metal Fasteners 05100 Structural Metal Framing 05310 Steel Decking (Structural) 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 Thermal Insulation I 07421 Metal Wall Panels 07540 PVC Roofing 07591 Preparation for Reroofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07920 Joint Sealant Durham Facility Solids Building Phase 2 TOC-ii Table of Contents Odor Control Improvement No. 6755 Permit Set 1376017'70 ©2016 Kennedy/Jenks Consultants q:\projects\2013\1376013.70_solids_bldg_odor_phase2\10-engdesign\10.01-specs\100%submittal\permit setl'oc 100%.doc I I DIVISION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS I08520 Translucent Sandwich Panel Systems I DIVISION 9: FINISHES 09221 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09290 Gypsum Board I 09900 Exterior and Concrete Painting 09912 Interior Painting IDIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 11001 General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 11002 Electric Motor Drives IDIVISION 15: MECHANICAL I 15050 Piping, Valves and Accessories 15510 Hot Water Heating Coils 15800 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning ' 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL I 16010 Electrical Work, General 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 16075 Electrical Identification 16080 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 16120 Conductors 16130 Raceway and Boxes I 16262 Variable Frequency Drives 16412 Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 16422 Motor Starters. I16444 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers DIVISION 17: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I 17050 Basis Measurement and Control Instrumentation 17100 HVAC Instruments 17330A Input-Output List I 17331 17901 Control Loop Descriptions Schedules—Field Instruments I IDurham Facility Solids Building Phase 2 TOC- iii Table of Contents Odor Control Improvement No. 6755 I Permit Set 1376017'70 ©2016 Kennedy/Jenks Consultants q:\projects\2013\1376013.70_solids_bldg_odor_phase2\10-engdesign\10.01-specs\100%submittal\permit setl'toc 100%.doc I I ISECTION 00030 CLEAN WATER SERVICES IDURHAM ADVANCED WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 I PROJECT NO. 6755 ADVERTISEMENT TO BID I Sealed Bids will be received by Jane Nishizaki, Administrative Assistant, at the office of Clean Water Services (Owner), located at the Treatment Plant Services Building, 16060 S.W. 85th Avenue, Tigard, Oregon, 97224 (Owner's Office), until 2:00 p.m. local time, on Wednesday, April 6, 2016 for the Durham AWWTF Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 (Project). Any I Bids received after the specified time and date will not be considered. No electronic submissions will be accepted. First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Forms must be delivered to the same location at or before 4:00 p.m., local time on the same day, and in a separate envelope from the I Bid. The Bids will be publicly opened and read at 4:00 p.m. local time on Wednesday, April 6, 2016 at IOwner's Office. The site of the WORK is located at the Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility, 16060 SW 85th Avenue, Tigard, Oregon 97224 (Site). IThe WORK is a Public Works project subject to ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870. The WORK includes but is not limited to: furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the following I work on the Solids Building Odor Control System at the Site: Modify the Solids Building existing ductwork and electrical work, supply and install new Solids Building interior ductwork, modify the existing outside ductwork (exposed and buried), supply and install new outside ductwork (exposed and buried), supply and install two new make-up air units, supply and install new five exhaust fans, II supply and install a new supply fan with heating coils, modify an existing make up air unit, and, perform other miscellaneous demolition, mechanical, civil, and electrical upgrades specified in the Contract Documents. IBidding Documents can be downloaded from the Owner's Website at http://www.cleanwaterservices.org/AboutUs/Solicitations/. Prospective Bidders will need to sign I in to download the information and that information will be accumulated for a Plan Holder's List. Additional options for viewing, obtaining or purchasing the Bidding Documents, half-size or full-size drawings, or specifications are further described in Subsection 2.1 of Section 00100 and on OWNER's website. 1 Prospective Bidders are responsible for obtaining any Addenda from District's Website listed above. Prospective Bidders may subscribe to Owner's Open Solicitations RSS feed at the same l Website address and will be notified when an Addendum to or clarifications of the Bidding Documents have been posted. If problems are experienced downloading the Bidding Documents, please contact Jane Nishizaki at(503) 547-8175. 1 The estimated construction cost of the WORK is approximately$1,540,000. I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Advertisement to Bid Project No.6755 00030- 1 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I To obtain Bid results, and for assistance with other administrative issues, contact the OWNER: Clean Water Services I Ms. Jane Nishizaki 16060 SW 85th Avenue I Tigard, OR 97224 503-547-8175 Ph 503-547-8196 Fax nishizakij@cleanwaterservices.org MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE AND VISIT TO SITE: Prospective Bidders are required to attend a pre-bid conference and Site visit that will begin at 2:00 p.m. local time on Wednesday, March 23, 2016 in the Owner's Office. The purpose of the conference and Site visit is to distribute Bidding Documents, discuss the scope of the Project and bidding requirements and to acquaint Bidders with Site conditions. Detailed technical questions may be submitted in writing I and will be answered, if warranted, by written addenda later. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. Direct communications on technical issues should be addressed to the Design Engineer I (Engineer): Kennedy/Jenks Consultants, Inc. Preston Van Meter, PE 421 SW 6th Street, Suite 1000 Portland, OR 97201 503-423-4000 Ph PrestonVanMeter@kennedyjenks.com Prior to submission of its Bid, Bidder shall be licensed with the Oregon Construction Contractors I Board as required by ORS 701.055, and thereafter comply with the requirements of ORS 701.035 to 701.137. Bidders need not be licensed under ORS 468A.720 (regarding licensing of Contractors on projects involving asbestos abatement). I Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check or Bid Bond in the amount of 10 percent of the Lump Sum Price payable to Owner as a guarantee that the Bidder, if its Bid is accepted, will promptly execute the Agreement. A Bid shall not be considered unless one of the forms of Bidder's security is enclosed with it. Each Bid must contain a statement as to whether a Bidder is a Resident Bidder as defined by ORS 279A.120. II I I II Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Advertisement to Bid 1 Project No.6755 00030-2 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I. 1 1 The Bidder shall guarantee the Lump Sum Price for a period of 60 calendar days from the date of Bid opening. Bidders shall be qualified in accordance with the applicable parts of ORS 279C in order to submit a Bid for public work in Oregon. Owner reserves the right to cancel this solicitation or reject any or all Bids not in compliance with ' all prescribed public bidding procedures and requirements or when Owner finds that the Bidder has not demonstrated its responsibility under ORS 279C.375(3)(b) and as that term is used in any applicable Owner's Purchasing Rules. 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Advertisement to Bid Project No.6755 00030-3 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 ' SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR 1 DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 PART 1 — DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders and the Advertisement to Bid which are 1 defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Certain additional terms used in the Bidding Documents have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. A. Bidder--One who submits a Bid directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, bidder, who submits a price or quote to a Bidder. B. Successful Bidder--Lowest, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom Owner(on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. ' PART 2 —COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids. Neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.02 The Bidding Documents can be downloaded from the Owner's Website at http://www.cleanwaterservices.orq/AboutUs/Solicitations/. Neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. Prospective Bidders will need to sign in to download the information and that information will be accumulated for a Plan Holder's List. Prospective Bidders are responsible for obtaining any Addenda from District's Website listed above. Prospective Bidders may subscribe to Owner's Open Solicitations ' RSS feed at the same Website address and will be notified when an Addendum to or clarifications of the Bidding Documents have been posted. If problems are experienced downloading the Bidding Documents, please contact Jane Nishizaki at the Owner's office at (503) 547-8175. Full-size Drawings may be obtained from Owner at cost of reproduction and handling, plus postage for mailing (if mailing is requested). 2.03 Bidding Documents made available on the above terms are only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. PART 3—QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS ' 3.01 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, the apparent Successful Bidder and other Bidders as determined by Owner, must be prepared to submit within seven calendar days after Owner's written request, evidence such as financial data, previous ' experience, present commitments, and other such data as may be called for in the Bidding Documents. ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Instruction to Bidders 00100- 1 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 3.02 Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualifications to do business in Oregon or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to Contract award. I 3.03 Bidders for public work in Oregon shall be qualified in conformance with ORS Chapter 279C. L 3.04 Nothing indicated herein will prejudice Owner's right to seek additional pertinent information as provided in Article 14— Evaluation of Bids of this Section. I 3.05 Bidders and every subcontractor performing Work on the Project must have filed with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board a public works bond in the amount of $30,000 with a corporate surety authorized to do business in the State of Oregon before starting I Work on the Project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8), or (9). must require in every subcontract that the Subcontractor have a public works bond filed with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board before starting Work on the Project 1 unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8), or (9). PART 4— LICENSING REQUIREMENTS I 4.01 A person, partnership, limited liability company, corporation, or joint venture shall have a current, valid license issued by the Oregon Construction Contractors Board, as required by ORS 701.055, prior to submitting a Bid to do Work as a contractor or subcontractor. I PART 5— ENVIRONMENTAL AND NATURAL RESOURCES LAWS AND REGULATIONS 5.01 Bidder's attention is directed to the General Requirements and Supplementary I Conditions for ordinances and regulations dealing with the prevention of pollution and preservation of natural resources which may affect the performance of the Work. Bidder shall take such ordinances and regulations into consideration in preparing and submitting its Bid. PART 6 — INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDAII 6.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to the Owner. Questions shall be submitted in writing only (i.e., mail, fax or e-mail). I Additions, deletions, or revisions to the Bidding Documents considered necessary by the Owner in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the Owner as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than five days prior to the date of Bids may not be answered. Only answers III such questions issued by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.02 Addenda may also be issued to make other additions, deletions, or revisions to the I Bidding Documents. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda on the Bid Form in the appropriate space. I 6.03 Bidders shall make no special interpretation or inference of intent from differing formats in the Technical Specifications. I ruction to Bidders Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Inst 00100-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I I PART 7— BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 7.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid: A. To examine thoroughly the Bidding Documents and other related data identified in I the Bidding Documents; B. To visit the Site and attend the Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work; ' C. To consider federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work; D. To study and carefully correlate the Bidder's observations with the Bidding I Documents; and E. To promptly notify the Owner of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in Ior between the Bidding Documents and such other related data. 7.02 Copies of reports and drawings utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Bidding Documents will be made available by Owner to any Bidder on request at cost of I reproduction and handling, plus postage for mailing (if mailing is requested), if the reports and drawings are not bound herein. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Bidding Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which the Bidder is I entitled to reasonably rely, as provided in Paragraph SC-4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions, are incorporated herein by reference. 7.03 Information and data reflected in the Bidding Documents with respect to underground ' facilities at or contiguous to the Site are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by the owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is I expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions. 7.04 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, underground facilities, and other physical conditions, I and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02 through 4.04 of the General Conditions. I7.05 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, I subsurface, and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the Work and which the Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for performing the Work in accordance with the time, price, and other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. I 7.06 On request a minimum of two calendar days in advance, Owner will provide each Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and Istudies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Location of any excavation or boring shall be subject to prior approval of Owner and applicable agencies. Bidder shall fill all holes, restore all pavement to match existing structural section, and Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Instruction to Bidders Project No.6755 00100-3 K/J Project No. 1376013'"70 1 shall clean up and immediately restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 1 7.07 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way, and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the CONTRACTOR in performing the Work are identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder I that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Paragraph 7 and the following: A. The Bid is premised upon performing the Work required by the Bidding Documents without exception and such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (if any) as may be required by the Bidding Documents; I B. Bidder has given the Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in the Bidding Documents and the written resolution thereof by the Engineer is acceptable to the Bidder; and C. The Bidding Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work. PART 8—SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS I 8.01 ORS 279C.370 requires Bidders for Public Improvement Projects exceeding $100,000 to submit a disclosure form identifying first-tier Subcontractors that will furnish labor or labor I and materials equal to 5 percent or more of the total Contract Price, but at least $15,000; or $350,000, regardless of percentage of the total Contract Price. If no Subcontractors are subject to the disclosure requirements, "NONE" shall be indicated on the form to be provided. Subcontractor disclosure forms not submitted with the Bid shall be submitted within two working hours of Bid closing. If Bidder fails to submit a disclosure form with the information required and by the stated deadline, the Bid will be rejected. 8.02 The definition of a Subcontractor does not include Suppliers who provide materials only. 8.03 If the Successful Bidder declines to make a substitution of a Subcontractor, Supplier, I person, or organization acceptable to Owner, as required by Paragraph 6.06.B of the General Conditions, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and I organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person, or organization listed and to whom Owner or Engineer does not make written objection prior I to giving the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as provided in General Conditions Paragraph 6.06.B. I Instruction to Bidders Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I 00100 4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I PART 9—WAGE RATES/BOLI FEE 1 10.01 The Work under these Bidding Documents is to be paid for by public funds. This is a public works project subject to the state prevailing rates of wage under ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870. Unless otherwise exempt, Contractor and any Subcontractors must pay workers in each trade or occupation that Contractor or its Subcontractors or other person who is a party to the Contract uses in performing all or a part of the Contract not less than the applicable minimum Oregon prevailing wage rates in accordance with ORS 279C.838 and ORS 279C.840, or the Davis-Bacon Act(40 U.S.C. Section 3141 et seq.). The ' applicable Oregon minimum prevailing wage rates for such workers are contained in the publication January 1, 2016 Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon dated January 1, 2016, including all applicable amendments (see links at http://www.oregon.gov/boli/whd/pwr/pwr_state.shtml), available at http://www.oregon.gov/BOLI and are hereby incorporated herein as of the date these Bidding Documents were first advertised. ' 10.02 ORS 279C.365(1)(g) requires that all Bids for public work, including those public work projects financed by federal funds and subject to the Davis Bacon Act, shall include a statement by the Bidder that it will comply with the provisions of ORS 279C.838, ' 279C.840 or 40 U.S.C. Section 3141, et seq. The Bid Form in the Bidding Documents contains the required statement of Bidder's declaration of compliance with ORS 279C.838, 279C.840 or 40 U.S.C. Section 3141, et seq. The Bidder's signing of the Bid ' constitutes compliance with this Oregon Statute. 10.03 Owner shall be responsible for paying the fee required by ORS 279C.825(1) to the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries. PART 10— BID FORM ' 11.01 The Bid shall be submitted on the Bid Form provided herein. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by typing or printing in ink. All price information shall be shown in both words and figures where required. All names must be printed below the signatures. The ' Bid shall be submitted in a sealed envelope that shall be plainly marked in the upper left hand corner with the name and address of the Bidder and shall bear the words "BID FOR" followed by the title of the Bidding Documents for the Work, the name of Owner, the address where Bids are to be delivered or mailed to, and the date and hour of opening of Bids. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. ' 11.02 First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Forms must be delivered to the same location for delivery of the Bids within two hours of the specified time for receipt of Bids. ' 11.03 Bidder's state Contractor license number for the State of Oregon shall be shown on the Resident/Nonresident Bidder Status Form. ' 11.04 Each Bid must identify whether the Bidder is a resident bidder, as defined by ORS 279A.120, by completing and submitting the Resident/Nonresident Bidder Status Form. ' 11.05 Bidder shall complete the Noncollusion Affidavit and submit it with its Bid. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Instruction to Bidders Project No. 6755 00100-5 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 t 1 PART 11 — BID CERTIFICATES 12.01 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president, a vice- president, or other corporate officer. The Bid shall be accompanied by the enclosed Certificate of Authority to sign, and shall be attested by the secretary or assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must appear below the signature. 12.02 Bids by limited liability companies (LLC) must be executed under the name of the LLC and be signed by a manager if the LLC is manager managed or a member if the LLC is member managed, accompanied by the enclosed Certificate of Authority to sign, and his/her title must appear under the signature and the official address of the LLC must appear below the signature. 12.03 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and be signed by a managing partner, accompanied by the enclosed Certificate of Authority to sign, and his/her title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must appear below the signature. 12.04 Bids by joint ventures must be executed in the joint venture name and be signed by a joint venture managing partner, accompanied by the enclosed Certificate of Authority to sign, and his/her title must appear under the signature and the official address of the joint venture must appear below the signature. PART 12— DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 13.01 More than one Bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names will not be considered. If Owner believes that any Bidder is interested in more than one Bid for the Work contemplated, all Bids in which such Bidder is interested will be rejected. If Owner believes that collusion exists among the Bidders, all Bids will be rejected. A party who has quoted prices to a Bidder is not hereby disqualified from quoting prices to other Bidders, or from submitting a Bid directly for the Work. PART 13—QUANTITIES OF WORK(NOT APPLICABLE) PART 14— EVALUATION OF BIDS 15.01 Owner will evaluate Bids to determine which responsible Bidder has made the lowest responsive Bid. Owner will make this evaluation in accordance with the Bidding Documents and applicable law. Owner may reject a Bid when it is not responsive, or it is in the public interest to do so, or when Owner finds the Bidder has not demonstrated its responsibility to District as required by ORS 279C.375(3)(b) and is not responsible, as that term is used in any applicable Owner's Purchasing Rules and ORS 279A.010 1 r . Owner may also reject Bids from Bidders declared ineligible under ORS 279C.860 or from Bidders listed as not qualified by the State of Oregon Construction Contractors Board, from Bidders that have not met the requirements of ORS 279A.105(1), (2) or(3), and for other circumstances that indicate acceptance of the Bid may impair the integrity of the selection process. Instruction to Bidders Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 00100-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 137601370 1 1 I 15.02 Owner reserves its right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the right to I reject any or all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids, and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if Owner believes that it would not be in the public interest to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is I unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by Owner. Owner reserves the right to reject all Bids and rebid the Project if it is in the public interest to do so in accordance with ORS 279C.395. Owner I also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work. 15.03 In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider the qualifications of Bidders, whether or not the 1 Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise provided Iin the Bidding Documents. 15.04 Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work for which their I identity was required. Owner also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data, and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data are required to be Isubmitted prior to the Notice of Award. 15.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in Bid I evaluation and to establish responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations to execute Work in accordance with the Bidding Documents to Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time. I 15.06 In determining the lowest responsible Bidder, Owner will for the purpose of awarding the Contract, add a percent increase on the Bid of a nonresident Bidder equal to the percent, Iif any, of the preference given to that Bidder in the state in which the Bidder resides. 15.07 If, at the time this Contract is to be awarded, the total of the lowest acceptable Bid I exceeds the funds then estimated by Owner as available, Owner may reject all Bids or take such other action as best serves Owner's interests. 15.08 If the Successful Bidder fails to sign the Agreement and provide acceptable Performance Iand Payment Bond(s), copies of public works bonds, insurance certificate(s), and other required documents, Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. PART 15—SUBMISSION OF BIDS 16.01 The Bid shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in the Advertisement To I Bid. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that its Bid is received in proper time and at the proper place. I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6755 Instruction to Bidders 00100-7 KM Project No. 1376013*70 1 PART 16— BID SECURITY, BONDS, AND INSURANCE 17.01 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check or approved Bid Bond in an amount equal to ten percent of the Bid. The check or bond shall be made payable to Owner and shall be given as a guarantee that the Bidder, if awarded the Work, will enter into an Agreement with Owner, and will furnish the necessary insurance certificates, Payment Bond, and Performance Bond, each of the bonds to be in the amount stated in 111 the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and copies of Public Works Bonds. In case of refusal or failure to enter into the Agreement, the check or Bid Bond, as the case may be, shall be forfeited to Owner. If the Bidder elects to furnish a Bid Bond as its Bid security, the Bidder shall use the Bid Bond form bound herein, or one conforming substantially to it in form. Bid Bonds shall comply with the requirements applicable to payment and performance bonds in the General Conditions. PART 17— DISCREPANCIES IN BIDS 18.01 If there is more than one Bid item in a Bid Schedule, the Bidder shall furnish a price for all Bid items in the Schedule, and failure to do so will render the Bid non-responsive and may cause its rejection. If there are unit price Bid items in a Bidding Schedule and the amount indicated for a unit price Bid item does not equal the product of the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall govern and the amount will be corrected accordingly, and the BIDDER shall be bound by the correction. If there is more than one Bid item in a Bid Schedule and the total indicated for the Schedule does not agree with the sum of the prices bid on the individual items, the prices bid on the individual items shall govern and the total for the Schedule will be corrected accordingly, and the Bidder shall be bound by the correction. If there are discrepancies between figures and written words, words shall govern. PART 18— MODIFICATIONS AND UNAUTHORIZED ALTERNATIVE BIDS 19.01 Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisos attached to the Bid shall render it I informal and may cause its rejection as being non-responsive. The Bid Form shall be completed without interlineations, alterations, or erasures in the printed text. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for. Oral, telegraphic, telephonic or electronic Bids or modifications will not be considered. PART 19—WITHDRAWAL OF BID , 20.01 The Bid may be withdrawn by the Bidder by means of a written request, signed by the Bidder or its properly authorized representative. Such written request must be delivered to the place stipulated in the Advertisement To Bid for receipt of Bids prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids. 20.02 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with , Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material and substantial mistake in preparing its Bid, as determined by Oregon law and any applicable Owner's Purchasing Rules, Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, Bidder will be disqualified from further consideration on the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents. Instruction to Bidders Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 00100-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 137601370 I 1 1 PART 20—AWARD OF CONTRACT 1 21.01 Award of the Contract, if awarded, will be made to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder whose Bid complies with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. Unless otherwise specified, any such award will be made within the period stated in the Advertisement to Bid that the Bids are to remain open. Unless otherwise indicated, a single award will be made for all the Bid items in an individual Bid Schedule. If the Work is contained in more than one Bid Schedule, Owner will award all Schedules. PART 21 — RETURN OF BID SECURITY 22.01 Within 14 days after award of the Contract, Owner will return the Bid securities accompanying such Bids that are not being considered in making the award. All other Bid securities will be held until the Agreement has been finally executed. They will then be returned to the respective Bidders whose Bids they accompany. PART 22— EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT 23.01 The Bidder to whom award is made shall execute a written Agreement with the Owner on the form of Agreement provided, shall secure all insurance, and shall furnish all certificates and bonds required by the Bidding Documents within ten calendar days after ' receipt of the Notice of Award from Owner. No changes to the Contract Documents will be allowed. Submission of a Bid constitutes acceptance of the terms of the Contract Documents. Failure or refusal to enter into an Agreement as herein provided or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid security. If the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement, Owner may award the Contract to the second lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. If the second lowest responsive, responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement, Owner may award the Contract to the third lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second or third lowest Bidder to execute the Agreement, each such ' Bidder's Bid securities shall be likewise forfeited to Owner. 23.02 Within ten calendar days of Owner receiving the properly executed Agreements and acceptable certificates and bonds, Owner will provide one fully executed Agreement to CONTRACTOR. PART 23— LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 24.01 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 1 I 1 ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Instruction to Bidders Project No. 6755 00100-9 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 25.01PART Provisions24RETAI concerning retainage and Contractor's rights to deposit securities in lieu of retainage are set forth in the Agreement. PART 25— PROTEST PROCEDURE 26.01 Owner has adopted its own Public Contracting Rules and is not subject to the Attorney General's Model Public Contracting Rules. Owner's procurement rules have opportunities for Bidders to protest at various stages in the procurement process. This section only contains a brief summary of the deadlines for filing protests. It does not identify the conditions required to file a protest or the information required to be included in the protest. Copies of Owner's rules containing the protest process may be obtained by contacting Owner's representative. A. Specification Protest Process A Bidder must deliver a protest of specifications to Owner in writing no later than ten calendar days prior to the due date for Bids. B. Solicitation Protest Under Owner's rules, prospective Bidders have the opportunity to protest the procurement process or this Invitation to Bid by submitting a written protest to Owner not less than ten calendar days prior to the due date for Bids. C. Award Protest Adversely affected Bidders will also have an opportunity to protest Owner's Notice of Intent to Award, but a written protest must be delivered to Owner within seven calendar days of the date of the Notice of Intent to Award. The award by Owner's Board of Directors of the Contract shall constitute a final decision of Owner to award the Contract if no written protest of the award is filed. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 Instruction to Bidders Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 00100- 10 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 r SECTION 00300 IBID BIDFORMS BID TO: Clean Water Services 1 1 1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an I Agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform the WORK as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents entitled Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents, including without limitation those in the Advertisement to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, dealing with the disposition of the Bid security. This Bid will remain open for sixty (60) days from the bid due date unless otherwise required by law. Bidder will enter into an Agreement within the time and in the manner required in the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders, and will furnish the insurance certificates, Payment Bond, Performance Bond and copies of Public Works Bonds required by the Contract Documents. Bidder agrees that as Contractor, it will comply with ORS 279C.838, 279C.840 or 40 U.S.C. Section 3141, et seq. 1 Bidder certifies that Bidder has not discriminated and will not discriminate, in violation of ORS 279A.110(1) against a disadvantaged business enterprise, a minority-owned business, a woman-owned business, a business that a service-disabled veteran owns or an emerging small business that is certified under ORS 200.055 in awarding a subcontract. ' Bidder certifies that it has in place or will implement before performance of the Work for this Project begins a mandatory employee drug-testing program. Bidder further certifies that it will demonstrate that the employee drug-testing program is in place. 7. Bidder has examined copies of all the Contract Documents including the following addenda (receipt of all of which is hereby acknowledged): Number Date I 1 Failure to acknowledge receipt of Addenda may render the Bid not responsive and may be cause for its rejection. 8. Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, IWORK, Site, locality where the WORK is to be performed, the legal requirements Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Bid Forms Project No. 6755 00300-1 K/J Project No. 137601370 I (federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations), a nd the conditions affecting cost, progress or performance of the WORK and has maden such independent investigations as Bidder deems necessary. 1 9. Bid Forms as included herein are: a. Bid Schedule. b. Bid Certificate (If Corporation). c. Bid Certificate (If Partnership). d. Bid Certificate (If Limited Liability Company). e. Bid Certificate (If Joint Venture). f. Bid Bond. g. Noncollusion Affidavit. h. Resident/Nonresident Bidder Status Form. i. First-Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form. 10. Bidder by signing below hereby attests or affirms under penalty of perjury: That I am authorized to act on behalf of the Contractor in this matter, that I have authority and knowledge regarding payment of taxes, and that Contractor is to the best of my knowledge, not in violation of any Oregon Tax Laws. For the purposes of this certification, "Oregon Tax Laws" means a state tax imposed by ORS 320.005 to 320.150; ORS 403.200 to 403.250; ORS Chapters 118, 314, 316, 317, 318, 320, 321, 323, the elderly rental assistance program under ORS 310.630 to 310.706; and any local tax laws administered by the Oregon Department of Revenue under ORS 305.620. To all the foregoing, and including all Bid Forms contained in this Bid, the Bidder further agrees to complete the WORK required under the Contract Documents within the Contract Time stipulated in the Contract Documents, and to accept in full payment therefore the Contract Price based on the Lump Sum Price named in the Bid Forms. Dated: Bidder: I By: Name (Signature) Name (Type or Print) Title: I I 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Bid Forms 00300-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I I I I I 1 I BID SCHEDULE Schedule of Bid Prices for Construction of Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Bidder agrees to accept as full payment for the Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 proposed within the Bidding Documents, based upon the undersigned's own estimate of quantities and costs and including sales, consumer, use, and other taxes, except as provided below, and overhead and profit. Bid shall include replacement of three thousand pounds (3000 pounds) of fascia angle iron steel for the Solids Building. (The quantity of fascia angle iron steel is estimated and payment will be made on actual quantities replaced.) The lump sum bid price is as follows: Bid Item Lump Sum Price Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 $ Project No. 6755 (figures) (words) (The amount in words shall take precedence.) The Undersigned Bidder accepts that the lump sum full payment will be modified by additions or deductions as provided below. Add or Deduct Unit Prices for Solids Building Fascia Steel I IThe lump sum payment will be adjusted, up or down, by the amount calculated by multiplying the actual number of pounds of steel within the Solids' Building Fascia replaced by Contractor, at Owner's and Engineer's direction, by the following unit price: Add/Deduct: $ (Words) (Dollars per Pound) I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 00300-3 Project No. 6755 Bid Forms 1 K/J Project No. 1376013'"70 t BIDTIFIC (if CorporationCERATE) STATE OF ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Board of Directors of the t a corporation existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2016, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of this Corporation, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated , 2016 to Clean Water Services by this Corporation and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of this Corporation shall be the official act and deed of this Corporation." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2016. t (Signature) (Title) t t Secretary (Address) t Bid Forms Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 00300-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 137601370 I t BID CERTIFICATE (if Limited Liability Company) I STATE OF ) I ) ss: COUNTY OF ) II HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Members or Managers of the I (Insert Limited Liability Company Name Here) a limited liability company existing under the laws of the State of , was held on Iadopted: , 2016, and the following resolution was duly passed and "RESOLVED, that , as I of this limited liability company, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated 2016 to Clean Water Services by this limited liability company and that his/her execution thereof, attested by of I this limited liability company shall be the official act and deed of this limited liability company." II further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of I , 2016. By: I (Signature) (Title) I (Address) I I I I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 00300-5 Bid Forms IK/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 BID CERTIFICATE (if Partnership) 1 STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Partners of the t a partnership existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2016, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of the Partnership, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated 2016 to Clean Water Services by this Partnership and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the General Partner shall be the official act and deed of this Partnership. I I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of , I 2016. 1 (Signature) I (Title) i (Address) 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Bid Forms 00300-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I BID CERTIFICATE (if Joint Venture) 1 STATE OF ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Principals of the 1 a joint venture existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2016, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as Vre, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated of the Joint, 2016 to Clean Water Services by this Joint Venture and that his/her execution thereof, attested bythe shall be the official act and deed of this Joint Venture." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 2016. , day of I Managing Partner I (Address) 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Bid Forms 00300-7 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I BID BOND t FOR DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS, I That as Principal, and . as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Clean Water Services, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum f oollars , for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a Bid to OWNER to perform the WORK required under the Bid Forms of the OWNER's Contract Documents entitled DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755. NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal is awarded a contract by OWNER and, within the time and in the manner required in the "Advertisement To Bid" and the "Instructions To Bidders" enters into a written Agreement on the form of agreement bound with the Contract Documents, furnishes the required certificates of insurance, and furnishes the required Performance Bond and Payment Bond and copies of Public Works Bonds, and performs in all other respects the Agreement created by this Bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety stipulates and agrees that the obligation of the Surety shall in no way be impaired or affected by an extension of the time within which OWNER may accept such Bid and the Surety further waives notice of any such extension. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by OWNER and OWNER prevails, the Principal and the Surety shall pay all costs incurred by OWNER in such suit, including reasonable attorney's fees and costs to be fixed by the court. I SIGNED, this day of , 20—. (Principal) (Surety) I By: By: (Signature) (Signature) 111 (ATTACH POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR THE ATTORNEY IN FACT FROM THE BONDING I COMPANY TO THIS BOND.) I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 f Bid Forms 00300-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 t NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT FOR DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 State of ) Services Requested ss. In Bid: Durham Odor County of ) Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 I state that I am (Title) of (Name of Firm), and being first duly sworn, depose and say that I am authorized to make this Affidavit on behalf of this firm and its owners, directors, and officers. I state that: (1) The price(s) and amount of this Bid have been arrived at independently and without consultation, communication or agreement with any other contractor, Bidder or potential Bidder, except as disclosed on the attached appendix; (2) Neither the price(s), amount of the Bid or approximate prices or amounts, nor other information included in this Bid have been disclosed to any other firm or person who is a Bidder or potential Bidder, and that they will not be disclosed prior to the award of the Contract(s); (3) No attempt has been made or will be made to induce any firm or person to refrain from submitting a Bid, or to submit a Bid containing less competitive terms than those contained in this Bid; (4) The Bid of this firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or discussion with, or inducement from, any firm or person to submit a complementary or Iother noncompetitive proposal; and (5) (Name of this Firm), its affiliates, subsidiaries, officers, directors and employees are not currently under investigation by any governmental agency and have not in the last four years been convicted of or found liable for any act prohibited by State or Federal law in any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to proposing on any public contract, except as described on the attached appendix. I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Bid Forms Project No. 6755 00300-9 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I (Name of this Firm)state that understands and acknowledges that the above representations are material and important, and will be relied on by Clean Water Services in awarding the Contract(s)for which this Bid is submitted. I understand and this firm understands that any misstatement in this Affidavit is and shall be treated as fraudulent concealment from Clean Water Services of the true facts relating to the submission of Bids for this Contract. Name of Company Signature/Position Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20_, by I I Notary Public for This Commission Expires: I I I I I 1 I I I I Bid Forms Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 00300- 10 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I RESIDENT/NONRESIDENT BIDDER STATUS FORM FOR I DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 Oregon law (ORS 279A.120) requires OWNER, in determining the lowest responsible bidder, to 111 add a percent increase on the bid of a nonresident bidder equal to the percent, if any, of the preference given to bidders in the state in which that bidder resides. Consequently, each bidder must indicate whether it is a resident or nonresident bidder. A resident bidder is a bidder who has paid unemployment taxes or income taxes in Oregon during the 12 calendar months immediately preceding submission of this bid, and has a business address in Oregon, and has stated in its bid whether the bidder is a "resident bidder." A "nonresident bidder" is a bidder who is not a resident bidder. The undersigned bidder states that it is: (check one) 1 1. A resident bidder 2. A nonresident bidder Indicate state in which bidder resides: CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR'S LICENSING Oregon law requires all contractors to be licensed with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board or for landscaping projects with the Landscape Contractors Board in order to submit a Bid to do work and to do work as a contractor or a landscape contractor, respectively. The undersigned Bidder states it is now licensed by the Oregon Construction Contractors Board. Indicate Bidder's Construction Contractors or Landscape Contractors Board License No. Signature of Bidder I I I I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 00300- 11 Bid Forms K/J Project No. 1376013*70 FIRST-TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE FORM a FOR DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 Bid Closing: Disclosure Submittal Deadline: 4:00 P.M.,Wednesday, April 6, 2016 1 This form must be submitted at the location specified in the Advertisement To Bid on the advertised bid closing date and within two working hours after the advertised bid closing time. List below the names of each subcontractor that will be furnishing labor or furnishing labor and materials and that is required to be disclosed, the category of 111 workthat the subcontractor willbe performing and the dollar value of the subcontract. Enter `NONE if there aresubcontractors that need to be disclosed (ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NEEDED). Subcontractor Name Dollar Value Category of Work 1 r 1 I I t Failure to submit this form by the disclosure deadline will result in a nonresponsive bid. A nonresponsive bid will not be considered for award. Form Submitted by (Bidder Name): Contact Name: Phone No.: 1 SIGNATURE: By: Title: Date: I END OF SECTION Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Bid Forms 00300- 12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of , 2016 by and between Clean Water Services (OWNER) and to be determined(CONTRACTOR). tOWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK. CONTRACTOR shall complete the WORK as specified or indicated in OWNER's Contract Documents entitled Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 (Project). The WORK under this Contract shall consist of, but is not limited to, the following: Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the following work on the Odor Control System at the Site: Modify the Solids Building existing ductwork and electrical work, supply and install new Solids Building interior ductwork, modify the existing outside ductwork (exposed and buried), supply and install new outside ductwork (exposed and buried), supply and install two new make-up air units, supply and install new five exhaust fans, supply and install a new supply fan with heating coils, modify an existing make up air unit, and, perform other miscellaneous demolition, mechanical, civil, and electrical upgrades specified in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER. The Project has been designed by Kennedy/Jenks Consultants, Inc., 421 SW 6th Ave, Suite 1000, Portland, OR 97204, (503)423-4000, and they are the Design Engineer-of-Record. For the purposes of this Agreement, OWNER shall also be referred to as ENGINEER and shall have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES. Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the WORK shall be completed within the following number of days from the commencement dates identified below: 111 Milestone Commencement Date Calendar Days Substantial Completion Date of Notice to 168 Proceed (NTP) Final Completion Date of Notice to 196 Proceed (NTP) Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Agreement Project No. 6755 00500- 1 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I I ARTICLE 4. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the WORK is not completed within the time(s) specified in Article 3 herein, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 11 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in determining in a legal or other dispute resolution proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the WORK is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the following amounts for each day that expires after the time specified in Article 3 herein: Milestone Liquidated Damages per Day Substantial Completion $200 Final Completion $200 I In addition, CONTRACTOR shall pay damages of impacts to other contractors/suppliers affected I by CONTRACTOR delays. OWNER shall recover such liquidated damages by deducting the amount owed by change order or from the final payment or any retainage held by OWNER. Each Milestone is a separate Contract requirement. OWNER will not assess liquidated damage amounts cumulatively for failure to meet multiple Milestone dates. ARTICLE 5. CONTRACT PRICE. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds the amount(s) set forth in the conformed Bid Forms, which are included as an attachment to this Agreement. ARTICLE 6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. I CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 7. RETAINAGE. I Prior to Final Completion, OWNER shall retain from progress payments 5 percent of the value of WORK completed. I In lieu of retainage, and at CONTRACTOR's option, provisions may be made as provided in ORS 279C.560 for either depositing with OWNER or in a bank or trust company, bonds or securities of value equal to the retainage, to be held for the benefit of OWNER. Interest on such bonds or securities shall accrue to CONTRACTOR. Costs incurred by OWNER as a result of this option will be deducted from CONTRACTOR's final payment. In lieu of retainage, CONTRACTOR may elect to have accumulated funds deposited by OWNER, as provided in ORS 279C.560, in an interest-bearing account. Interest on such an Agreement Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I 00500-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I U I account would accrue to CONTRACTOR. Costs incurred by OWNER as a result of this option I will be deducted from CONTRACTOR's final payment. In lieu of retainage CONTRACTOR, with the approval of OWNER, may deposit a surety bond for I all or any portion of the retainage in a form acceptable to OWNER. Such bond and any proceeds therefrom shall be made subject to all claims and liens as provided for in ORS 279C.550 to 279C.620. IARTICLE 8. PREVAILING WAGE RATES/BOLI FEE/PUBLIC WORKS BOND REQUIRED. The Project is a public works project. CONTRACTOR agrees that the provisions required by ORS I279C.830 pertaining to CONTRACTOR'S payment of prevailing wage rates shall be included as part of the Contract. CONTRACTOR must pay workers in each trade or occupation that Contractor or its Subcontractors or other person who is a party to the Contract uses in performing all or part of I the Contract at not less than the specific minimum hourly rate of wages in accordance with ORS 279C.838 and 279C.840 and shall require its Subcontractors to pay at such rates. The applicable Oregon prevailing wage rates for such workers are incorporated by reference in Section 00810. 1 CONTRACTOR shall include in every subcontract a provision requiring the Subcontractor to comply with this provision. OWNER shall pay the fee required by ORS 279C.825 to the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries. II Before starting any Work on the Project, CONTRACTOR and every Subcontractor performing WORK on the Project must have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board, unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or(9). CONTRACTOR must require in every subcontract that the Subcontractor have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting work on the Project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), I (7), (8) or(9). ARTICLE 9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. IThe Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning WORK are: I • Agreement • Permits from outside agencies I • Addenda numbers_to_, inclusive • Conformed Bid Forms I • Contract Specifications: Volume 1, Divisions 0 through 16 (Except Sections 00030 — Advertisement to Bid, and Section 00100— Instructions to Bidders) • Contract Drawings I • Executed Performance and Payment Bonds • Copies of Public Works Bonds from CONTRACTOR and every Subcontractor on the I Project. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 00500Agreement -3 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I There are no Contract Documents other than those listed in this Article 9. The Contract Documents may only be amended by Change Order as provided in Article 9 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10. ASSIGNMENT. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation monies that may become due and monies that are due may not be assigned without such consent(except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility I under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 11. PAYROLL AND CERTIFIED STATEMENT FILING REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL RETAINAGE. CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR'S surety, and every Subcontractor or Subcontractor's surety, I shall file with OWNER written payroll and certified statements (Certified Payrolls)that accurately and completely contain the payroll records for each week during which the CONTRACTOR or subcontractor employs a worker on a public works project. The Certified Payrolls shall contain the information required and conform to the requirements set forth in ORS 279C.845 and Oregon Administrative Rule 839-025-0010. CONTRACTOR shall file the Certified Payrolls with OWNER once a month by the fifth business day of the following month. Once construction starts, CONTRACTOR shall file a Certified Payroll with OWNER containing the notation "No Work" 111 week that CONTRACTOR does not WORK on the Project. OWNER shall retain 25 percent of any amount earned by CONTRACTOR, in addition to other retainage, on the WORK until CONTRACTOR has filed with OWNER the required Certified I Payrolls. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR the amount retained under this section within 14 days after the CONTRACTOR files the Certified Payrolls required by this article regardless of whether a subcontractor has failed to file Certified Payrolls. OWNER is not required to verify the truth of the contents of the Certified Payrolls filed by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall retain 25 percent of any amount earned by a first-tier subcontractor on the WORK until the subcontractor has filed with OWNER the required Certified Payrolls. CONTRACTOR shall verify that the first-tier subcontractor has filed the Certified Payrolls before the CONTRACTOR may pay the subcontractor any amount retained under this article. CONTRACTOR shall pay the first-tier subcontractor the amount retained under this article within 14 days after the subcontractor files the Certified Payrolls required by this article. Neither OWNER nor CONTRACTOR is required to verify the truth of the contents of the Certified Payrolls filed by the first-tier subcontractor. I OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Agreement Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 9 00500-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first above written. CLEAN WATER SERVICES CONTRACTOR By: By: General Manager or Designee Title: Address for giving notices Address for giving notices Approved as to Form License No. District Legal Counsel I I I I I 1 I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Agreement Project No.6755 00500-5 K/J Project No. 137601370 I 1 AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Corporation) I STATE OF ) I SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Board of Directors of the I a corporation existing under the laws of the State of , was held on I , 216, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as 111 (insert title) of the Corporation, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement for Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 by and between this Corporation and Clean Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of the Corporation, shall be the official act and deed of this Corporation." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. I IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2016. I President I Secretary I I I Agreement Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I 00500-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Limited Liability Company) STATE OF ) rCOUNTY OF ) ss: ' I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Members or Managers of the (Insert Limited Liability Company Name Here) a limited liability company existing under the laws of the State of on , 2016, and the following resolution was dulywas held passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as the of the liability company, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement Durham Odorlimited Cont of System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 by and between this limited liability company and Clean Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the shall be the official act and deed of this limited liability company." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 2016. , day of 1 By: Title: I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 00500-7 Agreement K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Partnership) STATE OF ) SS: COUNTY OF ) ' I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Partners of the a partnership existing under the laws of the State of , was held on 1 , 2016, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: as "RESOLVED, that of the Partnership, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement for Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 by and between this Partnership ash Cleane the n Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested y theofficial act and deed of this Partnership." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2016. I Partner 1 I I I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Agreement 00500-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Joint Venture) STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Principals of the 1 a joint venture existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2016, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of the Joint Venture, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement for Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 by and between this Joint Venture and Clean Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the shall be the official act and deed of this Joint Venture." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2016. I Managing Partner END OF AGREEMENT I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Agreement Project No.6755 00500-9 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I SECTION 00610 I PERFORMANCE BOND FOR I DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 IBond No. IAmount: $ KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS, that I as Contractor, and I a corporation, duly authorized to do general surety business in the State of Oregon, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and bound unto Clean Water Services, hereinafter referred to as the Obligee, in the sum of ($ DOLLARS administrators, successors, and assigns,for j jointly and seve ally,the payment of which weInd and firmly by these presenourselves, our heirs, ts utors, This bond is executed under the authority of ORS Chapters 279A, 279B and 279C, of the State I of Oregon, the provisions of which are hereby incorporated into this bond and made a part thereof. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT: WHEREAS, the Contractor has been conditionally awarded a contract for Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 by the Obligee, which contract, including all Contract Documents, is by this reference expressly incorporated herein. NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this bond is such that if the Contractor shall faithfully I perform all the provisions of such Contract for the duration thereof, including the one-year correction period described in Contract Documents, and indemnify and save harmless the Obligee from any claim for damages of every kind and description or injury to property or I persons arising or alleged to have arisen by reason of the work; and shall, in the time and manner, and under the terms and conditions prescribed, faithfully do, perform, and furnish all matters and things as by them in the Contract undertaken, and as by law, local, state, and federal, prescribed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER: In no event shall the Surety be liable forareater sum 9 than the amount of this bond. 1 The Surety for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the term of the Contract Documents, or to the work to be performed thereunder, Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Performance Bond 00610- 1 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 or the Specifications accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any sucho the change,Ceextension ct sionDocof time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work, or nts. Signed this day of , 20__ 1 ADDRESS CONTRACTOR ' By: PHONE NUMBER Title: Approved as to Form SURETY District Counsel By: Attorney-in-Fact 1 Address of Surety's Resident Agent I 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Performance Bond 00610-2 Project No.675 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 SECTION 00620 ' PAYMENT BOND FOR I DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 1 ' Bond No. Amount: $ KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS, that as Contractor, and a corporation, duly authorized to do general surety business in the State of Oregon, as Surety, ' are jointly and severally held and bound unto Clean Water Services, hereinafter referred to as the Obligee, in the sum of DOLLARS �$ ) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, and firmly by these presents. ' This bond is executed under the authority of ORS Chapters 279A, 279B and 279C, of the State of Oregon, the provisions of which are hereby incorporated into this bond and made a part ' thereof. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT: ' WHEREAS, the Contractor has been conditionally awarded a contract for Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 by the Obligee, which contract, including all Contract Documents, is by this reference expressly incorporated herein. NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this bond is such that if the Contractor shall faithfullyand promptly pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, materialmen, and all persons who supply such work and services, and indemnify and save harmless the Obligee from any claim for damages of every kind and description or injury to property or persons arising or alleged to have arisen by reason of the work; and shall, in the time and manner, and under the terms and ' conditions prescribed, faithfully do, perform, and furnish all matters and things as by them in the Contract undertaken, and as by law, local, state, and federal, prescribed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER: In no event shall the Surety be liable for a greater sum than the amount of this bond. The Surety for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the term of the Contract Documents, or to the work to be ' performed thereunder, or the Specifications accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work, or to the Contract Documents. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Payment Bond Project No. 6755 00620- 1 KM Project No. 1376013*70 1 I Signed this day of , 20_ 1 1 ADDRESS CONTRACTOR 111 PHONE NUMBER SURETY By: Title: Attorney-in-Fact ' 1 Address of Surety's Resident Agent I Approved as to Form District Counsel , I I I 1 1 1 1 Payment Bond Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 y 00620-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 1 1 SECTION 00630 STATUTORY PUBLIC WORKS BOND Contractor shall have or obtain a Statutory Public Works Bond wit Contractors Board. h the Oregon Construction 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Statuto Publ Project No. 6755 00630- 1 rY is Works Bond K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I I This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations. I STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS I OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT IPrepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE Iand IIssued and Published Jointly by ACEC � I - S- A��eeFcnv C:rnrn�u.o�Ilc.ivcswsc(o.u•nmies +Bl AME0.V6�a ASCI American Society National Society of I of Civil Engineers fessionEn ProtesProaionaJ Engineersal in Pringivateeers Practice IAMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES IASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS I PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE A Practice Division of the I NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IEndorsed by lis I CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE I I IEJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. I 1 These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C-520 or C-525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C-001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC C-800, 2007 Edition). 1 1 1 1 Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-2794 (703) 684-2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies ' 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www.acec.orct American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org Associated General Contractors of America 2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201-3308 (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org 1 The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE. 1 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 1 I I STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT I TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Page Article 1 — Definitions and Terminology 1 1.01 Defined Terms 1.02 Terminology 1 5 Article 2 — Preliminary Matters 7 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance 7 I 2.02 Copies of Documents 7 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed 7 2.04 Starting the Work 7 I 2.05 Before Starting Construction 7 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives 8 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 8 IArticle 3 — Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse 8 3.01 Intent 3.02 Reference Standards 8 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 9 0 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents 3.05 Reuse of Documents 10 I 3.06 Electronic Data 10 11 Article 4 —Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points 11 4.01 Availability of Lands 11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions 12 I4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions 12 4.04 Underground Facilities 14 4.05 Reference Points 111 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site 15 15 Article 5 — Bonds and Insurance 17 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds 17 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers 17 5.03 Certificates of Insurance 18 I 5.04 Contractor's Insurance 18 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance 20 5.06 Property Insurance 20 5.07 Waiver of Rights 21 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds 22 I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page i I Option to Replace 22I 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; 23 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer Article 6 - Contractor's Responsibilities 2323 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence 23 6.02 Labor; Working Hours 24 1116.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment 24 6.04 Progress Schedule 24 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals" 27 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others 28 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties 29 6.08 Permits 29 6.09 Laws and Regulations 30 6.10 Taxes 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas 30 30 6.12 Record Documents 31 6.13 Safety and Protection 32 6.14 Safety Representative 32 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs 32 6.16 Emergencies 32 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples 34 6.18 Continuing the Work 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee 34 354 6.20 Indemnification 36 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services Article 7 -Other Work at the Site 3737 7.01 Related Work at Site 37 7.02 Coordination 37 7.03 Legal Relationships Article 8 -Owner's Responsibilities 38 111 38 8.01 Communications to Contractor 38 8.02 Replacement of Engineer 38 8.03 Furnish Data 38 8.04 Pay When Due 38 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests 39 8.06 Insurance 39 8.07 Change Orders 39 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals 39 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities 39 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition 39 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements 39 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program Article 9 - Engineer's Status During Construction 4040 9.01 Owner's Representative 40 9.02 Visits to Site EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page ii 1 1 9.03 Project Representative 40 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work 40 I9.05 Rejecting Defective Work 41 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments 41 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work 41 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work 41 I 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities 42 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program 43 1 Article 10- Changes in the Work; Claims 43 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work 43 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work 43 I10.03 Execution of Change Orders 43 10.04 Notification to Surety 44 10.05 Claims 44 I Article 11 - Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work 45 11.01 Cost of the Work 45 I 11.02 Allowances 47 11.03 Unit Price Work 48 I Article 12- Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times 49 12.01 Change of Contract Price 49 12.02 Change of Contract Times 50 I 12.03 Delays 50 Article 13-Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work 51 I 13.01 Notice of Defects 51 13.02 Access to Work 51 13.03Tests and Inspections 51 I 13.04 Uncovering Work 52 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work 53 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work 53 13.07 Correction Period 53 I 13.08Acceptance of Defective Work 54 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work 54 111 Article 14- Payments to Contractor and Completion 55 14.01 Schedule of Values 55 14.02 Progress Payments 55 1 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title 58 14.04 Substantial Completion 58 14.05 Partial Utilization 59 1 14.06 Final Inspection 60 14.07 Final Payment 60 14.08 Final Completion Delayed 61 1 14.09 Waiver of Claims 62 I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page iii 1 1 Article 15—Suspension of Work and Termination 62 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work 62 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause 62 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience 63 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate 64 Article 16— Dispute Resolution 64 16.01 Methods and Procedures 64 Article 17— Miscellaneous 65 17.01 Giving Notice 65 17.02 Computation of Times 65 17.03 Cumulative Remedies 65 17.04 Survival of Obligations 66 17.05 Controlling Law 66 17.06 Headings 66 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page iv r I IARTICLE 1 — DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY I1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with I initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. I 1. Addenda—Written orra hic instruments p issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract I Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between IOwner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by I Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. I4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. I 5. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting Iforth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. I 7. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). I 8. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 1 9. Change Order—A document recommended by Engineer Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, orVrevision in the Work I or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10.Claim—A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of I Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. I I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 66 1 1 11.Contract—The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and t Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12.Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. t 13.Contract Price—The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14.Contract Times—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendation of final payment. I 15.Contractor—The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16.Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 for definition. 17.Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer I which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. ' 18.Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19.Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. ' 20.Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21.General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. 22.Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto. 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 66 I I23.Hazardous Waste—The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended Ifrom time to time. 24.Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, I agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25.Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real I property, or personal property. 26.Milestone--A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an Iintermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27.Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that I upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. I 28.Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. I29. Owner—The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 1 30.PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31.Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at Istandard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and I crude oils. 32.Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, I describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. I 33.Project—The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. I 34.Project Manual—The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 1 35.Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. I IEJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 66 I I 36.Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer who I may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 37.Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are I representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. ' 38.Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. I 39.Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 40.Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 41.Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by I Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are ' designated for the use of Contractor. 42.Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 43.Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) 44.Substantial Completion—The time has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract I Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 45.Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 46.Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or 111 supplements these General Conditions. 47.Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract II Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 66 I I materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work Subcontractor. by Contractor or 48.Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any I encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 49.Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. I50. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to 111 produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 1 51. Work Change Directive—A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to I differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the Ichange ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. r1.02 Terminology IA. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.13 through F are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. 1 B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1. The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as I ordered," "as directed" or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import I are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the I Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not 111 intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 66 1 undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other I p Y provision of the Contract Documents. DaI C. y: 1. The word "day" means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. , D. Defective: 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or b. does not meet the requirements of Contract nyapplic applicable inspectionts; n, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the c. has been damaged prior Engineer's thereof hase been recommendation final payment Owner(unless at responsibility for the protection Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: , 1. The word "furnish," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. I 3. The words "perform" or ' itused ii connection services, materials, or equipment, shall mean tofurnshand stall said seryces, matealso� equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, "provide" is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional 6 of Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 1 1 ARTICLE 2— PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers l' vers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner 1 shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which ' Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 111 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and ' Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work tA. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the IContract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction ' A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for ' starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and • ' EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 66 1 1 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. I B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. , 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference 1 attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor's Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and ' substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. I, ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent 1 A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 66 1 I B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, I documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no Iadditional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. I 3.02 Reference Standards IA. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, Iorganization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date I of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. I 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or I instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, I any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. I3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1 1. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the IContract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, Ior has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. I2. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents I and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 66 I 1 t an emgParagraph 6.16.A) an amendme ( supplementexcein p to theerContractencyas Documents requiredby has been issued byuntil one of the methodsntor indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies: 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer'sapproval a roval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of 1 Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification. I 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 66 r I ' 2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied ' upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived ' from such electronic files will be at the user's sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. ' C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents ' resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data's creator. ARTICLE 4—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands ' A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner's furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. tB. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 66 1 I mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required 1 for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions 1 A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and 2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or , subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any I such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions , A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or I 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 66 1 1 ' 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: I1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in ' Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times ' by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's ' making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. ' 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for ' EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 66 1 1 any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Sshown DocuhownmentsorIndicated:with respectThe to existinginformation Undergroundanddata Facilitiesor atindicated or contiguousinthe to theContract Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor 1 shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data; ' b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction; and 1 d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. ' B. Not Shown or Indicated: 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site 1 which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 66 1 I or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be ' aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as ' provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points ' A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or ' destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 1 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have I been identified at the Site. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but ' such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: ' 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn fromdata" any"technical or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 66 I created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, I or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or I anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; I (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph I 4.06.E. ii E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work I based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in I the area affected by such condition beto e ted the amount or ext ntf if any,rom the Work. Irof an Contractor cannot agree as to entitleento oron adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. I G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not and other limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of I or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's I own negligence. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 66 I 1 IH. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, and partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5— BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual's authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in- fact signed each bond. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 66 located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. I Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. , B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor. E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. 5.04 Contractor's Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability I coverage which are sustained: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 66 1 a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: 1 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of • liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); ' 5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 1 6. include completed operations coverage: a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. l EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 66 1 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance 1 A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner's option, may purchase and maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); ' 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 1 6. include testing and startup; and 1 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 66 1 1 IEngineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, I consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee. I C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to I Owner and Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07. ID. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the ISupplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may Ipurchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property I insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing Iadvise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights IA. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and I the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered I thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights I against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or I causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss Ipayees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights Ithat any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 66 I r B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds I A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 1 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other ' provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 66 I r ' 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or ' insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. ' 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. ' EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 66 r Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, 111 Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. ' C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. submit to Engineer for acceptance 1. Contractor shall (to the extent indicated in g Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals" I A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or"or-equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract ' Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 66 1 I 1 1. "Or-Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so I that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or-equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all I of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: Ia. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, Istrength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results I imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and 1 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 1 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 1 2. Substitute Items: a. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by I Contractor does not qualify as an "or-equal" item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. I b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. I Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Ic. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. Id. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 66 1 a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the II general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: 1 a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and 4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, , technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer's review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 66 1 I I I I I D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer's Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. IF. Contractor's Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or"or-equal" at Contractor's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity I I I I I (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. I B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. IC. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts 1 and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or I entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 66 I 2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the 1 payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. performed Work for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an I appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 66 i adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute ' resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ' ARTICLE 13—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ' 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. ' 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional ' interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to ' perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 51 of 66 I C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part I thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. I D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or I approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if I requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor's expense I unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. I 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested I by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. I B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as I Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. I C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute I resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. I D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly I attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 52 of 66 I icosts) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the ' Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, ' or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the p y 9 pp performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and 1 other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor's responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 66 1 the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as II provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes I A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas I A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and I equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. I B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site I and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 66 ID. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any ' part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does ' not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall ' provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; r2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, ' or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and 1 shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner's safety programs, if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner's safety programs that are applicable to the Work. D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor's safety program with which Owner's and Engineer's employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 66 1 1 E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 , caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). , 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. ' 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if111 Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples I A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 66 t I I1. Shop Drawings: I a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, I dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. 2. Samples: IIa. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as I catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. IB. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required uired bythe Schedule of Submittals, any related Workperfor ed prior otorEngiact neer's Documentsthe I approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures: 1 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: 111 a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; Ib. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog I numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the I indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and III d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. 1 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification tractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents that thnrespect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 66 I 1 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any I variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer's Review: 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract The review andocuments) or to approval of a sepaaate item as such tions or programs incident thereto. such will ,not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures: ' 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as attentionerequired, ein ,writing Sampleso for revhew and pproval. Contractor shall direct co sections called for by Engineer specific prev previous submittals. to revisions other than 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere ttokthe Progress bScdelayed Schedule or during all rponed disputes or disagreements with Owner. No pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. I 6.19 . Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrantsguarantees and to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers ineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 34 I I t , , , ents cons 9 , entitled membersto rely partnerson representationemployeesof a Contractor's warrantyultantsandand guarantee.subcontractors shall be 1 B. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused 111 by: ' 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. 1 C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; ' 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable . EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 66 I i B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, 1 members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ' A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer. I C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design111 professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer's review and approval of design calculations L and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 66 1 1 submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. 1 ARTICLE 7—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site 1 A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's Owner s employees, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise 1 make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other 1 work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 66 1 1 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of I the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. ' B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. I 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of I Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor's wrongful actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's wrongful action or inactions. ARTICLE 8—OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES I 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer I A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data , A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. I 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in I Paragraphs 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 66 I I I8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests I A. 's cto lands and easements and providing engineeringOwnersurveysdutieswith to estabrespelisht reference providing points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor I copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 8.06 Insurance IA. Owner's responsibilities, if any,ny, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 1 8.07 Change Orders IA. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals IA. Owner's responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. I8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be I responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the I performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. I8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition Iis set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements IA. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the IContract Documents. 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program IA. While at the Site, Owner's employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Owner has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. I IEJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 66 I 1 ARTICLE 9 —ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION I 9.01 Owner's Representative A. Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative I during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the 11 various aspects of Contractor's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. I B. Engineer's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative I A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer's consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. I 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract I Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 66 1 Iwho shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor asrovided in Paragraph ragraph 10.05. I 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. I9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to design I calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work IA. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon I (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject 11 to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work IA. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question. 111 I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 66 B. E , , render a issue , referred.ngineer IfwillOwnerwith orreasonable Contractorpromptnessbelieves that any suchwritten decisiondecision entitleson themthe to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer's decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B. C. Engineer's written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and 111 Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. , B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be determine of certificates of inspections,r content complies with the requirements of, and in the case tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. I E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 66 1 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer's employees and representatives shall comply with the 111 specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Engineer has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 10—CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidatingthe Contract tract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: i () ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 43 of 66 I I applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry I on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety I A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents I (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. I 10.05 Claims I A. Engineer's Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by ConOwner or tract Documents Contractor or by Laws antd s or remedies either may otherwise have under the Regulations in respect of such Claims. I B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in I Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt e1pt of if the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, any, ake one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part; 2. approve the Claim; or I 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. 9 D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the I Claim shall be deemed denied. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract I Page 44 Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers ineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. I I IE. Engineer's written action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or denialursu p ant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless I Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not I submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 — COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK I11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change IOrder or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the Ievent giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall Iinclude only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of I the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for I employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social I security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the I, above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, I including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in I which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. I3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from Isubcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 45 of 66 I be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on I the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. I 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services I specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. I b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. 1 c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements I approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, 1 or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, I f. Losses and damages (and not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract I Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 66 I h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 1 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A. C. Contractor's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, ' Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting I data. 11.02 Allowances ' A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 66 r performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: 1 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and I b. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: t 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by111 allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work I A. Wthe Contract mvpart WUnit Price Workhere, initially the ContractDocuents Price willprobeide deemed thatallor to includeofthe for all ork Unitisto Pricebe Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely I for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 66 i 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price ' A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or ' 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.6.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in ' Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). ' C. Contractor's Fee: The Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: ' 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of ' the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 49 of 66 1 i Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times I A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 1 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 50 of 66 i I Ireplacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount orI I II I extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 111 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). ' B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Ownerr''s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 53 of 66 I , B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions, or I p y in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed I and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of b or relating ela ingeo such all air or such removal and replacement (including t 1 correction or re p d n costs of repair or replacement of work of others)will be paid by Contractor. Cp In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed inco „at item inousI service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting tt eef rom)ct on pbeen en I corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ' A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept ges I it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, aattorneys,nd mges (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness)trand for the di diminished to this value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paidby sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so I accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 0. Sthe acceptance toafter such recommendation, an appropriate amountpaid Owner, I 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work I A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 111 Page 54 I 1 Iprovision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days correct, or remedy any such deficiency. ays written notice to B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14— PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments: 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 55 of 66 1 1 the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed I to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials I and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. III 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's I legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in , the Agreement. B. Review of Applications: I 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, t either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the ApplicationI Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. I 2. Engineer's recommendation of any payment requested based ppn an lication Eng Weems r Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the I Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and I c. the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer's responsibility to observe the I Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have I represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been I performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract I Page56 a Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional nineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. I I I Ito'I' progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the Iresponsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or I II b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or construction, b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, orprocedures of st uctlon, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.6.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such I payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in IEngineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring I I I correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A. IC. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of I EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 57 of 66 D. Reduction ParagraphContractor. 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to ' in Payment: , 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: ' a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work; ' b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount 111recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, ' when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, , the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. Contractor's WarrantyI 14.03 of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment 111covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete , (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. 111B. Promptly after Contractor's notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 58 of 66 1 1 IC. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial ' Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, ' stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner's objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to ' security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer's issuing the 1 definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. ' E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the tentative list. 1 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a ' separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: ' 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended 1 use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work. ' 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 59 of 66 I 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and I Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially I complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of I Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to I compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection 1 A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. I 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment: 1 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all I corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph I 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. I 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: I a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.6.6; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; I c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and 111 d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. I 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, 1 material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract I Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 60 of 66 and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer's Review of Application and Acceptance: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days of fAon for P , e ngineer's recommendationafterreceipt oh paymentinalpplicati and present the Applicationaymentindicatfor pi to EOwner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for I Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for ent and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer,nless any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 61 of 66 14.09 Waiver of Claims 1 A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms I of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. 1 ARTICLE 15—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work 1 A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to ' any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract 1 Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 62 of 66 1 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, ' and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor(without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion); 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any meWcIf the unpaid balance of the IContract Pricefurther exceedspayall nt claimsuntil, coststhe , lossesorkis , andompleted.damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out ' of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner ' will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor's services will not be ' terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. ' E. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the ' provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.6 and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause ' and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): ' 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract ' EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 63 of 66 Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate I A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 111consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly I attributable to Contractor's stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16— DISPUTE RESOLUTION 1 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer ' for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 64 of 66 1 termination of the mediation shall be determined b referenced above. y application of the mediation rules C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer's action under Par 111 111 raph 10.05.0 or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or 3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17— MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 65 of 66 I 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, 111 or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, survive of the Cont act or to mpnation and acceptance of the Work or term ation or completion of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings I A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. 1 I I I I I I I I 1 1 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract 1 Page 66 Copyright©2007 National Society of Professional Engineers ineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. I I I SECTION 00800 ISUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR I DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 PROJECT NO. 6755 I GENERAL IThese Supplementary Conditions make additions, deletions or revisions to the Section 00700 - General Conditions of the Contract Documents. All provisions which are not so added to, deleted or revised remain in full force and effect. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which I are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. ISC-1.01.A— Delete and replace the following paragraphs: 6. Bidder--Any individual, partnership, corporation,joint venture, or other combination thereof I who submits a Bid to Owner for the Work contemplated, acting directly or through an authorized representative. As used in the Contract Documents, masculine pronouns refer to both masculine and feminine genders. I 15. Contractor-- Person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and the Contractor's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. I19. Engineer-- Person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and the Engineer's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. I 29. Owner The individual, entity, public body or authority identified as such in the Agreement and the Owner's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract IDocuments as if singular in number. SC-1.01.A—Add new paragraphs immediately following Paragraph 1.01.A.51 as follows: 1 52. Final Completion--See Paragraph 14.07.6.1 and SC-14.07.B.1 for definition. 53. Latent Defect--A defect in the Work of which the Owner has no actual knowledge. 1 54. Specialist--The term Specialist refers to a person, partnership, firm, or corporation of established reputation (or if newly organized, whose personnel have previously I established a reputation in the same field), which is regularly engaged in, and which maintains a regular force of workers skilled in either (as applicable) manufacturing of fabricated items required by the Contract Documents, or otherwise performing Work required by the Contract Documents. Where the Specifications require the installation I by a Specialist, that term shall also be deemed to mean either the manufacturer of the items, a person, partnership, firm, or corporation licensed by the manufacturer, or a person, partnership, firm, or corporation who will perform the Work under the Imanufacturer's direct supervision. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 IK/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-1 1 I 55. Consultant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Engineer or Engineer's Consultant for performance of Work on the Project. ' 56. Award --The formal acceptance of the Bid by Owner's Board of Directors. 57. Bid Guarantee (Bid Bond) --The security furnished with a Bid to guarantee that the 1 Bidder will enter into the Contract if Bidder's Bid is accepted by Owner. 58. Construction Manager-- Person or entity designated by the Owner to provide 1 construction management services for the Project with duties, responsibilities, and limitations of the Engineer, unless stipulated otherwise. 59. Design Engineer– Kennedy/Jenks Consultants, Inc. 60. Equipment-- (Construction) --All machinery and equipment, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep and maintenance, including tools and apparatus necessary for the proper construction and acceptable completion of the Work contemplated. (Installation) ---All material or articles used in equipping a facility or apparatus required to fulfill a functional design. 61. Execution -- Field or Site performance, workmanship, installation, erection, application, field fabrication, quality control, and protection of installed products on the Site. , 62. Materials--All materials incorporated into the Project, including equipment and all other materials consumed or to be consumed in the performance of the Work contemplated. 63. Products-- Materials, equipment, systems, ship fabrications, mixtures, and source controls. 64. Utility-- Any public or private fixed works for transporting fluids, gases, electricity, signals, or communications. SC-2.01 –Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 2.01.B: r C. Public Works Bond: Before starting any Work on the Project, Contractor and every Subcontractor performing Work on the Project must have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board, unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). Contractor must require in every subcontract that the Subcontractor have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting work on the Project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). Contractor shall include copies of both its public works bond and the public works bonds from its Subcontractors in the copies of the bonds required in Paragraph 2.01.A above. SC-2.02.A – Delete the first sentence of Article 2.02.A in its entirety and replace with the following sentence: Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to five copies of the Project Manual (Specifications and half-size Drawings) and two copies of full-size Drawings. SC-2.03.A– Delete the third sentence of Paragraph 2.03.A in its entirety. I SC-2.05.A–Add the following to paragraph 2.05.A: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 00800-2 I I 1SC-4..07 A preliminary scheduleto of payments showing projected cash flow. 2 .A Add the following Paragraph 2.07.A: I4. Contractor's schedule of payments will be acceptable if it provides a reasonable projection of payments in relationship to the Progress Schedule and Schedule of Values. ISC-3.01.A—Add the following at the end of Paragraph 3.01.A: In resolving inconsistencies among two or more components of the Contract Documents, precedence shall be given in the following order: I 1. Permits from outside agencies 2. Agreement 3. Addenda I 4. Contractor's Bid (Bid Form) 5. Supplementary Conditions 6. General Conditions 7. Specifications— Division 01 8. Specifications— Divisions 02 — 16 9. Drawings 10. Bonds I Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, Engineer's written interpretation and clarifications and Notice to Proceed, in precedence listed, will take precedence over all other 1 Contract Document components referenced herein. Figure dimensions on Drawings take precedence over scaled dimensions. The Drawings with the higher level of detail take precedence over less detailed Drawings. rSC-3.03.A.3 — Delete Paragraph 3.03.A.3 in its entirety and replace it paragraph: p with the following I3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. ISC-3.04.B.2 — Delete the parenthetical phrase in its entirety with the following: i n Paragraph 3.04.6.2 and replace I (Subject to the provisions of Section 01300—Submittals) SC-3.05.A— Delete Paragraph 3.05.A in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: A. Contractor and any Subcontractor furnishing all of the Work under a diectt or indirect contract plier or other individual i hContractor, shall not: or ISC-4.01.B— Delete Paragraph 4.01.B in its entirety and change Paragraph "C" to "B".. I SC-4.02.A.1 — Delete Paragraph 4.02.A.1 in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-3 I I SC-4.02. -Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 4.02.6 of the General Conditions as follows: C. In preparation of Drawings and Specifications, Engineer or Engineer's Consultants have utilized the following drawings of physical conditions: 1. Drawings dated 1973 by Stevens, Thompson, & Runyun, Inc., entitled "Durham I Wastewater Treatment Plant" - Plans for construction; and 2. Drawings dated 1999 by HDR Engineering, Inc., entitled "Durham Wastewater Treatment Plant- Phase III Expansion". I D. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but as established above, the Contractor may reasonably rely on the general accuracy of the technical data I contained in such reports and drawings, except for such physical dimensions that can be field verified. However, the interpretation of such technical data, including interpolation or extrapolation thereof, and opinions contained in such reports and drawings are not to be relied on by the Contractor. Copies of these reports and drawings may be examined at the office of the Owner during regular business hours if said reports and drawings are not bound herein. I SC-4.02.B — In the first sentence, insert the word "reasonably" between the words "may" and "rely" and delete the second sentence (beginning with "Such" and ending with "Conditions") of Paragraph 4.02.B. 1 SC-4.04.A.1 — Delete the words "provided by others" following the word "data" from the end of this paragraph. SC-4.05.A—Add the following sentence after the first sentence of Paragraph 4.05.A: Reference points shall be as shown on the Drawings. I SC-4.06.A— Delete Paragraph 4.06.A in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the I identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents. SC-4.06.B — In the first sentence, insert the word "reasonably" between the words "may" and "rely". I SC-4.06.F - Delete this Paragraph in its entirety. SC-4.06.G - Delete this Paragraph in its entirety and change Paragraph "H" to "F" and Paragraph111 "I"to "G". SC-5.01.A— Delete the second sentence of Paragraph 5.01.A in its entirety and replace with the following: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800-4 I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after date of Final Completion of the Project and acceptance by the Owner, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. ' SC-5.02.A -Add the following to Paragraph 5.02.A: Such surety shall have a rating of not less than A-X in the most current edition of Best's ' Rating Guide. SC-5.03.A—Add the following to the end of Paragraph 5.03.: Include the following parties or entities as additional insureds, as applicable: 1. Clean Water Services (Owner) ' 2. Kennedy/Jenks Consultants, Inc. Deliver all certificates of insurance required by the Contract Documents to Owner with the executed Agreement. SC-5.04 - Delete Paragraph 5.04 in its entirety and replace with the following paragraphs: 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance A. Insurance Generally: Contractor shall provide the insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs thereof. r1. Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance, in a form acceptable to Owner, meeting all of the insurance requirements of the Contract. Insurance is to be placed with insurers acceptable to Owner with a minimum Best's rating of A-X. 2. Before commencing Work under this Contract, Contractor shall furnish Owner with certificates of insurance specified herein showing the type, amount, class of operations ' covered, effective dates and date of expiration of policies and containing substantially the following statement: "The insurance covered by this certificate will not be canceled or ' materially altered, except after 30 days' written notice has been received by Owner." 3. In case of the breach of any provision of this Paragraph, Owner, at its option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of Contractor, such insurance as Owner may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from retainage or from any monies that may be due or become due Contractor under this Contract. ' A. Contractor and Subcontractor Insurance: Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until Contractor has obtained all the insurance required hereunder and submitted the requisite certificate of insurance and such insurance has been reviewed by ' Owner, nor shall Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence Work on any subcontract until the insurance specified below has been obtained. Review of the insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor hereunder. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 KU Project No. 1376013"70 00800-5 I I B. Workers' Compensation: Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract workers' compensation insurance required by Oregon law and employer's liability coverage I with minimum limits of $500,000 for all of Contractor's employees to be engaged in Work pursuant to this Contract. The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers for losses arising from Work I performed by Contractor for Owner. In case any such Work is sublet, Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to provide the same workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for all of the Subcontractor's employees to be engaged in such Work. Where such ' Work under this Contract includes any water or navigational exposure, coverage shall be included to cover the Federal Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act and the Federal Jones Act. I C. Liability Insurance: Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers shall be included as additional insureds on all Contractor's insurance policies as respects liability I arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of Contractor, products and completed operations of Contractor; premises owned, leased or used by Contractor, or automobiles owned, leased, hired or borrowed by Contractor. Coverage shall include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to Owner and its officers, employees, agents or volunteers. The "other insurance" clause in the I required insurance shall not apply to the insurance policies of the Owner. D. Commercial and Automobile Liability Insurance: Contractor shall maintain during the I life of this Contract coverage that is at least as broad as Paragraphs A and B of this Section, and with the limits required below: 1. Commercial General LiabilityInsurance: "Occurrence" Form including XCU, with a $ I (see schedule below) combined single limit per occurrence and a $ (see schedule below) Products and Completed Operations and General Annual Aggregate limit. The policy shall be endorsed to provide full Products and Completed Operations and General Annual Aggregate limits for the Project independent of any other project of Contractor. (Note: "Claims Made" coverage may be considered subject to additional conditions on a case-by-case basis.) I I I I I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 6 I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I ISchedule for Commercial General Liability Limits Product & Completed I Contract Bid Operations and General Per Occurrence Limit Annual Aggregate Limit Less than $100,000 $500,000 $1,000,000 I $100,000- $1,000,000 $1,500,000 $2,000,000 Greater than $1,000,000 $4,000,000 $5,000,000 I2. Automobile Liability Insurance: Code 1 ("any auto") and Uninsured Motorist Endorsement with a $ (see schedule below) combined single limit per occurrence. I Contract Bid Per Occurrence Limit $0 - $1,000,000 $500,000 Greater than $1,000,000 $1,000,000 I E. Excess/Umbrella Liability: If y Contractor's primary-coverage commercial general liability and automobile coverages do not meet the minimum limit required, Contractor shall I maintain during the life of this Contract excess or umbrella liability over the primary policies sufficient to meet the total aggregate limits required by this Contract. IF. Pollution Liability Insurance: Contractor shall obtain, at Contractor's expense, and keep in effect during the term of the Contract, Pollution Liability Insurance covering the Contractor's liability for bodily injury, property damage and environmental damage from Isudden accidental pollution and related cleanup cost incurred by the Contractor, all arising out of the Work or services including the transportation risk to be performed under this Contract. Combined single limit per occurrence shall not be less than $1,000,000. Annual Ilaggregate limit shall not be less than $1,000,000. G. Other Insurance Provisions: 1. Contractor shall show evidence that the required commercial and in effect for the entire term of this Contract. automobile liability is I2. Owner shall be an "Additional Insured" on all liability policies in effect under Contract. this I3. Contractor's coverage shall be primary insurance for Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by Owner and its officers, employees, agents or volunteers shall be in excess of Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. I4. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to Owner and its officers, employees, agents or volunteers. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions 111 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-7 1 1 5. Coverage shall state that Contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each I insured against whom a claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. H. All Coverages: Any accidents or incidents causing injury or property damage shall be reported by Contractor to Owner and Contractor's insurer. Any deductible or self-insured retentions in excess of 1 percent of the Contract amount must be declared to and approved ' by Owner. At the option of Owner, the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions as respects Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers, or Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. In the event any Work under this Contract is performed by a Subcontractor, Contractor shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the Work performed under this Contract by a Subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the Subcontractor's insurance. I. Insurance Coverage for Special Conditions: When the construction is to be accomplished within a public or private right-of-way requiring special insurance coverage, Contractor shall conform to the particular requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and provide the required insurance. Contractor shall include in its liability policy all endorsements that may be required for the protection of the Owner and its officers, agents and employees. Insurance coverage for special conditions, when required shall be provided as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. J. No Personal Liability for Public Officials: In carrying out any of the provisions hereof in exercising any authority granted by the Contract, there will be no personal liability upon any public official. K. Additional Insurance: In addition to the specific insurance requirements set forth above, Contractor shall also provide all insurance and/or certificates required by federal, state, county or municipal bodies, as well as railroads and public utilities. SC-5.06.A — Delete the word "Owner" in the first sentence and replace with the word ' "Contractor". SC-5.06.B— Delete the word "Owner" in the first line and replace with the word "Contractor". I SC-5.06.E — Replace the word "Owner" with the word "Contractor" and replace the word "Contractor with the word "Owner"throughout this paragraph. SC-5.07.6.1. - Delete this Paragraph in its entirety and renumber Paragraph 5.07.B.2 to become 5.07.B.1. SC-6.01.8—Add the following after the first sentence of Paragraph 6.01.B: If a replacement is necessary, the replacement shall also be a compete tresident dent ' superintendent and shall be subject to approval by Owner. The Contractor's sup erinshall be present eltimes i1e ork is in proreand shall be g at any time the superiilable by ntendent intende t t 1 phone for emergencies 24 hours per day, 7days per week. II Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 8 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I leaves the Project Site while Work is in progress, Engineer shall be notified and provided with the name of the Contractor's representative having responsible charge. 1: SC-6.02.B—Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 6.02.B: Contractor's (and Subcontractors') regular work hours shall be between 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. on weekdays, Monday through Friday, only. If a change to these standard hours is desired, a request must be placed with and approved by the Owner a minimum of five work days prior to the first day of altered hours. I I SC-6.03 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.03.C: D. Until Substantial Completion of the Work is acknowledged by Owner, Contractor shall have the responsible charge and care of the Work and of materials to be used herein, including materials for which Contractor has received partial payment or materials which have been furnished by Owner, and shall bear the risk of injury, loss, or damage to any part thereof by the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution of the Work or not. E. Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries, losses, or damages to any portion of the Work or the materials occasioned by any cause before the Work's completion and acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. Where necessary to protect the Work or materials from damage, Contractor shall, at Contractor's own expense, provide suitable drainage and erect such temporary structures or rent such structures as are necessary to protect the Work or materials from damage. The suspension of the Work or the granting of an extension of time for any cause whatever shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's responsibility for the Work and materials as specified herein. F. When the quality of a material, process, or article is not specifically set forth in the Contract Documents, the best available quality of the material, process, or article shall be I provided. SC-6.04.A — Add the following subparagraph to Paragraph 6.04.A immediately after subparagraph 6.04.A.2: 3. If, in the opinion of Engineer, Contractor falls behind the accepted Construction Schedule due to actions or neglect of Contractor or Contractor's agents, servants, employees, officers, Subcontractors, directors, or any party contracting to perform part or all of the Work or to supply any equipment or materials, Contractor shall take steps, including, but not limited to, increasing the number of personnel, shifts, and/or overtime operations, days of work, and/or I amount of construction equipment until such time as the Work is back on schedule. Contractor shall also submit for review no later than the time of submittal of the next request for partial payment, such supplementary schedule or schedules as may be necessary to demonstrate the manner in which the acceptable rate of progress will be regained, all without additional cost to Owner. SC-6.05.E. — Delete the word "reasonable" from in front of the word "charges" in two places in this Paragraph. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 KM Project No. 1376013"70 00800-9 1 SC-6.06.B—Delete the first sentence of the Paragraph 6.06.B and insert the following in lieu thereof: I B. Contractor shall submit to the Owner a list of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner as stipulated in the Bidding Documents. Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto within two weeks of submittal of the list) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. SC-6.07.A—Add the following subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.07.A: 1 1. Contractor shall furnish to Owner at the time of initial submittal, satisfactory evidence that Suppliers of proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes to be furnished or used in the performance of the Work do indemnify, keep, and save harmless Contractor from all liabilities, judgments, costs, damages, and expenses which may arise from the use of such proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes, furnished to Contractor for incorporation in or use in performance of the Work and their operation by Owner after acceptance of the Work. Such satisfactory evidence shall consist of patent licenses or patent releases covering proprietary materials, equipment, devices or processes. SC-6.08.A — In Paragraph 6.08.A after the words, "Supplementary Conditions", add the words, "or Division 1 —General Requirements". SC-6.08—Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.08.A: I B. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits. Owner, however, will pay the cost of the permits. 1 SC-6.09 -Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.09.C.: D. The following paragraphs ra hs include without limitation the standard contract clauses that ' 9 P are required in every public contract in accordance with the Oregon Revised Statutes. Contractor shall include any other standard contract clauses required by federal, state, and local laws, ordinances and regulations. This Agreement shall include by reference any other standard contract clauses required by federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations. 1. Prompt Payment:Contractor shall promptly pay all of its obligations arising out of or in connection with the Work, including, but not limited to, payments (1) to all persons, as due, supplying to Contractor labor, equipment, services or material for the performance of the Work, (2) of all contributions or amounts due the Industrial Accident Fund from Contractor or any Subcontractor incurred in the performance of the Work, and (3) to the Department of Revenue of all sums withheld from employees under ORS 316.167. 2. Prompt Payment Policy: It is the policy of the State of Oregon that all payments due on a public improvement contract and owed by a contracting agency shall be paid promptly. No public contracting agency is exempt from the provisions of ORS 279C.570. 3. Contractor's Failure to Make Prompt Payment: If, upon reasonable concern by Owner that Contractor has failed, neglected or refused to make prompt payment of any claim for Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-10 1 1 labor, equipment, services or materials furnished to Contractor or a Subcontractor by any person in connection with the Project as such claim becomes due, Owner may pay such claim to the person furnishing the labor, equipment, services or materials and charge the amount of the payment against funds due or to become due Contractor under the Contract. Owner reserves the right to make payments directly or by multiple-payee check and Contractor hereby consents to such direct and multiple-payee check ayments. Upon Owner's request, Contractor shall furnish to Owner the information required poo facilitate such payments with each application for payment, including (1) names, addresses, and telephone numbers of persons making any such claim for labor, equipment, services or material, and (2) a complete listing of outstanding amounts owed to all such persons. 4. Contractor's and First-Tier Subcontractor's Failure to Make Payment After Payment From Owner; Interest Penalty: If Contractor or a first-tier Subcontractor fails, neglects or refuses to make payment to a person furnishing labor, equipment, services or materials in connection with the Project within thirty (30) days after receipt of payment from Owner or Contractor, Contractor or first-tier Subcontractor shall owe the person the amount due plus interest charges commencing at the end of the 10-day period that payment is due under ORS 279C.580(4) and ending upon final payment, unless payment is subject to a good faith dispute as defined in ORS 279C.580. The rate of interest charged to Contractor or first-tier Subcontractor on the amount due shall equal three times the discount rate on 90-day commercial paper in effect at the Federal Reserve Bank in the Federal Reserve district that includes Oregon on the date that is 30 days after the date when payment was received from Owner or from Contractor, but the rate of interest may not exceed 30 percent. The amount of interest may not be waived. 5. Construction Contractors Board Complaint: neglects or refuses to make payment to a person furnishing labor,orequ pment,a tservices ractor fails, materials in connection with the Project, the person may file a complaint with the Construction Contractors Board, unless payment is subject to a good faith dispute as defined in ORS 279C.580. 6. Continuing Liability of Contractor and Surety: Payment by Owner of a claim in the manner authorized in this paragraph does not relieve Contractor or Contractor's surety from obligation with respect to any unpaid claims. 7. Prevailing Rate of Wage:This Project is a public works the prevailin wage rate requirements in ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870. Contractor tand Janyectto Subcont actors shall comply with ORS 279C.838 and ORS 279C.840. Workers in each trade or occupation that Contractor or Subcontractors or other person who is a party to the Contract uses in performing all or a part of the Contract for this Project shall not be paid less than the minimum hourly rate of wage for such workers incorporated by reference in Section 00810 of the specifications for the Contract. 8. Fee to be Paid to BOLI: Owner will pay the required fee to the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries pursuant to the provisions of ORS 279C.825. 9. Compliance with Laws/Tax Laws: Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, statutes, codes, regulations, rules, orders, and rulings as well as all applicable construction industry standards, including without limitation, those governing labor, materials, equipment, construction procedures, safety, health, sanitation, and the environment. Contractor agrees to indemnify, hold harmless, reimburse, and defend Owner from and against any penalties or liabilities arising out of violations of such obligations by Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions KM Project No. 1376013"70 00800-11 1 1 Contractor or its Subcontractors or Suppliers at any tier. Contractor must also comply with all Oregon tax laws. I 10. Employee Drug Testing Program: h thetractor shall certify completion of the tWork of thethat Project,can r has initiated, and shall maintain9 employee drug testing program. 11. Work Day/Work Week: No person shall be employed for more than 10 hours Where the I hany one day, or 40 hours in any one week, except in cases e id at least time public policy absolutely requires it, and in such thecases, employee shall b and a half pay (1) for all overtime in excess of eight hours a day or 40 hours in any one week when the work week is five consecutive days, Monday through Friday, or (k2) fors all r conseovertime cutive 1 excess of 10 hours a day or 40 hours in any one weekwhen theor days, Monday through Friday, and (3) for all work performed on Saturday, and on any legal holiday specified in ORS 279C.540. r 12. Notice of Required Work Hours: Contractor, each Subcontractor and each lower-tier Subcontractor must give notice to its employees pface in a locationsther at the frequented time by itsf employeeshire or �of t re commencement of Work, or by posting an the number of hours per day and days per week that the employees may be required to work. I 13. Claims for Overtime:Any worker employed by Contractor shall be foreclosed from the d right to collect for any overtime provided in he Oof theS Ounless a claim for Contract, provided Contractor haent is s: with Contractor within 90 days from completionof this I (1) Caused a circular clearly printed in boldfaced 12-point type and containing a copy section to be posted in a prominent place alongside the door of the and freely visible to any or all I wo kers employed on ekeeper's office or in a similar place which is readily availableI the Work; (2) Maintained such circular continuously posted from the inception to the completion of the Contract on which workers are or have been employed. 14. Worker's Compensation: All employers, including gtrll comply that h with ORS 6 employ u 017 bject workers who Work under this Contract in the State of Oregon shall and provide the u 656.126. Contractor orrshallensurethat each its Subcontractors Compensation or unless of sch employers areexempt under ORSRSI complies with these requirements. ymen 15. Prompt Payment for Medical Contractorervices: corporation,Il fupromtly make rni hpng medical, cal or I as due, to any person, co-partnership, association or or hospital care services or other needed care and attention, incident to sickness sory nes injury, to theemployees on ys of thatoContactor, collected or Contractor deducted from they for the wages of employees I all moneys and sums t under any law, contract or agreement for the purpose of providing or paying for the services. r 16. Prompt Payment by Contractor ou and tractactors;entered Interest into Penalby Cotntra y: Contrtoraatoclausel I include in each subcontract and supply con obligating Contractor (1) to make fssuch amounts asayment to the arepaid torCont aor ppo1eby Owner under for satisfactory performance within ten days ou receipt of the Contract, and (2) if payment is Supplier nliede within 3days r an intereso penalty onr amounts dueyn the case ment from I Owner, to pay the Subcontractor pp of each payment not made in accordance the payment included subcontract as required by this Paragraph ( ) aboveTheinterest penalty shallbe for the I Supplementary Conditions Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6755 00800 12 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I period beginning on the day after the required payment date and ending on the date on 1 which payment of the amount due is made, and computed at the rate specified in Paragraph 6.09.D.4 above. Contractor shall also include in each subcontract and supply contract entered into by Contractor a clause obligating each Subcontractor and Supplier to include a payment clause and an interest penalty clause conforming to the standards of this paragraph and Paragraph 6.09.D.4 above in each of its subcontracts and supply contracts and to include such clauses in their subcontracts and supply contracts with each lower-tier Subcontractor or Supplier. 17. List of Subcontractors/Licensing With Construction Contractors Board: Before commencing Work, Contractor shall provide to Owner and Engineer a list of all ISubcontractors and Suppliers to be involved on the Project. The list shall be attached to the Agreement as an Exhibit. The receipt of such list shall not require Owner or Engineer to investigate the qualifications of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers, nor shall it waive the I right of Owner to later object to or reject any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to assure that all Subcontractors are duly registered with the Oregon State Construction Contractors Board and have not been declared ineligible to work Ion a public contract. 18. Material Salvage: To the extent the scope of the Work for this Agreement requires demolition, Contractor must salvage or recycle construction and demolition debris, if feasible 1 and cost-effective. 19. Composting: To the extent the scope of the Work for this Agreement requires lawn I and landscape maintenance, Contractor must compost or mulch yard waste material at an approved site, if feasible and cost-effective. 20. Environmental and Natural Resources Laws: Pursuant to ORS 279C.525, the following is a list of Federal, State, and Local agencies that have enacted ordinances or regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of natural resources that may affect the performance of this Agreement. The following list may 1 not include all such agencies that have enacted ordinances or regulations relating to the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources. I Federal Agencies: Agriculture, Dept. of Forest Service I Natural Resources Conservation Service Defense, Dept. of Army Corps of Engineers Coast Guard 1 Environmental Protection Agency Interior, Dept. of U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Bureau of Land Management Bureau of Indian Affairs Bureau of Reclamation I Labor, Dept. of Occupational Safety and Health Administration Transportation, Dept. of Federal Highway Administration I Bureau of Mines Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions 1 Project No.6755 I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-13 Federal Geological EnergySurvey 1 Regulatory Commission Health and Human Services, Dept. of Housing and Urban Development, Dept. of Mine Safety and Health Administration Minerals Management Service National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Office of Surface Mining, Reclamation and Enforcement Water Resources Council State Agencies: Administrative Services, Dept. of Agriculture, Dept. of Columbia River Gorge Commission Consumer and Business Services, Dept. of Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Division Environmental Quality, Dept. of Fish and Wildlife, Dept. of Forestry, Dept. of Geology and Mineral Industries, Dept. of Human Services, Dept. of Labor and Industries, Bureau of Land Conservation and Development, Dept. of Natural Resources, Dept. of Parks and Recreation, Dept. of State Fire Marshall State Lands, Dept. of Water Resources Department Local Agencies: City Councils Circuit Courts County Commissioners, Boards of Fire Districts Historical Preservation Commission Planning Commissions Port Districts Special Districts Oregon Tribal Governments 21. Retainage: The withholding of retainage by Contractor or Subcontractor shall be in accordance with ORS 279C.550 to ORS 279C.570, and 279C.845(7). 22. Liens: Contractor shall not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against the state, county, school district, municipality, municipal corporation or subdivision thereof, on account of any labor or material furnished. 23. Notice of Claim on Bond: The notice of claim required by ORS 279C.600 mustbe sent by registered or certified mail or hand-delivered no later than 180 days after the day the person last provided labor or furnished materials or 180 days after the worker listed in the notice of claim by the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries last provided , Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 137601370 00800-14 I I motCSubcontractor at any place Contractorlabor. The or Subcontractornoticeaybe maintainssentrdelivered an office o or conductsontractor business or at the residence of I Contractor or Subcontractor. If the claim is for a required contribution to a fund of an employee benefit plan, the notice required by ORS 279C.600 must be sent or delivered I within 200 days after the employee last provided labor or materials. The notice shall be in writing substantially as follows: I (insert the name of Contractor or Subcontractor and the name of the Owner): I Notice is hereby given that the undersigned (here insert the name of the claimant) has a claim for (here insert a brief description of the labor or materials performed or furnished and the person by whom performed or furnished; if the claim is for other than labor or materials, I insert a brief description of the claim) in the sum of (here insert the amount) dollars against the (here insert public works bond or payment bond, as applicable) taken from (here insert the name of the principal and, if known, the surety or sureties upon the public works bond or I payment bond) for the work of (here insert a brief description of the work concerning which the public works bond or payment bond was taken). Such material or labor was supplied to: I (insert the name of Contractor or Subcontractor) I (here to be signed) I I I I I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-15 1 SC-6.12.A — Delete the last sentence of Paragraph 6.12.A and replace it with the following sentence: , Upon completion of the Work, these record Drawings and record specifications, annotated (marked-up to reflect field changes, if any), Samples and final Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner. SC-6.13.B—Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.13.B: Contractor shall be aware that permit-required confined spaces exist in or near the Project Site. Entry to these spaces must be accomplished in compliance with the requirements of OAR 166-150-0190 (29 CFR 1910.146). Examples of permit-required confined spaces include but are not limited to the following: 1. Open tanks beyond the handrails including clarifiers, aeration basins, channels, etc. 2. Manholes. 3. Flow control structures which have the potential to contain sewage. 4. Enclosed tanks including digesters, clarifiers, aerated grit basins, chemical tanks, etc. 5. Wet well and dry wells of pump stations. 6. Electrical vaults. The hazards associated with these confined spaces may include but are not limited to: 1. Oxygen deficiency. 2. Combustible vapors including methane. 3. Slip hazards. 4. Fall/retrieval hazard. 5. Engulfment hazard. 6. Lockout required of mechanical and electrical devices. 7. Toxic or hazardous chemicals including hydrogen sulfide and process chemicals. 8. Traffic hazards. 9. Hot work and ignition sources. 10. Potential for rapid changes in working conditions. 11. Painting or coating application activities often pose temporary hazards. Prior to beginning Work in permit-required confined spaces, Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of Contractor's permit-required confined space entry plan/program including a copy of the permit forms that will be used by Contractor. Upon request by Contractor, Owner will review with Contractor, Owner's permit-required confined space program and specific procedures Owner would incorporate in spaces entered. Owner will coordinate any of its entries into the same spaces with Contractor. When the permit-required confined space Work is completed, Contractor shall inform Owner, in writing, of any hazards encountered or changes made resulting in different hazards within the space. SC-6.13.D—Change Paragraph "D"to"E" in and insert the following Paragraph as 6.13.D: ' D. Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor shall have prepared Contractor's written plan for the Project-specific safety precautions and programs, complete with respect to procedures and actions that Contractor intends for Contractor and all others as provided in Paragraphs 6.13.A.1 and 13.02, in order for Contractor and all others to comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations. Contractor's plan for safety 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 16 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 • precautionssignated andsafety programs representative shall haverequired beenin approved 6.14.and endorsed by Contractor's deParagraph SC-6.13.E and 6.13.F — Re-label existing paragraphs 6.13.E. and 6.13.F to become 6.13.H and 6.13.1. SC-6.13— Insert the following paragraphs as 6.13.F and 6.13.G: F. Contractor shall revise Contractor's plan for safety precautions and programs appropriate times to reflect changes in construction conditions, the Work, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of , the requirements of Paragraph 13.02. Contractor shall disseminate thestructionorigi al plan and revisions to all others indicated in Paragraphs 6.13.A.1 and 13.02. G. Contractor's plan for safety precautions and programs will not require more stringent safety requirements, training or other qualifications for all others, including those specified in Paragraph 13.02 and their employees, than Contractor sets forth for comparable activity and responsibility of Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers and their respective employees. SC-6.17 — Delete Paragraph 6.17 in its entirety. See Section 01300 — Submittals of Division 1 - General Requirements. SC-6.20.A— Delete Paragraph 6.20.A in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless, reimburse and defend Owner and Engineer and the officers, directors, partners, members, employees, agents, Consultants and Subcontractors of each and any of them, and the successors in interest of the foregoing, from, for and against suits, actions, claims, damages, penalties, liabilities, losses and expenses (including but not limited to all fees and related costs, disbursements and expenses of engineers, architects, attorneys and expert witness' fees) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, but only to the extent caused by: 1) the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2) breach of this Contract by Contractor. SC-6.21.B—Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 6.21.B: The design professional shall be registered in the State of Oregon. SC-6.21.D — In the last sentence of Paragraph 6.21.D, delete the phrase "Paragraph 6.17.D.1" and replace with "Section 01300—Submittals". SC-7.01 —Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.01.C: D. Should Contractor cause damage to the Work or property at the Site, or should any claim arising out of or resulting from Contractor's performance of contractor the Work at the Site be made by any separate contractor against Contractor, Owner, Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions K/J Project No. 1376013'70 00800-17 1 Engineer, or Engineer's Consultants or any other prto otherwisecresoNellthe dispute by promptly pt • to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or r the fullest extent mediation, arbitration or at law. Contcfeimbushall, rseoand defend Ownepand'Eng neerLaws and the Regulations, indemnify, hold harmless, officers, directors, partners, members, employees,nnte est oft a foregoing, from, and Subcontractors of each and any of them, and the successors against suits, actions, claims, damages, penalties, liabilities, losses and expenses (including ers, but not limited to all fees and related costs, disbursements and expenses ofconsineentially architects, attorneys and expert witness' fees) arising directly, indirectly or out of or resulting from any action, lel or equitable,Consultants orought the officers,a sy a Sdpectoes, employees, contractor against Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's on a claim caused 9 agents, or other Consultants of each and any of them to the extentbased by, arising out of, or resulting from Contractor's negligent or other failure of performance in the Work. I E. Should a separate contractor cause damage to the Work or property of Contractor or should the performance of Work by any separate contractor at the Sgivee Orise to Enny gineer, her claim, Contractor shall not institute any action, legal or equitable, againstoother a or Engineer's Consultants or the officers, directors, employees, agents, nts of each and any of them or permit any actio n court or before against any ofany mediatorem to be ormaintained which continued in its name or for its benefit in y ineer's seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages fromlo employees, agents, or other wner, Engineer, onsultants ogeach and Consultants or the officers, directors, e p y any of them on account of any such damage or claim. SC-7.02—Delete Paragraphs 7.02.A and 7.02.B in their entireties and replace with the following: A. Engineer and Owner will have authority and responsibility adjacent for to the coPrordination ject sfe.ite activities for various contractors and utility own ers at Contractor shall cooperate with this �s effort andassist the coordination of Work activities conducted by other contractors performing such other Work. B. Unless expressly assigned ned to Engineer or Owner, all other authority and 1 responsibilities shall remain vested in each contractor and utility owner. SC-7.03.B Delete the word "wrongful"from the last sentence of this paragraph. 1 SC-7.03.0— Delete Paragraph 7.03.0 in its entirety and replace with the following paragraph: C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's wrongful action or inactions. SC-8.02.A — In Paragraph 8.02.A, delete the words, "to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection,". Supplementary Conditions Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6755 00800 18 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 SC-8.05.A— Delete Paragraph 8.05.A in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. ' Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have ' been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. SC-8.11.A— Delete Paragraph 8.11.A in its entirety and replace it with the following: ' A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the Contract ' Documents, Owner's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ' SC-8.12—Change the paragraph reference "6.13.D"to "6.13.E." SC 9.01.A—Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 9.01.A: ' "and will not be changed without written consent of Owner." SC-9.03.A—Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 9.03.A: tB. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be furnished by Owner. The responsibilities, authority, and limitations of the RPR are limited to those of Engineer in ' accordance with Paragraph 9.09 of the General Conditions and as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents and are further limited and described below. C. Responsibilities and Authority: 1. Schedules: Review and monitor the Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittal submissions and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult with Engineer ' concerning acceptability. 2. Conferences and Meetings: Conduct or attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, Work conferences and other Project related ' meetings. 3. Liaison: (i) Serve as Engineer's liaison with Contractor, working principally through Contractor's superintendent and assist in understanding the intent of the Contract Documents; (ii) assist Engineer in serving as Owner's liaison with Contractor when Contractor's operations affect Owner's onsite operations; (iii) assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information when required for proper execution of the Work. 4. Submittals: Receive Submittals which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability for examination. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the ' commencement of any Work or arrival of products at the Site, when recognized, requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample if the Submittal has not been approved by Engineer. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-19 i 5. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: (i) Conduct onsite observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents; (ii) inform Engineer and Contractor whenever RPR believes that any Work is defective; (iii) advise Engineer when RPR believes that any Work will not produce a complete Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the complete Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or whenever RPR believes Work should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection, or approval; (iv) monitor to ensure that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof; (v) observe, record and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and startups; and (vi) accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these inspections and report to the Engineer. 6. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Inform Engineer when clarifications and ' interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer. 7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor's suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and provide recommendations to Engineer; transmit to Contractor the decision issued by Engineer. ' 8. Records: (i) Maintain at the Site files for correspondence, conference records, Submittals including Shop Drawings and Samples, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all Addenda, the signed Agreement, Written Amendments, Work Change Directives, Change Orders, Field Orders, additional Drawings issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Engineer's written clarifications and interpretations, progress reports, and other Project related documents; (ii) keep a record of pertinent Site conditions, activities, decisions and events. 9. Reports: (i) Furnish Engineer periodic reports of progress of the Work and of Contractor's compliance with the Progress Schedule and Schedule of Submittal submissions; (ii) consult with Engineer in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work; and (iii) assist in drafting proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders, and obtain backup material from Contractor as appropriate. 10. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 11. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals, Record Documents, and Site Records: During the course of the Work, monitor whether these documents and other data I required to be assembled, maintained, and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have this material delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to final payment for the Work. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-20 1 ' Substantial Conduct pg ,Owner12., and Contractor andCompletion:prepare(i) a list of itemsan to insbeection completedinthe or corrected;company of(ii)Ensubmitineerto 1 Engineer a list of observed items requiring completion or correction. ' 13. Final Completion: (i) Conduct final inspection in the company of Engineer, Owner, and Contractor; and (ii) notify Contractor and Engineer in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective; and (iii) observe that all items ' on final list have been completed, corrected, or accepted by Owner and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance. D. Limitations of Authority: Resident Project Representative will not: 1. have authority to authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment, unless authorized by Engineer; or 2. undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors or Contractor's superintendent; or ' 3. accept Submittals from anyone other than the Contractor; or 4. authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part; or 5. participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. ' SC-9.06.A - In Paragraph 9.06.A, delete the phrase "Paragraph 6.17" and replace with "Section 01300—Submittals". 1 SC-9.09—Add the following paragraph immediately following Paragraph 9.09.E: F. Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers and others on the Project, or their sureties, ' shall maintain no direct action against the Design Engineer of Record, its officers, employees, affiliated corporations, and Subcontractors, for any claim arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from the engineering services performed. Only the Owner will be the beneficiary of any undertaking by the Design Engineer of Record. SC 9.10.A. Change the reference to "Paragraph 6.13.D" in this paragraph to "Paragraph 6.13.E." paragraphs e SC-10.01 — Change "B" to "E" in this paragraph and add the following immediat Iy after Paragraph 10.01.A: 1 B. Owner may, in anticipation of ordering an addition, deletion or revision to the Work, request Contractor to prepare a proposal of cost and times to perform Owner's contemplated changes in the Work. Contractor's written proposal shall be transmitted to the Engineer promptly, but not later than 14 days after Contractor's receipt of Owner's written request and shall remain a firm offer for a period of not less than 45 days after receipt thereof by Engineer. ' 1. Contractor is not authorized to proceed on an Owner contemplated change pin the Work prior to Contractor's receipt of a Change Order (or Work Change Directive) incorporating such change into the Work. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 ' K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-21 I I 2. Owner's request for proposal or multiple requests for proposals shall not justify a claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones). C. In signing a Change Order, Owner and Contactor acknowledge and agree that: I 1. the stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set forth in the Change Order includes payment for (i) the Cost of the Work covered by the Change I Order, (ii) Contractor's fee for overhead and profit, (iii) interruption of progress schedules, (iv) delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on Work under the Contract Documents, and (v) extended overhead; I 2. the Change Order constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for the change to the Work; 3. no reservation of rights to pursue subsequent claims on the Change Order will be I made by either party; 4. no subsequent claim or amendment of the Contract Documents will arise out of or as I a result of the Change Order; 5. in executing the Change Order, Contractor shall defend and indemnify Owner and I Engineer and their officers, agents and employees from any and all claims of any kind by any Subcontractor or Supplier of any tier based upon the subject matter of any claim released hereunder by Contractor in the Change Order; and I 6. except as otherwise provided in the Change Order, the Contract, as amended, between Owner and Contractor remains in full force and effect. I D. A copy of the Change Order form that will be used on the Project is attached as Exhibit A to the Supplementary Conditions. Requests for Information (RFI's) of the Contractor and Engineer's responses to RFI's that result in the development and execution I of a Change Order shall be attached to and referenced in the Change Order. SC-10.06—Add the following paragraph to ARTICLE 10—CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS: I 10.06 Cost Reduction Incentive A. Contractor may submit cost reduction proposals to the Engineer for modifying the I plans, Specifications, or other requirements of this Contract for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of construction. The cost reduction proposal shall not impair the essential functions or characteristics of the Project, including, but not limited to, service life, economy I of operation, ease of maintenance, desired appearance, or safety standards. B. Cost reduction proposals shall contain the following information: I 1. A description of both the existing Contract requirements and the proposed changes. 2. An itemization of the change in Contract requirements if the cost reduction proposal is I adopted. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 I K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-22 1 3. A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing Contract and under the proposed change. The detailed estimates shall include all labor, material, equipment, Subcontractor, supervision, overhead and fee costs in sufficient detail as Owner deems appropriate and in accordance with Article 11. The detailed estimates shall also ' include adequate substantiation for such costs in the form of quantity surveys and Supplier and Subcontractor quotations. If requested by Owner, Contractor shall require any Subcontractors to provide detailed estimates in accordance with this Paragraph. ' 4. A CPM schedule analysis of the time associated with performing the Work under the existing Contract and under the proposed change. l 5. A statement of the time within which the Engineer must make a decision on the cost reduction proposal. ' C. Engineer will not be liable to the Contractor for any failure to accept or act upon any cost reduction proposal submitted, nor for any delays to the Work attributable to any such cost reduction proposal. ' D. Contractor shall continue to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract until an executed Change Order, incorporating the cost reduction proposal has been issued. If an executed Change Order has not been issued by the date indicated in the ' Contractor's cost reduction proposal, or such other date as the Contractor may subsequently have specified in writing, such cost reduction proposal shall be deemed rejected. E. Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of a cost reduction proposal and of the estimated net savings in construction costs from the adoption of all or any part of such proposal. In determining the estimated net savings, Engineer reserves the right to disregard ' Contract bid prices if, in the judgment of Engineer, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the work to be performed or deleted. F. Engineer reserves the right to require Contractor to share in Owner's costs of investigating a cost reduction proposal submitted by Contractor. Where such condition is imposed, Contractor shall indicate acceptance in writing, and such acceptance shall constitute full authority for Engineer to deduct amounts payable to Contractor from any monies due Contractor under the Contract. G. If Contractor's cost reduction proposal is accepted in whole or in part, such ' acceptance will be by a Contract Change Order. The Change Order shall specifically state that it is executed pursuant to this section. Such Change Order will incorporate the changes in the Contract Documents which are necessary to implement the cost reduction proposal, and shall include any conditions upon which the Engineer's approval is based. The Change ' Order shall set forth the estimated net savings in the cost of performing the Work attributable to the cost reduction proposal, and shall further provide that the Contract cost be adjusted by crediting the Owner with 50% of the net cost savings. The amount specified to accrue to the Contractor in the Change Order for a cost reduction proposal shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for all Work associated with the cost reduction proposal. H. Acceptance of the cost reduction proposal and performance of the Work thereunder shall not extend the time of the Contract unless specifically provided for in the Contract Change Order incorporating the cost reduction proposal. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 00800-23 I. Owner expressly reserves the right to adopt a cost reduction proposal for general use on contracts administered by the Owner when it determines that the cost reduction proposal is suitable for application to other contracts. When an accepted cost reduction proposal is adopted for general use, only Contractor who first submitted such proposal will be eligible for compensation, and only to those contracts awarded to Contractor prior to submission of the accepted cost reduction proposal. Cost reduction proposals similar or identical to previously submitted proposals will be eligible for consideration and compensation if the previously submitted cost proposal was not adopted for general application. Owner or any other public agency shall have the right to use all or any part of a cost reduction proposal without obligation or compensation of any kind to Contractor. J. Contractor shall bear all costs to revise all bonds for the Project to include the cost reduction incentive proposal work. SC-11.01.A.1 — Delete Paragraph 11.01.A.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: ' 1. Labor costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work will be the actual cost for wages in accordance with the Oregon Bureau of Labor and Industries (BOLI) Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon for each craft or type of workers performing the Work at the time the work is done, plus BOLI's established Fringe Rate for employer payments of payroll taxes, worker compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs resulting from Federal, State or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers will be paid only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. The labor costs for foremen and superintendents shall be proportioned to all of their assigned Work and only that applicable to extra Work shall be paid. SC-11.01.A.4 — In Paragraph 11.01.A.4, delete the word "special" and replace with the word ' "technical" and delete the parenthetical phrase"(including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants)" in its entirety. SC-11.01.A.5.c— Delete Paragraph 11.01.A.5.c and replace with the following: I c. Rentals of construction equipment at the rental rate listed for such equipment specified in the current edition of the "Contractor's Equipment Cost Guide" as published by Equipment Watch (www.equipmentwatch.com), telephone number 800/699-3282, or from rate sheets from local rental companies. Such rental rate will be used to compute payments for equipment whether the equipment is under the Contractor's control through direct ownership, leasing, renting, or another method of acquisition. The rental rate to be applied for use of each item of equipment will be the rate resulting in the least total cost to the Owner for the total period of use. If it is deemed necessary by the Contractor to use the equipment not listed by the references specified herein, an equitable rental rate for the equipment will be established by the Engineer. The Contractor may furnish cost data which might assist the Engineer in the establishment of the rental rate. Payment shall be subject to the following: 1) Payment for equipment which is already on the Project Site and which is used in the completion of extra Work will not be allowed; 2) All equipment shall, in the opinion of the Engineer, be in good working condition and suitable for the purpose for which the equipment is to be used; Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-24 1 3) Before construction equipment is used on the extra Work, the Contractor shall plainly stencil or stamp an identifying number thereon at a conspicuous location, and shall furnish to the Engineer, in duplicate, a description of the equipment and its identifying number; 4) Unless otherwise specified, manufacturer's ratings and er approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment for the determination rof applicable rental rates. Equipment which has no direct power unit shall be powered by a unit of at least minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer; 5) Individual pieces of equipment or tools having a replacement value of$500 or less, whether or not consumed by use, will be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made therefore; and 6) Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. The rental time to be paid for equipment at the Site will be the time the equipment is in productive operation on the extra Work being performed and, in addition, will include the time required to move the equipment to the location of the extra work and return it to the original location or to another location; except, that moving time will not be paid if the equipment is used on other than the extra Work, even though located at the Site of the extra Work. Loading and transporting costs will be allowed, in lieu of moving time, when the equipment is movedthanthe by means other than its own power, except that no payment will be made for loading and transporting costs when the equipment is used at the Site of the extra Work on other extra Work. Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. The rental time of equipment on the Work Site will be computed subject to the following: 1) When hourly rates are listed, any part of an hour less than 30 minutes of operation will be considered to be one-half-hour of operation, and any part of an hour in excess of 30 minutes will be considered one hour of operation; 2) When daily rates are listed, any part of a day less than four hours operation will be considered to be half-day of operation. When Owner-operated equipment is used to perform extra Work to be paid from on time and materials basis, Contractor will be paid for the equipment and operator, as set forth in Paragraphs a), b) and c) following; a) Payment for the equipment will be made in accordance with the provisions in Paragraph c above; b) Payment for the cost of labor and subsistence or travel allowance will made at the rates established in Paragraph SC-11.01.A.1; and be c) To the direct cost of equipment rental and labor, computed as provided herein, will be added the allowances for equipment rental and labor as provided in Section 00700 — Paragraph 12.01.C. SC-11.01.B.5— Insert the words ", including lost opportunity costs" between the"and" in the second line. Delete the "s" on "Paragraphs" in this same paragraph. words "kind" and Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions K/J Project No. 137601370 00800-25 1 SC-11.01.D—Add the following to Paragraph 11.01.D: I Supporting data shall include but not be limited to daily submissions of timesheets indicating hours and trades worked, equipment and time equipment was employed, and materials expended. , SC-11.03.D— Delete Paragraph 11.03.D in its entirety. SC-12.01.C.2.c — Add the following to Paragraph 12.01.C.2.c immediately following the word 1 "Subcontractor" at the end of this Paragraph: except, the maximum total allowable cost to Owner a shall b fished e oSubcontractors st ofhe rkopl s a maximum collective aggregate fee for Contractor 8 percent SC-12.02.6—Add the following to Paragraph 12.02.B: All requests for time extensions shall be supported by Schedule analysis showing the effect on the entire ainto concurrent path,critical including Partial demonstrationofimpact on particular operations only will not be acceptable to show the criticality of any event on the Project Schedule as a whole. 1 SC-12.02—Add the following paragraphs to 12.02 immediately following Paragraph 12.02B: C. Use of Float: 1. A claim for an adjustment of Contract Times (or Milestones), otherwise allowable under the Contract Documents, shall be granted only when the time lost or gained exceeds the float for the activity at the time of the event giving rise to the claim. Float, the amount oftiimnbetween the early start date and the late start date, or the early ish date, isjointly owned by both Owner and Contractor whetherfinish la and the latea finish expressly disclosed or implied in any manner. 2. Contractor shall not use float suppression techniques (including, but not limited to, preferential sequencing caused by late starts of follow-up trades, unreasonably small crews, extended durations, or imposed dates) in information provided to Engineer. Add 12.03.0— the following after the first sentence of Paragraph 12.03.C: , Contract Times may be extended because of delays in the completion of the Work due to abnormal weather conditions provided that the Contractor shall, within 10 days of the beginning of such delay, notify Engineer in writing of the cause of the delay and request an extension of time. Such requests shall be accompanied with supporting documentation referenced to the NOAA INDEX weather in the Project vicinity. Engineer will make recommendations to Owner to extend the Contract Times for completing the Work when, in Engineer's judgment, the findings of facts and extent of delay justify such an extension. Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation of any kind arising out of or relating to abnormal weather conditions. SC-12.03.E—Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 12.03.E: F. Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Final Completion within the Contract Time. If Contractor's performance falls behind schedule, the Contractor shall accelerate the Work as required to get back on schedule at no additional , Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 26 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I cost to the Owner. Accelerated work shall include air or express delivery of materials and equipment, increasing the number of workers, working overtime, working Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays and working additional shifts. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for any extra cost of inspection made necessary by accelerated work required under this I I I I I I I I provision. SC-13.03.A— Delete Paragraph 13.03.A in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Contractor shall notify Engineer 48 hours prior to the expected time for operations requiring inspection and laboratory testing services. Contractor shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. SC-13.03.B — In the first line of Paragraph 13.03.B insert the words, "perform testing and inspections itself or shall" between the words "shall" and "employ". SC-13.03.6.2— Delete the word "and" at the end of this paragraph. SC-13.03.B.3—Change Paragraph "3"to "4" and add the following paragraph: 3. retesting required because of non-conformance to the requirements of the Contract I Documents; and SC-13.03.D—Add the following to Paragraph 13.03.D: I I Tests required by Contract Documents to be performed by Contractor that require test certificates be submitted to Owner or Engineer for acceptance shall be made by an independent testing laboratory or agency licensed or certified in accordance with Laws and Regulations and applicable state and local statutes. In the event state license or certification is not required, testing laboratories or agencies shall meet the following applicable requirements: 1. "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by the American Council of Independent Laboratories.2. Basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction" as applicable. 3. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. IPrior to requesting a certificate of Substantial Completion, and allowing occupancy of facilities, Contractor shall provide an inspection by a state industrial safety representative, an independent safety inspector certified by the state in the construction type being inspected, or a federal or state (OSHA) representative qualified in the construction type being inspected, to determine that the facilities provided are in compliance with the state and federal safety requirements. Signed copies of the inspection reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for Owner's files. Violations or deficiencies noted therein shall be resolved prior to occupancy of the facilities and before final payment will be made. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions I KM Project No. 1376013"70 00800-27 I 1 SC-13.03—Add the following paragraph after Paragraph 9 p h 13.03.F: G. Costs of retesting as required in accordance with Paragraph 13.03.B.3 shall be paid I by the Contractor. SC-14.02.A.1 — In the first sentence, delete the phrase "date established in the Agreement for each progress payment" and replace it with the phrase "first day of each month". Add the I following immediately following Paragraph 14.02.A.1: a. Stored Materials and Equipment: Payments for stored materials and equipment shall be I based only upon the actual cost of the materials and equipment to Contractor and shall not include any overhead or profit to Contractor. Partial payments will not be made for undelivered materials or equipment, except for payments associated with procurement I contracts initiated by Owner and assigned to Contractor. b. Schedules and Data: During the progress of the Work, each Application for Payment I shall be accompanied by Contractor's updated schedule of operations, or progress report, with the Shop Drawings schedules, procurement schedules, and value of material on hand included in the application, and other data specified in Section 01330 or reasonably required by Engineer. I c. Payment for material delivered to the Work Site or stored under Owner's control will be based on the vendors' paid invoices or the bill oflading h shall be furnished showing date of lvery by Contractor to the Work Site where the delivery took place, a copy of w Engineer with each request for progress payment. Only those materials which have been incorporated into the Project or are stored under Owner's control may be included in the I progress payment as material stored. d. In addition to the amounts which Owner may retain as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Owner may withhold a sufficient amount or amounts from any I payment otherwise due Contractor as in Owner's judgment may be necessary to cover: 1) Payments which may be due and payable for properly filed claims against Contractor I or any Subcontractor for labor or materials furnished in or about the performance of the Contract. 2) Estimated or actual costs for correcting defective work not remedied. I 3) Amounts claimed by Owner as forfeiture due to delays or other offsets. Owner may apply such withheld amount or amounts to the payment of such claim at Owner's I discretion. In doing so, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payments so made by Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for such payment Imade in good faith. Such payments may be made without prior judicial determination of the claim or claims. Owner shall render to Contractor a proper account of any such funds disbursed in or on behalf of Contractor. I SC-14.02.6.1 — In the first line of Paragraph 14.02.6.1, change the number "10" to the number "15". Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 28 I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 i 1 SC-14.02.C.1 — Delete Paragraph 14.02.C.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: 1 1. Thirty days after presentation of the Application days after approval of Application for Payment by Owner, whcheverncomes first, thea amount 1 recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. The Engineer shall have fifteen days from receipt of Application for Payment to notify Contractor if all or part of the Application for Payment is in 1 dispute. SC-14.02.D— Modify Paragraph 14.02.D.1 as follows: 1 Modify Paragraph 14.02.D.1.c by removing the "or". Modify Paragraph 14.02.D.1.d by removing the "."and replacing it with "; or". 1 Add the following paragraph immediately after 14.02.D.1.d: 1 e. Owner has not received the Certified Payrolls from Contractor required by Article 11 of the Agreement and must withhold the additional retainage required in Article 11 of the Agreement until Contractor submits its Certified Payrolls. 1 SC-14.02.D.2 - Delete Paragraph 14.02.D.2 and replace it with the following paragraph: 2. Owner may reduce the amount recommended by Engineer and to be paid for the 1 following items: a. Owner compensation to Engineer for labor plus expenses because of the following 1 Contractor-caused events: i. witnessing retesting of corrected or replaced defective Work; 1 ii. return visits to manufacturing facilities to witness factory testing or retesting; iii. Submittal review in excess of two reviews by Engineer for substantially the same 1 Submittal; iv. evaluation of proposed substitutions and in making changes to Contract 1 Documents occasioned thereby; or b. liability for liquidated damages incurred by Contractor as set forth in the Agreement. 1 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions 1 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-29 1 1 SC-14.02.D.3 — Renumber existing Paragraph 14.02.D.3 to become Paragraph 14.02.D.4. and insert the following paragraph for 14.02.D.3: , If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. SC-14.04.A—Add the following to Paragraph 14.04.A: Substantial Completion is further defined as (i) that degree of completionof f thepe P roject's and operating facilities or systems sufficient to provide Owner the full time, uni continuous beneficial operation of the Work; (ii) all required functional, performance and acceptance or startup testing has been successfully demonstrated for all components, devices, equipment, and instrumentation and control to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications; (iii) all inspections required have been completed and identified critical defective Work has been replaced or corrected; and (iv) all appurtenant operations and maintenance features (e.g., hose bibs, drainage systems, etc.) and safety features (e.g., handrails, motor guards, etc.) have been installed and are functional. I SC-14.04.A—Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.04.A: 1. Conditions precedent to Substantial Completion of the Work and Engineer's issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion shall include: a. Conformance with all training services requirements and deliverables. ' b. Acceptance of all preliminary operation and maintenance manuals by Owner and Engineer. I c. Submittal of current record documents to Owner and Engineer. d. Correction of all state, local, and other regulatory agencies defective Work lists. 1 e. Submittals have been received and approved by Engineer including, but not limited to, the following: i. Approved Shop Drawings. ii. Record Drawings and Specifications. iii. Electrical testing and wiring diagrams. iv. Equipment data forms. v. Manufacturer's certificates of proper installation. ' vi. Factory test reports. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 30 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I vii. Commissioning, testing and start-up reports. SC-14.04.D— Delete the last sentence of Paragraph 14.04.D. SC-14.07.A.2.a. —Change the reference to Paragraph "5.04.B.6"to"5.04.8"in this paragraph. SC-14.07.6.1 —Add the following sentence after the second sentence of Paragraph 14.07.6.1: Such written notice of acceptance of the Work shall constitute Final Completion. SC-15.02 Delete Paragraphs 15.02.A through 15.02.D and insert the following in lieu I thereof: A. If Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the Work or any separable part thereof with such diligence as will ensure the completion of the Work within the Contract Times, or any extension thereof, or fails or refuses to complete such Work within such extension, or if Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or if Contractor should make assignment for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or if Contractor files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency, or if Contractor or any Subcontractor should violate any provision of the Contract, or if Contractor should persistently refuse or should fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper ' materials to complete the Work in the time specified, or if Contractor should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or if Contractor should disregard laws, ordinances, or instructions given by Owner or Engineer or disregard in any substantial ' way any provisions of the Contract Documents; Owner may without prejudice to any other right or remedy, serve written notice upon Contractor and Contractor's surety of Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice will contain the reasons for Owner's intention to terminate the Contract and unless such violations shall cease and satisfactory arrangements for the corrections thereof have been accepted by Owner in writing within 10 days after the service of such notice, the Contract shall upon the expiration of said 10 days cease and terminate. In the event of such termination, the Owner shall immediately serve I written notice upon the Surety and Contractor, and Contractor shall be liable for all costs necessary to complete the Work. B. The Surety shall, after receipt of notification from Owner of termination of the Contract, take over and perform the Work, utilizing a Contractor which is acceptable to Engineer. The Surety shall, within 10 days after receipt of the notice of termination, provide Owner with written notice of Surety's intent to take over and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall commence the Work within 10 days thereafter. C. If the Surety does not reply to the notice of termination, or fails to perform the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents, or provides the Owner with written notice that Surety does not intend to take over and perform the Work to completion, Owner may without prejudice on the part of the Surety, take over the Work and prosecute the same to completion by any method Owner may deem advisable for the Project at the expense of Contractor, and the Surety shall be liable to Owner for any excess cost incurred by or other damage to Owner. In such event Owner may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing the Work such materials, appliances, plant, and other property belonging to Contractor that may be on the Work Sites and be necessary therefore. Contractor shall turn over to Owner's Operating Agent all materials and equipment in Contractor's possession that is to be incorporated into the Project, and shall make Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions IK/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-31 1 I arrangements with Owner to turn over any materials or equipment in which Owner has made payment or partial payment but is not in Owner's possession. I D. Upon completion of the Work, if the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect cost of completing the Work, including, but not limited to, all costs incurred by Owner from professional services and attorneys' fees and all costs generated to insure or bond the Work of substitute contractors or Subcontractors used to complete the Work, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner within 30 days upon demand; on failure of Contractor to pay, the Surety shall promptly pay the difference to Owner upon written notice of Contractor's failure to pay. Such difference or any portion thereof not paid by Contractor or the Surety within the 30 days following the date of mailing of the demand for payment, shall earn interest at the rate of 10 percent per annum or the maximum rate authorized by state law, whichever is lower. SC-15.04— Delete paragraph 15.04 in its entirety. SC-16.01 — Delete Paragraph 16.01 in its entirety and replace with the following Paragraphs 16.01 and 16.02: 16.01 Executive Negotiation A. Within 10 days of the delivery of notice of appeal to Engineer's written decision regarding a Claim, dispute or other matter, senior representatives of at least Owner and Contractor, having authority to settle the dispute, and Engineer shall meet at a mutually acceptable time and place, and thereafter as often as they reasonably deem necessary, to exchange relevant information and to attempt to resolve the dispute. B. In the event a mutually acceptable decision cannot be reached through executive negotiation within 20 days of the appealing party's notice, or mutually agreeable longer period, or if the party receiving such notice will not meet within 10 days, Owner or Contractor may make a written declaration, delivered to the other party and Engineer, that the executive negotiation is deemed unsuccessful and may initiate further dispute resolution measures in accordance with this Article 16. 16.02 Mediation, Followed by Binding Arbitration: I A. All appealed or unsettled Claims, disputes or other matters between Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, (except for Claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Paragraph 14.09) shall first be submitted to mediation under the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the limitations of Article 16. The mediator of any Claim, dispute or other matter submitted to mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such Claim, dispute, or other matter unless otherwise agreed. B. Should the mediation be unsuccessful, such Claim, dispute or other matter (except ■ for Claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Paragraph 14.09) shall be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the limitations of this Article 16. The mediator of any Claim, dispute or other matter Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-32 I I submitted to mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such Claim, I dispute, or other matter unless otherwise agreed. C. This Agreement so to mediate or to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to I mediate or to arbitrate entered into in accordance with these Contract Documents will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. D. No demand for mediation or arbitration of any appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter that is required to be referred to Engineer initially for decision in accordance with Paragraph 9.08 will be made later than 10 days after the date the executive negotiation has been declared unsuccessful by Owner or Contractor; and the failure to demand mediation or arbitration within said 10 days' period will result in Engineer's decision being final and binding upon Owner and Contractor. If Engineer renders a further decision after mediation or arbitration proceedings have been initiated, the decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. Time deadlines specified above apply to both mediation (after the executive negotiation has been declared unsuccessful by Owner or Contractor) and arbitration (after the mediation process has been declared unsuccessful by Owner or Contractor). E. Notice of the demand for mediation or arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be 11: sent to Engineer for information. The demand for mediation or arbitration will be made within the 10 day periods specified in Paragraph 16.02.D as applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. IF. Except as provided in Paragraphs 16.02.G and H below, no arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner any other person or entity who is not a party to the Contract unless: 1. the inclusion of such other person or entityis necessary afforded among those who are already nsry if complete relief is to be parties to the arbitrations, and 2. such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such I proceedings, and 3. the written consent of the other person or entity sought to be included and the Owner and Contractor has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific I reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any party not specifically identified in such consent. G. Notwithstanding Paragraph 16.02.F, if an appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter between Owner and Contractor involves any allegations relating to the design, Owner may join Engineer as a party to the mediation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor hereunder. H. Notwithstanding Paragraph 16.02.F, if an appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter between Owner and Contractor involves the Work of a Subcontractor, either Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions I Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 00800-33 I I Owner or Contractor may join such Subcontractor as a party to the mediation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor hereunder. Contractor shall include in all subcontracts I required by Paragraph 6.06.G of the General Conditions a specific provision whereby the Subcontractor consents to being joined in mediation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor involving the Work of such Subcontractor. Nothing in this Paragraph 16.02.H nor I in the provision of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall create any Claim, right or cause of action in favor of Subcontractor and against Owner, Engineer or Engineer's Consultants that does not otherwise exist. I I. The results of successful mediation will be implemented by a Change Order. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and will not be subject to modification or appeal. I SC-ARTICLE 17—Add the following paragraphs to ARTICLE 17— MISCELLANEOUS: 17.07 AttorneyFees I A. At the conclusion of the mediation process specified herein, the Contractor will, as a condition of taking any further action with respect to any Claim, be required to certify that the r amount of the Claim is its best good faith estimate of the amount due ("Certified Claim"). Owner will certify its final offer of settlement ("Final Offer"). In the event Contractor pursues the Claim, Contractor will be entitled, in addition to whatever recovery it has on the Claim, to I be reimbursed its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in the same proportion it was successful based on the difference between its Certified Claim compared to the Owner's Final Offer. Conversely, Owner will be entitled to be reimbursed its reasonable attorney's ' fees incurred in proportion to the amount that Contractor was unsuccessful based on the difference between its Certified Claim compared to the Owner's Final Offer. For example, if Contractor recovers 40% of the difference between its Certified Claim and the amount of the I Owner's Final Offer, Contractor would be entitled to recover 40% of its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in the prosecuting the Claim and the Owner would be entitled to recover 60% of its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in defending the Claim. On the other hand, if the Contractor recovers 60% of the difference between its Certified Claim and the amount of the I Owner's Final Offer, Contractor would be entitled to recover 60% of its reasonable attorney's fees in prosecuting the Claim and the Owner would be entitled to recover 40% of its reasonable attorney's fess incurred in defending the Claim. The Certified Claim and the Final Offer will be admissible in any dispute resolution proceeding. 17.08 Right To Audit I A. If the Contractor submits a Claim to the Owner for additional compensation, the Owner shall have the right, as a condition to considering the Claim, and as a basis for evaluation of the Claim, and until the Claim has been settled, to audit the Contractor's books to the extent they are relevant. This right shall include the right to examine books, records, documents, and other evidence and accounting procedures and practices, sufficient to discover and verify all direct and indirect costs of whatever nature claimed to have been incurred or anticipated to be incurred and for which the Claim has been submitted. The right to audit shall include the right to inspect the Contractor's plant, or such parts thereof, as may be or have been engaged in the performance of the Work. The Contractor further agrees that the right to audit encompasses all subcontracts and is binding upon Subcontractors. The rights to examine and inspect herein provided for shall be exercisable through such representatives as the Owner deems desirable during the Contractor's normal business hours at the office of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make available to the Owner for auditing, all relevant accounting records and documents, 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Supplementary Conditions Project No.6755 00800 34 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 and other financial data, and upon request, shall submit true copies of requested records to the Owner. END OF SECTION I 1 1 r 1 I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Supplementary Conditions 111 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 00800-35 I IEXHIBIT A I CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO: TO CONTRACTOR: IPROJECT: DURHAM ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM PROJECT IMPROVEMENTS PHASE 2 NO. 6755 IOWNER: CLEAN WATER SERVICES ENGINEER: I The following change(s) to the Contract are hereby ordered (use additional pages if required): I Attachments, (List Supporting IDocuments): Changes to Contract Amount and I Contract Times: The stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set forth in this Change Order includes payment for(i) the Cost of the Work covered by the Change Order, (ii) I CONTRACTOR'S fee for overhead and profit, (iii) interruption of progress schedules, (iv) delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on other Work under the Contract Documents, and (v) extended overheads. IThis Change Order constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for the change to the Work. No reservation of rights to pursue subsequent claims on the Change Order will be made by either party. I No subsequent claim or amendment of the Contract Documents will arise out of or as a result of this Change Order. I In executing this Change Order, Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner and Engineer and their officers, agents, and employees from any and all claims of any kind by any subcontractor or supplier of any tier based upon the subject matter of any claim released hereunder by Contractor. IExcept as otherwise provided in this Change Order, the Contract, as amended, between Owner and Contractor, remains in full force and effect. IContract Amount Contract Times (Calculate Days) Original Amount: Original Duration: Days I Previous Contract Change Previous Contract Change Das Orders: Orders: y I This Contract Change This Contract Change Order: Days Order: I Revised Contract Amount: Revised Contract Time: Days The Revised Contract Completion Date is: I r r Zo This Change Order is Issued in Accordance with Paragraph SC— 10.01.A of the Supplementary 11 Conditions Owner Contractor Engineer Recommendation I By: By: By: Date: Date: Date: I 1 1 1 1 • r 1 r 1 ' SECTION 00810 OREGON PREVAILING WAGE RATES 1 The applicable Oregon minimum prevailing wage rates are contained in the publication ' January 1, 2016 Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon effective January 1, 2016, including all applicable amendments (see links at http://www.oregon.gov/boli/whd/pwr/pwr state.shtml), available at http://www.oreoon.cov/boli, and are incorporated herein as though fully set forth as of the date these Bidding Documents were first advertised. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Oregon Prevailing Wage Rates 00810- 1 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 SECTION 01010 ' SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.01 The WORK covered under this Contract will be performed at the site of the Clean Water Services' Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility located at 16580 SW 85th Avenue, Tigard, Oregon 97224 (Site). ' 1.02 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: ' 1. Prior to the commencement of Work at the Site, a preconstruction conference will be held at Owner's Office at a mutually agreed time, but no later than seven days after the Notice to Proceed. The conference shall be attended by Contractor's Project Manager, Superintendent, Quality Control Engineer, Safety Representative, and Subcontractors. Subcontractor attendance shall be ' requested and approved by Engineer. Other attendees will be: a. Engineer and the Resident Project Representative. ' b. Representatives of Owner. c. Governmental representatives, as appropriate. d. Utilities representatives, as appropriate. e. Others as requested by Contractor and Owner upon approval by the Engineer. 2. Contractor shall bring the preconstruction conference submittals in accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. 3. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The complete agenda will be furnished to Contractor prior to the meeting date. However, Contractor should be prepared to discuss all of the items listed below: a. Contractor's initial schedules. b. Procedures for and transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals (normal and deferred). c. Processing applications for payment. d. Maintaining record documents. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Summary of Work Project No. 6755 01010-1 ' K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I e. Special inspection procedures. I f. Critical work sequencing. g. Field decisions and Change Orders. I h. Use of Site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner's needs. I i. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. j. Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid. I k. Daily Report Form which the Engineer will furnish. I. Submittal Transmittal Form which the Engineer will furnish. I m. Temporary utilities. 4. Engineer will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. Contractor shall advise Engineer within 5 days of receipt of minutes if Contractor does not agree with the content of the minutes. 5. Contractor and its Subcontractors should plan on the conference taking four hours. The conference will cover the items listed in paragraphs 2 and 3, and I will include reviewing the Drawings and Specifications, in extensive detail, with Engineer and Owner. B. Progress Meetings: I 1. Engineer will schedule and hold regular on-site progress meetings at least I weekly and at other times as requested by Contractor or as required by progress of the Work. Contractor and Engineer shall attend each meeting and representatives of Owner may also attend. Contractor may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its suppliers, manufacturers, utilities, I and subcontractors. Attendance by such representatives shall be subject to approval of Engineer. 2. Engineer will preside at the progress meetings and will arrange for keeping I and distributing the minutes. Contractor shall advise Engineer within five days of receipt of minutes if Contractor does not agree with content of minutes. The purpose of the meetings is to review the progress of the Work including review of Contractor's three week look-ahead schedule, review submittal and Request for Information status, review change order status, review coordination with operations, maintain coordination of efforts, address field problems, and resolve other problems which may develop. The three-week look-ahead schedule shall include but not be limited to key upcoming activities such as major equipment deliveries to the Site, key construction activities and key 111testing activities. The three-week look-ahead schedule shall be in the form of marked-up Drawings and schedules/flow charts to depict the activities. During each meeting, Contractor shall present any issues that may impact its 111Summary of Work Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 01010-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I progress and propose solutions with a view to resolve these issues 1 ' expeditiously. ' 3. Engineer shall prepare and distribute agenda. Engineer shall review progress of the Work, Progress Schedule, narrative report, Application for Payment, record documents, and additional items of current interest that are pertinent to execution of the Work. 1 4. Engineer will verify with Contractor: a. Actual start and finish dates of completed activities since last progress meeting. b. Durations and progress of activities not completed. 1 c. Reason, time, and cost data for Change Order Work that will be incorporated into Progress Schedule and application for payment. d. Percentage completion of items on Application for Payment. e. Reasons for required revisions to Progress Schedule and their effect ' on Contract Time and Contract Price. 5. Engineer/Owner and Contractor will discuss potential problems that may impede scheduled progress and corrective measures. 1.03 PROJECT STATUS REPORTING ' A. Contractor shall prepare monthly written narrative reports of the status of the Project for submission to the Engineer. The monthly reports shall be submitted to the Engineer seven days prior to the first weekly progress meeting each month. Written status reports shall include: 1. The status of major Project components (percent complete, amount of time ahead or behind schedule) and an explanation of how the Project will be brought back on schedule if delays have occurred. 2. The progress made on critical activities indicated on the CPM Schedule. 3. Explanations for any lack of Work on critical path activities planned to be performed during the last month. 4. Explanations for any schedule changes, including changes to the logic or to activity durations. 5. A list of the critical activities scheduled to be performed in the next two month period. ' 6. The status of major material and equipment procurement. 7. The value of materials and equipment properly stored at the Site but not yet ' incorporated into the Work. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Summary of Work Project No. 6755 01010-3 K/J Project No. 1376013'"70 I I 8. Any delays encountered during the reporting period. 9. An assessment of inclement weather delays and impacts to the progress of I the Work. B. Contractor may include any other information pertinent to the status of the Project. 1 Contractor shall include additional status information requested by Engineer. PART 2 - DESCRIPTION OF OWNER'S PROJECT 2.01 Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the following work on the Odor Control System at the Site: Modify the Solids Building ductwork and electrical work, supply and install new Solids Building interior ductwork, modify the existing outside ductwork (roof), supply and install new outside ductwork (roof), supply and install two Inew make-up air units, supply and install five new exhaust fans, supply and install one new supply fan, modify existing make-up air unit, and perform other miscellaneous demolition, mechanical, civil, and electrical upgrades specified in the Contract Documents including the odor scrubber. I 2.02 "OR EQUAL" CLAUSE A. In order to establish a basis of quality, certain processes, types of machinery and I equipment or kinds of material may be specified on the plans or herein by designating a manufacturer's name and referring to brand or product designation. It I is not the intent of these specifications to exclude other processes, equipment or materials of a type and quality equal to those designated. When a manufacturer's name, brand or item designation is given, it shall be understood that the words "or equal"follow such name or designation, whether in fact they do so or not. If I Contractor desires to furnish items of equipment by manufacturers other than those specified, he shall secure the approval of Engineer prior to placing a purchase order. I B. No extras will be allowed to the Contractor for any changes required to adopt the substitute equipment. Therefore, Contractor's proposal for an alternate shall ' include all costs for any modifications to the plans, such as structural and foundation changes, additional piping or changes in piping, electrical changes or any other modifications which may be necessary or required for approval and adoption of the proposed alternate equipment. Approval of alternate equipment by 111Engineer before or after bidding does not guarantee or imply that the alternate equipment will fit the design without modifications. 2.03 WORK BY OTHERS I A. Where two or more contracts are being performed at one time on the same Site or adjacent land in such manner that work under one contract may interfere with work I under another, Owner will determine the sequence and order of the Work in either or both contracts. When the Site of one contract is the necessary or convenient means of access for performance of work under another, Owner may grant privilege I of access or other reasonable privilege to Contractor so desiring, to the extent, amount, and in manner and at time that Owner may determine. No Owner determination of method or time or sequence or order of the work or access Summary of Work Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 01010-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 I privilege shall be the basis for a claim for delay or damage except under provisions ' of the General Conditions for temporary suspensions of the Work. Contractor shall conduct its operations so as to cause a minimum of interference with the work of such other contractors, and shall cooperate fully with such contractors to allow ' continued safe access to their respective portions of the Site, as required to perform work under their respective contracts. B. Interference With Work On Utilities: CONTRACTOR shall cooperate fully with OWNER or other public or private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities which interfere with the progress of the WORK, and shall schedule the Work sous to minimize interference with such relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. 2.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Contractor's use of the Site shall be limited to its construction operations, including on-site storage of materials, on-site fabrication facilities, and field offices. ' B. Contractor access points, staging and parking areas have been designated on the Contract Drawings. Contractor shall restrict its operations to those areas and where the C. ContractorContract is Work advisedshall thatbe all indoorperformed.areas (buildings and galleries) at the Site are nonsmoking areas. Contractor shall instruct all personnel working at Contractor's behest to observe Owner's smoking restrictions. 2.05 PARTIAL UTILIZATION OF THE WORK BY OWNER 1 A. Owner may take partial utilization of portions of the Work upon completion of portions of the new facilities. Partial utilization shall be implemented as described in the General Conditions. END OF SECTION I 1 rDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Summary of Work Project No. 6755 01010-5 ' K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I SECTION 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS IPART 1 - CONTINUITY OF PLANT OPERATIONS I1.01 GENERAL A. The Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility (DAWWTF) continuously receives and treats sewage, and this function shall not be interrupted except as I specified herein. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work to avoid any interference with normal operation of DAWVVTF equipment and processes. I1.02 PERMIT VIOLATIONS A. The DAVVVVTF must continuously be in compliance with its National Pollutant I Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit requirements. In the event permit violations are caused or, in the OWNER's opinion, will be caused by CONTRACTOR's operations, OWNER shall immediately be entitled to employ 1 others to stop the violations without giving written notice to CONTRACTOR. B. Penalties imposed on and costs incurred by OWNER as a result of any violations caused by the actions of CONTRACTOR, its employees, or subcontractors, shall be borne in full by CONTRACTOR, including legal fees and other expenses to I OWNER resulting directly or indirectly from the violation. Under the terms of discharge permits issued to OWNER, OWNER is liable for the following penalties: II. NPDES Permit No. 101141 $25,000 per day for each violation 1.03 ACCESS IA. Normal working hours at the DAWWTF are 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. CONTRACTOR shall have access to the Site as needed during these hours except as listed herein or unless otherwise arranged with and approved by I OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall not shutdown any power without receiving prior approval from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall observe and comply with all loading limits for structures and roadways posted at the Site. IB. Parking is to be contained to within the staging areas noted on the drawings. PART 2 -WORK SEQUENCE 1 2.01 Work shall be performed to ensure that the Project is fully operational by the Substantial Completion date, which includes installing, testing and start-up of all HVAC Equipment. 1 2.02 CONTRACTOR shall submit a proposed work sequence to OWNER within one week of the date of OWNER's Notice to Proceed. A. The proposed work sequence shall be prepared using the critical path method and shall depict a detailed sequence of tasks and required shutdowns. The dependencies between activities shall be indicated so that it may be established I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Work Sequence&Schedule Constraints Project No. 6755 01014- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I t I what effect progress ane. al shall be shown.the Completionof timey shallone beactivity shownhas onnothe the schedule. Two copies critical of I the schedule shall be provided to OWNER. B. The OWNER has developed a potential work sequencing plan in Section 01517. I This plan is only provided as a reference to potentially aid the CONTRACTOR in obtaining the Schedule Constraints of Part 4 of this specification. 2.03 The work sequence submittal shall detail the proposed types, weights, and locations of vehicles and equipment used to lift the materials and equipment necessary for the I Project, including the CONTRACTOR'S proposed approach for installing the new Solids Building Roof. I PART 3— PROJECT COORDINATION 3.01 CONTRACTOR shall submit a layout of staging area for review before beginning any work on Site per Section 01500 1.01.A. 3.02 Per specification section 01730, final operations and maintenance manual must be I approved before the Project is at 75% completion based upon Project payouts. 3.03 The OWNER has pre-purchased two Chemical Scrubber Spray Nozzles from Integrity Municipal Systems, LCC. The CONTRACTOR shall install these pre-purchased items during Chemical Scrubber modifications work. 3.04 The United States Geological Survey Department(USGS) owns a piece of equipment on II' top of the Solids Building. The CONTRACTOR shall contact USGS at least two weeks before the roof replacement to coordinate a USGS site visit. During roof replacement, the CONTRACTOR shall protect the equipment in place and not cover or shade the equipment as it uses solar power. The equipment also has a single phone line for communication that shall also be protected. Call Micelis C. Doyle of the USGS to coordinate—(503) 251-3226. 3.05 Any shutdowns of HVAC equipment including MAUs, exhaust and supply fans require installation and operation of temporary ventilation. 3.06 The OWNER has built their own PLC panel. The CONTRACTOR shall install this OWNER I built PLC panel. PART 4- SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS I 4.01 The schedule constraints are summarized below. Target Date and/or Duration Milestone in Calendar Days Roof Installation Shall occur between July 1, 2016 and September 30, 2016 1 Chemical Odor Scrubber Modifications Scrubber system shall not be shutdown after July 1, 2016 Substantial Completion 156 days from Date of Notice to Proceed (NTP) I Final Completion 189 days from Date of Notice to Proceed (NTP) Work Sequence&Schedule Constraints Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 111 Permit Set 01014-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I I A. A failure to comply with the duration requirements of any of the above milestones, I or the substantial completion or final completion dates shall result in the assessment of liquidated damages in accordance with the Agreement. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I 1 I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Work Sequence&Schedule Constraints K/J Project No. 1376013'70 01014-3 Permit Set I 1 SECTION 01060 1 SAFETY AND HEALTH PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 The CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for safety for all work related to the Contract Documents. Portions of the existing plant are exposed to wastewaters of varying degrees of treatment. By submitting a bid, the CONTRACTOR shall be experienced and qualified to anticipate and meet the safety and health requirements of this project. 1.02 Workers involved in the removal, renovation, or installation of equipment within the treatment plant may be exposed to disease-producing organisms in wastewater. The CONTRACTOR shall require his personnel to observe proper hygienic precautions. 1.03 Solvents, gasoline, and other hazardous materials enter the plant with incoming sewage, and, therefore, certain areas are hazardous to open flame, sparks, or unventilated occupancy. The CONTRACTOR shall take measures to ensure that its personnel observe proper safety precautions when working in these areas. PART 2- SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS 2.01 CONTRACTOR shall comply with Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, promulgated by the Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, as set forth in Title 29, C.F.R. Copies of these regulations may be obtained from Labor Building, 14th and Constitution Avenue N.W., Washington, DC I 20013. 2.02 CONTRACTOR shall also comply with the provisions of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act, as amended. 2.03 Additional safety regulations are listed in Section 00800. PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN 3.01 CONTRACTOR shall prepare a construction safety plan, which details the methods and procedures to comply with State, Federal, and local health and safety laws, rules and requirements for the duration of the Contract Time. The plan shall include the following at a minimum: A. Procedures for providing workers with an awareness of safety and health hazards expected to be encountered in the course of construction. B. Safety equipment appropriate to the safety and health hazards expected to be encountered during construction. Include warning devices, barricades, safety equipment in public right-of-way and protected areas, and safety equipment used in multi-level structures. C. Methods for minimizing employees' exposure to safety and health hazards Iexpected during construction. D. Procedures for reporting safety or health hazards. E. Procedures to correct and follow-up on a recognized safety and health hazard. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Safety and Health Project No. 6755 01060-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 I F. Procedures for investigation of accidents, injuries, illnesses and unusual events that I have occurred at the construction site. G. Periodic and scheduled inspections of general work areas and specific workstations. H. Training for employees and workers at the job site, including at a minimum: 1. General Safety Rules, including reporting of Unsafe Conditions 2. Hazard Communication & chemical safety 3. Lockout-Tagout 4. Electrical Safety 1 5. Evacuation Routes, Alarms & Procedures 6. Hot Work Program 7. Confined Space Program 8. Process Safety Management 9. Personal Protective Equipment I. Methods of communication of safe working conditions, work practices and required personal protection equipment. 3.02 CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility for every aspect of health and safety on the ' job Site, including the health and safety of Subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons on the job site. 3.03 CONTRACTOR shall transmit to OWNER copies of reports and other documents related 111 to accidents or injuries encountered during construction. 3.04 To ensure the safety of CONTRACTOR and employees, facilities and equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct comprehensive pre-work safety review conference with employees for all CONTRACTOR work that involves: A. Construction I B. Renovation C. Equipment installation and repair ' D. Utility modifications E. Electrical work F. Work at elevated locations G. Confined space entry H. Use of toxic substances Hot work or welding 3.05 At a minimum, the safety review participants will consist of a CONTRACTOR safety representative. All task specific safety concerns shall be addressed and resolved prior to commencement of WORK by the CONTRACTOR. Safety and Health Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01060-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 r I I 3.06 CONTRACTOR shall also provide to the Construction Manager a listing of all hazardous I chemicals with applicable Material Safety Data Sheets that will be used on the job site. 3.07 Work within the aeration basins, channels and clarifiers will involve permit-required I confined space entry. Entry is allowed only through a permitted space program developed by CONTRACTOR that meets the requirements of OAR 437-2/J (29 CFR 1910.146). I3.08 CONTRACTOR may encounter slip, fall, and engulfment hazards. OWNER will provide information regarding precautions and protective measures established within the plant prior to CONTRACTOR commencing work. CONTRACTOR shall inform OWNER of the I employee protection procedures that will be used, shall utilize employees trained in safe practices, and shall instruct employees as to the specific potential hazards of this project. CONTRACTOR shall maintain records as to training and enforcement procedures that Iensure that safe practices are followed. 3.09 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all necessary safety equipment. END OF SECTION r I I I I I I I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 01060-3 Safety and Health IUJ Project No. 1376013"70 Permit Set I I SE090 SEISMIC RECTIONQUIRE11MENTS I PART 1 - GENERAL II1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section is applicable to the following secondary structural system elements, non-structural components, and/or equipment supported by structures: 1. Mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment and appurtenances. 2. Conduit, piping, cable trays, raceways, ducts and similar systems. 3. Tanks and vessels (include contents), including support systems. 4. All equipment specifically listed in this specification. 5. Storage racks, suspended ceilings, light fixtures, partitions, store-front windows, louvers, architectural features and other non-structural I components. B. This Section is applicable to the following elements of the primary structural system: I1. None. 1.02 REFERENCES IA. American Society of Civil Engineers Standard ASCE 7-10, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. B. International Building Code 2012 Edition with Amendments adopted in the State of I Oregon 2014 Structural Specialty Code (OSSC). 1.03 DEFINITIONS 111 A. Engineer of Record: The Engineer responsible for the preparation of Contract Documents. I B. Specialty Engineer: Structural or Civil Engineer licensed in the State where the project is being built responsible for specific elements of the primary structural system, the secondary structural system, non-structural elements and/or I equipment supported by structures. The Specialty Engineer shall be provided by the Contractor. 1.04 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS IA. The Contractor is responsible for producing designs that resist applicable loads and forces in accordance with the design criteria. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating between the Engineer of Record and the Specialty Engineer. I B. The design of non-structural components and equipment shall be in accordance with the OSSC Chapter 16, ASCE 7-10, and the coefficients and factors for determining the total design forces shown on the Drawings. I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 01190- 1 Seismic Requirements K/J Project No. 1376013"70 Permit Set I 1 C. Coordinate the layout so that adequate space is provided between items for relative motion. Provide adional to supports revent seismic and wind impacts or different systems when ne interaction. D. Design non-building structures in accordance with chapter 15 of ASCE 7-10; all designs utilizing chapter 15 shall include the design and anchorage of the entire non-building structure. E. Design anchorages of all elements of structures, nonstructural components, and equipment supported by structures, to resist static and dynamic operational loads, plus other applicable loads (i.e. live, wind, seismic, snow, rain, fluid, earth, etc.) specified in the OSSC Chapter 16, ASCE 7-10, and as follows: 1. For suspended equipment, multiply dead load by 1.2 and add 0.2Sos to account for vertical seismic effects in the downward direction. 2. For anchorage uplift, multiply dead load by 0.9 and subtract 0.2Sos if used to reduce vertical seismic effects. 3. Post-installed anchors installed in concrete shall be prequalified for seismic application in accordance with ACI 355.2. F. Design Basis and Coordination: Contractor shall note that the layout of the structure and equipment pads is based on the first named manufacturer and model for the equipment to be anchored. 1. Contractor shall coordinate all attachments and related work and shall provide connections as noted in the favorably reviewed shop drawings. 2. For all suppliers, if the dimensions required by the contractor's submitted anchorage calculations deviate from those provided on the drawings, contractor shall note the deviation in the submittal for review and provide the favorably reviewed pad at no additional cost to the owner. 3. Ifa model turer cont aother for shallthe coordinat all name related work anlier is d for use byythe contractor, deviations from the drawings. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING, CONDUIT, AND DUCTS A. The Contractor is responsible for producing designs for support of piping, conduit, duct or other systems to resist total lateral and vertical forces based on the design criteria coefficients specified above, unless shown on the Contract Documents. Except where the technical specifications give specific exemption from resistance of seismic forces, all supports shall be designed to meet seismic criteria. B. Where possible, pipes, conduit, and their connections shall be constructed of ductile materials (e.g., copper, ductile iron, steel or aluminum and brazed, welded or screwed connections). Pipes, conduits and their connections, constructed of nonductile materials (e.g., cast iron, no-hub pipe and plastic), shall have the brace spacing reduced to one-half of the spacing allowed for ductile material. C. Seismic straaretpmay be omitted for the componen componentsng and the conditions, ductwork, connections ns provided between piping and conduit: 1. Fuel piping less than 1-inch inside diameter. 2. All other piping less than 2.5 inches inside diameter or all piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the pipe to Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Seismic Requirements 01190-2 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I the bottom of the structural support for the hanger or electrical conduit less than 2.5 inches trade size. I3. All rectangular air-handling ducts less than 6 square feet in cross-sectional area or all round air-handling ducts less than 28 inches diameter or all ducts suspended by individual hangers 12 inches or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom of the structural support for the hanger, where the hangers are detailed to avoid bending of the hangers and their connections. D. All trapeze assemblies supporting pipes, ducts and conduit shall be braced to resist the total seismic forces considering the weight of the elements on the trapeze. Pipes, ducts and conduit supported by a trapeze where none of those elements would individually be braced need not be braced if connections to the I pipe/conduit/ductwork or directional changes do not restrict the movement of the trapeze. If this flexibility is not provided, bracing will be required when the aggregate weight of the pipes and conduit exceed 10 pounds/foot. The weight shall be determined assuming all pipes and conduit are filled with water. I E. As an alternative to designing the supports and anchorage, where an approved national standard provides a basis for the earthquake-resistant design, submit I standard, data, and details for piping, conduit, duct or other systems: 1. For ductwork, mechanical piping, process piping and electrical conduits, follow Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems by SMACNA modified as follows: Ia. Seismically brace piping regardless of size or location. Provide transverse braces at all changes in direction and at the end of all pipe b. runs.Seismically Spacebrace transverseall braces not more than 20 feet apart. Provide I longitudinal braces at 40-foot centers. ductwork regardless of size or location. Provide transverse braces at all changes in direction and at each end of run. Space braces not over 20 feet apart. Provide longitudinal braces at 40-foot centers. 2. For fire protection systems, follow NFPA 13 modified as in paragraph 1.b above. Ensure that no seismic interaction occurs with items of other systems. I 1.06 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings for non-building structures and contractor designed components: Submit signed and sealed structural calculations and detailed drawings for the I following listed elements and where required in Divisions 2 through 17 of the primary structural system and their attachments, the secondary structural system and their attachments, permanent non-structural components and their attachments, and the attachments and anchorage for permanent equipment supported by the structure: 1. Exhaust Fan Prefabricated Curbs 2. MAU Prefabricated Curbs 3. MCC Panel Stand-off Support 4. Any components or equipment the contractor's Specialty Engineer has designed using chapter 15 of ASCE 7-10. I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 01190-3 Seismic Requirements K/J Project No. 1376013*70 Permit Set I I C. Seismic CertiBfication of Equipment: Submit cert ification for equipmentequipment notitself listedis in 1 , but included in Divisions 2 through 17 that the designed to resist all internal seismic forces based on the seismic design criteria I for the project. 1. Certification shall consist of a written certification from the manufacturer that the equipment is capable of resisting the internal seismic loads due to the loading conditions noted herein and meeting the requirements of ASCE 7 1 Chapter 13.2.1. 2. For elements designed using chapter 15, contractor shall submit complete calculations for the element or non-building structure in lieu of seismic certification. D. Shop Drawings for Anchorage Calculations: Where required in the equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 17 and listed below, submit signed and sealed I structural calculations and detailed drawings from the contractor's Specialty Engineer. 1. Required anchorage items include: a. MCC b. PLC I c. MUA and Prefabricated Curb d. Exhaust Fans and Prefabricated Curb e. ACU E. Structural calculations and detailed drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor's I Specialty Engineer. F. Structural calculations and detailed drawings shall clearly show the total design forces which will be transferred from the elements of the structural system, non- I structural components, and/or equipment and their attachments to the primary structure. Calculations must be reviewed by Engineer of Record for general conformance with the design criteria and building code and therefore calculations shall include: 1. Seismic and wind load criteria used to determine design lateral and uplift forces. For external equipment, a statement should be made as to whether wind controls for all equipment. 2. Derivation of forces used, including at least one complete sample calculation, showing the processRecord determine general compliance. Printouts of spreadsheets without explanation of calculations used to determine values are not acceptable. t A y of age to concrete masonry or 3. primary tort transfer the design f forces from the element to the structure 4. Detail drawings shall note: a. Required concrete strength, b. Anchor type, dimensions, and materials. Coordinate material selection with Section 05090. c. Edge distance, spacing, embedment depth, substrate thickness and any supplementary reinforcing required for anchors installed in concrete. d. Required dimensions of equipment pads based on equipment size and edge distance. The Contractor shall coordinate dimensions of equipment pads, including any revisions required to meet the requirements of the favorably reviewed submittal by the Specialty Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Seismic Requirements 01190-4 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I IG. The Engineer of Record's 9 d s review of items within a Specification Section cannot be completed until all related items have been coordinated and submitted for review. H. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Test Reports: Submit test reports for tension testing of anchors. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The Contractor is responsible for submitting signed and sealed structural calculations and detailed drawings from a Specialty Structural or Civil ' Engineer licensed in the State where the project is being built. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the State of Oregon adopted and amended versions of the International Building Code (IBC) Section 1613, the referenced sections of ASCE 7 plus clarifications and additions specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Tension testing of expansion or adhesive anchors utilized for ' anchorage shall be done in the presence of the inspector and a report of the test results shall be submitted. See Specification Section 05090 for additional requirements. ' B. Inspection: Special Inspection shall be provided for high strength bolting or bolts installed in concrete. See Specification Section 05090 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION I 1 I 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Seismic Requirements K/J Project No. 1376013*70 01190-5 Permit Set 1 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Submittals covered by these requirements include manufacturers' information, shop drawings, test procedures, test results, samples, requests for substitutions, and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Submittals shall also include, but not be limited to, all mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment and systems, materials, reinforcing steel, fabricated items, and piping and conduit details. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certificates, samples, tests, methods, schedules, and manufacturer's installation and other instructions as specifically required ' in the Contract Documents to demonstrate fully that the materials and equipment to be furnished and the methods of work comply with the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents. 1 1.02 The OWNER's cost of review of submittals for the same proposed materials, equipment or work shall be apportioned as follows: (1) the cost of review of the initial submittal and the first revised submittal shall be borne by the OWNER; and (2) the cost of all additional revised submittals shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR. The cost of review shall include, without limitation, administrative, design and engineering activities directly related to review of submittals. 1.03 If a submittal requires further engineering or re-design efforts on the part of the OWNER, the cost of such efforts shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR; provided, the CONTRACTOR shall not be charged for such efforts if implementation of the submittal results in savings to the OWNER greater than the cost of such efforts. ' PART 2—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 2.01 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall ensure that the material, equipment or method of work shall be as described in the submittal. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that all features of all products conform to the specified requirements. Submittal documents shall be clearly edited to indicate only those items, models, or series of equipment, which are being submitted for review. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the ENGINEER in each case where its submittal may affect the work of another CONTRACTOR or the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate submittals among its subcontractors and suppliers including those submittals complying with unit responsibility requirements specified in applicable technical sections. I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Submittals Project No. 6755 01300- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 i 1 I 2.02 The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate submittals with the work so that work will not be delayed and coordinate and schedule different categories of submittals, so that one will not be delayed for lack of coordination with another. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly schedule submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work related to a submittal until the submittal process is complete. This requires that submittals for review and comment shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or"Make Corrections Noted." 2.03 The CONTRACTOR shall certify on each submittal document that it has reviewed the I submittal, verified field conditions, and complied with the Contract Documents. 2.04 The CONTRACTOR may authorize in writing a material or equipment supplier to deal directly with the ENGINEER or with the OWNER with regard to a submittal. These dealings shall be limited to contract interpretations to clarify and expedite the work. PART 3—CATEGORY OF SUBMITTALS 3.01 GENERAL A. Submittals fall into two general categories; submittals for review and comment, and submittals, which are primarily for information only. 3.02 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT I A. All submittals except where specified to be submitted as product data for information only shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER for review and comment. PART 4—TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE 4.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise specified, submittals regarding material and equipment shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01999-2 specified in Section 01999. Submittals for operation and maintenance manuals, information and data shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01999-2 specified in Section 01999. A separate form shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections, for which the submittal is required. Submittal documents common to more than one piece of equipment shall be identified with all the appropriate equipment numbers. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package as a whole. B. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: "XXX"; where "XXX" is the sequential number assigned by the CONTRACTOR. Resubmittals shall have the following format: "XXX-Y"; where. "XXX" is the originally assigned submittal number and "Y" is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals, i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for example, is the second resubmittal of submittal 25. Submittals Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01300-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 4.02 DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT A. If the CONTRACTORro p poses to provide material, equipment, or method of work, which deviates from the project manual, CONTRACTOR shall indicate so under "deviations"on the transmittal form accompanying the submittal copies. 4.03 SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS A. Submittals which do not have all the information required to be submitted, including deviations, are not acceptable and will be returned without review. PART 5— REVIEW PROCEDURE 5.01 GENERAL A. Submittals are specified for those features and characteristics of materials, equipment, and methods of operation which can be selected based on the CONTRACTOR's judgment of their conformance to the specified requirements. Other features and characteristics are specified in a manner which enables the CONTRACTOR to determine acceptable options without submittals. The review procedure is based on the CONTRACTOR'S guarantee that all features and characteristics not requiring submittals conform as specified. Review shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or to verifying quantities, dimensions, weights or gages, or fabrication processes (except where specifically indicated or required by the project manual) or to safety prenotcautions or programs incident thereto. Review of a separate item, as such, will indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. When the Contract Documents require a submittal, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the specified information as follows: 1. 4 copies of all submitted information plus one electronic file in PDF format of all information shall be transmitted with submittals for review and comment. 2. Unless otherwise specified, 3 copies of all submitted information shall be transmitted with submittals (product data) for information only. 5.02 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND CONTENT A. Unless otherwise specified, within 15 calendar days after receipt of a submittal for review and comment, the ENGINEER shall review the submittal and return 2 copies of the marked-up submittal. One submittal copy original will be retained by the ENGINEER. The returned submittal shall indicate one of the following actions: 1. If the review indicates that the material, equipment or work od complies with the project manual, submittal copies will be marked "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN." In this event, the CONTRACTOR may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal. 2. If the review indicates limited corrections are required, copies will be marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." The CONTRACTOR may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 01300-3 P ' K/J Project No. 1376013*70 Peermit Set bmittals I 1 ciWsubmittal information aO&M data, a corrected orrectcopyhere shall bebmiprovided. 3. If the reviewons. reveals that the submittal iswill insuffbeicientincorporor containstedin incorrect data, copies will be marked "AMEND AND RESUBMIT." Except at its own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until it has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or"MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." 4. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method does not comply with the project manual, copies of the submittal will be marked "REJECTED - SEE REMARKS." Submittals with deviations which have not been identified clearly may be rejected. Except at its own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake the work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is made and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or"MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." PART 6-EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS 6.01 Review of contract drawings, methods of work, or information regarding materials or equipment the CONTRACTOR proposes to provide, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of its b responsibility for errors therein the OWNER, orot be regarded as an by any officer or employeethereof,tion of rlsks and or liability by the ENGINEER the CONTRACTOR shall have no claim under the contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method ofNwork, AKE CORRmaterial, ECT ONSequipment NOTED'e shaleld. A mea-ar{ aft"h0 EXCEPTIONS TAKEN or 11 e OWNER has no objection to the CONTRACTOR, upon its own responsibility, using the plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed. END OF SECTION 1 1 I I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Submittals 01300-4 Project No. 6755 Permit Set K/J Project No.1376013"70 I I SECTION 01450 IQUALITY REQUIREMENTS IPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY IA. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. IB. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements I in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. I3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Owner or authorities designated by the Owner having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. I 1.02 DEFINITIONS IA. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. IB. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions prior to, during, and after execution of the Work to ensure products incorporated into the Work I and completed construction comply with specified requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Owner. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are I constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work being constructed will be compared. 1 1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Quality Requirements Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 01450- 1 1 D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or I compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. 1 Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require r that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS I A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Owner for a decision before proceeding. 1 B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum requirements. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Owner for a decision before proceeding. ' I Quality Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01450-2 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 1.04 TOLERANCES ' A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturer's tolerances. Should manufacturer's tolerances conflict with ' Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. ' B. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in -Section 014600 "Seismic Design Requirements for Nonstructural Elements ' C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. ' 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. E. Provide qualification credentials according to 1.9, A-H 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 30 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than 15 days prior to preconstruction conference. Identify personnel (Quality Control Manager and Quality Control Representatives), procedures, controls, instructions, tests, testing matrix (including who is performing tests) and ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Quality Requirements Project No. 6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 01450-3 1 I sequenceassurance of work, rerds, and forms to be d to carry out ContracwithtContractor'sor's quality- and quality-controlcoresponsibilities.useCoordinate I construction schedule. 1. Acceptance of Plans: Acceptance of the Contractor's CQC plans is required prior to the start of construction. Acceptance is conditional and will be predicated on satisfactory performance during the construction. Owner's Representative reserves the right to require Contractor to make changes in the CQC plan and operations including removal of personnel, as necessary, to obtain the quality specified 2. Notification of Changes: After acceptance of the CQC plan, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative, in writing, a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to I any proposed change. Proposed changes are subject to acceptance by Owner's Representative. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained I and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. I 1. Project Quality-Control Manager shall be identified by Contractor to the Owner, including any additional Project responsibilities and time commitment requirements this designated manager shall have. I 2. Project Quality-Control Manager shall be certified by in Quality Control Management through US Army Corps of Engineers Training or approved equal. (http://www.aac-oreaon.orp/public/resource center/army corps.html). I 3. CQC staff shall take direction from CQC Manager in matters pertaining to QC. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor- elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated in 1.10 'Special Tests and Inspections' of this Section. 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority. I E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to I testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. I F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Owner has indicated as nonconforming or Quality Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 01450-4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I I defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into Icompliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Documentation (quality and production records) shall be submitted within 24 hours of Work performed unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner. 1.07 MEETINGS, REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS IA. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: II. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and I testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting B. CQC COORDINATION MEETING 1. After the Preconstruction Conference, but before start of construction, and prior to acceptance of the CQC Plan, schedule a meeting with Owner's I Representative to discuss the Contractor's quality control system. 2. The purpose of the meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the system details, including the forms for recording the CQC operations, control activities, I testing, administration of the system for both onsite and offsite Work, and the interrelationship of Contractor's management and control with the Owner's Quality Assurance. 3. There may be occasions when subsequent conferences may be called by either I party to reconfirm mutual understandings and/or address deficiencies in the CQC system or procedures that may require corrective action by Contractor. 4. The Contractor shall prepare minutes of the meeting that are to be signed by the I Owner and the Contractor. The minutes shall become a part of the contract file. 5. To the extent the Contractor employs subcontractors, subcontractor CQC staff shall attend the initial coordination meeting. IC. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: I 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. p rt. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Quality Requirements Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 01450-5 I I 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. I 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. ' 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1 D. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and III inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service 111representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. E. Permits Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, I , licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar ' documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification I levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems I similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or I assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. I E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing I engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those Quality Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 IPermit Set 01450-6 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 137601370 I I performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in I material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with 111 the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary I Laboratory Accreditation Program. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative I of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. IH. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to Ithose indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: I a. Provide test specimens representative construction. p tative of proposed products and I b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and I laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will IIperform same tasks for Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Owner and Commissioning 111 Authority, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. IJ. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: I1. General: 111 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 01450-7 Quality Requirements K/J Project No. 1376013*70 Permit Set I I , I a. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner; Architect to provide elevations for mockups. b. Notify Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. c. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. d. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. e. Obtain Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or I construction. 1) Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. I f. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. I g. Retain subparagraph below as the default requirement and add specific requirements in individual Specification Sections. h. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. i. Coordinate mockup work to result in a comprehensive sample of building envelope for each building envelope type as described in Drawings. j. Approval of mockup does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockup unless such deviations are I specifically approved by Owner's Representative in writing. 2. 07421 Metal Wall Panels Mock-up requirements. I a. Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and I installation. 1) Build mockup of typical wall and corner panel, including flashing and coping, as specified by Architect, including insulation, openings, supports, attachments, and accessories. 3. 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Mock-up requirements. 111 a. Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1) Build mockup of typical wall and corner panel, including flashing and coping, as specified by Architect, including insulation, openings, supports, attachments, and accessories. 4. 07920 Joint Sealants I a. Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: Quality Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 01450 8 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"'70 1 I I 1) Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. I 5. 08520 Translucent Sandwich Panel System Mock-up requirements. a. Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to ' demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. b. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in I "Field Quality Control"Article. 1.09 QUALITY CONTROL 111 A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. I 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the GMP will be adjusted by Change Order. IB. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. I 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide -con uali q ty trol services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services I required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. IIa. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. I 3. Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit I a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. I 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service II representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6550 Quality Requirements K/J Project No. 1376013*70 01450 9 Permit Set I I I D. r' indicated, enga manufacturer's technicalManufacturerepresentativesTechnical to observeServices:andWhere inspect the Work. Manufacturerage 's technical ' representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were I Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. I F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner, Commissioning Authority and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. I 1. Notify Owner, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. I , 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, I and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: I I 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality- assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I Quality Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01450-10 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I 1 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS I A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency/special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, Drawings, and as follows: I1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. I 2. Notifying Owner, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. I 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Owner and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial I Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. I 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) I PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.01 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG IA. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner. I4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner's reference during normal working hours. I 3.02 REPAIR AND PROTECTION IA. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Quality Requirements Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 01450-11 I I patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. I B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of I responsibility for quality-control services. 3.03 COMPLETION INSPECTION I A. CQC Manager shall conduct an inspection of the Work with the Owner's I Representative at the completion of all Work or any milestone established by a completion time stated in the Contract. B. Punchlist: I I I I 1. CQC Manager shall develop a punch list of items which do not conform to the Contract requirements. 2. Include punch list in the CQC report, indicating the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. 3. CQC Manager or staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected and so notify the Owner's Representative. 4. These inspections and any deficiency corrections required will be accomplished within the time stated for completion of the entire Work or any particular increment thereof if the Project is divided into increments by separate completion dates END OF SECTION 01450 I I I Quality Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01450-12 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I 1 SECTION 01500 CONTRACTOR'S FACILITIES AND UTILITIES ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STAGING AREA A. Before starting the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER a ' proposed plan and layout for all temporary offices, sanitary facilities, storage areas, temporary water service and distribution, and temporary power service and distribution. I B. Staging shall be subject to the following restrictions: 1. An on-site job trailer is allowed for the Work in the designated area shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate exact location with the OWNER. 2. All privately owned vehicles shall be parked in areas designated by the OWNER and shall not interfere with construction or OWNER's operation of facilities. 3. Only materials and equipment related to construction shall be located on Site. 1 1.02 NOT USED 1.03 WATER A. The CONTRACTOR may temporarily connect into the OWNER's non-potable water system. The water is not suitable for drinking. CONTRACTOR shall use the water in a non-wasteful manner. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of connecting into the water system and disconnecting from the system upon completion of work. OWNER shall not charge CONTRACTOR for use of water. 1.04 POWER A. The CONTRACTOR may temporarily connect into OWNER's electrical power system where 120V service is available. CONTRACTOR shall use electrical power in a non-wasteful manner. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of connecting into OWNER's electrical power system and for the cost of disconnecting from the system upon completion of the work. OWNER shall Icontinue to pay power bill and shall not charge CONTRACTOR for use of power. 1.05 TELEPHONE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cellular telephone service at the construction site. The CONTRACTOR shall not be permitted to use the OWNER's telephone service. I ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Contractors Facilities Project No. 6755 01500-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I 1.06 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Toilet Facilities: The CONTRACTOR may use the OWNER's existing restroom in I the main level of the Solids Building as indicated on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall clean this facility on a weekly basis and return to the original condition upon project completion. END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I 1 I Contractors Facilities Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01500-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 137601370 I 1 SECTION 01505 IMOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 MOBILIZATION Mobilization shall consist of preparatorywork and operations, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the site; for the establishment of all facilities necessaryfor work on the project; and for all other work and operations which must be performed, or costs incurred prior to beginning work, on the various items on the project site. Mobilization shall also include the construction of temporary ramps and access ways, temporary fencing, and the necessary preparatory work required to allow for the safe and stable movement of all vehicles that are required to construct the improvements as I shown. 1.02 DEMOBILIZATION IDemobilization shall consist of work and operations necessary lized items and clean up the site. The removal of all temporary ramps,d cbcess ways,and all signs, temporary fencing, and temporary facilities or works on the restoration of surfaces to an equal or better than existing condition shall also be included as part of demobilization. END OF SECTION I 1 I t IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Mobilization and Demobilization Project No. 6755 01505- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I ISECTION 01517 IOWNER'S POTENTIAL CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PLAN It is the Contractor's responsibility to design a Construction Sequencing Plan in accordance with the Contract Documents. The following plan developed by the Owner presents a potential plan Ifor construction of the Durham AWWTP Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2. It is not a comprehensive Operations Plan for all construction activities included in the Contract 1 Documents. This plan shall not supersede the provisions of the Contract Documents related to the Contractor's responsibility for construction means and methods. This plan is not required to be followed by the Contractor, however is presented as a possible sequence of construction for the Contractor to use as a starting point for developing their own temporary operations plan. IThe following constraints shall be observed at all times as noted in Section 01014: 1. Any shutdowns of HVAC equipment including MAUs, exhaust and supply fans require I installation and operation of temporary ventilation. 2. New roof installation shall be performed after July 1, 2016 and shall be completed before ISeptember 30, 2016. 3. Shutdowns of the chemical odor scrubber system shall not occur after July 1, 2016. I PART A. —Construct HVAC Improvements including selective roof demolition, new make up air units, new exhaust fans, new supply fans, chemical scrubber modifications, ducting, MCC installation, control panel installation, wiring, and controls. 1 1. Submit long lead items/critical equipment for review and approval including: a. Makeup Air Units, Exhaust and Supply Fans Ib. New MCC and VFDs Ic. Chemical Odor Scrubber modification components d. Roofing System Ie. Skylight f. Air Conditioning Unit Ig. Ducting h. Instrumentation I2. Mobilize 1 3. Pothole and/or locate existing utilities, ducts and cables/conduits. 4. Coordinate system electrical temporary shutdown of 11 MCC10001, and install bucket for manual transfer switch connection to new MCC 11 MCC10003. I 5. Coordinate system electrical temporary shutdown of 11 MCC10002, and install bucket for manual transfer switch connection to new MCC 11 MCC10003. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Owner's Potential Transition Plan Project No. 6755 01517- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I 6. Coordinate system electrical temporary shutdown of MCC11002, and complete I necessary modifications. 7. Pick up, deliver and install new HVAC (PLC-based) control panel built by Clean Water I Services. 8. Install wiring and conduit to new HVAC equipment locations. I 9. Install new chemical piping to chemical scrubber. 10. Perform selective shutdowns to isolate and connect low odor ducts to chemical I I scrubber. While HVAC systems are shutdown, provide temporary ventilation per Section 01560. 11. Install new MCC 11MCC10003. 12. Coordinate chemical scrubber shutdown with District . Provide temporary ventilation system to chemical scrubber per Section 01560 and demolish/decommission EF-30-1 and EF-32-1. 13. Connect new chemical piping to scrubber and install new chemical scrubber mister system replacement parts and instrumentation. Install new low odor fans 750EF5040 and 750EF5050 to chemical scrubber. Connect power and signal to new 750EF5040 and 750EF5050. Perform Initial testing. I I 14. Bring chemical scrubber system online. 15. Demo select portions of roof and insulation for installation of two new exhaust fan units 750EF5060 and 750EF5080. Keep existing exhaust fans operational. 16. Structurally attach 750EF5060 and 750EF5080 curbs to roof deck, replace insulation, I roofing the flashing. 17. Connect power and signal to new 750EF5060 and 750EF5080. Perform Initial testing of I 750EF5060 and 750EF5080. 18. Install new ducts to 750EF5060 and 750EF5080. Cut roof openings and reinforce roofing members per Structural Drawings. Connect new ductwork to new exhaust fans 750EF5060 and 750EF5080. 19. Bring new exhaust fans 750EF5060 and 750EF5080 online. I I 20. Perform selective shutdowns of 750EF5060 and 750EF5080 to demo, isolate , separate and install new ducts for the very low odor ductwork system to 750EF5060 and 750EF5080. 21. Install new ductwork to convey very low odors to new Exhaust fan 750EF5070. 22. Demo existing roof top unit V-2-2 ductwork and appurtenances. 23. Demo select portions of roof and insulation for installation of new exhaust fan unit I 750EF5070. Keep existing exhaust fans operational or provide temporary ventilation per Section 01560. Owners Potential Transition Plan Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01517-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 1 24. Structurally attach 750EF5070 curbs to roof deck, replace insulation, roofing flashing. the 1 25. Connect power and signal to new 750EF5070. Perform Initial testing of 750EF5070. 26. Cut roof openings and reinforce roofing members per Structural Drawings. Connect new I ductwork to new exhaust fan 750EF5070. 27. Bring new exhaust fans 750EF5070. I28. Install Electrical Room Air conditioning ductless split system. 29. Demo exhaust fan E-17-1 and provide temporary ventilation per Section 01560. I 30. Install new supply fan 750SF5 pp Y 090 and associated ducting, hot water coils, and hot water piping. 1 31. Coordinate shutdown of H-6-1 and startup of temporary ventilation system. ventilation shall be provided per Section 01560. Decommission/Demo H-6-1. Cutover ry I ducting as required to 750MAU5010. Structurally attach 750MAU5010 curbs to roof deck, replace insulation, roofing the flashing. Connect power and signal to new 750MAU5010 and perform initial testing. Bring 750MAU5010 unit online. 32. Coordinate shutdown of H-7-1 and startup of temporary ventilation system. Temporary ventilation shall be provided per Section 01560. Decommission/Demo H-7-1. Cutover II ducting as required to 750MAU5020. Structurally attach 750MAU5020 curbs to roof deck, replace insulation, roofing the flashing. Connect power and signal to new 750MAU5020 and perform initial testing. Bring 750MAU5020 unit online. 33. Coordinate shutdown of MU-11001 and startup of temporary ventilation system. I Temporary ventilation shall be provided per Section 01560. Decommission/Demo MU- 11001. Install new 750MAU5030, and perform startup and testing. 1 34. Perform HVAC system startup and testing and balancing. 35. Conduct remaining demolition of obsolete HVAC equipment, once roofing work is I mobilized. PART B. - Roof Replacement and Skylight Installation. II. Demo and remove existing membrane roofing, insulation, screening wall, abandoned equipment sleepers, nailers and parapet cladding. I 2. Cut new rough opening for skylight installation. 3. Structurally patch holes from obsolete/demolished HVAC equipment. 1 4. Install new skylight. 5. Install new parapet. 1 6. Install new substrate board over metal deck. I 7. Install new roof insulation and crickets; install protection board. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Owner's Potential Transition Plan Project No. 6755 01517-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 I 1 8. Install new membrane roofing system. I 9. Install new perimeter flashing. 10. Substantial Completion. 11. Perform site restoration and punchlist. I 12. Final Completion. I END OF SECTION I I I I t I I I Owners Potential Transition Plan Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I I I I I Permit Set 01517-4 Project No. 6755 KMProject No. 1376013"70 I 1 SECTION 01560 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SITE MAINTENANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the work site, staging areas, and CONTRACTOR'S facilities clean and free from rubbish and debris. The CONTRACTOR'S staging area is noted on the drawings. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site when they are no longer necessary. Equipment IIIremoved as part of demolition shall not be stored on site. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance, the work site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish to present a clean and neat appearance. B. CLEAN-UP 1. Waste material of any kind will not be permitted to remain on the site of the work or on adjacent streets. Immediately upon such materials becoming unfit for use in the work, they shall be collected, carried off the site, and properly and legally disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cleanup facilities for CONTRACTOR'S 111 employees and keep these areas clear of all refuse, rubbisha , and debriscondition thatto may accumulate from any source and shall keep them in neat the satisfaction of the OWNER. 3. In the event that waste material, refuse, debris, and/or rubbish are not so removed from the work by the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER reserves the right to have the waste material, refuse, debris and/or rubbish removed and the expense of the removal and disposal charged to the CONTRACTOR. 4. Paints, solvents, and other construction materials shall be handled with care to prevent entry of contaminants into sewers, storm drains, surface waters, 111or soils. 1.02 VENTILATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary ventilation to all spaces whenever the existing ventilation for those spaces is not operating for any reason. Temporary ventilation shall be supply air that prevents the build up of odor and/or stale air in the spaces affected and meet OSHA requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall submit temporary ventilation plan for approval prior to any HVAC equipment shutdown. 1.02 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL A. The CONTRACTOR shall not discharge smoke, dust, and other contaminants into the atmosphere that violate the air pollution regulations for the area. Internal combustion engines shall not be allowed to idle for prolonged periods of time. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain construction vehicles and equipment in good Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Environmental Controls K/J Project No. 1376013"70111111111111111111111111111111111111111.1111.1111.11 01560- 1 Permit Set 1 1 t repair. Exhaust emissions that are dl ined to be excessive by the ENGINEER or OWNER shall be repair p 1.03 NOISE CONTROL I A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all local controls and noise level rules, regulations, and ordinances, which apply to any work performed pursuant to the Contract. If the requirements of this Section are more restrictive than those of the local regulations, the requirements of this Section shall govern. B. Each internal combustion engine, used for any purpose related to this dontby the, shall be enclosed and be equipped with a muffler of a type manufacturer. No internal combustion engine shall be operated on the project without said muffler and enclosure. 1 1.04 TRACK OUT A. The CONTRACTOR shallupon she surface rive or ove of anyystreetclsidewalk,le or 1park pawhich rking area, tracks dirt, mud, or debris or other paved surfaces. Any mud, dirt, or and the area)s that swept)s by placed the end trackedof thsame onto paved surfaces shall beI workday. 1.05 HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL 111A. It is the goal of the OWNER maintain the Igenerataon of HazardousltWaste. Pounds ionally Exempt Small Quantity Generator" be chargd of waste generated by CONTRCTR AD nOmberring a dvnotRK aga ag ainst Ithe local)site EPA eD against CONTRACTOR'S EPA number. This will require that CONTRACTOR remove materials that meet Oregon's definition of Hazardous Waste from OWNER'S property as frequentl as of I practical. Removal shall be done before consolidation, manifesting, or shipping the waste, preferably by each workday's end. Recycling or proper disposal of the waste is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR or its agent. END OF SECTION I I 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Environmental Controls 01560-2 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I SECTION 01605 ISHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE IPART 1 - GENERAL I 1.01 Equipment, products and materials shall be shipped, handled, stored, and installed in ways, which will prevent damage to the items. Damaged items will not be permitted as part of the work except in cases of minor damage that have been satisfactorily repaired and are acceptable to the OWNER. I 1.02 The CONTRACTOR shall make arrangement to have shipments delivered to staging area. The OWNER will not accept shipments. IPART 2 - PIPE I 2.01 Ducting, pipe, valves, fittings, and appurtenances shall be handled, stored, and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Ducting and pipes with paint, tape coatings, linings or the like shall be stored to protect the coating or lining from physical damage or other deterioration. Pipes shipped with interior bracing shall have the bracing removed Ionly when recommended by the pipe manufacturer. PART 3- EQUIPMENT 1 3.01 PACKAGE AND MARKING A. All equipment shall be protected against damage from moisture, dust, handling, or Iother cause during transport from manufacturer's premises to site. Each item or package shall be marked with the number unique to the specification reference covering the item. IB. Stiffeners shall be used where necessary to maintain shapes and to give rigidity. Parts of equipment shall be delivered in assembled or sub-assembled units where possible. 1 3.02 IDENTIFICATION I A. Each item of equipment and valve shall have permanently affixed to it a label or tag with its equipment or valve number designated in this contract. Marker shall be of stainless steel. Location of label will be easily visible. Labels shall be as specified in Section 11001. I3.03 SHIPPING I A. Bearing housings, vents and other types of openings shall be wrapped or otherwise sealed to prevent contamination by grit and dirt. B. Damage shall be corrected to conform to the requirements of the contract before I the assembly is incorporated into the work. The CONTRACTOR shall bear the costs arising out of dismantling, inspection, repair and reassembly. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Shipment, Protection and Storage Project No. 6755 01605-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 1 3.04 STORAGE A. During the interval between the delivery of equipment to the site and installation, all 1 equipment, unless otherwise specified, shall be stored in an enclosed space affording protection from weather, dust and mechanical damage and providing favorable temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions to ensure against equipment deterioration. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to in addition to these requirements. B. Equipment and materials to be located outdoors may be stored outdoors if protected against moisture condensation. Equipment shall be stored at least 6 inches above ground. Temporary power shall be provided to energize space heaters or other heat sources for control of moisture condensation. Space heaters or other heat sources shall be energized without disturbing the sealed enclosure. 3.05 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AFTER INSTALLATION 1 A. After installation and until final completion, all equipment shall be protected from damage from, including but not limited to, dust, abrasive particles, debris and dirt generated by the placement, chipping, sandblasting, cutting, finishing and grinding of new or existing concrete, terrazzo and metal; and from the fumes, particulate matter, and splatter from welding, brazing and painting of new or existing piping and equipment. As a minimum, vacuum cleaning, blowers with filter, protective shielding, and other dust suppression methods will be required at all times to adequately protect all equipment. During concreting, including finishing, all equipment that may be affected by cement dust must be completely covered. 1 END OF SECTION r 1 1 I t Shipment, Protection and Storage Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 01605-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 t 1 1 SECTION 01650 COMMISSIONING AND FACILITY STARTUP PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to commission all systems and equipment provided by OWNER and CONTRACTOR to verify performance, function, and correct operation by performing procedures to activate, startup, adjust, and test the systems and equipment provided as part of this project. Commissioning shall demonstrate that the work is in operating order in accordance with the general requirements of this specification section and the detailed requirements of the technical specification sections for the system or equipment specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals: B. A detailed, written plan for the startup and initial operation, under actual operating conditions, of the equipment and systems installed and constructed under this contract. This document, after acceptance by the ENGINEER, shall serve as the guidance manual for the commissioning process. C. Copies of all test reports upon completion of the individual tests. D. Affidavits. 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE AND AFFIDAVITS A. Field Service 1. Where specified that the manufacturer of equipment shall provide field service, the service shall be provided by an authorized factory trained and qualified manufacturer's representative for the specific equipment. Equipment shall not be considered ready for full time operation until after the manufacturer's representative has checked and adjusted the equipment, and certified by written affidavit that the equipment has been properly installed, tested, adjusted, lubricated, and calibrated, and is ready for full time operation. B. Affidavits 1. Acceptable affidavits shall be submitted prior to completion of the work. Affidavits shall contain the following specific wording: a. "The Name of Equipment has been properly installed, tested, adjusted, lubricated, and calibrated, and is ready for full time operation. The installation has been inspected and has been found to be in conformance with our (the manufacturer's) standards and requirements." Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6755 01650- 1 Commissioning ane artup K/J Project No. 1376013"70 Permmit Set I I 1 b. No amplification, dilution, or modification of this specific wording will be permitted. I PART 2— NOT USED PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 INITIAL STARTUP AND OPERATION OF FACILITIES I A. The following listing is a general sequence of startup activity steps to be used in placing facility systems in operation: 1. Perform initial lubrication of equipment and have manufacturers check and adjust equipment. Provide all subsequent lubrication and maintenance, and such staff as required for test operation until the OWNER assumes equipment maintenance responsibility. I 2. Perform satisfactory testing of electrical work required prior to energizing the electrical system. 3. Test-operate equipment by manually initiating operation. Where manual operation bypasses alarm or safety monitoring, provide continuous supervision of such parameters. 4. Complete instrumentation calibration. 5. Complete Operation Readiness Testing (ORT 1). 6. Complete the performance testing when specified for equipment in the individual equipment specification sections. specified equipment p 1 7 performancollowing e testing, allow RT 1 and l5 days for progran coordination mming th o be completed by I the OWNER. 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required for other equipment items and systems. It may be necessary for the CONTRACTOR to put portions of the newly constructed facilitythe (iceWobefore k f a whol construction of other portions of the facility or completing 9. Upon completion of all the above steps, initiate the operation testing and commissioning period. For the operational testing and commissioning, the new equipment shall be activated to automatically run for 5 days. During this 10-day period, the OWNER will run the different combinations of the equipment control options. If equipment failure occurs during the 5 days of operational testing, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace the defective eon t nued tand until the shall new equipment functions operational accept acceptably for11s5 shall all b be c consecutive days. 10. After successful completion of testing, completion of required training, commissioning, and receipt of final O&M manuals, the OWNER will take over maintenance duties as well as operation and will begin to provide and pay for operation and maintenance costs. 11. Complete all documentation of tests for record submittal prior to final acceptance. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Commissioning and Startup 01650-2 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 I B. OWNER shall not accept system and take over maintenance responsibilities until all of the above steps are successfully completed and final approved operation and maintenance manuals are received in accordance with Section 01730. ' END OF SECTION I 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Commissioning and Startup Project No. 6755 01650-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I ISECTION 01700 RESTORATION OF IMPROVEMENTS IPART 1 - STRUCTURES I1.01 CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions necessary to protect the integrity and usefulness of all existing facilities. If necessary, the CONTRACTOR may, with the approval of the OWNER, remove existing structures, including curbs, gutters, pipelines, I and utility poles, necessary for the performance of the work and shall rebuild or replace the structures in as good a condition as found. CONTRACTOR shall also repair existing structures, which may be damaged as a result of the work under this contract. IPART 2 - ROADS AND STREETS 2.01 Roads, curbs, and streets in which the surface is removed, broken, or damaged, or in I which the ground has caved or settled during the work under this contract, shall be brought to original grade and section and resurfaced. Before resurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be sawcut back far enough to provide clean solid Ivertical faces, and shall be free of loose material. Rough cuts shall not be allowed. PART 3- CULTIVATED AREAS AND OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS I3.01 Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements, which are damaged by CONTRACTOR, shall be restored to their original condition. Existing guard posts, barricades, and fences, which are damaged, shall be repaired. IPART 4 - PROTECTION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS 4.01 CONTRACTOR shall immediately repair or replace all existing equipment, controls, I structures, or facilities, which are damaged as part of its operations. 4.02 CONTRACTOR shall take all measures necessary to ensure that construction debris and Imaterials are kept out of the wastewater system. END OF SECTION I I I I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Restoration of Improvements K/J Project No. 1376013*70 01700- 1 Permit Set I 1 I SECTION 01720 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 1 —SUMMARY I I 1.01 CONTRACTOR on shallof maintain a legibly marked-up set of contract docuents showing piping, equipment, electrical conduits, and cables. mInt addition, CONTRACTOR shall keep a copy of all electrical, instrumentation, and shop drawings. ' A. Marking of the contract documents shall be performed using colored pencils as follows: 1. Additions Red 2. Deletions Green 3. Comments Blue 4. Dimensions Red (if change is to appear on final Record Drawings) ' 5. Dimensions Blue (if a dimensional note is not intended to appear on final Record Drawings) ' B. Record Drawings shall be full size and shall be available for review by OWNER at the work site. Copies of Electrical and Instrumentation/Control record drawings shall be made available to the OWNER prior to the OWNER taking beneficial occupancy of a phase. At the completion of the project, prior to final payment, all Record Drawings shall be submitted to OWNER. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 01720- 1 Record Drawings K/J Project No. 1376013*70 Permit Set I I SECTION 01730 IOPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 1 PART 1 - GENERAL I Operation and maintenance (O&M) information instructions shall be provided in accordance with this section and as required in the technical sections of this project manual. O&M information shall be provided for each maintainable material and piece of equipment. IPART 2- INFORMATION REQUIRED 2.01 GENERAL IA. O&M information shall include the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the manufacturer, nearest representative, and nearest supplier of parts. 1 2.02 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Instructions, procedures, and illustrations shall be provided for the following phases Iof operation as applicable: 1. Safety precautions. 2. Operator prestart. I 3. Startup, shutdown, and post shutdown. 4. Normal operations. I 5. Emergency operations. 6. Operator service requirements. 7. Environmental conditions. I2.03 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE IA. The following preventative maintenance data shall be provided: 1. Lubrication data, including recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges; charts and diagrams showing lubrications points; I 2. lubricant types, grades, and capacities; and a lubrication schedule. Preventative maintenance plan and schedule. I2.04 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE A. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be provided on procedures for correcting I problems and making repairs, including the following: 1. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques. 2. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams, as applicable. 3. Maintenance and repair procedures. 4. Removal and replacement instructions. 5. Spare parts and supply lists. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 0&M Information Project No. 6755 01730- 1 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013*70 I I 6. Corrective maintenance manhours. 2.05 APPENDICES I A. The following additional information shall be provided: 1. Parts identification, including labeled exploded view illustrations and parts numbers. 2. Warranty information. 111 3. Personnel training requirements. 4. Testing equipment and special tool information. PART 3 - TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE AND CONTENT I 3.01 Number the transmittal for any Operation and Maintenance Manual with the original root number of the approved shop drawing for the item. 3.02 Submit 2 copies until approval is received. Submit five final copies after approval is I received. 3.03 Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8-1/2 x 11 inches size heavy first quality paper with standard three-hole punching and bound in stiff metal hinged binder I constructed as a three-ring style. Provide binders with titles and submittal number on front and on spine of binder. Tab each section of manuals for easy reference with plastic- coated dividers. Provide index for each manual. Provide plastic sheet lifter prior to first page and following last page. 1 3.04 Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 x 11 inches or 11 x 17 inches size. However, where reduction is not practical to ensure readability, fold larger I drawings separately and place in vinyl envelopes which are bound into the binder. Identify vinyl envelopes with drawing numbers. 3.05 Enclose one electronic copy of Operations and Maintenance manual in each hard-copy I version. Electronic documentation shall be provided on standard CD-ROM media capable of being read by standard PC CD-ROM drives. All documents shall be provided in Adobe I Systems portable document format (PDF). The resulting documents shall be viewable with Adobe Reader version 5.0 or higher. The PDF documents shall be produced using the postscript printer driver engine within Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later. Documents shall not be scanned unless no electronic form of the document exists. In such cases and with approval of the OWNER, the document shall be scanned in color, at 100 percent image scaling and a resolution of 300 dpi. All PDF files shall be text captured, image with hidden text, optimized, searchable and indexable using the Adobe Acrobat Catalog engine. 3.06 TRANSMITTAL CONTENT I A. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals is applicable but not necessarily limited to: 1. Major equipment. I O&M Information Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 01730-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 2. Equipment used with electrical motor loads of 1/6 HP nameplate or Igreater. . Specialized equipment including valves and instrumentation and control system components for HVAC and process systems such as meters, I recorders, and transmitters. 4. Valves greater than 6-inches diameter. B. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals to include, but are not necessarily ' limited to, the following detailed information, as applicable: 1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations. 2. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. 4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 5. Guide to "troubleshooting." 6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams. 8. Test data and performance curves. 9. A list of recommended spare parts with a price list and a list of spare parts provided under these specifications. 10. Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other documents packed ' with equipment when delivered. PART 4- PAYMENT ' 4.01 Final acceptable O&M information packets must be delivered to the OWNER prior to the project being 75 percent complete based on progress payments. Progress payments for work completed beyond 75 percent complete will be delayed until operating and maintenance information is submitted and approved by the OWNER. The OWNER will not be responsible to any late payment charges assessed to the CONTRACTOR. PART 5- FIELD CHANGES 5.01 Following the acceptable installation and operation of an equipment item, the item's instructions and procedures shall be modified and supplemented by the CONTRACTOR to reflect any field changes or information requiring field data. END OF SECTION ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 0&M Information Project No. 6755 01730-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 r ' SECTION 01999 REFERENCE FORMS ' The forms listed below and included in this section are referenced from other sections of the project manual: Form No. 01999-1 Title ' Request for Clarification 01999-2 Submittal Transmittal 01999-3 Deactivation Request 1 1 1 I 1 r I ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Reference6755Forms 01999-1 Pe K/J Project No. 1376013.70 Forms Set 1 1 Clean Water Services RFC No. Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility Form 01999-1 REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION Project: Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2,Project 6755 Location: Durham AWWTF, 16060 SW 85th Avenue, Tigard,Oregon. Contractor: Area of Work in Question: PART(s), Division(s), Section(s), Paragraph(s)/Page(s), Sheet(s): Change Order Requested: [ ]Yes [ ] No QuestiOn(S): (Attach sketches as required) 1 Submitted by: Date: Response: 111 I ' By: Date: Response Distribution: Contractor Owner Engineer File No. ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Reference Forms Project No. 6755 01999-2 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 I I Clean Water Services Submittal Transmittal No. Durham AWWTF I Form 01999-2 Project Name: Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Date Received: I Project 6755 Project Number: Checked By: Contractor: Engineer: Date Checked: i Address: Address: Date Returned: Spec.Section: Attn: Attn: 1st.Sub. I I ReSub. Date Transmitted: Previous Transmittal Date: �-- u No. Description Manufacturer Dwg.or Data No. Action Taken* I Copies I I I Remarks: I *The Action Designated Above is in CONTRACTOR:Must certify one of the following Accordance with the Following Legend: statements pertaining to the transmittal or submittal sent for review: 0 As the General Contractor for this project we certify that A No Exceptions Taken the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets B Make Corrections Noted all the requirements,including coordination with all related C Amend and Re-Submit work specified(no exceptions). D Rejected E Engineer's review not required 0 As the General Contractor for this project we certify that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified except for the attached deviations. Comments: I By Date I Distribution: Contractor u Owner U Engineer U File U File No. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Reference Forms Project No. 6755 01999-3 Permit Set IUJ Project No. 1376013*70 I I , 1 CleanWater Services Form 01999-3 Our CO11 mi1'17 ctit is cicdr. Deactivation Req. No. 1 Date of Request: CWS Project#: 6755 Project Name: Durham Odor Control System Improvements Phase 2 Project Contractor: IEquipment/ Pipe Name: Drawin #: Length of Out of Service: Deactivation Date/Time: ' Gen.Contractor Contact: Name/Phone Sub-Contractor Contact Name/Phone: IDescription of Request: (provide copy of plan sheet effected equipment) I 1 rAttachments: Yes No Person Requesting: Owner/En.ineer Res.onse: t IApproved Denied Date r Owner: Clean Water Services cc: Owner Contractor Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 01999-4 Reference Forms Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 t 1 SECTION 02050 PART 1 - GENERAL DEMOLITION 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all demolition required to perform the work covered under this contract including without limitation: 1. Remove existing construction shown to be removed. 2. Remove and replace existing construction and/or finishes as required to provide access to perform other work included in this contract. 3. Include removal of mechanical and electrical work that is to be abandoned and is contained in construction to be removed whether or not the mechanical and electrical work is shown. Disconnect and cap off utilities in accordance with applicable codes and safety regulations. 4. Where utilities that are not shown pass through construction that must be removed and those utilities serve other areas notify the Owner before disrupting service. If rerouting is required to maintain service, the Owner may issue a Change Order to accomplish the required work. 5. Store and protect items intended for reuse. 6. Assume ownership of debris and unwanted materials, remove from the site and dispose of legally. 7. Include the cost of removing and disposing of hazardous material including without limitation asbestos or asbestos-containing material, lead-containing ' paint, and PCBs. If the presence of a hazardous material is suspected, have material tested. If material is identified as hazardous, retain qualified and licensed specialist to remove and dispose of it legally. 8. If illegal electrical wiring is encountered such as "BX" or nonmetallic sheathed ' cable, notify the Owner. 9. Remove unwanted fixed equipment, including without limitation unwanted lockers, shelving, hoods, equipment, machinery, and devices built into or attached to the building. 1.02 NOISE AND DUST CONTROL A. Perform work in accordance with requirements in Division 1. Particular attention is directed without limitation to paragraphs titled: Owner and Contractor's Use of Premises, Cleanup During Construction, Fire Protection During Construction, ' Maintenance of Exit Routes for Building Users, Temporary Dust Barriers, Noise Control and Care of Existing Facilities. ' B. Provide temporary partitions to control dust and noise and exclude unauthorized persons. C. Perform work in a manner to cause least disturbance to building occupants and least damage to work to remain. D. Maintain adequate means of safe, clear egress for building occupants. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Demolition Project No. 6755 02050- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 I E. Employ all available techniques for construction noise abatement. Use remote, 1 well-mufflered air compressors and newest noise suppressed pneumatic and electric tools. 1.03 WARNING A. The Contractor is advised that work under this Section may be hazardous. The Contractor is to take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of workers and property. Removal of and/or working in areas containing even minor amounts of hazardous material including without limitation, asbestos, lead-based paint, PCBs orIl other hazardous materials requires special precautions, knowledge and procedures. If hazardous material is suspected, notify the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I Not Used PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF CONSTRUCTION IN AREAS TO RECEIVE NEW WORK I A. In areas intended to receive new work and/or finishes, remove all unwanted non- structural partitions, furred walls, chases, suspended or furred ceilings, doors, windows and finishes. B. Remove all unwanted mechanical and electrical work(whether shown or not)that is not wanted and is not needed to serve other areas that is in, on, or concealed behind work being removed. Cap off or terminate all mechanical or electrical work in accordance with the requirements of Divisions 15 and 16. C. Protect mechanical and electrical work that serves other areas. Relocate concealed I mechanical and electrical work that is required to preserve service to other areas. D. Remove structural work designated for removal. Take precautions not to damage I structural work intended to remain. Where temporary shoring is needed, submit a design prepared by an appropriately licensed engineer for review before I proceeding. E. If structural elements are encountered that were not shown, protect them from damage and report their presence to the Engineer. I 3.02 REMOVAL OF LIMITED PORTIONS OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO PERMIT MODIFICATIONS I A. Provide careful, selective cutting and removal of existing construction as required to permit relocation or modification of partitions, doors, or openings. Cut and remove the least amount of work possible except when a larger area needs to be removed to permit strengthening existing construction or when required to remove finishes to a natural break line such as a corner or change in material. B. Protect existing construction to remain with temporary coverings. I Demolition Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 02050-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 C. Treat existing mechanical, electrical or structural work as described in other parts of this Section. D. When modifications are complete, replace removed work with new construction and finishes to match adjacent existing work. Standards of material and workmanship shall be in accordance with other portions of this Specification or if not covered then in accordance with current practice for this class of work. Salvaged materials may be used for replacement if in good condition. 3.03 REMOVAL OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO PROVIDE ACCESS TO PERFORM WORK ' A. Provide careful selective cutting and removal of existing construction where required to permit installation of new concealed mechanical or electrical work, or installation of equipment, fixtures or devices. B. Treat existing mechanical, electrical or structural work as described in other parts of this Section. ' C. Replace and/or patch removed construction and finishes in accordance with other parts of this Section. 3.04 PROTECTION OF WORK TO REMAIN A. Protect all work to remain. Repair damage with materials, workmanship and finishes matching existing work when new. B. Most existing floor finishes will not be replaced in this contract. It is essential that these floors be protected from any damage due to impact, dirt, abrasion, paints and solvents. 3.05 CUTTING HOLES IN CONCRETE AND/OR CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. The Contractor is cautioned that electrical conduits and reinforcing that are not shown on drawings may be concealed in concrete CMU construction. Use electronic detection equipment to locate concealed items before cutting holes. Take all required precautions to avoid damage to existing conduits or reinforcing. B. New openings in existing concrete walls or slabs may be saw cut to opening perimeter lines where drawings do not call for adding reinforcing trim bars to strengthen openings. Do not run saw kerfs past corners of openings. Complete concrete removal at opening corners by chipping and grinding. Take all required precautions to avoid water damage to existing construction or the Owner's property. C. Where drawings call for adding reinforcing trim bars to strengthen openings, limit saw cutting to a depth of 3/4-inch to avoid cutting existing reinforcing steel. Carefully chip out concrete to avoid damaging existing reinforcing steel which is to remain. D. Use chipping guns to chip out small holes for pipes or conduits. Proceed carefully to avoid damage to concealed conduits. Core drilling is permitted only at the Contractor's risk and only with the Owner's permission. If core drilling is used, the Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Demolition Project No. 6755 02050-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 Contractor shall: 1) use electronic detection equipment to locate conduit before ' drilling, 2)take precaution to avoid water damage to existing construction or the Owner's property, and 3) replace, at its own expense, any damaged electrical or signal wiring or conduits. 3.06 REMOVE UNWANTED FIXED EQUIPMENT A. Remove unwanted lockers, shelving, hoods, fixed and built-in equipment, machinery, machinerybases and similar items whether shown or not. Cut off protruding bolts or attachment devices flush with existing surfaces. I B. If items are designated on the Drawings to be salvaged, remove them carefully without causing damage. Store and protect items to be reused until time of need on jobsite. 3.07 IF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ARE ENCOUNTERED A. If hazardous materials are discovered, comply with paragraph 1.01 of this Section and all applicable laws. 3.08 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. Use debris chutes with covered tops emptying into covered containers. B. Use rubber tired covered buggies with rubber bumpers to transport debris through occupied sections of buildings. D. Store debris in suitable covered containers located where directed by the Owner and remove from site when full. Burning on the site is not permitted. E. Removed material (other than material to be reused) shall become the property of ' the Contractor who shall remove it from the site and dispose of it in a legal manner. END OF SECTION 1 r 1 1 1 1 Demolition Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 02050-4 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 r 1 SECTION 03200 IREINFORCING STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcing work, complete as indicated, specified and required. 2. Provide all bar and wire fabric steel reinforcing for cast-in-place concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specifications: 1. ASTM A185: Steel welded wire fabric, plain, for concrete reinforcement. 2. ASTM A615: Deformed and plain billet- steel bars for concrete reinforcement. B. American Concrete Institute: ' 1. Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement (ACI 315). 2. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318). C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute: Manual of Standard Practice (CRSI Manual). D. International Code Council: Evaluation Service Reports (ICC-ES Reports). E. American Welding Society: D1.4 Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel (AWS D1-4). 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: 1. Bar supports and chairs. 2. Mechanical bar connectors, including ICC Reports. 3. Certified mill test results on reinforcement. 4. Tests on unidentified bars. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Bar and wire fabric layouts. 2. Bar bending diagrams. 3. Assembly diagrams, including bar lap and splice locations and mechanical connector layout. 4. Accessories and inserts layout. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Reinforcing Project No. 6755 SteelSt K/J Project No. 1376013*70 03200- 1 Permit Set i t 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ALITMaterial Tests: Not required for bars, wire ntifabric or sheets delivered in bundles from the mill and tagged with valid Idefication Certirollsficate. 1. Unidentified Bars: Test samples from each five tons or fraction thereof for each size. If already delivered to site, test additional samples from each day of planned concrete placement. Perform one tension and one bend test from 111 each sample for each size. 2. Test standard: ASTM A615. I 3. Testing Laboratory: Selected by Engineer, to take samples and perform tests. Costs paid by Contractor. 4. Unidentified Wire Fabric: Not acceptable. B. Standard: CRSI Manual, except as otherwise indicated or specified. I 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to simplify sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so material is not damaged. Store reinforcement off ground, place under cover and keep clean. Store welded fabric in I flat sheets, not rolls. Keep an adequate supply of reinforcement at site to avoid delays. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING BARS A. General: Deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Dowels: All dowels are deformed bars unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 1. Deformed bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2. Smooth bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 3. Threaded bars: ASTM A572, Grade 50. C. Spiral Reinforcement: Cold-drawn steel wire, plain, ASTM A82, or deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2.02 WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Smooth Wire: ASTM A185; sheets. 2.03 TIE WIRE A. Annealed steel, 16-gauge minimum. I 2.04 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Type: Tension-compression. B. Strength: Develop 125% of the reinforcing yield strength in tension and compression. Reinforcing Steel Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 03200-2 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 I 1 C. Manufacturer: 1. Tension-compression: Lenton by Erico Products, Inc., Dowel Bar Splice I Systems by Richmond Screw Anchor Co., or equal. 2. Future Extension Mechanical Butt Splice: Lenton Form Saver by Erico Products, Inc., or equal. Provide plastic taper threaded plugs for"long-term" IIthread protection. 2.05 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Conform to CRSI Manual Chapter 3, for Types SB, BB, BC, JC, HC, CHC, and others of standard types as required. I B. Use Class "1" plastic-coated chairs and spacers at waterbearing surfaces, roofs of waterbearing structures, and at all interior or exterior surfaces exposed to view or weather in the completed structure. Precast concrete block supports with embedded wire ties are not acceptable. C. Use precast concrete block supports with embedded wire ties or dowels for placement on grade or on membranes. Cast the blocks with concrete equal in I strength, cement type and aggregate to the parent concrete. D. Do not use aluminum or stainless steel supports or accessories. 2.06 FABRICATION A. General: CRSI Manual Chapters 6 and 7, including tolerances. B. Splice, development and embedment lengths: Furnish bars with lap lengths 1 equivalent to ACI 318, Section 12, Class B splices for the specified concrete strength, bar size and location, unless noted otherwise. C. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated size and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required. Fabricate by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Reject bars with kinks or bends not scheduled. D. Concrete Cover: Detail and fabricate the reinforcement to provide specified cover to outer edge of rebars and other installed items. IE. Dowels: 1. Provide deformed reinforcing bar dowels at all construction joints, unless noted otherwise. 2. Provide smooth or threaded dowels where shown on Drawings. 3. Provide same dowel size and spacing as the reinforcing to which they are spliced, unless noted otherwise. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL IA. Verify bend tolerances are not exceeded. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Reinforcing Steel K/J Project No. 1376013'70 03200-3 Permit Set I 111.1 B. Verify bar end cuts are within tolerance when mechanical connectors are to be I used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: CRSI Manual Chapter 8 including placement tolerances. No reduction of concrete cover is allowable for bars at concrete surfaces exposed in liquid or water- containing structures. 1. Cleaning: Before placing reinforcing, and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose mill scale, dried concrete, oil, or other coating that might destroy or reduce bond. Do not allow form coatings, release agents, bond breaker, or curing compound to contact reinforcement. 2. Concrete coverage: Provide coverage to the outer edge of ties, stirrups, bar spacers, hangers, and like items. 3. Securing in place: Accurately place reinforcement and securely wire tie in position, at an adequate number of points, where bars cross so as to prevent displacement. Tie stirrups to bars at both top and bottom. Bend ends of tie wire inward allowing no encroachment into the concrete cover. 4. Bar supports: CRSI Manual, Chapter 3. 5. Field bending: Not permitted, except where specifically shown, or approved. 6. Bar spacing: Between parallel bars, no less than 1-1/2 times the maximum aggregate size and in no case less than 1-1/2 inches. At splices, bundle and wire together bars to accomplish this. 7. Welded wire fabric: Install necessary supports and chairs to hold in place during concrete pours. Straighten fabric to lay in flat plane and bend fabric to fit work. Lap 12 inches, minimum. Tie every other wire at laps. 8. Welding of reinforcing: Proceed after continuous inspection has been authorized. Welding procedure: Satisfy AWS D1.4. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect all reinforcement installations. Provide 48 hours' notice for inspection before concrete placement. B. Verify placement tolerances are not exceeded. C. Mechanical Connectors: Install favorably reviewed products, following the Manufacturer's recommendations, under continuous inspection. D. Welding Reinforcement: Perform only when approved and only under continuous inspection. Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of any procedure involving welding. END OF SECTION Reinforcing Steel Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 03200-4 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I I Section 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL I1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. All cast-in-place concrete including bases for mechanical and electrical equipment, swept-in grout and all manholes not specified to be precast. 2. Concrete shoring, forming, patching, grouting, sealing, curing and repairing. 3. Concrete accessories including waterstops,joint fillers, and sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200: Reinforcing Steel 2. Division 5: Metals—Coatings for Aluminum in contact with Concrete 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 2. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 3. ACI 306 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting I 4. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 5. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete 6. ACI 350 Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures IB. ASTM International (ASTM) Standard Specification or Test Method: 1. ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field 2. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates 111 3. ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens 4. ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete 5. ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete 6. ASTM C87 Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar 7. ASTM C88 • Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate 8. ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete 9. ASTM C131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse I Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine 10. ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates I11. ASTM C142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates 12. ASTM C143 Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete 13. ASTM C150 Portland Cement 14. ASTM C156 Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials 15. ASTM C171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 16. ASTM C172 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 03300- 1 Cast-in-Place Concrete K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 Permit Set I and CuringConcrete Test Specimens in the I 17. ASTM C192 Making Laboratory 18. ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 19. ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete re (Chemical 20. ASTM C289 Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates I Method) 21. ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 22. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 23. ASTM C595 Blended Hydraulic Cements 24. ASTM C618 Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete 25. ASTM C827 Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens II from Cementitious Mixtures 26. ASTM C869 Foaming Agents Used in Making Preformed Foam for Cellular Concrete 27. ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 28. ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants 29. ASTM C1077 for Use inles Construlng ctionoandete and Criter a for Laboratory Aggregates Laboratory Evaluation 30. ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Nonshrink) 31. ASTM C1240 Use of Silica Fume as a Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic- Cement Concrete, Mortar, and Grout 32. ASTM D882 Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 33. ASTM D1056 Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber 34. ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction 35. ASTM D2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate I 36. ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials C. Corps of Engineers (COE) Specifications: 1. COE CRD-C-572 Polyvinylchloride Waterstop 111 ion als D. 1.American Association of State Standard Method of Test for Qualghway and ity oftWater to'be Used in 1. T2 Concrete E. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction or"GREENBOOK" F. International Building Code (IBC) 2012with Amendments adopted in the State of Oregon 2014 Structural Specialty Code. G. International Code Council (ICC) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: I 1. Concrete mix product certification: Submit certified laboratory test results that the mix proportions and materials comply with these Specifications. a. Cementitious materials. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 PeConcrete 03300-2 Project No.6755 Perrmmiitt Set et K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 b. Coarse and fine aggregates. gg egates. c. Admixtures. d. Water. e. Ready-mix plant certification. f. Mix designs. 111 g. Mix test results (see Paragraph 2.05.E for required testing). 2. Formwork products: a. Forms, if fabricated off construction site. b. Form ties or through-bolts. c. Form coatings. d. Waterstop, including waterstop joints. e. Reshoring for suspended slabs and beams. 3. Miscellaneous products: Submit technical data including installation instructions, independent laboratory test reports (ICC), and handling and storage instructions. a. Curing materials and curing program. b. Joint fillers c. Sealants d. Epoxy compounds, including adhesives and grouts e. Non-shrink grouts f. Methods and materials for concrete repairs C. Shop Drawings: 1. Construction joint layout, including waterstop placement. 2. Sequence of concrete wall and slab pours. 3. Program and method of concrete placement. 4. Layout and sequence for reshoring suspended concrete slabs and beams. 5. After defects are identified and investigation, Contractor to submit design of repair plan specific for each noted defect. See Paragraph 3.10. D. Samples: Submit any item of Product Data not fully assembled by a single manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: 10 years of experience on similar water containment facilities. B. Construction Standard: Applicable requirements of the IBC, ACI 301, ACI 318 and ACI 350. C. Concrete Products and Materials Tests: Certified by independent commercial testing laboratories. Submit certification on cementitious products and aggregates performed within the past 6 months. D. Concrete Mix Designs: By an independent commercial testing laboratory, complying with ASTM C1077 and favorably reviewed by the Engineer. Concrete mix design proportions shall be established on the basis of field experience and trial mixtures with the materials to be employed in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 5. E. Concrete Mix Test Results: 1. Submit in accordance with requirements of Paragraph 2.05.E. Durham Odor Control Improvements p ements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300-3 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 Permit Set 1 F. 2.Concrete Allow adequate time for review of submittals and adjustments to comply p Y with the Specifications. Tests, as Placed: Performed by the Owner's Testing Laboratory: 1. Test frequency: Each mix type placed, each day placed. 2. Concrete sample: ASTM C172. Provide all material required. 3. Compressive strength: A set of four stndard 6-inch x 12-inch concrete each 100 Makincastfor yards or fraction thereof for concrete I greater than 2,500 psi. a. Making, storing, initial cure, and final cure of cylinders: ASTM C31. Provide site storage and initial cure, 16 hours minimum and 24 hours maximum. b. Test of cylinders: ASTM C39. Testing laboratory will transport cylinders 1 from site, cure, test, and provide report. Test two cylinders at age of 7 days, two at 28 days. 4. Slump: Test will be performed on each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof. Test each sample used for strength tests. a. Testing: ASTM C143. b. Results outside the limits indicate possible cause for rejection of concrete. The Engineer shall be the sole judge. III 5. Air content:Furnish calibrated equipment required to perform the test. strength tests. a. Testing: ASTM C231. I G. Additional Tests: 1. General: Provide and pay for additional material and strength tests on new specimens, when test results fail to meet the specified requirements. Strength tests shall be considered satisfactory if the requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.6.3.3 are satisfied. If in the opinion of the Engineer, results of tests on concrete cylinders indicate the possibility of substandard concrete in the structure, cored samples may be required to be taken from the concrete. 2. Coring and testing: ASTM C42. The Engineer will investigate low-strength test results in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.6.5; however, the requirements of Section 5.6.5.4 are not applicable. If, in the I opinion of the Engineer, the results of the core tests indicate that concrete has been placed which does not meet this specification, the Owner may require defective concrete strengthened by means of additional concrete, reinforcing steel or replacement of the defective concrete, all at no additional II cost to the Owner. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING in dry, 1 A. Cementitious Materials: If required at site, store immediately after delivery a weather-tight, properly ventilated structure, with adequate provisions for prevention of moisture absorption and overheating of the cement. B. Aggregates: If required at site, store in piles which afford good drainage and which are protected to prevent the inclusion of foreign material. Stockpile the various sizes or gradations of aggregates separately. C. Lumber: Store all lumber, including plywood for forms, to prevent direct contact with the ground. Protect the stored lumber from the elements by a suitable Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I PeConcrete 03300-4 Project No.6755 Perrmmiitt Seett K/J Project No. 1376013*70 i 1 Icovering, such asof eth lene film P Y Y or waterproof building paper, suitably held in place. D. Waterstop: Reject any cracked material, any joints with offsets between ribs or incomplete bond. Protect material from oil, grease and dirt and cover against direct sunlight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Obtain materials from an established and experienced manufacturer or supplier. Provide new materials of first-class ingredients guaranteed to perform the service required. 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials: 1. General: Use only one brand of each cementitious material. The color shall not significantly alter the typical grey concrete color. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Comply with the requirements for low alkali cement in ASTM C150 Table 2. 3. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Mineral Admixture Class N. 4. Blended Cement: ASTM C595 Type 1P (MS). 5. Flyash: ASTM C618, Class F, with the following restrictions: a. Loss on Ignition: 4% maximum b. SO3 Content: 3% maximum c. Moisture Content: 1% maximum B. Concrete Aggregates: 1. General: ASTM C33: a. Provide free from organic materials, waste products, clay balls, shale, and mica and thoroughly washed before use. b. Provide aggregate meeting the combined gradation requirements below as specified in Paragraph 2.05.B. For thin sections, such as slabs or walls 10 inches thick or less, or for sections that require special placement due to shape, form or congestion of reinforcing, provide 1-inch maximum size. c. Provide aggregates that do not deleteriously react with the alkalies in the cement. d. Grading: ASTM C136. Submit results of sieve analysis. e. Reactivity: ASTM C289. Submit graphical data showing compliance. 2. Coarse Aggregates: a. Provide clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, or combinations. b. Deleterious substances: Submit compliance with ASTM C33, Table 3 and as follows: 1) Clay lumps and friable particles: ASTM C142. Not more than 5%. 2) Abrasion: ASTM C131. Not more than 45%. 3) Soundness: ASTM C88. Not more than 10%. 4) Cleanness: ASTM C142. For three tests, not less than 70, with an average greater than 75. Max friable/clay materials in coarse Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I are 2% for exposarecce, 3%for liquid I retainingggegatconcreteat structuresed, andchit5%fortural all otheroncretstructural concrete. Ic. Do not use aggregate containing more than 10% of inferior materials, flat or elongated particles, cracked or laminated rock, or rock than can be readily broken after immersion in water for one hour. 3. Fine Aggregate: a. Provide natural sand or a combination of natural and manufactured sand, of siliceous, granitic or igneous origin, hard and durable. b. Deleterious substances: Submit compliance with ASTM C33 Table 1 and as follows: 1) Organic impurities: ASTM C40 and C87. Not less than 95% relative strength by ASTM C87. 2) Sand equivalent: ASTM D2419. For three tests not less than 70, with an average greater than 75. C. Combined Aggregates: Provide a mixture of fine aggregate and coarse aggregate uniformly graded between the screen sizes specified below. Percentage Passing Sieve Size 1-1/2-Inch 1-inch 2-inch 100 -- 1-1/2-inch 90-100 100 1-inch 50-96 90-100111 3/4-inch 45-80 55-100 3/8-inch 38-55 45-75 No. 4 30-45 35-60 I No. 8 23-38 27-45 No. 16 17-33 20-35 No. 30 10-22 12-25 No. 50 3-10 3-15 No. 100 0-3 0-5 No. 200 0-2 0-2 2.03 WATER A. Provide water meeting AASHTO T26 for washing aggregates, for mixing concrete, for patching grout and for curing that is free from oil and contains not more than 1,000 parts per million (ppm) of chlorides as Cl, nor more than 1,300 ppm of sulfates as SO4. Do not allow impurities that will cause a change in the setting time of the Portland Cement of more than 25%, nor a reduction in the compressive I strength of mortar at 14 days of more than 5%, when compared to the results obtained with distilled water. B. Do not allow impurities that cause discoloration of the concrete or produce etching I of the surface. C. The Engineer may require tests of the water should there be a question of the quality. Costs of such tests would be borne by the Owner, unless the quality does not meet the requirements in Paragraph A above. I Cast-in-Place Concrete Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Permit Set 03300-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining: ASTM C260 IB. Accelerating: ASTM C494, Type C or E C. Retarding: ASTM C494, Type D I D. Water Reducing: ASTM C494, Type A E. High Range Water Reducing: ASTM C494, Types F or G, second or third generation type. Add at the batch plant, after all other ingredients have been mixed I and initial slump has been verified. F. Shrinkage Reducing: ASTM C157. Eclipse by W.R. Grace, Tetraguard AS20 by I Master Builders, or equal. G. Corrosion Inhibition and Permeability Reduction (Silica Fume): ASTM C1240. Force 10,000 or 10,000D (dry) by W.R Grace, Rheomac SF 100 (dry) or 110 by IMaster Builders, or equal. H. When two or more admixtures are used, they must be added to the mix separately (through dispensers or manually) and must not be mixed with each other prior to I adding to the concrete mix. Add admixtures to concrete mix ingredients in liquid form by a special dispensing unit, approved by the manufacturer of the admixture as suitable for accurately dispensing the admixture. Install an alarm or indicator, I which will immediately inform the batch plant operator if the dispensing unit malfunctions. Dispense admixtures uniformly into the mixing water as it is added to the concrete batch. I I. No admixture containing any chloride ions is acceptable. J. Manufacturers: WR Grace & Co., Master Builders, Inc., or equal. III2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. General: I 1. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory complying with ASTM C1077 and favorably reviewed by the Engineer to design all concrete mixes and carry out all necessary testing. Concrete mix design proportions I shall be established on the basis of field experience and trial mixtures with the materials to be employed in accordance with ACI 318 Section 5.3. 2. If the testing laboratory has satisfactory mix designs available from prior projects, submit test record statistics to demonstrate compliance with the Irequirements of this Section and ACI 318 Section 5.3. Include calculations for fcr based on source quality test records. 3. If new mix designs are required, prepare a range of trial batches for each I design and submit the mixes that demonstrate satisfactory test results in accordance with ACI 318 Section 5.3. 4. Allow for the variability of concrete strength from test to test by increasing the I required average compressive strength over the specified strength as specified in ACI 318 Section 5.3. 5. Design the mixes far enough ahead of concrete placement to allow completion of trial batch testing and submittal of the test results and mix Idesign to the Engineer for review. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 6. Take sole responsibility for selection of laboratory, submittal of materials to laboratory in time for all tests, and overall timing of all aspects of testing program, including submittals. 7. Prepare mix designs for concrete placement by the batch process and/or by pumping, as required, and state the process on the design submittal. 8. Allow for the hot or cold weather and the time required to transport the concrete from the mixer to the site and to place within the forms. If accelerating or retarding admixtures will be required for only a proportion of the concrete placements, submit test results that include the full range of options. 9. Do not exceed the water-cementitious material ratios. Vary the water- reducing admixtures to accomplish an increase in slump or workability time. 10. Proportion cementitious materials, aggregates, and water by weight. 11. Check periodically the weight of moisture contained within the stockpiled aggregates. Compensate for this water when proportioning the concrete mix and adjust when change occurs. 12. Do not use chlorides in any concrete mix. B. Mix Proportions: Concrete Type A Specified 28-Day 4,000 Compressive Strength (Ib/in2) Coarse Aggregate Gradation 1 (in) Air Content at Point of 4 Placement(%) Maximum Water-Cementitious 0.45 Material Ratio Minimum Cementitious 570 Material Content (Ib/yd3) C. Cementitious Material: Either Portland Cement, cement with fly ash, cement with natural Pozzolan, or blended cement. D. Pozzolan or Flyash: Optional. Not less than 10%, nor more than 20% of the weight of the cementitious materials. Do not use pozzolan or flyash as an admixture in concrete made with Portland-Pozzolan Cement. E. Mix Test Requirements: 1. Compression: ASTM C192 for cylinder preparation. ASTM C39 for cylinder tests. Submit 7-day and 28-day curing test results in accordance with Paragraph A above. 2. Slump: ASTM C143. Slump range is 3 to 4 inches. After high-range water reducer added, range is 6 to 9 inches. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231. Air content range is±1%. 4. After favorable review of the mix design, no variations of the constituents are permitted during the project without prior submittal and favorable review. I Cast-in-Place Concrete Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 03300-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 2.06 DRY PACK GROUT A. Very stiff mix grout; one-part Portland Cement to two-parts sand (by weight) and I water. Wet the mixture only sufficiently to moisten the materials to the point where they will ball when squeezed by hand. I 2.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. ASTM C1107, with no shrinkage as measured by ASTM C827. Furnish a premixed product, consisting of properly proportioned amounts of non-metallic, dimensionally Istable material to which water is added. 2.08 CEMENT MORTAR IA. For repairs and patching concrete. B. One-part Portland Cement, two-parts fine sand (by weight) and water. Use only the amount of water needed to make the mix workable for the intended use. IC. Provide a mixture of white and regular cements as required to make a mortar that after curing 28 days will match the adjacent concrete. Prepare several trial batches and make test samples in an inconspicuous location for review. ID. When a mix has been selected for color match, batch all mortar by weight in accordance with the formula for the selected mix. I2.09 EPDXY BONDING SYSTEM A. General: ASTM C881: 1. Provide Type I for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete; Type II for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete; and Type III as a binder in epoxy mortar or concrete, or for use in bonding skid-resistant materials to hardened concrete. 2. Provide Grade 1 or 2 for horizontal surfaces and Grade 3 for vertical I surfaces. 3. Provide Class A if placement temperature is below 40°F, but not less than I allowed by the manufacturer; Class B if placement temperature is between 40 and 60°F; or Class C if placement temperature is above 60°F, but not more than allowed by the manufacturer. 4. Provide: Sikadur Epoxy adhesives manufactured by the Sika Chemical ICorporation; Concresive compounds manufactured by Master Builders, Inc., or equal. I B. For bonding new to pre-existing concrete, provide Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod (Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL is not allowed for use in contact with potable water) by Sika Chemical Corporation, Concresive Liquid LPL by Master Builders, or equal. 11 I 2.10 PREFORMED JOINT FILLER A. Structures Retaining Water or Earth: ASTM D1056, Type 2, Class C, Grade 5. Neoprene sponge rubber, closed cell, resistant to oil, medium swell, firm. Supply Ipremolded product, Durafoam DK5151; equivalent product by Armacell; or equal. B. Miscellaneous Structures Above Grade: ASTM D1752 Type 1, 1-inch thick unless indicated otherwise on drawings. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300-9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I t 2.11 CURING MATERIALS I A. Cure by fog spray, or by one of the following methods after discontinuance of the fog spray. Slabs shall be continuously wet cured with sheet materials or wet blankets after discontinuance of the fog spray; liquid curing compound alone is insufficient. B. Liquid Curing Compound: A water-based membrane-forming resin suitable for exterior or interior use as a curing and hardening compound on freshly placed concrete. 1. Provide an emulsion of synthetic resinous solids dispersed in water containing no waxes, paraffins or oils. Provide the fugitive type that will oxidize and disintegrate completely within 60 days when exposed to sunlight in exterior applications or that can be removed by washing with dilute muriatic acid or TSP in interior applications. 2. Water retention requirements: ASTM C309, Type I or II, Class B, when tested in accordance with ASTM C156. 3. Use white pigmented material for exterior applications and clear material for interior applications. 4. Comply with the applicable local air quality district. 5. Exterior surfaces: Aqua Resin Cure-White by Dayton-Superior; 1200-White by W.R. Meadows; or equal. 6. Interior surfaces: Spartan-Cote by Dayton-Superior; Vocomp 20 by W.R. Meadows; or equal. C. Sheet Materials: ASTM C171. Waterproof paper, plastic sheeting or white burlap- polyethylene sheet. 1. Plastic sheeting: fungus-resistant, minimum 4-mil thick, clear and free of defects, having ASTM E96 perm rating of not more than 0.5. 2. Waterproof paper: Two layers of non-staining kraft paper laminated with latex adhesive and reinforced with glass in both directions. Seal joints with 2-inch- wide tape with water-resistant adhesive. D. Wet Blankets: Clean cotton mats (burlap, except for white burlap-polyethylene sheeting, is unacceptable). Provide material free from any substance that will have a deleterious effect on the concrete. Use a thickness sufficient to retain moisture between programmed applications of water. E. Evaporation Retardant: Eucobar by the Euclid Chemical Company; E-CON by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; or equal. 2.12 FORMS A. Provide forms for exposed concrete surfaces with a clean, smooth plywood or metal face. Exposed concrete surfaces include beams, columns, slabs, interior and exterior walls, and surfaces of tank, chamber and tunnel walls except those in contact with earth. B. Furnish plywood with a waterproof, synthetic resin bonded face manufactured for formwork. Furnish steel forms that incorporate reinforcement, inserts, pipe fittings, box-outs, and other details shown on the Contract Drawings without modification to these details. I Cast-in-Place Concrete Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 03300-10 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 ' 2.13 FORM TIES A. General: 1. Provide commercially manufactured steel rods or through-bolts capable of withstanding applied pressures. 2. Do not use wire, wire ties or wood spreaders. 3. Provide form ties designed that when forms are removed, no metal shall remain within 1-1/2-inch to the finished concrete surface. B. Cone-Snap Tie: 111 1. Furnish ties adjustable in length or of proper fixed length, with no metal closer than 1-1/2-inch to the finished concrete surface. 2. Use a plastic cone spacer at each end of the form tie to allow a full 1-1/2-inch ' breakback and part of tie to be removed shall leave a cone shaped depression in the concrete with a minimum diameter of 1-inch at the surface. 3. Provide ties for walls resisting water or earth pressure with waterstop washers of diameter%-inch greater than the rod, bonded to rods at the wall centerline, or with other favorably reviewed water seal devices. C. Taper Ties or Through Bolts: 1. Alternatively, provide tapered removable through-bolts at least 1-inch in diameter at smallest end. 2. Manufactured neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug to be installed at the wall centerline. 2.14 FORM COATING COMPOUNDS A. Do not stain or impart any material or residue to the concrete surface detrimental or incompatible with any specified paint or coating system to be applied later, or unacceptable for contact with drinking water. 2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Forms: Verify that components pre-assembled offsite are satisfactory for the purpose. Verify that designs, products and samples have been submitted for Product Review. B. Concrete: 1. Verify that ready-mix batch plant delivery tickets contain all product information necessary for acceptance of the concrete delivered to site. 2. Verify that the mixing and trucking equipment have adequate capacity to deliver the concrete batches to site on time, thoroughly mixed and discharge without segregation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROPORTIONING CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Do not place concrete prior to favorable review of submittals for reinforcing steel, materials specified in this Section and the mix proposed. Unfavorable results of actual pours may require a redesign of mixes in addition to corrective work related to any defects. ' B. Do not make substitutions to the constituents tested in the design of concrete mixes without favorable review of the revised mix and the new test results. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project ect No. 6755 03300- 11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 1 3.02 BATCHING AND MIXING CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Ready or Transit Mixed Concrete: 1. Deliver completely mixed to the project site. 2. Do not add water unless approved by the Engineer. Do not add mixing water during hauling. Add water after delivery and only from the"hold-out"volume indicated on the mix ticket. Should water be added, revolve the mixing drum not less than 30 revolutions at mixing speed after adding and before commencing discharge. 3. Deliver each load at the job site accompanied by a ticket showing mix design number, volume of concrete, the weight of cement in pounds and the total weight of each ingredient in pounds. Also show the time at which the materials were batched and the reading of the revolution counter at the time the truck mixer was charged. 4. No retempering of partially hardened material is permitted. Do not use partially hardened concrete in the work. B. Batching in Adverse Weather: 1. Cold Weather: Perform work in accordance with ACI 306 along with the following requirements. When the atmospheric temperature is below 40°F, or is likely to fall below 40°F during the 24-hour period after placing, heat the materials before mixing, so that the temperature of the mix at the batch plant shall be between 65° and 80°F. Do not heat the mixing water or the cement over 160°F. Remove lumps of frozen material and ice from the aggregates before they are placed in the mixer. 2. Hot Weather: When temperatures are above 90°F, reduce the temperature of the concrete mix by using iced mixing water, and protecting aggregates and cement from direct rays of the sun. Do not place concrete exceeding 80°F. 3. Should the provisions noted in 1. and 2. above not be possible or practicable, postpone the batching until favorable weather conditions prevail. 3.03 FORMS I A. General: 1. Take responsibility for adequacy of the form, bracing, and shoring. Satisfy ACI 347. 2. Form concrete unless specified otherwise. 3. Construct forms confirming to the shape, line and grade specified. 4. Provide tight seams, or seal with tape, to be mortar-tight. 5. Brace and shore all forms properly to ensure stability against pressure from any source, without failure of any component part. 6. Keep the deflection of wall or slab form sheathing or framing for beams within 1/270 of the span. Consider camber in designing the supports of beams and slabs. 7. If inadequate support is provided by the forms, remove all placed concrete and replace, as directed. 8. Provide for temporary openings for cleaning out, observation, pouring and vibration of concrete. 9. If the concrete mix design includes a high-range water reducing additive, design the forms with enough strength to resist the high liquid concrete pressure without distortion. Cast-in-Place Concrete Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 03300-12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'`70 B. Chamfers: 3 -inch at all exposed outside corners, including the top edges of all walls, machinery bases and curbs. Use mill run chamfer strips surfaced all sides. Provide rounded top edges of sidewalks, walkways and where directed. C. Formed Surfaces: 1. Ensure that the reinforcement has been favorably reviewed before closing up the wall forms. 2. Provide exposed, unpainted concrete surfaces that are uniform in appearance and color. Apply non-staining mineral oil, form coating or form release compound before placing the forms. Remove any excess coating with cloths. Scrape and clean any reused forms before coating again. 3. Provide flush fitting caps over any unused form tie holes. 4. Do not use mineral oil on formed surfaces that are to be painted, coated, or bonded to other concrete. D. Form Ties and Through-Bolts: ' 1. Provide sufficient number and strength to prevent spreading of forms while placing concrete. 2. Remove the removable portion immediately after stripping the forms. Avoid spalling the exposed concrete surfaces. ' 3. Locate tapered ties, if used, with the larger diameter on the water side of the form. 4. Provide a separate support system for the curtains of reinforcing, with a ' minimum 1-inch clearance between rebar and form ties or bolts. E. Construction Joints: 1. At ends of the first concrete pour, provide forms that positively locate any waterstop. Ensure the end forms of walls are removable without releasing the side forms. Provide seals around reinforcement and waterstop to prevent mortar leaks. 2. Overlap the hardened concrete of the first pour with forms for the second pour. Brace the ends of the forms against the hardened concrete to prevent joint offsets and mortar leakage. Align any exterior features required on the finished surface. 3.04 ALLOWABLE VARIATIONS FOR FORMED SURFACES A. Tolerances: ACI 301 and as noted below: B. Variations in Size or Thickness: 1. Footings: a. Length and width: ±1/2-inch b. Reduction in thickness: 5% 2. Slabs and walls: a. Thickness of 6 inches or less: 0-inch b. Thickness of more than 6 inches: ±1/4-inch C. Allowable Tolerances (Location, Lines and Grades): 1. Horizontal misplacement or eccentricity 2% of footing width, but no of footings more than 1-inch 2. Variation of vertical dimensions at all floor ±1/2-inch per 100-foot ' levels from specified position: 3. Variation of vertical dimensions from ±1/4-inch ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300-13 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I specified position: I 4. Variation from level or from slopes specified ±1/4-inch per 20 feet for floors, ceilings, water channels and I conspicuous lines 5. Variation in location from specified position ±1/4-inch for sleeves, pits, floor, and wall openings: D. General: Set and maintain concrete forms to ensure that, after removal of the 1 forms and prior to patching and finishing, no portion of the concrete work will exceed any of the tolerances. Measure variations in floor levels before removal of supporting shores. Accept responsibility for variations due to deflections resulting from concrete quality or curing other than that specified. The specified variation for one element of the structure will not be applicable when it will permit another element of the structure to exceed its allowable variation. 3.05 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: Comply with the recommendations of ACI Committee 347. Remove without damage to the concrete and with complete safety of the structure. Ensure that the concrete has hardened sufficiently and the members have attained sufficient strength to safely support the imposed loads. I B. Removal Time: Minimum duration after completion of concrete placement: 1. Walls and wall or slab construction joints 12 hours 2. Sides of beams and girders 12 hours I 3. Columns 12 hours 4. Underside of suspended slabs, walkways, 21 days, and full design beams and girders compressive strength verified I by data from additional field cured cylinders, if removed at less than 28 days. C. Cold Weather: Forms shall remain in place for the full protection period in accordance with ACI 306 and Engineer may further increase the minimum form removal times if the temperature is 50°F or lower. D. Reshoring: Submit for favorable review, any requirement for accelerated partial stripping and reshoring of forms that may be necessary to maintain the construction program. Removal times for two-way suspended slabs are contingent on reshoring and shall be favorably reviewed by the Engineer. 3.06 REUSE OF FORMS A. Between concrete placements, inspect all form surfaces and repair to uniform texture for all concrete surfaces to be exposed. Fill all unused holes, cracks and defects. 3.07 PLACING CONCRETE AND GROUT A. Preliminary Work: 1. Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from the inner surface of the mixing and conveying equipment. Remove all debris from the space to be occupied by the concrete. 2. Remove water from the space to be occupied by the concrete before I concrete is deposited. Divert any flow of water into an excavation through Cast-in-Place Concrete Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Permit Set 03300-14 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013°70 I proper site drainage to a sump, or byother y the Engineer, grout up any water vent pipes and drains after the concrete to has thoroughly hardened. 3. Provide satisfactory redundancy in the delivery system so that work can continue in the event of a breakdown. 4. Do not use aluminum materials in pumping lines, transfer hoppers or chutes longer than 12 feet. Provide conveyor belts instead of chutes when the distance is longer than 50 feet. Use a storage hopper at the start of the line. 5. For pumped concrete, provide a hose with an angle-change, to create a back-pressure at the outlet. 6. Provide illumination if necessary inside the forms, so that the placed concrete will be visible from the deck at top of formwork. 7. Provide thermometer for measuring concrete temperature when weather conditions are predicted to go beyond the range 50°F to 80°F. 8. All surfaces in contact with concrete, including forms and reinforcing steel, shall be within 10°F of the concrete prior to placement of concrete. 9. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade. Subgrade shall be above 32°F and within 10°F of concrete prior to placement of concrete. Remove frost before placing concrete and recompact thawed soil disturbed by frost. B. Embedded Items: 1. Place all equipment, bolts, anchors, sleeves, inserts, structural steel members, angles and similar items which require embedment in the concrete. 2. Hot-dip galvanize all ferrous metal sleeves, inserts, anchors, and other embedded ferrous items unless shown otherwise. Set anchor bolts for equipment in templates, carefully plumbed and checked for location and elevation with an instrument, and held in position rigidly by double-nutting to the template to prevent displacement while concrete is being poured. 3. Ensure that any aluminum items inserted in the concrete are isolated by a bituminous or asphaltic coating in accordance with Division 5 Specification. 4. Move reinforcement bars as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items, but not so as to impair design strengths of the member. If bars are moved more than two bar diameters, submit the resulting arrangement of bars for review. 5. Inspect the installation of all embedded items and reinforcing. C. Placing: 1. Transfer the concrete to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods that prevent the separation or loss of ingredients. Under no circumstances deposit partially hardened concrete in the work. Deposit concrete in the forms as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling. Maintain, until the completion of the pour, a plastic concrete surface, approximately horizontal. 2. Deposit concrete without segregation of the aggregate and without displacement of the reinforcement. 3. Maximum height of free fall for concrete during placement: a. Concrete with maximum 4-inch slump: 4 feet b. Concrete with high-range water reducing admixture and minimum 6-inch, maximum 9-inch slump: 8 feet 4. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers 12 to 20 inches in depth so that no concrete will be deposited on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Cast-in-Place Concrete K/J Project No. 137601370 03300- 15 Permit Set uousl ori cannot be placed Contin y as 9 1 during the placement. 5. Use every means to secure a dense, imperviousinally planned, locate construction joints homogeneous concrete, free from voids or pockets. If honeycomb, air, or rock pockets occur, repair the structure to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer, and modify the placing method or mix design, to prevent recurrence of deficient concrete. I Provide such repairs and modifications at no additional cost. Extensive honeycomb or pockets may be cause for rejection of the work. D. Time Limit: Place all concrete in its final position in slab or forms within 1-1/2 hours of batching or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first in accordance with ASTM C94. Alternatively, as part of the mix design, provide admixtures that delay the initial set and state the proposed length of time in the submittal. E. Temperature Limits: Place all concrete in its final position in slab or forms at: 1. Less than 90°F, measured in the mix. I2. More than 40°F, measured both in the mix and in the air, with air temperature predicted to rise above 50°F. 3. More than 50°F, measured in the mix, 40°F measured in the air, with air temperature falling. I 4. Temperature measurements above refer to on-site measurements. Refer to the vibration, concrete joints and curing sections for other requirements. F. Precast Items: 1 1. Items may be cast on or off the site. 2. Apply all applicable portions of Section 03300, including materials, forms, placement, finish and curing. I 3. Take particular care when handling and placing the precast items. Lift or move after a minimum of 90% of the specified compressive strength has been attained. Use the average compressive strength of two test cylinders. I 3.08 VIBRATION A. Compact the concrete with high frequency, internal mechanical vibrating I equipment, and when required, supplement by hand spading and tamping. Consolidate slabs 6 inches or less in depth by hand tampers, spreading and settling with a heavy leveling straightedge. B. Operate vibrators with vibratory element submerged in the concrete, with frequency between 8,000 and 12,000 impulses per minute when submerged. C. Furnish sufficient vibrators to complete the compaction as specified without I causing delay in the depositing of concrete. Provide at least one spare unit for each structure when concrete is being placed and at least one vibrator for each 25 cubic yards per hour of concrete placement. I D. Vibrate by direct action in the concrete for approximately 10 seconds at approximately 12-inch intervals, not against forms or reinforcements. Do not move concrete horizontally by vibration. Work the concrete around the reinforcement, I and around embedded fixtures and into the corners of the forms. Penetrate 6 to 12 inches into previously poured layers as new layers are poured, provided the running vibrator penetrates by its own weight. To secure even and dense surfaces, free from aggregate pockets, honeycomb, or air pockets, supplement vibration 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 PeConcrete 03300-16 Project No.6755 Perrmmiitt Seett K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I Iwhen required by forkingspading or p g by hand or hammering the forms lightly opposite the freshly deposited concrete. Revibrate the final layer. Stop vibrating I when concrete is thoroughly compacted and has ceased to decrease in volume and give off air bubbles. E. When placing concrete with 8-inch or more slump, reduce the time of vibration to I 5 seconds and follow the admixture manufacturer's recommendations for technique. 3.09 CONCRETE JOINTS 111 A. General: 1. Provide joints: 1 a. As shown on the Drawings and as noted below in these Specifications. b. As required for constructability. c. After favorable review of layout, sequence and concrete placement program. 2. Provide minimum curing times before the second placement: a. 10 days after each adjacent concrete placement for infill pours (i.e. in- between two existing sections) or checkerboard (existing concrete on two or more sides) placement patterns. b. 2 days after the first concrete placement at the joint. 3. During placement of the new concrete, ensure there are no interruptions to I the 14-day curing time and 14-day load restriction plan for the adjacent pours. B. Control Joints: 1. Space typical control joints in slabs on grade or suspended slabs not exceeding 10 feet, or as shown on the Drawings. Control joints shall not be provided in water containment structures. 2. If cast-in with the concrete, positively locate the preformed joint filler and hold rigidly in place during concreting. 3. If saw-cut, use a wheeled power saw as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough. Saw-cut control joints must be constructed within 12 hours after concrete placement. Fill the groove with sealant over a backer rod. C. Construction Joints: 1. Produce quality concrete, with full continuity of reinforcing and water tightness across the joints. 2. Space typical slab joints not exceeding 20 feet in the direction of the transverse or secondary reinforcing, typically the smaller reinforcing nearer to the center of the slab thickness. Space typical vertical wall joints no more Ithan 30 feet apart. 3. After the first concrete placement at the joint, do not walk on or disturb any reinforcing extending into the second placement area for at least 48 hours. I4. Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has hardened, clean and roughen the entire surface of the joint exposing clean coarse aggregate solidly embedded in mortar matrix. Provide typically '/4-inch roughness or amplitude of the concrete surface measured from the top of the exposed aggregate to the bottom of pockets between stones. 5. Drench the prepared joint with clean water and remove prior to the concrete I pour. Durham Odor Control Improvements p Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300- 17 Permit Set I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 joints Use special care in vibrating adjacent to construction to ensure I thorough consolidation of the concrete around the waterstops and against the hardened portion of the joint. Additional hand tamping may be required. 7. For joints that are shown on architectural drawings as having a continuous reveal or recess, leave the wood form or pour strip used to create the reveal or recess in place or re-insert before roughening. Prevent the next concrete placement from filling the reveal or recess. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Stop all steel reinforcing clear of the joint at each side. 2. Prepare a smooth first concrete surface with all voids filled. 3. Provide preformed joint filler, securely fastened to the existing concrete as directed by the Manufacturer. 4. Install bond breaker and sealant after curing is completed and when directed. E. Bonding to Pre-existing Concrete: Mechanically roughen the old surface to a '/4-inch amplitude, as defined in construction joint paragraph above. Apply epoxy ' bonding system material prior to concreting and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE I A. Inspect all concrete surfaces immediately after carefully removing joints; Defective ; work includes concrete out of line, level or plumb; cracks; poorj I honeycomb; voids; spalls and exposed reinforcing. Patch all minor defects, including form tie holes, before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Do not interrupt the curing program. Ensure that repairs match the existing surface for color and texture. B. Minor Defects: 1. Clean thoroughly, including removal of any curing compound. Cut out to solid concrete but to a depth of not less than 1 inch. Prepare the edges of the cut I slightly more than perpendicular to the surface of the concrete, so as to form a key. 2. Repair with cement mortar. Use minimum water, consistent with the Thoroughly to plcrequirements creed off to eave he patch h flush with the surrrotundi gthe asurfacterial e. place an 3. Keep the surface damp for at least 48 hours. I C. Major Defects: 1. Large areas involving voids or rock pockets extending through the section may be cause for rejection of the work. , 2. If acceptable repairs can be made without adversely affecting the structural integrity of the work, cut out the section and either dry pack, or reform and re-pour to match the adjacent concrete. Do not cut the reinforcing, but cut keyways into the adjacent sound concrete to securely fasten the patch to the I original work. Prepare edges of the damaged area with a minimum of a 1-inch cut perpendicular to the concrete surface. 3. Coat all surfaces with epoxy bonding compound immediately prior to patching. Place the concrete patch before the epoxy has set. Follow the epoxy bonding manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Provide a patch with strength and modulus of elasticity compatible with the 1 parent concrete. Cure in accordance with the following article. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Placermt Concrete 03300-18 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"'70 I 1 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Maintain concrete above 50°F and below 90°F in a moist condition and ' without external loadings for 14 days after placement. For slabs, after the specified initial moist cure, provide further moist curing, utilizing sheet materials or wet blankets for 14 days after placement. Apply liquid membrane curing after the 14-day wet curing period. For walls after the specified initial moist cure, provide further moist curing, impervious-sheeting curing, or application of liquefied membrane-curing compound, as noted. ' B. Slabs: 1. Initial moist cure: Provide a 36-hour uniform spray treatment immediately following final troweling and before the surface can dry out, but after bleeding ' has stopped. Use clean water and special fog spray nozzles of type and number required to keep entire surface moist. Keep all traffic off the floor surfaces. 2. Continued cure: After 36 hours, continue fog curing, or before the surface dries out, continue curing by utilizing sheet materials or wet blankets in order to keep the surface of the slab continuously wet for the balance of the 14 days. After 14 days apply a liquid membrane curing compound: a. Place waterproof curing paper smoothly upon the moist concrete surface with all joints and edges lapped a minimum of 4 inches and continuously sealed with tape. Do not use paper that will leave an ' impression on the finish. Repair, replace and reseal, torn or scuffed sheets. b. Install polyethylene plastic sheeting and maintain in the same manner as for curing paper. 1 c. Apply liquid membrane curing compound, if favorably reviewed for this purpose. Apply while slab is still damp from the fog spray. 1) Agitate compound thoroughly by mechanical means during use ' and apply uniformly in a two coat continuous operation by appropriate power-spraying equipment. Apply the two coats at right angles. Apply between 150 and 200 sq. ft. per gallon of ' undiluted compound, total coverage. Form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional coat ' immediately to areas where the film is defective. 2) Keep alternate specified covering readily available for use in the event conditions occur which prevent correct application of the compound at the proper time. 3) Respray surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied (when slab reaches a moist condition and there is no standing water)with two ' additional coats of curing compound by the foregoing method and coverage. 4) Allow foot traffic only after 36 hours of cure time and only when slab is protected with paper or sheeting. ' 5) Allow building material storage only after 14 days of cure time and only on plywood sheets and wood sleepers that spread the load and protect the finish. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Project No. 6755 03300- 19 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 C. Walls: ' 1. When forms are in place, keep concrete damp by spraying the outside and top of the forms with water. 2. When forms are in place, but loosened, keep concrete damp by streaming water down inside the forms. 3. When forms are removed, continue curing by one of the following methods for the balance of the 14 days. a. Provide continuous perforated hose sprays at the top of wall covering the entire wall, both sides, with water. b. Place water-retaining blankets continuously over the wall surfaces and hose periodically with water, 24 hours a day. c. Apply liquid membrane curing compound, if favorably reviewed for this purpose. Follow the procedures for slabs contained in paragraph above. 111D. Other Surfaces: 1. Provide a curing program equivalent to either slab or wall system, as appropriate. 2. Include construction joint surfaces when applying curing compound. 3. Cover, or protect joint openings, exposed reinforcing, surfaces to be painted and other areas where curing compound may enter and interfere with a special finish. 4. Remove curing compound sprayed on reinforcing or construction joints by sandblasting after curing is completed, or before placing the next pour. If the cones of tie holes are sprayed with curing compound, lightly ream prior to patching. E. Cold Weather Requirements: Provide adequate equipment for heating the placed concrete during freezing or near freezing weather: 1. Whenever the surrounding air temperature is below 40°F, or may fall below 40°F within the 24-hour period after placing concrete, maintain all freshly poured concrete at not less than 50°F for 5 days. 2. Keep the housing, covering, or other protection in place and intact at least 24 hours after the artificial heating is discontinued. 3. Do not use manure, salt, calcium chloride, or other chemicals on the concrete to prevent freezing. F. Hot Weather Requirements: Provide additional cooling to concrete when temperatures rise above 90°F, or low humidity, wind and temperature combine to cause high surface evaporation, over 0.2 lb/sq. ft./hour: 1. Provide additional water if curing by fog spray or ponding or saturated blankets. 2. Provide shade to surfaces exposed to direct sunlight. 1 3. Apply an evaporation retarder during the finishing operation, following the manufacturer's recommendation. 3.12 CONCRETE FINISHES 1 A. Provide a trowel finish at the topside of unformed surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. B. Provide a smooth-rubbed finish for formed surface in accordance with ACI 301. 1 Cast-in-Place Concrete Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 03300-20 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Placement: I1. Verify that forms and reinforcement are accurately placed and secured in position. Confirm that both forms and reinforcement have been favorably reviewed. I 2. Verify that tie wire ends have been bent back away from the forms. 3. Verify that all sleeves, castings, pipes, conduits, bolts, anchors, and any other items required, are accurately and securely placed within or on the forms. 4. Verify waterstop is correctly in place and that splices are watertight. I 5. Verify adequate vibrators are available. 6. Verify construction and expansion joint faces have been prepared for the next concrete placement. I 7. Check that the mix design is compatible with the method of placement of the concrete, by pump or by batch. 8. For wall placements, verify that the modified concrete mix required at construction joints is to be delivered. 9. Verify the concrete delivered to site is satisfactory, including checks on the batch tickets, quality assurance tests and direct observation of the batches. I B. Concrete Curing: 1. Verify procedures and equipment is available for controlling concrete temperature during hot and cold weather conditions. I 2. Verify actual time of application of evaporation retardant, fog spray and curing materials for each placement. 3. For cold weather applications, record at least twice a day for the six days of special concrete curing and protecting procedures the temperature of the I concrete at multiple locations (including surfaces, edges and corners), the daily maximum and minimum concrete temperature, location where temperature was taken, air temperature, weather conditions, and other I ACI special 306.conditions. Measure concrete temperature in accordance with ' 3.14 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all work performed under this Section, remove from the site all excess materials, storage facilities and temporary facilities. Smooth and clean of I debris all areas that were used or occupied during concrete construction operations and leave in first-class condition. I END OF SECTION I I I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Cast-in-Place ace Concrete Project No. 6755 03300-21 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 SECTION 05090 STRUCTURAL METAL FASTENERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. All anchors, including mechanical and adhesive anchors, adhesive rebar dowels, eye bolts, turnbuckles, cable clamps, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and other metal fasteners not specified elsewhere. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03200: Reinforcing Steel 2. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete 3. Section 05100: Structural Metal Framing 4. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications (Miscellaneous Metal) 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications: 1. ANSI/AISC 360-05 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings B. Research Council on Structural Connections: 111 1. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2004 C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) D. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI B18-2-1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws 2. ANSI B18-2-2 Square and Hex Nuts 3. ANSI B18-21-1 Lock Washers 4. ANSI B18-22-1 Plain Washers E. American Society for Testing and Materials Standard Specifications: 1. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 2. ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 3. ASTM A325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated 4. ASTM A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products 5. ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 6. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process 7. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts 8. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 9. ASTM E8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 10. ASTM F436 Hardened Steel Washers 11. ASTM F844 Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 05090- 1 Structural Metal Fasteners K/J Project No. 1376013'70 Permit Set 1 12. ASTM F959 With Structural Fasteners pe Direct Tension Indicator for Use ' 13. ASTM F1554 Anchors Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength F. International Code Council (ICC) 1. Evaluation Service Reports 2. AC 193 Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete , Elements 3. AC 308 Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements , G. International Building Code (I1Editionnd with Amendments adopted in the State of Oregon 2014 Structural SP a 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: 1. Adhesive anchors, reinforcing steel dowels and expansion anchors. 2. Insulation between dissimilar metals. C. Samples: Manufacturer's latest standard product: Specify special or unique products. D. ICC Evaluation Service Reports for all anchors submitted demonstrating compliance with 2012 IBC and ICC AC 193 or 308 for Mechanical or Adhesiveanchors for use in respectively. Reports for concrete anchors shall demonstrate approval cracked concrete in Seismic Design use for ss seismic loads when attached to CMegories A-F. Reports for masonry anchors shall demonstrate approval for e E. List of all anchors to be used including: 1. Location, diameter, material type, number and length of anchors 2. Testing plan for anchors, including percentage of anchors to be tested and allowable loads for anchors and testing loads. 3. Certified Verification Testing Report: a. Certified by an independent testing laboratory or registered professional engineer. b. Detailing results of testing required in paragraph 1.04.C.2. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Furnish materials and fabricated items from an established and reputable manufacturer or supplier. 2. Supply all new materials and fabricated items made from first class ingredients and construction and guaranteed to perform the service required. 3. For adhesive anchorage, Contractor shall be trained by anchor product manufacturer representative and provide twith a il Inspector.ificate or card of completion, to be ava table upon request byhe Spec a ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Structural Metal Fasteners 05090-2 Project No.675 Peermitrmit S Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I B. Codes and Standards: 1. Bolting: Ia. General: AISC Specifications. C. Tests: 1. General: The Owner shall provide Special Inspection, defined by IBC Chapter 17 and as noted in the ICC-ES report for the anchor. The Contractor shall provide and pay for verification testing for mechanical and adhesive anchoring systems described below. Installation inspection shall be periodic I special inspection or continuous special inspection as required by the ICC ES report of by the Design or Specialty Engineer. 2. Verification Testing for Mechanical expansion and adhesive anchoring systems: a. Do not begin installation until testing plan has been favorably reviewed by the engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage, including damage to adjacent structural elements, resulting from use of loads not favorably reviewed by the engineer. b. Expansion and adhesive anchors shall be tested as follows: 1) Test 10% of anchors used for sill plate bolting applications Iequipment 2) Test 50% of anchors used for non-structural applications, such as anchorage. 3) Test 100% of anchors for applications not listed above. c. Undercut anchors that allow visual confirmation of full set need not be Itested. d. Visual inspection of layout including horizontal location, minimum embedment, minimum cover, minimum spacing, and minimum edge distance. e. Test anchors by a calibrated torque wrench, direct pull with a hydraulic jack, or a calibrated spring loaded devices. Testing shall be performed on a single anchor and shall be done in a "confined" manner, where the testing 111 equipment prevents concrete breakout in tension. Torque wrench method shall not be used for screw anchors, or where additional torque will damage the installed condition. f. Anchors tested using the torque wrench shall achieve the load within 1/2 turn of the nut. Prior to testing, the nut shall be snug to the manufacturer's recommended installation tightness. Ig. Anchors tested using a hydraulic ram shall be tested to the required load for a minimum of 15 seconds and shall not exhibit any discernable movement during the loading, such as loosening of the washer under the nut or an observable gap. h. IAnchors which do not pass the test shall be considered defective work, and such failures shall be corrected at no additional cost to the owner, including any indirect costs necessary to relocate or reinstall anchors. 1 D. Additional Tests: Provide and pay for all necessary additional tests made on weld or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original s fabrication. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle, ship and store material in a manner that will prevent distortion, rust, damage to the shop coat or any other damage. rDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Structural Metal Fasteners K/J Project No. 1376013'70 05090-3 Permit Set IB. Store material in a clean, properly drained location out of contact with the ground. C. Ensure that dissimilar metals are not in contact with each other. I D. Replace or repair all damaged material in an approved manner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FASTENERS A. General I 1. For buried, submerged, or conditions where anchors or fasteners will be continuously or intermittently wet, except where otherwise shown or specified, all bolts, anchor bolts, mechanical anchors, adhesive anchors, washers, and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel , 2. For exterior or exposed conditions provide 316 stainless steel except where otherwise shown or specified. 3. For all other exposure conditions provide hot dipped galvanized materials, except where otherwise shown or specified. I B B . Bolting —Steel 1. Bolts: High Strength Bolts: ASTM 325, heavy hex, Type 1 (High Strength I Bolts) 2. Bolts installed in Wood: ASTM A307, Grade A (Regular Hexagon Bolts) 3. Nuts: ASTM A563, heavy hex, Grade DH (High Strength Nuts) OR ASTM A563, Grade A (Regular Hexagon Nuts) 4. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened (High Strength Bolt Washers) OR ASTM F 844 (Regular Bolt Circular Washers) 5. Lock Washers: ANSI B18.21.1 6. High Strength Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959. 7. Dimensional Requirements: a. Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. I b. Nuts: ANSI B18.2.2. C. Bolting—Stainless Steel I 1. Stainless Steel Bolts: AISI 316. ASTM A193 or F593.18-8 material is not acceptable. 2. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM A194 or F594. I 3. Washers: AISI 316 washers meeting the dimensional requirements of ASTM F436 4. Dimensional Requirements: I a. Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. b. Nuts: ANSI B18.2.2. D. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts I 1. Headed Anchors: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, unless Grade 55 or 105 is shown on Drawings. High Strength anchors on Drawings shall be Grade 55 minimum. 2. Threaded & Nutted Anchors: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with threaded ends and double hex nuts at the anchored end, or with washer between anchoring nuts if ' shown on the drawings. Use heavy hex nuts for rods 13/4" diameter or greater. Fasteners Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Structuralermit S Metal05090-4 Project No.6755 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 ' Provide Grade 55 or 105 if shown on the Drawings and use heavy hex nuts. High Strength anchors on Drawings shall be Grade 55 minimum. 3. Welded Headed Studs or Welded Hooked Studs: AWS D1.1, Grade B, fut = 60 ksi, fy = 50 ksi. 4. Hooked Anchors (J and L Bolts): Are not allowed unless specifically shown on the Drawings as they do not provide equivalent performance. If shown, provide ASTM F1554, Grade 36, unless Grade 55 or 105 is shown on Drawings. High Strength anchors on Drawings shall be Grade 55 minimum. 5. Hooked anchor bolts shall not be used in concrete masonry unit construction. 6. Provide minimum embedment shown on the Drawings, or a minimum of eight bolt diameters. E. Mechanical Anchoring Systems (friction anchors are not acceptable) 1. Mechanical Undercut Anchoring Systems (required for overhead applications) a. Anchor: Undercut anchor shall be of an undercut style with brazed tungsten ' carbides on the embedded end that perform the self-undercutting process. b. Carbon Steel Bolt and Sleeve: 1) Bolt: ISO 898, class 8.8, or SAE Grade 5. 2) Sleeve: AISI 1010. 2) Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2. 3) Washers: SAE 1005-1033 or AISI 1040 and meeting the dimensional ' requirements of ANSI B18.2.2 Type A Plain. 4) Plating: Zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC1, Type III Fe/Zn 5. c. Stainless Steel Bolt and Sleeve: 1 1) Bolt: AISI 316 or 316Ti. 2) Sleeve: AISI 316 or 316Ti or Type 304 stainless steel. 3) Nuts: DIN 934, grade 8. ' 4) Washers: DIN 6796 or Type 18-8 stainless steel. d. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES showing Cracked Concrete testing compliance per A.C.193. ' e. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for published allowable loads. f. Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc. HDA Undercut Anchor, Simpson Torq-Cut (pending ICC approval)Atomic+ Undercut by Powers Fasteners or equal. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchoring Systems a. Anchor: Expansion anchor shall be preassembled expanding sleeve or wedge type with a single piece three section wedge. Anchors shall meet the description of Federal Specification A-A 1923A or A-A 1922A, Type 4. Anchor will bear a length identification code that is visible after installation. Provide hex head stud style unless flat or rod coupler styles are noted on Drawings. b. Carbon Steel Anchors: 1) Anchor Body: ASTM A510 or AISI 1018 or AISI 12L14 or SAE J403. 2) Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2. 3) Washers: SAE 1005-1033 or ASTM F844 and meeting the dimensional requirements of ANSI B18.2.2 Type A Plain. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Structural Metal Fasteners Project No. 6755 05090-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I 4) Plating: Zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC1, Type III I Fe/Zn 5. c. Stainless Steel Anchors: I 1) Anchor Body and Wedges: ASTM A276 or ASTM A493 with chemical composition of either AISI 304 or 316 or 316L. 2) Nuts: ASTM F594 with chemical composition of either AISI 304 or 316 or 316L. I 3) Washers: ASTM A240 with chemical composition of either AISI 304 or 316 or 316L. d. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES showing Cracked Concrete I testing compliance per A.C. 193. e. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for published allowable loads. f. Manufacturer: Hilti, Inc. Kwik Bolt TZ, Simpson Strong-Bolt, Powers Fasteners, Power-Stud +SD1 or Power-Stud +SD2 (except 1/1" diameter 1 and not for use in masonry), or equal. F. Adhesive Anchoring Systems 1. Adhesive (Epoxy) Injection Anchoring'Systems a. Adhesive: Adhesive consisting of two-component epoxy base resin and hardener material meeting the requirements of ASTM C-881 Types I and IV, Grade 3, Class C. The adhesive shall be supplied in manufacturer's I standard side-by-side cartridge and dispensed through a static-mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. b. Anchor Rod, Reinforcing Steel or Insert: Threaded Rod or insert with chamfered threaded end for ease of starting nut on one end and 45 degree chisel or cut point on opposite end (where insert is required by manufacturer). Furnish nuts and washers to meet the requirements of the rod or insert. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings provide hot dip I galvanize rods or inserts or stainless steel. Stainless steel rods or inserts shall be provided in buried or submerged locations. Reinforcing Steel shall meet the requirements of Section 03200. All Reinforcing Steel indicated to I be embedded in existing concrete shall be embedded using the epoxy injection systems. 1) ASTM A36 or A307 (standard carbon steel anchor). 2) ASTM A193 Grade B7 (high strength carbon steel anchor). I 3) Reinforcing bars as specified in Section 03200 with chisel or cut point. 4) AISI 304/ASTM A276 or AISI 316L/ASTM A276 stainless steel meeting the mechanical requirements of ASTM F-593 (Condition CW). c. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES showing Cracked Concrete testing compliance per A.C. 308. d. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown I on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for published allowable loads. e. For submerged application in potable water provide NSF/ANSI STD 61 certification. f. Manufacturer: Hilti HIT RE 500-SD Epoxy Anchoring System, Hilti HIT HY- 200, Simpson Strong-Tie SET-XP Epoxy, PE10O0+ by Powers Fasteners or equal. 2. Adhesive (Ester) Injection Anchoring Systems (for use in CMU only) Structural Metal Fasteners Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Permit Set 05090-6 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 I Ia. Adhesive: Adhesive consisting of methacrylate resin or acrylic based adhesive, hardener, cement and water. The injectable adhesive shall I consist of two components and a static mixing nozzle as recommended by the manufacturer. b. Anchor Rod or Insert: Threaded Rod or insert with chamfered threaded end for ease of starting nut on one end and 45 degree chisel or cut point on I opposite end (where insert is required by manufacturer). Furnish nuts and washers to meet the requirements of the rod or insert. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings provide hot dip galvanized rods or inserts or I stainless steel. Stainless steel rods or inserts shall be provided in buried or submerged locations. 1) ASTM A36 or A307 (standard carbon steel anchor). I 2) ASTM A193 Grade B7 (high strength carbon steel anchor). 3) Reinforcing bars as specified in Section 03200 with chisel or cut point. 4) AISI 304/ASTM A276 or AISI 316L/ASTM A276 stainless steel meeting I the mechanical requirements of ASTM F-593 (Condition CW). c. Submit a product evaluation report by ICC-ES with seismic approvals. d. Provide embedment depth, edge distance, and anchor spacing as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations Ifor published allowable loads. e. For submerged application in potable water provide NSF/ANSI STD 61 certification. I f. Manufacturer: Hilti HIT HY 150 MAX Injection Adhesive Anchor, Simpson Strong-Tie SET, AC100+ Gold by Powers Fasteners, or equal. For materials with voids and holes like hollow block provide Hilti HIT HY 20 Injection Adhesive Anchor with wire mesh screen tubes for Masonry I Construction, Simpson Strong-Tie Acrylic-Tie with ATS screens, or equal. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS IA. Turnbuckles: ASTM F1145 and AISI C-1035. IB. Eye Bolts and Eye Nuts: ASTM F541 and AISI C-1030. C. Clevises: AISI C-1035. ID. Threaded Rods (Tie Rods): ASTM A36. E. All metal fasteners not specified elsewhere. I2.03 GALVANIZING I A. Hot-dip galvanize all exterior and exposed steel items, except when specified otherwise. 1. Steel hardware, nuts, bolts, washers, anchors, and threaded rods: ASTM A153. 2. Where specified, electroplate nuts, bolts and washers with zinc coating of I 0.001-inch minimum thickness in accordance with ASTM B633 Class SC4. Where specified, provide a 4-mil DFT coating of zinc silicate. 3. Size nuts so that they screw on threaded bolts readily after galvanizing or Icoating. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Structural Metal Fasteners Project No. 6755 05090-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 B. Repair Materials: Gal-Viz by Thermacote Welco, Pasadena, CA; ReGalv by Rotometals, Inc., San Francisco, CA; or equal. 2.04 NON-SHRINK GROUT I A. See Section 03300. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION , A. Structural Steel Work: 1. Connections: a. Provide anchor bolts and other connections between structural steel and foundations. b. Set all anchor bolts by template, with provisions to hold bolts rigid and in correct position with respect to plan and elevation. c. Install adhesive and expansion anchorages by personnel with satisfactory previous experience using the same Products, following the manufacturer's recommendations and in compliance with the latest ICC-ES report. d. Detail any undesigned connections in accordance with the AISC Specification. e. Do not increase any hole diameter or slot length without the Engineer's approval. f. Washers: 1. Provide washers for slotted holes. Washers shall be hardened for high-strength bolts (fy > 36 ksi) and shall be 3/8-thick plate washer for long-slotted holes. 2. Provide washers under the turned element for bolts installed with the Calibrated Wrench Pretensioning method. 3. Provide washers for bolts installed with the Direct-Tension-Indicator Pretensioning method. 2. 3. Where metal is fastened to concrete, make the connections by anchor bolts, or by anchors embedded in concrete, such as adhesive, or expansion anchors. 4. Provide grout pads below base and bearing plates of non-shrink non-metallic grout having a minimum thickness of 3/4-inch unless otherwise noted. Do not bear directly on concrete slabs or equipment bases. 5. Provide leveling nuts on anchor bolts, below base plates, and adjust prior to grouting. 6. Where anchorage requires drilling into existing concrete, contractor shall locate all reinforcing steel at least 14 days prior to drilling and shall notify engineer of any conflicts immediately upon discovery. Contractor shall not drill through or cut any reinforcing steel without express written direction from the engineer. B. Mechanical Anchoring Systems: Mechanical anchoring systems shall be installed in accordance with the ICC-ES Evaluation Report for the specific anchor. 1. Mechanical Undercut Anchoring Systems (required for overhead applications) a. Drill a hole in the base material using drill bit diameter and embedment depth in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. ' Structural Metal Fasteners Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 05090-8 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I CAUTION: in the base anchor's material will reduce the 111 load capacity andOversized holes cannot be used. b. Remove dust from holes with compressed air. c. Assemble the anchor with the nut and washer so the top of the nut is flush with the top of the anchor. d. Place the anchor in the fixture and drive into the hole until washer and nut are tight against the fixture. e. Install nut and washer and tighten to the required installation torque. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchoring Systems a. Drill a hole in the base material using drill bit diameter and embedment depth in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. CAUTION: Oversized holes in the base material will reduce the anchor's load capacity 111 and cannot be used. b. Remove dust from holes with compressed air. c. Assemble the anchor with the nut and washer so the top of the nut is flush with the top of the anchor. d. Place the anchor in the fixture and drive into the hole until washer and nut are tight against the fixture. e. Install nut and washer and tighten to the required installation torque. C. Adhesive Anchoring Systems: Adhesive anchoring systems shall be installed in accordance with the ICC-ES Evaluation Report for the specific anchor. Adhesive anchoring systems are not allowed in overhead applications. 1. Adhesive (Ester or Epoxy) Injection Anchoring Systems a. Drill a hole to the specified depth and diameter. b. Clean hole with a wire brush. Remove dust from holes with oil-free compressed air. Jetting holes with water is not permitted. c. Install adhesives only in clean holes free of standing water. 1) Dispense portion of adhesive off to the side to check for proper mixture, and consistent color before using. 2) Fill hole halfway to 2/3rds, starting from bottom of hole to prevent air pockets. Withdraw nozzle as hole fills up. 3) Substrate temperature should be kept above the minimum allowed temperature as specified by the manufacturer for the entire curing process. 4) Insert anchor, turning slowly until the anchor contacts the bottom of the hole. Do not disturb anchor during the specified cure time. 5) For holes 10" and deeper contractor shall use a piston plug for adhesive anchor installation D. Repair of Connections: The Contractor shall pay for all necessary additional tests made on weld or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original fabrication or during erection. E. Repair of Galvanized Coating: 1. Repair surfaces damaged by cutting or welding by the method of heated zinc alloys in accordance with ASTM A780. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 111 A. Mechanical and Adhesive Anchoring Systems: stems: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Structural Metal Fasteners Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 05090-9 Permit Set 1 1 1. Anchoring systems shall be installed in accordance with the ICC-ES Evaluation Report for the specific anchor. All anchors shall be tested in accordance with paragraph 1.04C. 111 2. Set torque-controlled expansion-type anchors to the recommended installation torque using a calibrated torque wrench. Following attainment of 10% of the specified torque, 100% of the specified torque shall be reached within 7 or fewer complete turns of the nut. If the specified torque is not achieved within the required number of turns, the anchor shall be removed or abandoned. 3. Set displacement-controlled expansion-type anchors to the recommended displacement. If the concrete cracks during installation of the anchor, the anchor shall be removed or abandoned. 4. Anchors should exhibit no discernable movement during load testing. 5. Holes drilled for anchors that do not set properly or fail in a tension test may not be reused, and shall be filled with non-shrink grout. B. Erection Sequence: Verify each stage is completed before proceeding to the next. C. Tolerances: AISC Standard Practice. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Structural Metal Fasteners 05090-10 Project No.6755 Peermitrmit S Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 1 1 1 SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel, stainless steel or aluminum, such as beams, channels, angles, tees, bars, pipe, tubing and plates (connection and base plates). 2. Fabricated metal items, such as pipe supports, brackets, hangers, equipment supports, and lift hooks. 3. All anchors, eye bolts, turnbuckles, cable clamps, bolts, nuts, washers, inserts, and other metal items not specified elsewhere. 4. Fabricated tanks, hoppers, and similar structures, if not specified elsewhere. ' 5. All structural metal framing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05090: Structural Metal Fasteners ' 2. Section 05310: Steel Deck 3. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications 4. Section 09912: Interior Painting 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association: ' 1. AA Manual-Aluminum Design Manual B. American Institute of Steel Construction Specifications: 1. ANSI/AISC 360-05 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 1 2. ANSI/AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings Including Supplement No.1 C. Research Council on Structural Connections: II. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2004 D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). E. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI H35-1 Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum F. ASTM International (ASTM) Standard Specifications: 1. ASTM A36 Structural Steel 2. ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless 3. ASTM A108 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality 4. ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel I5. ASTM A153 ProductsZinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Structural Metal Framing Project No. 6755 05100-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 6. ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes I 7. ASTM A370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products 8. ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 9. ASTM A653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process I 10. ASTM A992 Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing 11. ASTM B633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel 12. ASTM C827 Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures 13. ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink) 14. ASTM E8 Test Methods for Tension Testing of Metallic Materials 15. ASTM E165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Inspection 16. ASTM E709 Practice for Magnetic Particle Examination 17. ASTM F2329 Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners G. American Welding Society: ' 1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code- Steel 2. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code-Aluminum 3. AWS D10.4 Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing 4. AWS A4.3-93R Standard Methods for Determination of the Diffusible Hydrogen Content of Martensitic, Bainitic, and Ferritic Steel Weld Metal Produced by Arc Welding 5. AWS A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes 6. AWS A5.3 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Electrodes for Shielded 111Metal Arc Welding 7. AWS A5.4 Covered Corrosion-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Welding Electrodes 8. AWS A5.5 Low Alloy Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes 9. AWS A5.9 Corrosion-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Base and Composite Metal Cored and Stranded Welding Electrodes and Welding Rods 10. AWS A5.10 Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bare Welding Rods and Electrodes 11. ANSI/AWS B4.0-98 Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds- U.S. Customary 111 12. AWS B5.1-2003 Standard for the Qualification of Welding Inspectors 13. AWS C4.1 Oxygen Cutting Surface Roughness Gauge and Wall Chart for Criteria Describing Oxygen-Cut Surfaces I H. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT): 1. ASNT SNT TC-1 a-2001 Recommended Practice for the Training and Testing of Nondestructive Testing Personnel 2. ANSI/ASNT CP-189-2001 Standard for the Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel I. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA): 1 Structural Metal Framing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 05100-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I1. FEMA 350 Recommended Seismic Design n Crit g ena for New Steel Moment-Frame Buildings, July 2000 III J. International Code Council (ICC) K. International Building Code (IBC) 2012 Edition with Amendments adopted in the IState of Oregon 2014 Structural Specialty Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1A. Submit in Accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Hangers, pipe and equipment supports (shelf items). 1 2. Stainless steel and aluminum items (not fabricated). 3. Certified mill test results on structural metals. 4. Electrode manufacturer's data and product data, including electrodes to be I used for dissimilar metals. 5. Insulation between dissimilar metals. 6. Manufacturer's product data sheets or catalog data for SMAW, FCAW and GMAW composite (cored) filler metals to be used. I 7. Non-shrink grout. C. Samples: Manufacturer's latest standard product. ID. Shop and Erection Drawings: 1. Structural framing. 2. Connection material specifications. 3. Locations and dimensions of protected zones. 4. Gusset and base plates drawn to scale. 5. Locations of pretensioned bolts. 6. Field assembly or erection sequence. IE. Quality Assurance: 1. Welder performance qualification test records "welder's certification". 2. Written Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) in accordance with I AWS D1.1 requirements for each different welded joint proposed for use whether prequalified or qualified by testing. 3. Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) in accordance with AWS 1.1 for all procedures qualified by testing. 4. Fabricator's and Erector's AISC Certifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. General: 1. Furnish materials and fabricated items from an established and reputable manufacturer or supplier. Fabricator and Erector shall both be AISC certified for the work that they are performing. 2. Supply all new materials and fabricated items made from first class ingredients and construction and guaranteed to perform the service required. I 3. The Contractor is responsible for preparing and submitting written WPSs. WPSs for each joint type shall indicate proper AWS qualification and be available where welding is performed. WPSs shall be included with any shop I drawings referencing welds. WPSs shall include the manufacturer and specific electrode. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Structural Metal Framing 05100-3 Permit Set I K/J Project No. 1376013"70 4. Quality control and quality uali assurance shall be provided in accordance with I AISC 341 Appendix Q. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Metalwork: a. Steel: AISC Specification. b. Aluminum: AA Manual. 2. Welding: a. Steel: AWS D1.1. b. Aluminum: AWS D1.2. c. Stainless Steel: AWS D10.4. 3. Welders: a. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, 111position, and joint configuration. b. All welding operators are subject to examination for requalification at any time during the progress of the work. C. Tests: 1. General: The Owner will provide Special Inspection, defined by IBC Section 1704, for welding and high-strength bolting. Visual welding inspection and nondestructive testing (NDT) shall be conducted in accordance with a written practice by personnel qualified in accordance with AISC 341 Appendix W. 2. Weld Tests: By a testing laboratory, selected by Engineer and paid by Owner. a. Visual inspection: 1) Check fit-up of joint materials. Verify satisfactory alignment of material. Verify gaps and bevels of penetration welds. 2) Check during welding. Verify satisfactory technique is used. 3) Check after welding completed and cleaned by wire brush or chipping hammer. 4) Inspect with magnification when necessary and under strong, adequate light. 5) Inspect for the following defects: a) Surface cracking. b) Porosity. c) Excessive roughness. d) Unfilled craters. e) Gas pockets. f) Undercuts. g) Overlaps. h) Size. i) Insufficient throat and concavity. b. Nondestructive testing: Ultrasonic testing, except where not feasible due to the type or location of the weld. Magnetic particle, liquid penetrant or radiograph tests when ultrasonic testing is not feasible. 1) Ultrasonic inspection technique and standards: AWS D1.1 Part C. 2) Particle inspection method: ASTM E709. 3) Penetrant inspection method: ASTM E165. 4) Radiography tests: AWS D1.1, Part B. 5) Charpy V-Notch (CVN). Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 StructuralMetal Framing 05100-4 Project No.6755 Peermitrmit S Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 a) When they are used as members in the Seismic Resisting Force System, ASTM A6, Group 3 shapes with flanges 1% inches thick and thicker, ASTM A6 Groups 4 and 5 shapes, and plates that are 1%-inch thick or thicker in built- up cross sections shall have a minimum CVN toughness of ' 20 ft-lbs. at 70°F. b) All complete joint penetration groove welds used in the Seismic Force Resisting System shall be made with a filler metal that has a minimum CVN toughness of 20 ft-lbs at ' minus 20°F, as determined by AWS classification or manufacturer certification Ultrasonic inspection technique and standards: AWS D1.1 Part C. c. Extent of testing: 1) Visual inspection of all welds. 2) Measurement of weld profiles for 25% of all welds at random. 3) Magnetic particle examination or liquid penetrant examination 1 performed on root pass and on finished welds for 25% of all shear plate, stiffener plate, column base plate, gusset plate, and miscellaneous fillet welds. 4) Ultrasonic contact examination on all complete joint penetration (CJP) welds. See Drawings for CJP welded beam or girder to column moment connections. Defective welds shall be repaired and costs of retesting defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor. D. Additional Tests: Provide and pay for all necessary additional tests made on welds or bolts required to repair or replace faulty work performed during the original fabrication. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle, ship and store material in a manner that will prevent distortion, rust, damage to the shop coat or any other damage. B. Store material in a clean, properly drained location out of contact with the ground. C. Ensure that dissimilar metals are not in contact with each other. ' D. Replace or repair all damaged material in an approved manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL MEMBERS A. W-Shapes and WT-Shapes: ASTM A992, fy = 50 ksi, fu = 65 ksi. B. M-, S-, and HP-Shapes and Channels, Angles, Structural Tees, Plates and Similar Items: ASTM A36, fy = 36 ksi, fu = 58 ksi. Except plates for W-Shapes and WT-Shapes ASTM A572, Grade 50. C. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): Rectangular and square, ASTM A500, Grade B, fy = 46 ksi, fu = 58 ksi. Round, ASTM A500, Grade B, fy =42 ksi, = 58 ksi. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Type E or S, Grade B, fy = 35 ksi, f° = 60 ksi. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Structural Metal Framing Project No. 6755 05100-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL ARTICLES I A. Material: AISI Type 304, unless Type 316 is specifically specified. B. Channels, Angles and Structural Tees: ASTM A276. 2.03 FABRICATED ALUMINUM ITEMS A. Material: ANSI H35-1 Alloy and Temper 6061-T6 with an anodized finish. I B. Surfaces in Contact With Concrete or Masonry: Shop prime with a bituminous mastic or zinc chromate coating. I C. Bolted Connections: Provide stainless steel fasteners. 2.04 METAL FASTENINGS A. See Section 05090. 2.05 WELDING ELECTRODES, FILLER METALS A. Steel: 1. AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E70XX category. 2. AWS A5.20, A5.29, E7XTX-X except-2, -3, -10, -GS for FCAW. 3. AWS A5.17 or A5.23, F7XX-EXXX for SAW. B. Stainless Steel: AWS A5.4 or A5.9. C. Aluminum: AWS A5.3 or A5.10. D. For welding dissimilar metals, submit the appropriate electrodes for Product Review. I 2.06 GALVANIZING A. Hot-dip galvanize all exterior and exposed steel items, except when specified otherwise. 1. Sheet steel, plain or shaped: ASTM A653, coating designation G 90. 2. Products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8-inch-thick or heavier: ASTM A123. 3. Structural tubing and pipe: ASTM A53 4. Grind smooth fabricated items at welded joints, edges, and corners, and galvanize after fabrication. 1 5. Items that are specified to receive paint or a coating after galvanizing shall receive no post treatment baths and shall not be stacked or stored in a wet environment until coated. B. Repair Materials: Gal-Viz by Thermacote Welco, Pasadena, CA; ReGaly by Rotometals, Inc., San Francisco, CA; or equal. 2.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. See Section 03300. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Furnish all items required to complete the project, but not specified herein, not I specified in Section 05500. Structural Metal Framing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 05100-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013''70 i 2.09 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel Work: Comply with the applicable provisions of the AISC Specification, the AISC Standard Practice and AWS D1.1. Weld only in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs, which are to be available to welders and inspectors during the production process. Provide workmanship equal to standard commercial practice in modern structural shops. 1. Fabricate and assemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible, and deliver to the project as a unit ready for installation. Coordinate the work, ' making all provisions necessary for the passage of all applicable work into, and attachment to, the structures. Make joints carefully and neatly, with corners mitered and spliced, bolted, screwed, or welded together. 2. Make proper allowance for the expansion and contraction of the metals, and of the materials to which they are fastened. 3. Make completely watertight joints on exterior work. 4. Shape all members correctly, with no kinks, twists, dents, or other blemishes ' prior to erection. Evenly spring all curved work. 5. Make exposed edges free of burrs, sharp edges or corners. Make corners rounded or chamfered. Grind exposed welds smooth when specified. 6. Include supplementary parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work may not be definitely specified. Provide all such miscellaneous metalwork required by the project in accordance with good accepted standard practice. ' 7. Review monorail supports and splices with the hoist manufacturer. 8. Shop prime all items that are not galvanized or epoxy coated, including connection angles, using a material compatible with the finish coat, as specified in Section 09912. Provide finish paint coats as specified in Section 09912. B. Stainless Steel Work: I1. Use the proper type of stainless steel electrodes or welding rods complying with AWS D10.4. Grind all welded joints smooth and polished, using wheels never used on carbon steel. Provide welds that eliminate injury to stainless steel parts in appearance, strength and resistance to corrosion. 2. Remove by grinding and polishing, all scratches, marks, pits and other blemishes on exposed surfaces incurred during fabrication of the material, until the entire surface possesses the same finish as the adjacent work. C. Aluminum Work: 1. Comply with the applicable provisions of the AA Manual and AWS D1.2. 2. Back painting: When aluminum is in contact, such as with concrete, mortar, masonry, or adsorptive materials subject to wetting, including condensation, give the contact surfaces a brush coat of cut-back asphaltic, or coal tar paint. Submit paint for favorable review. D. Base and Bearing Plates: Furnish under all columns, pipe supports, including rack type, supports for tanks, equipment frames and cabinets, and similar items. Provide rounded or chamfered corners. E. Dissimilar Metals: Insulate the faying surfaces with a brush coat of cut-back asphaltic or coal tar paint or by gasketing. Submit for favorable review. ' F. Metals in contact with cementitous or other material: Provide finish coating prior to erection. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Structural Metal Framing Project No. 6755 05100-7 Permit Set 111K/J Project No. 1376013"70 i 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Material Tests: Not required for materials identified with valid mill test records. 1. Unidentified materials: Test samples from each 20 tons of each material, or fraction thereof. Perform tension and bend tests, conforming to ASTM A370 for steel. Perform tension tests conforming to ASTM E8 for aluminum. 2. Do not provide unidentified stainless steel. B. Welding: 1. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. 2. Weld only in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs, which are to be available to welders and inspectors during the production process. C. Tolerances: AISC Standard Practice. D. Fabrication Tests: Standard and extent: See paragraph 1.04. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.01 ERECTION A. Structural Steel Work: 1. Erect members in accordance with the AISC Specification, and the AISC Standard Practice except as modified. 2. Incorrect fabrication or damaged members: a. When a condition exists whereby parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly as a result of errors in fabrication, or of deformation due to handling or transportation, report the condition immediately. The method of correction must be approved before any corrective work is done. Make the corrective work in the presence of the Engineer. b. Straighten plates and angles or other shapes using approved methods. c. Do not heat already heat-treated parts for straightening. 3. Connections: a. Provide anchor bolts and other connections between structural steel and foundations. See Specification Section 05090 for additional connection requirements. b. Set all anchor bolts by template, with provisions to hold bolts rigid and in correct position with respect to plan and elevation. c. Detail any undesigned connections in accordance with the AISC Specification d. Do not increase any hole diameter or slot length without the Engineer's approval. 4. Install work anchored in sleeves set in concrete with non-metallic non-shrink grout. Allow a 'A-inch minimum clearance between items anchored and the sleeve. 5. Where metal is fastened to concrete, make the connections by anchor bolts, or by fastenings embedded in concrete, such as adhesive, or expansion anchors, installed in accordance with Specification Section 05090. Contractor shall not substitute post-installed fasteners for cast-in-place bolts without prior written permission from the Engineer. Structural Metal Framing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 05100-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 1 1 6. Provide a 4-inch band of coal-tar epoxy in air, to galvanized or painted steel, partially embedded n concrete and sin concrete and ubject ' to weathering. 7. Provide grout pads below base and bearing plates of non-shrink non-metallic grout having a minimum thickness of 3/4-inch unless otherwise noted. Do not ' bear directly on concrete slabs or equipment bases. 8. Provide leveling nuts on anchor bolts, below base plates, and adjust prior to grouting. 9. Complete the work square, plumb, straight and true, accurately fitted, and ' with tight joints and intersections. B. Welding: ' 1. Weld only in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs, which are to be available to welders and inspectors during the production process. Perform all welding by the shielded electric arc method in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Repair and make additional inspections, at the Contractor's expense, of the ' weld areas which have been rejected as a result of inspection. Follow this procedure until the welds are acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. 4. All tack welds shall be of the same quality as the final welds. This includes preheat requirements. All tack welds not incorporated in the final welds shall be removed. C. Repair of Galvanized Coating: 1. Repair surfaces damaged by cutting or welding by the method of heated zinc ' alloys in accordance with ASTM A780. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Welding: ' 1. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1 for each process, position, and joint configuration. 2. The Owner's testing agency will inspect shop or field welding for conformance with AWS D1.1 requirements and will verify that welds are made in accordance with favorably reviewed WPSs. B. Erection Sequence: Verify each stage is completed before proceeding to the next. C. Tolerances: AISC Standard Practice. D. Erection Tests: Standard and extent: See paragraph 1.04. END OF SECTION 1 111 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Structural Metal Framing K/J Project No. 1376013*70 05100-9 Permit Set SECTION 05310 STEEL DECKING (STRUCTURAL) PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install all decking, including connectors, accessories, closures and all pieces required to make the decking complete. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Section 05100: Structural Metal Framing 3. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications ' 4. Section 09912: Interior Painting 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. American Iron and Steel Institute: 1. AISI Manual Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual ' B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A446 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality 2. ASTM A525 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip ' 3. ASTM A780 ProcessRepair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings ' C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel 2. AWS A5.1 Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes D. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, Loss Prevention Data: 1. FM 1-28 Insulated Steel Deck 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: 1. Metal deck unit cross-section, with dimensions and section properties. 2. Accessories and methods of installation, including reinforcement at openings. 3. Deck unit manufacturer's installation directions. 4. Welding equipment data, including type, voltage and amperage. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Metal deck units, details and layouts. 1 2. Erection sequence and procedure. rDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Steel Decking(Structural) Project No. 6755 05310- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 3. Welded connection location, type and sequence. I 4. Size and number of openings to be cut. 5. Indicate both fire-resistance-rated construction and non-rated construction. 111 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. AISI Manual. 2. AWS 01.3. 3. FM 1.28. I B. Welding Procedures: AWS D1.3. C. Welders: 1. Satisfy AWS D1.3 qualification procedure. 2. All welding operators are subject to examination for requalification at any time during the progress of the work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Before erection, stack the decking stored at the site on platforms or pallets and cover to provide a weathertight enclosure. I B. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken packages in a dry area until ready for installation. C. Do not use metal decking for storage or as a working platform. Do not damage or I overload roof decking during construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.01 STRUCTURAL-QUALITY STEEL SHEETS A. ASTM A446, Grade A and hot-dip galvanize to ASTM A525, Type G90. I 2.02 ELECTRODES FOR MANUAL SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING A. AWS D1.3: Provide covered mild steel electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1, I E60 Series. 2.03 GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT I A. ASTM A780: High-zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel. I 2.04 DECKING A. Metal Deck Units: 1. Fabricate with the specified structural-quality steel sheets. 2. Refer to Drawings for sheet thickness and section properties. 3. Provide fluted or corrugated section with interlocking type side laps. B. Length of Deck Units: Span three or more spacings where possible. I C. Metal Closures Between Decking and Other Construction: Fabricate from the specified structural-quality steel sheets not less than nominal 0.0478-inch I(18-gauge)thick before galvanizing. Steel Decking(Structural) Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Permit Set 05310-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 D. Provide the configuration required to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of flutes and sides of the roof decking. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install metal deck units and accessories in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings, descriptive data and as specified. B. Do not exceed carrying capacity of decking with construction loads. C. Do not use decking for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position. 3.02 WELDING A. Comply with AWS D1.3. 3.03 PLACING DECK UNITS A. Verify that supporting members are completely in place and interconnected before the placing is started. B. Place units on the supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends bearing on the supporting members accurately aligned, end to end, before being permanently fastened. Provide not less than 3 inches of end bearing. C. Place deck units in straight alignment for the entire length of run and with close ' alignment between flutes at ends of abutting deck units. Place and align the units to maintain the required number of units indicated on the approved Shop Drawings and to prevent stretching or contracting of the sidelap interlocks. ' 3.04 FASTENING DECK UNITS A. Fasten to the steel supporting members at ends and at intermediate supports by ' fusion welds. Refer to Drawings for weld size and spacing. Coordinate the welding sequence and procedure with the placing of deck units. B. For all spans, lock sidelaps between adjacent deck units together as noted on ' Drawings or at intervals not exceeding 18 inches on centers by welding. C. Reject any units with unwelded blowholes. ' 3.05 JOINT COVERS A. Provide pressure sensitive tape for abutting ends of the deck units. 3.06 HANGER SUPPORTS A. Reinforce local deckingarea a ea to receive hangers for support of the ceiling construction, air ducts, diffusers and lighting fixtures as indicated on Drawings. 3.07 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Perform where indicated and as required for the passage of other work projecting ' through, or adjacent to, the decking. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Steel Decking(Structural) Project No. 6755 05310-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 r I B. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces, as required for ' strength, continuity of the decking, or the support of other work. 3.08 METAL CLOSURES 1 A. Provide metal closures for open ends of flutes at openings, walls and other building construction and to close openings between decking and other building construction. Tack weld metal closures in position. 3.09 TOUCHUP PAINTING AND GALVANIZING A. Prior to installation, provide the specified final coating on any surfaces that cannot be painted after erection. Refer to Section 09912 for painting procedure. B. After completion of decking installation, wire brush, clean and touchup scarred areas on the top and bottom surfaces of the metal decking and on the surface of supporting steel members. Scarred areas include welds, weld scars, bruises and rust spots. Touchup galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair material. Refer to Section 05500 for galvanizing repair procedure. END OF SECTION I 1 1 I 1 I Steel Decking(Structural) Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 05310-4 Project No.6755 KM Project No. 1376013"70 I SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Work of this Section requires seismic bracing of components as further described in Section 01190, Seismic Requirements. ' C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01190: Seismic Requirements 2. Section 03300: Cast-In-Place Concrete 1 1.02 REFERENCES 1 A. Definitions 1. Structural Drawings: "S" series drawings of the Contract Documents. 2. Drawings: Contract Document drawing set. 3. Exposed to View: Readily apparent to the public in normal use of the structure. A view distance of 20 feet is consistent with the intent of this definition. 1 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: For the following: ' Metal Fabrications Permit Set 05500-1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 2. 1 1. NonslipPaint aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. products. 3. Grout. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. I E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. I F. Welding certificates. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." I 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code- Stainless Steel." 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous I with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.07 COORDINATION I A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop I primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, I including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.01 GENERAL A. Availability: During bidding, confirm availability of all products and notify Owner's 111 Representative of any that cannot be provided. B. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Fabrications I Project No.6550 05500-2 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 2.02 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. ' B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. C. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. ' F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches, unless specified or indicated otherwise. ' 2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.105-inch nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 ; ' 0.0966-inch minimum thickness. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication for all members permanently exposed to weather, humid conditions, freeze protected (semi-conditioned) spaces, or unconditioned spaces. 1 2.03 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. rB. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. 2.04 FASTENERS— refer to Section 05090. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 1 A. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 land compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. ' D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. ' 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL ' A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use ' Metal Fabrications Permit Set 05500-3 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. I B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly'and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. , D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: ' 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing. , F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches , with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 1 A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. ' B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. Fabricate units for seismic requirements as indicated in Division 01 section "Seismic Requirements" 2. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 3. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Fabrications Project No. 6550 05500-4 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 r I C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 1 1. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners. 2.08 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates. 1 2.09 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other s, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL ' A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. tB. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. C. For embedded angles at concrete loading dock edges. Paint yellow to comply with ANSI Z535.1. 1 2.12 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the 1 Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). 1 ' Metal Fabrications Permit Set 05500 5 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1 1. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.02 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS I A. For furnishing seismic bracing for mechanical, electrical, and plumbing see specification Divisions 11-17, Structural Drawings, and M,-,E-,P-,T- series drawings of the Contract Documents. If not specifically noted, follow the general installation criteria of this specification section or notify the Owner's Representative for instructions. B. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 3.03 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES ' A. Clean concrete bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Fabrications Project No.6550 05500-6 Permit Set 111 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids ' remain. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. ' B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. areas and END OF SECTION 1 1 I t I 1 1 ' Metal Fabrications Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 05500-7 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I SECTION 06105 I MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY IPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY IA. This Section Includes the Following: 1. Wood Blocking and Nailers. 2. Wood Sleepers, where required. IB. Related Sections include: 1. Other Sections of Division 07 for interior architectural woodwork. 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Drawings: Contract Document drawing set. I B. Exposed to View: Readily apparent to the public in normal use of the structure. A view distance of 20 feet is consistent with the intent of this definition. IC. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches I nominal in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the I following: 1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 2. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. I B. Product Data: For each type of process and facto - ry fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative I retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated I temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to I Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Miscellaneous Carpentry Project No. 6550 06105- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with current edition of the Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC): 111 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING D. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. E. Deliver interior wood materials to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. Provide lumber graded by one of the agencies listed above. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 2.02 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to Owner's Representative and containing no arsenic or chromium. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 1 D. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. E. Treat items installed in conjunction with roofing and metal flashings. 2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 1 F. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber), Pyro-Guard by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Dricon FRT by Arch Wood Protection, or equal. 111 Miscellaneous Carpentry Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 06105-2 Project No.6550 111 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 I G. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities having Jurisdiction. H. Treat exterior blocking, sleepers, and nailers, typ. I. Treat interior blocking, sleepers, and nailers noted with the term "FRP" on the Drawings. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type required that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture and Section 05090. 1. Where work is pressure-preservative treated, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. D. Screws for Fasteningto Light gage 9 g ge Steel Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened but with not less than 3 full threads penetration into stud. E. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. 1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Substrate Moisture Testing, General: Perform tests recommended by applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring." C. Concrete Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test per ASTM F 1869, as follows: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 Miscellaneous Carpentry K/J Project No. 1376013'70 06105-3 Permit Set I 1 1. P 'odnareat with test 0areas evenlypspacednon less erform thantests 2 testssothat in each eachtest installatareae t installation area. 2. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor- emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances bs ncon stt s noil, that are incompatible with installation adhesives and that soap, wax, r silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. I B. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before rrsduct alkaline installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.04 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Provide blocking as indicated. C. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative- ' treated lumber. Use inorganic boron. E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate. I F. Use screws, bolts and/or members. d nstariven ll fastens s without splitting woodeners; do not use . Make tight connections between 3.05 WOOD NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to o sh pes ' s indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. Miscellaneous Carpentry Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 06105-4 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 1 3.06 PROTECTING C. Protect treated wood with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, I inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 1 1 I r t i I I I 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Miscellaneous Carpentry Project No. 6550 06105-5 Permit Set 111K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 SECTION 07200 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 —GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. The WORK specified in this Section includes the requirements for 1 furnishing and installing thermal building insulation as designated in the Contract. ' 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. References 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 1 b. ASTM D1621 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics c. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ' d. ASTM E154 - 08a Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover 1 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) B. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products 1 e na "R-values,"they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivityardesig (k-valuestedby ). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivity's are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees Fahrenheit between the 2 exposed faces required to cause 1 BTU to flow through 1 square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1 B. Product Data: For each type ofroduct indicated. ated. 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in arom ndrytion Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 Thermal Insulation K/J Project No. 1376013"70 07200-1 Permit Set 1 1 location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, I storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: I 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. ' PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM D 1621, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Provide one of the following or equal: a. Dow Chemical Company b. Owens Corning. c. Atlas EPS 2. R-value: At walls R-15 and at ceiling R-20 B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. ' C. Vapor Retarders 1. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM E154 - 08a, 6 milsthick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. 2. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft.with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. a. Products: Provide one of the following or equal: 1) Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6VWV. 2) Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. 3. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 4. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. 5. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use 0 related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. 6. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. Thermal Insulation Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07200-2 Project No. 6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I I PART 3— EXECUTION I3.01 CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.02 PREPARATION I A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulationr o vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor Iretarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.03 INSTALLATION IA. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. IB. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. I C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. ID. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple I layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. E. Installation of Insulation for Framed Construction I1. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use I mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 2. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form I a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. IF. Installation of Insulation for Concrete Substrates 1. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively I attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: a. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors I according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. b. Show width of cavity on Drawings. 1 c. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Thermal Insulation Project No. 6550 07200-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 I I d. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by I pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking I care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. e. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. G. Installation of Vapor Retarders 1. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated I substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. 2. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. a. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, andI bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. b. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to I flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor- I retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid I substrates. 3. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. 4. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other WORK. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or I another layer of vapor retarders. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse I and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. I END OF SECTION I I Thermal Insulation Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 07200-4 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I SECTION 07421 IMETAL WALL PANELS IPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY IA. Section Includes: 1. Exterior Wall Cladding#1, including Z furring channels. 1 2. Exterior Soffit Panels. B. Work of this Section requires seismic bracing of components as further described in Section 01190, Seismic Requirements. I C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05100: Structural Metal Framing I 2. Section 05500: Metal Fabrications 3. Section 07620: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim I1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Structural Drawings: "S"series drawings of the Contract Documents. I 2. Drawings: Contract Document drawing set. 3. Exposed to View: Readily apparent to the public in normal use of the structure. A view distance of 20 feet is consistent with the intent of this definition. 1 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS I A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. IB. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: I1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: Ia. Lateral Wind Criteria as indicated on General Structural Notes of Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design loads: a. Lateral Seismic Criteria as indicated on General Structural Notes of IDrawings. 3. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. 4. Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, I I thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Wall Panels Project No. 6550 07421 - 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 or fracturing o.f attachments or components of system are not permitted in the installed work. 5. Design system so panels can be removed without removing or disrupting adjacent panels or materials. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, failure of joints, overstressing of components, 'oil canning', failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. D. Pressure Equalized Performance: 1. No streaming water or droplets/mist on more than 5% of exterior wall insulation in accordance with AAMA 508-07. I 2. Meet or exceed specified design and performance requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit in accordance in to Section 01300. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of wall panel and accessory. I C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, Z furring channels and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Show panel layouts, panel attachment, jointing, dimensions, sizes and locations of cutouts, relation to work of other trades, and other pertinent data and information. 2. Indicate and dimension adjoining, abutting and penetrating work, performed by other trades. 3. Number each panel to correspond to the markings shown on the fabrication drawings. Mark the identification number on the back of each panel. 4. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1- 1/2 inches per 12 inches : a. Flashing and trim. 5. The drawings and calculations shall bear the seal of an Oregon-registered professional engineer. The engineer shall also perform and submit structural calculations to document all panel conditions. D. Samples: For each type of metal wall panel indicated with factory-applied color finishes as specified by Owner's Representative: Metal Wall Panels Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07421 -2 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I 1. Prior to fabrication, submit 12-inch square preliminary samples panels of each Itype showing corners,jointing, special shapes, and other atypical conditions. 2. Samples will serve as the control for limiting acceptable range of appearance. E. Qualification Data: For Installer and Fabricator. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. I G. Field quality-control reports. IH. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS IA. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE IB. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: I1. Single firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the fabrication and erection of panel systems of similar sizes, shapes and finishes required for this Project. I 2. Firm must be regularly engaged in the engineering, fabrication, finishing and installation, of similar work and be licensed to engineer Z-furring and related fasteners. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single manufacturer. ID. Mockups: See specification 01450 Quality Requirements. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. I1. Meet with Owner, Owner's Representative, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal wall panel Installer, metal wall panel manufacturer's representative, structural- support Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects metal wall I panels, including installers of doors, windows, and louvers. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and I avoid delays. 3. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including Ialignment between and attachment to structural members. 5. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels. I 6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Wall Panels Project No.6550 07421 -3 Permit Set I K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 7. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after installation. I 8. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during I transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, I twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable I weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. I D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel installation. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS I A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed accordingI to manufacturers'written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening I dimensions by field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of supporting metal wall framing assembly, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.10 WARRANTY I A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or I workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. I Metal Wall Panels Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 07421 -4 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 1 B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which ' manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. I1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. ' b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years minimum from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR (METAL) WALL CLADDING#1 AND SOFFIT PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. ' B. Flush-Profile Metal Wall Panels: Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges with flush joint between panels. 1. Available Products: a. Prestige Series (Basis of Design) by AEP-Span, Tacoma Washington, ' (800) 733-4955; www.aepspan.com. b. Or Approved Equivalent by: 1) Metal Sales Mfr. Corp. (Basis of Design), Kent Washington. (800) 431-3470. www.metalsales.us.com 2) Centria Architectural Systems, Moon Township, Pennsylvania, (412) 299 - 8317 www.centria.com 3) Metecno-Morin., Fontana California, (800) 700-6140 www.morincorp.com ' 2. Metal Sheet Thickness: 20 gauge, Zinc-coated steel sheet—conforming to ASTM A792 Zincalume/Galvalume. 3. Metal Sheet Thickness: 24 gauge, Zinc-coated steel sheet—conforming to ASTM A792 Zincalume/Galvalume only at exterior soffit panels. 4. Panel Size ' a. Exterior Soffit Panels Soffits: Full 12-inch Panel, with 2 ribs spaced 4 inches on center, perforated. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Wall Panels Project No.6550 07421 -5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I b. Metal Wall Cladding 1, Wall Panel 1 per detail 2/A104 Flush Panel 12-inch c. Metal Wall Cladding 1, Wall Panel 2 per detail 2/A104: Flush Panel 11- inch up, 1-inch down d. Metal Wall Cladding 1, Wall Panel 3 per detail 2/A104: Flush Panel 10- inch up, 2-inch down e. Metal Wall Cladding 1,Wall Panel 4 per detail 2/A104: Flush Panel 6-inch up, 6-inch down 5. Exterior Finish: Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) coil coating with 70 percent ' Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin content, or pre-approved equivalent. Use compatible UV-resistant primer, and overall finish thickness to satisfy performance criteria and warranty requirements of this Section. , 6. Exterior Color: a. Exterior Soffit Panels: AEP Span Cool Regal White (Color#3). b. Exterior Wall Cladding #1 (Wall Panels, 1, 2, 3, 4): AEP Span Cool Zactique (Color#1). 7. Interior Finish: a. Primer Coat Material: Corrosion-resistant primer; primer coat dry film thickness: 0.15 mils; finish coat material: polyester paint, finish coat dry film thickness: 0.35 mils. b. Color: Off-White to Light Gray 8. Sidelap Sealant: Factory apply sealant, except where no sealant is required. Field-applied sealant is not acceptable. C. Z Furring Channel: a. Provide G90 galvanized steel of gauge and spacing required for metal wall panel system structural requirements and as recommended by the panel manufacturer in accordance with approved shop drawings and local code. b. To avoid galvanic reaction, separate dissimilar materials. D. Flashings and Trim: I 1. Metal Flashing, Fascias, and Trim: a. Formed from 0.030-inch (22 gauge) minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating b. Material, color, and finish to match adjacent wall panels. c. Material, color, and finish of trim at window surround trim at Window types B & C to match clear anodized aluminum finish. d. Conform to provisions of Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." e. At head and sill flashing, provide end dams with turn up not less than 2". l I C Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Wall Panels P Permit Set 07421 -6 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 2. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide ' finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to: finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. a. Locations include, but are not limited to: Perforated vent flashings, bases, ' drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps (coping), reveals, and fillers. b. See Drawings and Wall Panel Manufacturers' recommended details for additional information. Clarify any issues with Owner's Representative in writing during bidding and before installation. 3. Panel and Flashing Closures: Manufacturer's metal closures for selected panel ' profile to ensure snug fit to panel configuration. a. Material, color, and finish to match adjacent exterior wall cladding #1 at soffit panel end closures at adjacent walls, gutters, and rakes. b. Material, color, and finish to match metal soffit panels for end closures and trim at lights, security cameras, soffit transition, and door canopy downspout. 4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefinfoam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. ' 5. Cutting and Fitting: a. Make all cuts neat, square, and true. b. Saw-cut panels, de-burr edges, and clean filings from adjacent surfaces. E. Fasteners: 1. Supply concealed fasteners and clips tested to meet provisions of this section, as approved by fastener manufacturer and metal panel vendor. 2. Concealed Sheet Metal Fasteners: Panhead, self-drilling, self-tapping, non- corrosive fasteners, as instructed by panel manufacturer. 3. Fastener Lengths: Penetrate Wall Framing Assembly, and other metal framing systems in accordance with the fastener manufacturer's recommendations. F. Panel Sealants: 1 1. Conform to Section 07920 "Joint Sealants" and manufacturer's instructions. 1 G. Field-Installed Thermal Insulation: 1. Refer to Section 07200 "Thermal Insulation"for specified Wall Board Insulation. 2.02 EXTERIOR CUSTOM SHEET ' A. General: Provide custom sheet metal shapes designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Wall Panels Project No. 6550 07421 -7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. , B. Custom Sheet Metal: Solid shapes formed using sheet metal with flush joint between panels. 1. Metal Sheet Thickness: Section 07620, Zinc-coated steel sheet — conforming to ASTM A792 Zincalume/Galvalume. 2. Exterior Finish: Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) coil coating with 70 percent Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 resin content, or pre-approved equivalent. Use compatible UV-resistant primer, and overall finish thickness to satisfy performance criteria and warranty requirements of this Section. 3. Exterior Color: a. Sheet Metal Vertical Elements, see drawings for locations: AEP Span Cool Metallic Silver(Color#2). b. Sheet Metal Surrounds, see drawings for locations: AEP Span Cool Metallic Silver(Color#2). 1 4. Interior Finish: a. Primer Coat Material: Corrosion-resistant primer; primer coat dry film thickness: 0.15 mils; finish coat material: polyester paint, finish coat dry film 111 thickness: 0.35 mils. b. Color: Off-White to Light Gray 5. Sidelap Sealant: Field-applied sealant is acceptable.. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories (All Claddings): Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. Metal Wall Panels Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07421 -8 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I I C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for Ifull length of panel. D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator I strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with I recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. I 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. I 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate as specified by manufacturer with dry joint seams. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. I 4. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners I are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall Ipanel manufacturer. a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" I or metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. I2.04 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. I B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. IC. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacentieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approvedp g Samples. I Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Metal Wall Panels Project No.6550 07421 -9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I PART 3- EXECUTION I 3.01 EXAMINATION I A. Examine structure that will support the metal panel framing system. Verify elevation, tolerances, embedments, offset lines, and other conditions, which would affect the I satisfactory installation and performance of the panels. B. Correct unsuitable conditions before proceeding with installation. 3.02 PREPARATION I A. Verify supports are secure, within tolerances acceptable to the Installer, and properly aligned and prepared to receive panels. I B. Prepare surfaces to be in contact with panels and panel surfaces in compliance with materials manufacturers' recommendations and those of both panel fabricator and wall framing assembly fabricator prior to installation of panels to supports. 3.03 INSTALLATION I A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Install panels as directed by panel fabricator and wall framing assembly fabricator. Anchor metal I wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. I 2. Install trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 3. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 4. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. a. Color to match surrounding wall penetrated. B. Fasteners: 1. Use fasteners as directed by wall panel fabricator. I a. Use stainless-steel fasteners if fastener type is not specified by fabricator. b. Color match exposed fasteners to match the surrounding wall panel, unless specified otherwise. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Metal Wall Panels Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07421 - 10 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I D. w weathertightJointSealers:performanceInstallgaskets of metaland wallsealants panel assemblieshereindicated, as requiredandwhere byrequired metal walforl II panel manufacturer. Provide types of gaskets and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." E. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap and splice ribbed sheets as specified by metal wall panel manufacturer. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. I3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to 111 compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. 5. Seal gaps between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer and Owner's Representative. I 3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION IA. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings Iand other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written I installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges I folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY IA. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized inspect completed metal wall panel installation, including accessories. or es service representative to 111 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 07421 - 11 Metal Wall Panels K/J Project No. 1376013'70 Permit Set I I B. Remove and replace metal wall panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. I C. Additional e ti required, rpe , will be perfmed to deemne ompliancef replaced or additional work with specified I requirements. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation I instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. I B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. I C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 1 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I Metal Wall Panels Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07421 -12 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 SECTION 07540 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE ROOFING (PVC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes: 1. Roofing Membrane— Polyvinyl Chloride Membrane Roofing. 2. Sheet metal flashings at the perimeter penetrations of the roof membrane. 3. Roof Board Insulation — underlayment insulation including tapered insulation and crickets 4. Roof gypsum board underlayment and cover boards. ' 5. Fasteners and anchors to attach the roof membrane to concrete substrate and metal decks. 6. Vapor Barrier for roof assembly. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06105: Miscellaneous Carpentry 2. Other Sections of Division 07 for the following: a. Expansion joint cover assemblies. b. Joint sealants. ' c. Installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Definitions: 1. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 2. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Structural Drawings: "S" series drawings of the Contract Documents. 4. Drawings: Contract Document drawing set. 5. Exposed to View: Readily apparent to the public in normal use of the structure. A 1 view distance of 20 feet is consistent with the intent of this definition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' B. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, ' thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Project No. 6550 07540- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 111 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class FM 1-90 (Roof, General) Class FM 1-180 (Perimeter) Class FM 1-270 (Corners) 1 2. Width of Perimeter and Corner Enhancement: 9-feet 3. Hail Resistance: MH. 1114. Contractor to submit an Application For Acceptance Of Roofing System (FM form EMV 2688), roofing system shop drawings, and product submittals to Engineer for FM Global review and comment to verify that the above FMG assembly requirement is met. (A reference copy of FM form EMV 2688 is located at the end of this Section). 1.04 SUBMITTALS , A. Submit in accordance to Section 01300. B. Data: Copies of manufacturer specifications. ' C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. I 1. Base flashings, penetrations and membrane terminations. 2. Insulation. 3. Roof topography indicating spot elevations and slopes. 4. Insulation fastening patterns. D. Samples: Samples of each material to be used in the roof system including each component manufacturer's literature. 1. Make roof membrane samples a minimum of 12 inches square with one welded joint. 111 2. Make flashing samples a minimum of 6 inches long. E. Insulation: Written approval by the insulation manufacturer for use and performance of the product in the proposed system. F. Warranty: 1. Roofing membrane manufacturer warranty. 2. Roofer warranty. G. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is ' approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by Roofing Manufacturer certifying that roofing ' system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. 1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. ' Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 111Permit Set 07540-2 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 t I. Membrane Certification: 1. Submit documentation that membrane roofing system has been tested by controlled flooding, electronic testing or other leak detection method approved by I I the membrane manufacturer. See Section 3.12. J. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system. ' M. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. N. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. ' 0. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptance: 1. Technical acceptance from roofing membrane manufacturer of the roofing system. 2. Certifications by producers of roofing and insulating materials that materials ' supplied comply with requirements of the identified ASTM and industry standards. 3. Certification that system specifications meet all identified code and insurance requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Roofer Qualifications: ' 1. Roofing system shall be applied only by a firm authorized in writing, by the roofing membrane manufacturer, to apply roof membrane specified. 2. Upon completion of installation, and delivery to roofing membrane manufacturer by the Contractor of a certification that work was done in accordance with ' Specifications and roofing membrane manufacturer requirements, an inspection shall be made by a technical representative of roofing membrane manufacturer to observe the roof system. 3. Work pertaining to the installation of roofing membrane and flashings shall only be completed by applicator personnel trained and authorized by roofing membrane manufacturer in those procedures. D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Project No. 6550 07540-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I Section 10 mof methods procedures to roof deck ectioconstru010ctionSumand roofingaryWork.systemReview including, but not limandited to, the following:related I 1. Meet with roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, IIequipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. E. Code requirements: Submit evidence that the proposed roof system will meet Code requirements and has been tested and approved or listed by the following testing organizations. 1. FM (Factory Mutual Research Corp.): See Article 1.3 'Performance Requirements' 2. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.): Class A membrane. F. Membrane Testing for Water Tightness I I I I 1. Electronic Leak Detection Testing—The waterproofing applicator shall arrange for testing through Roofing Manufacturer. See Section 3.12. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07540-4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I I I insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting Iduring installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid Ipermanent deflection of deck. 1. Avoid wheel loads or concentrated loads in excess of 300 pounds on roof deck to avoid the chance of permanent deflection. I 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS IA. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's Iwritten instructions and warranty requirements. B. Installation Limitations: PVC membrane shall not come in contact with asphalt products. 1 C. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly installed waterproofing for storage, walking surface, and equipment movement. Where such access is absolutely required, I the Applicator. shall provide all necessary temporary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. Adequate protection of the membrane shall be provided for all waterproofing areas which receive traffic during construction. Any damage which occurs to the waterproofing membrane I and/or system is to be brought to the attention of the Architect and Roofing Manufacturer Representative. All damage is to be repaired according to Roofing Manufacturer's recommendations. The party responsible for damage shall bear the Icost of repairs. D. If any unusual or concealed condition is discovered, stop work and notify the Architect Iand Roofing Manufacturer's Representative immediately, in writing. 1.08 WARRANTY I A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that I fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. I 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board and walkway products and other components of membrane roofing system. I a. Warranty shall not be pro-rated over the warranty period. b. Warranty shall not exclude ponding water for the length of the warranty. 2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Project No. 6550 07540 5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 B. Special Project Warranty: Submit Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor barriers, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Availability: During bidding, confirm availability of all products and notify Architect of any that cannot be provided. 2.02 MEMBRANE SYSTEM B. Versiflex-E KEE HP 60-80 mils thick KEE (ketone ethylene ester) white polyester ' reinforced PVC (polyvinyl chloride) membrane fully adhered roofing system (Basis of Design), or Approved Equivalent by: Johns Manville, Firestone, or Carlisle. 1. Membrane Thickness: 60-80 mils. 2. Type: Reinforced. 3. Exposed Face Color: "White", (ENERGY STAR listed). 4. Roll width: 60" and 120". 2.03 MEMBRANE A. Membrane: ASTM D 4434 standard for polyvinyl chloride sheet roofing. B. Classification: UL Class A. C. Membrane with white color shall have an SRI (solar reflective index) not less than 107 in accordance with ASTM E 1980. 2.04 FLASHING MATERIALS , A. As supplied by roofing membrane manufacturer. B. Flashing materials shall be same material as roofing membrane, except that the metal 1 portion of the flashing shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2.05 ADHESIVES A. As recommended by the roof membrane manufacturer. 1 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07540-6 Project No. 6550 111 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I I 2.06 INSULATION, COVER BOARD AND FASTENERS A. Cover Boards: ASTM C 1177/C 1177Mlass- g mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate by Georgia-Pacific Corp., as follows: 111 1. Roof cover board on insulation board: 1/2 inch thick, "Dens-Deck Prime.," or equal. 2. Both roof cover boards must be part of an FM approved assembly — see 1.3B of this Section. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening panels to roof I deck, and acceptable to the roofing membrane manufacturer. 1. Perform pullout tests by the fastener manufacturer. I 2. Results of these tests plus and an assessment by the fastener manufacturer regarding the suitability of the fastener for the Project is required. C. Roof Board Insulation: 1. Thermal Resistivity—to match existing R-19. 2. Type: Polyisocyanurate board insulation, ASTM C 1289, FM 4450 or UL 1256, I ASTM E 108 or UL 790. Type II, with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84 or UL 723, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces by one of the following or other acceptable to the roof membrane manufacturer. a. Versico Secureshield Polyiso (basis of design). b. Atlas Roofing Corporation. c. RMAX. 3. Tapered Insulation: Factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Preformed Saddles, Crickets, Tapered Edge Strips, and Other Insulation Shapes: Provide for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 5. Cold, Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold, fluid-applied I adhesive formulated to continuously adhere roof insulation to substrate. D. Vapor Barrier: 1. Metal roof decks: Air-tighten the Roof Underlayment Board by taping all seams, edges and penetrations to achieve a minimum assembly air permeance of 0.20 V(s-m2) @75 Pa. (i.e. meet requirements for vapor barrier assembly). 2. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor barrier Imanufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor barrier. 111 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Heat-weldable flashing 25-gauge, Type 316 stainless steel sheet with a 20-mil unsupported VersiFlex membrane laminated to one side. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing K/J Project No. 1376013*70 07540-7 Permit Set I r t BC.. Vent pCircularipe flashing 0.048-inch fabricatedthick frommembrane 0.048-inch thick membrane. patches welded of T-joints formed by overlapping I thick membranes. D. 2-component urethane sealant used for pitch pocket topping. E. Prefabricated inside and outside corners made of 0.060-inch thick VersiFlex membrane I that is heat-welded to membrane or flashing. F. Walkway Pads: VersiFlex PVC Walkway Rolls. G. Warning Strip: Hot air weld to PVC roof a nominal 35-mil thick polyester reinforced PVC flashing yellow safety warning strip. Apply 12" wide strip to roof as designated in drawings. H. Warning Strip Signage: 14" x 10" Aluminum sign 'Danger — Fall Protection Required 11 Beyond this Point' adhere using roofing manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install every 16 linear feet outside of safety area, oriented to read from safety side of warning strip. I. All Other Accessories: As recommended by the roofing membrane manufacturer. 2.08 RELATED MATERIALS A. Wood Nailers: Refer to Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry." 1. Do not use creosote or asphaltic-treated lumber. , 2. Wood nailers shall conform to FM Loss Prevention Data 1-49. 2.09 ACCESSORIES I A. Adhesive: VOC-compliant adhesive for vertical concrete and steel deck surfaces per manufacturer's recommendation. I B. Versico HPVX Fasteners: A heavy duty #15 threaded fastener with a phillips head used for membrane securement into steel, wood plank or minimum 15/32" thick plywood. C. Versico HPV Fasteners: a threaded, black epoxy electro-deposition coated fastener used with steel and wood roof decks for insulation attachment. I D. Versico InsulTite Fastener: A threaded Phillips drive fastener used with Versico Insulation Plates for insulation attachment to steel or wood decks. I fastening e d with E. Versico HPVXo IMP- 14-1-10 Fasteners forrs: A 2-3/8" rmetal membranersecurement. Thistplatee Versico HPVX an be used for insulation securement. 111 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I 07540-8 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I r r F. Versico Insulation Fastening Plates: a nominal 3" diameter metal plate used for 1 insulation attachment with the appropriate Versico Fastener. G. Sealants: Multi-purpose sealant for termination details per manufacturer's recommendation. H. Aluminum Tape: 2-inch wide pressure-sensitive tape. I. Solvent cleaner for the specified membrane surface per manufacturer's recommendation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.01 GENERAL A. Avoid wheel loads or concentrated loads in excess of 300 pounds on roof deck to avoid ' the chance of permanent deflection. B. Installation practices shall adhere to the following FM Global requirements, as applicable: 1. FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1-28 and 1-28R 2. Wind Design, Data Sheet 1-29 3. Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components, Data Sheet 1-49 1 4. Perimeter Flashing and Data Sheet 1-35 1 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck comply with requirements in Division 05. 4. Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system ' manufacturer has passed. 5. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 6. Verify that concrete curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck have been removed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. tDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Project No.6550 07540-9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I r 1 3.03 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. I C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.05 VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Vapor Barrier is required on steel deck where deck is not concrete-filled; I B. Loose-lay vapor barrier over steel deck. C. Overlap all edges 4 inches (100 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 1 D. Extend vapor barrier to perimeter and deck penetrations and seal to provide continuity of the building's vapor barrier envelope. Vapor barrier must be sealed on the vertical surface at roof penetrations also. 3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION 1 A. General: 1. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. 2. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. 3. Do not install insulation on equipment pads. 4. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 5. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 1/2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 6. Trim insulation at roof drains to form a sloped pan so completed surface does not restrict flow of water. 7. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07540- 10 Project No.6550 111 KM Project No. 1376013*70 1 I B. Adhered insulationInsulation:in coldInstall, fluid-appeachlaliederof adhesiveinsulation in accordanceandadhere withto thesubstrate.insulationSet andeach 1 the adhesive manufacturers'written recommendations. 1 C. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in cold fluid-applied adhesive. I3.07 COVER BOARD A. Install cover board over all insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.08 WOOD NAILERS A. Install continuous treated wood nailers, of same thickness as insulation height, at the perimeter of the entire roof and around roof projections and penetrations. B. Anchor nailers to resist a minimum force of 300 lb./linear foot in any direction. C. Provide a 1/2-inch space between nailer lengths. D. Individual nailer lengths shall not be less than 3-foot long. E. Space fasteners at 12-inch o.c. Stagger fasteners 1/3 the nailer width and install within 6-inch of each end. F. Nailer attachment shall meet this requirement and current FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 3.09 ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Install roofing membrane fully bonded according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. C. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6550 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing K/J Project No. 1376013"70 07540- 11 Permit Set I t D. Accurately align membrane joints and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. I E. Apply water-based bonding adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer and immediately install roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. F. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. I G. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. I H. Seams: 1. Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end I laps of membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 2. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane. 3. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 4. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. I. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal I roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. 3.10 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. I C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld I side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 3.11 WALKWAY PADS A. Install walkway pads in the pattern indicated over the completed roof membrane. Space panels one-inch apart. B. Heat-weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. I Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07540- 12 Project No.6550 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing & Inspection: Engage roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Note defects and non-compliance with Specifications, and itemize roofing membrane manufacturer's recommendations in a punch list. 2. These items must be corrected immediately to the satisfaction of the roof membrane manufacturer and Architect prior to demobilization. 3. Seams: a. Check welded seams for continuity daily where directed by roofing membrane manufacturer's representative. b. Take one-inch wide cross-section samples of welded seams at least 3 times a day. c. Correct welds displaying failure from shearing of membrane prior to separation of weld. Patch each test cut. B. Electronic Leak Detection Testing 1. Provide electronic leak detection testing over the completed waterproofing membrane for testing of capillary defects and/or breaches in the membrane prior to the installation of subsequent layers. 2. Should leaks be discovered, the Applicator shall locate leak source(s) and make repairs. Re-test to assure watertightness. All costs associated with the repairs shall be borne by the Applicator. C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Owner's Representative. 3.13 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, ' inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Owner's Representative. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Project No. 6550 07540 13 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 i 3.14 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS of (address) , herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: Clean Water Services 2. Building Name/Type: Durham AWWTF Solids Building 3. Area of Work: Roofing Assembly 4. Acceptance Date: 5. Warranty Period: 5 years 6. Expiration Date: B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions I herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: I 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by: 1 a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding 100 mph; c. fire; d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner's Representative. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07540- 14 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the ' extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner's Representative in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, 1 or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this 1 day of , 20 . 1. Authorized Signature ' 2. Name: 3. Title: I I I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing Project No.6550 07540-15 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I ISECTION 07591 PREPARATION FOR REROOFING IPART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I 1. Partial tear-off of roof areas indicated. 2. Temporary roofing. B. Related Requirements: I 1. Section 01560 "Temporary Environmental Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for reroofing preparation. 2. Section 07540 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing"for roofing materials. I 1.02 DEFINITIONS IA. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA' NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"apply to work of this Section. s "The I B. Partial Roof Tear-Off: Removal of selected components and accessories from existing roofing system. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. I B. Shop Drawings: Include 9 plans, sections, and details. IC. Temporary Roofing Submittal: Product data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof remains in place, include surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing manufacturer, I stating acceptance of the temporary roof and that its inclusion does not adversely affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind or its FM Global rating. D. Contractor shall submit plan for temporary roofing during a rain event. Plan shall be I submitted for approval prior to existing roof membrane removal. I1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. I1. Include certificate that Installer is approved by warrantor of existing roofing system. 2. Include certificate that Installer is licensed to perform asbestos abatement. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 Preparation for Reroofing K/J Project No. 1376013'70 07591 - 1 Permit Set I I I B. rt C. Fastener Photographs orpull-out Videotape:testrepo .Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work ibegins. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installer Qualifications: Approved by warrantor of existing roofing system to work on existing roofing. I B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning roofing removal. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities I having jurisdiction. C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, per 07540. 1. Meet with Owner; Architect; Owner's insurer if applicable; testing and inspecting I agency representative; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer, including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers I whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing, including installers of roof deck, roof accessories, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and I replacement, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Reroofing preparation, including roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. I b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system components that are to remain. c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and I roof-drain plugging and plug removal. d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. e. Existing roof deck conditions requiring notification of Architect. I f. Existing roof deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. g. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse. 111 h. Structural loading limitations of roof deck during reroofing. i. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect reroofing. j. HVAC shutdown and sealing of air intakes. k. Shutdown of fire-suppression, -protection, and -alarm and -detection systems. I. Governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. m. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding. I Preparation for Reroofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07591 -2 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I I 1 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS IA. Existing Roofing System: EPDM roofing. B. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofing area. Conduct 1 reroofing so Owner's operations are not disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust I and water-leakage covers over sensitive equipment and furnishings, shut down HVAC and fire-alarm or-detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below work area. I 2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below affected area. Verify that occupants below work area have been evacuated before proceeding with work over impaired deck area. IC. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations. I D. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. E. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding are maintained by Owner as far as I practical. 1. Construction Drawings for existing roofing system are provided for Contractor's convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. They I are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Contractor's own investigations. Contractor is responsible for conclusions derived from existing documents. IF. Limit construction loads on roof to 100 PSF for rooftop equipment wheel loads and 20 PSF for uniformly distributed loads. IG. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building. 1 1. Remove only as much roofing in one day as can be made watertight in the same day. g 1 H. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials, such as asbestos- containing materials, will be encountered in the Work. 1 1.07 WARRANTY I A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during reroofing, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing roofing system warranty. Notify warrantor before proceeding. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Preparation for Reroofing Project No.6550 07591 -3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 i 1. Notify warrantor of existing roofing system on completion of reroofing, and obtain documentation verifying that existing roofing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY PROTECTION MATERIALS I A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation: ASTM C 578. B. Plywood: DOC PS1, Grade CD Exposure 1. I C. OSB: DOC PS2, Exposure 1. 2.02 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS A. Design and selection of materials for temporary roofing are Contractor's responsibilities. B. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). I C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet. I D. Glass-Fiber Felts: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M. 1 F. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV. G. Base Sheet Fasteners: Capped head, factory-coated steel fasteners, listed in FM Global's"Approval Guide." PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Shut off rooftop utilities and service piping before beginning the Work. I B. Test existing roof drains to verify that they are not blocked or restricted. Immediately notify Architect of any blockages or restrictions. 111 C. Protect existing roofing system that is not to be reroofed. 1. Loosely lay 1-inch- (25-mm-) minimum thick, expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation over existing roofing in areas indicated. Loosely lay 15/32-inch (12- Preparation for Reroofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07591 -4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I 1 I mm) plywood or OSB panels over EPS. Extend EPS past edges of plywood or OSB panels a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm). 111 111 2. Limit traffic and material storage to areas of existing roofing that have been protected. 3. Maintain temporary protection and leave in place until replacement roofing has been completed. Remove temporary protection on completion of reroofing. D. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air-intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air-intake louvers before proceeding with reroofing work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. E. During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain. F. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. 1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing roofing system components that are to remain. 3.02 DECK PREPARATION A. Inspect deck after tear-off of roofing system. B. If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to one another or to structure are observed, or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. C. If deck surface is unsuitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. D. Provide additional deck securement as indicated on Drawings. E. Replace steel deck as indicated on Drawings. F. Replace steel deck as directed on Drawings. G. Replace roof sheathing as indicated on Drawings. 3.03 INFILL MATERIALS INSTALLATION A. Immediately after roof tear-off, and inspection and repair, if needed, of deck, fill in tear- off areas to match existing roofing system construction. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 Preparation for Reroofing K/J Project No. 1376013*70 07591 -5 Permit Set i I I 1.2. Installation (PVC) Roofing.of infill materials is specified in Section 07540 "Polyvinyl Cholride Installation of wood blocking, curbs, and nailers is specified in Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry." B. Install new roofing patch atch over roof infill area. If new roofing is installed the same day I tear-off is made, roofing patch is not required. 3.04 TEMPORARY ROOFING A. Install approved temporary roofing over area to be reroofed. I B. Install temporary roofing over area to be reroofed. Install two glass-fiber felts, lapping each sheet 19 inches (483 mm) over preceding sheet. Embed glass-fiber felt in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied within equiviscous temperature range. Glaze- coat completed surface with hot roofing asphalt. C. Remove temporary roofing before installing new roofing. I D. Prepare temporary roof to receive new roofing per Section 05310 "Steel Deck" and Section 07540 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PC)forRtemporary eoofoofing." esubstrate fromroofing oofing watertight condition. Obtain approval manufacturer and Architect before installing new roof. 3.05 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION A. Remove blisters and areas of roofing not fully adhered. I B. Remove substrate irregularities that inhibit new re-cover boards from conforming to substrate. 1. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced built-up bituminous roofing with a power broom. 2. Clean substrate of contaminants, such as dirt, debris, oil, and grease, that can affect adhesion of coated foamed roofing. 3. Power vacuum the existing roof surface. If recommended by foam manufacturer, prime dried surface p rate with recommended primer. s 4. Scarify surface of coated P olyure hane roofing as necessary to achieve a suitable 1. substrate for new roofing. 5. Verify that surface is dry by pressing litmus paper to surface areas most likely to retain moisture, such as shaded areas and low spots. If paper changes color, surface is too wet to apply foam. 3.06 BASE FLASHING REMOVAL A. Remove existingbase flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, I sheet materials, dirt, and debris. Preparation for Reroofing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07591 -6 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 I I I B. Do not damage metal counterfiashings that are to remain. Replace metal I 1 1111 • IC. counterflashings damaged during removal with counterflashings of same metal, weight or thickness, and finish. Inspect parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers for deterioration and damage. If parapet sheathing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify Architect. ID. Remove existing parapet sheathing and replace with new parapet sheathing to comply with Section 06160 "Sheathing." If parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, or nailers have deteriorated, immediately notify Architect. E. When directed by Architect, replace parapet framing, wood blocking, curbs, and nailers to comply with Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry." 3.07 RE-COVER BOARD INSTALLATION IA. Install re-cover boards over roofing with long joints in continuous straight lines and end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt re-cover boards together and fasten to deck. 1. Tape joints of re-cover boards if required by roofing manufacturer. B. Fasten re-cover boards to resist wind-uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof specified in Section 07540 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing." 1. Install additional fasteners near board corners and edges as necessary to 1 I I conform boards to substrate and to adjacent boards. 3.08 DISPOSAL A. Collect demolished materials and place in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.permitted. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 07591 I I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Preparation for Reroofing Project No. 6550 07591 -7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I i SECTION 07620 I SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM IPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 MY IA. ThisSUMARSection Includes the Following: 9 I 1. Exterior sheet metal flashing and trim: a. Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. b. Formed copings. IB. Related Sections Include the Following: 1. Division 01 Section 01450 "Quality Requirements"for Mockups. 2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry"for wood nailers and blocking. I 3. Other Sections of Division 07 for the following: a. Manufactured sheet metal expansion-joint covers. b. Installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane. II c. Field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim sealants. d. Weather-resistive barrier applied over sheet metal flashing and trim. 4. Division 15 Plumbing for roofing rain leader assemblies. 1 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. IB. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, I overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. I 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. IC. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow infiltration to building interior. water ID. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 60. 1 IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No.6550 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim K/J Project No. 1376013'70 07620-1 Permit Set I 1 I 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit in accordance to Section 01300. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, 1 material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal nd flashingfieldssembled workdingnplans and s and elevations. Distinguish between shop- following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 4. Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish and/or color required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. For each type of flashing and trim indicated with factory-applied color finishes as specified by Architect: I; 4. Prior to fabrication, submit 12-inch square preliminary samples panels of each type showing corners, jointing, special shapes, and other a typical conditions. 5. Samples will serve as the control for limiting acceptable range of appearance. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. I B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary of Work." 1. Meet with Owner's Representative, Architect, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07620-2 Project No.6550 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013"`70 r 1 I 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, door, glazed openings in exterior walls, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. C. Mock-ups: See specification 01450 Quality Requirements. 1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ' ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.06 COORDINATION D. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METALS A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G120 coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting, 0.03-inch (22-gage) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 167, dead soft, fully annealed sheets, AISI No. 2D matte non-reflective finish, or 2B bright, moderately reflective finish, 0.015-inch thick unless noted otherwise. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, flat surface. 1 1. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is required, pretreat metal with white or light-colored, factory-applied, back-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil. 2. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2.02 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 07620-3 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS I A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 2. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 3. Material: Hot dip galvanized steel for galvanized sheet steel; stainless steel for sheet stainless steel. C. Solder and flux: I 1. For galvanized sheet metal: 50-50 lead/tin solder complying with ASTM B 32, used with a non-corrosive flux. I 2. Solder for stainless steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. D. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound I sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. i F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. II H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15- mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. I. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip I resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. I 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D1970; stable after testing at 240 degrees F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D1970; passes after testing at minus 20 I degrees F. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07620-4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I I a. Products: 1 1) International Building Components; WaterBlock Hi-Temp. 2) Grace Construction Products, a unit of W.R. Grace & Co. — Conn; Vycor Ultra. 1 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with I recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop- fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before I shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with I performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and I tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. I D. Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate I elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the I Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. I G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim. H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being I anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" Ifor application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.05 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS IA. Roof-Penetration and Roof-Drain Flashings: Refer to Division 07 Section 'Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing (PVC)' I2.06 COPINGS: A. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. I Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Provide with continuous cleats to support legs. Miter corners, seal, and solder watertight. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6550 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim K/J Project No. 1376013"70 07620-5 Permit Set I 1 B. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide concealed backup plate. C. Fabricate copings from galvanized steel, 0.0336 inch thick, or aluminum, 0.040 inch thick. D. Color: 1. At exterior wall cladding#1 match coping to wall cladding color. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from galvanized steel 0.0276 inch thick. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual111 locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. I B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with111 bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of rosin-sized slip sheet or minimum 6 mil thick polyethylene underlayment. 1113. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 07620-6 Project No.6550 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 1 D. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of ' intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than one inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07. I. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Pretin edges of uncoated sheets to be soldered using solder recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux residue from metal after soldering. 2. Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3.03 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. 3.04 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Project No. 6550 07620-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill,jamb, and 1 similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING I A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. C. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION I I I 1 I I Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07620-8 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I ISECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 —GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. The WORK specified in this Section includes the requirements for I furnishing and installing joint sealants and backing systems, as designated in the Contract, for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: I a. Control and expansion joints in masonry. b. Perimeter joints between masonry and frames of doors and windows. c. Control and expansion joints in soffit and overhead surfaces. d. Other joints as indicated. I 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. I b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated. 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. References I 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means of a I b. Durometer. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealing Compounds c. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants d. ASTM C1248—08 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants I e. ASTM C1330- Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: Submit product data from manufacturers for each joint I sealant product required. C. Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint sealant I required. Install joint sealant samples in 1/2-inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Joint Sealants Project No.6550 07920 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 1 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements I 1. Provide joint sealers that have been manufactured to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2— PRODUCTS 1 2.01 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS A. General Requirements 1. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be no staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248—08 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 3. Require manufacturer's standard color range to permit matching sealants to color of contacting surfaces. B. Silicone Joint Sealants 1. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. a. Products: provide one of the following or equal: 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 2) Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. b. Typical Uses: Exterior and interior control and expansion joints in vertical surfaces of masonry, between metal and concrete or mortar, interior and exterior perimeter joints between unit masonry, concrete, and frames of doors and louvers, and at other exterior conditions unless specified otherwise. Joint Sealants Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07920-2 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I Ic. Color: As selected by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. I 2. Single-Component, Nonsag,Acetoxy-cure elastomeric silicone sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, G, and A. a. Products: provide one of the following or equal: I1) Dow Corning Corporation; 999-A. 2) Rhone-Poulenc, Inc., Rhodorsil 3B b. Typical Uses: Exposed joints within aluminum door I framing systems. c. Color: As selected by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. I C. Latex Joint Sealants 1. Acrylic Latex Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. I a. Products: provide one of the following or equal: 1) Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2) Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. b. Typical Locations: Perimeter joints between interior wall I surfaces and frames of interior doors and louvers, and all other interior joints not indicated otherwise. c. Color: As selected by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. ID. Joint Sealant Backing 1. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are no staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, Iand other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. I2. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, closed-cell material with a surface skin and of size and density to control sealant depth I and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 3. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape Irecommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where Iapplicable. E. Miscellaneous Materials 1 1. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests. ' 2. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free I of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Joint Sealants Project No. 6550 07920 3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I substrates. I PART 3— EXECUTION I 3.01 CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 3.02 EXAMINATION I A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation I tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been I corrected. 3.03 PREPARATION I A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: I 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints I (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. I 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with I oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. I 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave I residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. I b. Porcelain enamel. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint- sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant- I substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of Joint Sealants Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 07920-4 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I Ijoint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. I3.04 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation Iinstructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. I B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. IC. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum I sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. I 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. I D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following I and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. I 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. IF. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of I configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. I 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. I 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in I ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. 1 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Joint Sealants Project No. 6550 07920-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I t adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated ' requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.06 CLEANING 1 A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the WORK progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original WORK. END OF SECTION I 1 1 1 1 . 1 Joint Sealants Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 07920-6 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 SECTION 08520 TRANSLUSCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work of this section includes all labor and materials required to install the translucent insulated sandwich panel systems, related fixed window systems with glass, aluminum framing and flashings, coatings of the aluminum components, skylights and the structural and watertight design of the assembly. B. Provide translucent panel systems as shown in the drawings. ' 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Translucent panel system must be listed by the International Code Council — ' Evaluation Service (ICC-ES), which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an approved agency. ' B. Quality control inspections and testing conducted at least once each year are to include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels" as regulated by the ICC-ES. C. Provide materials and products manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of translucent panel systems for a period of at least fifteen (15) consecutive years and which can show evidence of the specified materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects must have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer. D. Installation is to be performed by an installer who has been in the business of erecting insulated translucent sandwich panel systems for at least five (5) years installing this manufacturer's product, and who can show evidence of satisfactory completion of 3 projects of similar size and scope. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's product data including test results demonstrating Fall Protection performance. tC. Shop drawings showing skylight cross sections and the installation details. D. Copy of unexecuted warranty. E. Engineering calculations. ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Translucent Project No. 6550 Sandwich Panel System 08520- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I I F. Sample. 1.04 WARRANTY A. 5-year manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in material or workmanship. B. Warranty dates shall start on the day of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TRANSLUSCENT SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEMS A. Provide translucent fiberglass face sheets that have been manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins formulated specifically for architectural use. I Thermoplastic(e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic)faces are not acceptable. 1. Flammability of Interior Face Sheet a. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting. I b. Flamespread: No greater than 50 (20) and smoke developed no greater than 250 (200) when tested in accordance with UL 723. (Select 50/250 Class B Interior Finish or 20/200 Class A interior Finish.) I c. Burn extent must be 1" or less as determined by ASTM D-635. d. Faces must not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame. e. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes I per IBC and NBC. 2. Weatherability of Exterior Face Sheet a. Color Stability: Full-thickness of the exterior face sheet shall be manufactured with a colorfast resin that does not rely on a coating or film for long-term color I stability. 1) ASTM D-224 Delta E (Color Difference): Less than 3.0 CIE units Delta E when exposed to 5 years of outdoor weathering in south Florida sloping at 5 degrees facing south. Color difference determined by the average of 3 white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. 2) Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching. b. Erosion Barrier: Provide exterior face manufactured with a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded beneath the surface to provide maximum long-term I resistance to reinforcing fiber. 1) Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed 0.7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D-4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1000 cycles. I 2) Surface films or coatings are not permanent and are not acceptable erosion barriers. c. Exterior face sheets must be fully field restorable if worn or damaged. 3. Strength: Provide an exterior and interior face sheet that is uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand-held pencil and tested to repel an impact equal to 70 ft. lbs. (230 ft. pounds optional) without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4" diameter 5 lb. free falling ball in accordance with UL 972. Improvements Phase 2 III Translucent Sandwich Panel System Durham Odor Control Im P Permit Set 08520-2 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 B. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Kalwall Corporation. 2. Other Manufacturers: Submit a Substitution Request accompanied by the ' following items for consideration. a. International Code Council — Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) listing for proposed panel product. b. UL listing for the interior face sheets. c. Sample of exterior face sheet with full thickness colorfast resin and permanent glass erosion barrier cast into face sheet. d. A sample of proposed system assemblies, including thermally broken panel. e. Test reports for color stability on crystal and white face sheets without a film 1 or coating. Testing must be on face sheets intended for use on this project. f. Documentation of regular, independent quality control monitoring under a building code review and listing program as specified. g. Documentation of successful projects as specified. h. Installer qualifications as specified. ' 2.02 FLASHING A. Specified in Section 07620: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. B. Use skylight curb tape in all skylight installations. ' 2.03 GLAZING COLOR A. Provide face sheets that are uniform in color and not vary more than + 10% in thickness. ' 1. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 070"thick. Type SW-C; Color: white 2. Interior face sheets: Smooth, .052"thick. Type B3A; Color: white ' 2.04 STRUCTURAL GRID CORE A. Provide aluminum I-beams (thermally broken) of an engineered alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. I-beam to be a minimum of 7/16" wide, and flange surfaces must be machined to tolerances of not greater than + .002"for flat panels. ' B. Thermally broken grid: 1" minimum thermal break. Condensation Resistance Factor of the Thermally broken grid, on the I-beam: 80.) 2.05 ADHESIVE A. Laminate adhesive: heat and pressure type engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25 years field use. ' B. Adhesive must pass the testing requirements specified by International Code Council (ICC) "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesive". ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Translucent Sandwich Panel System Project No.6550 08520-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 1. Tensile strength, ASTM C-297: minimum 750 PSI (517 kPa) after 2 exposures to 6 cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037. 2. Shear strength, ASTM D-1002: after exposure to five (5) separate conditions: a. 540 PSI (372 kPa) after 50% relative humidity at 73° F (22.8° C) b. 100 PSI (68.95 kPa) after exposure to 182° F (83.3° C) c. 800 PSI (551.58 kPa) after Accelerated Aging at room temperature by ASTM D- 1037 d. 250 PSI (172.37 kPa) after Accelerated Aging at 182° F (83.3° C) by ASTM D- 1 1037 e. 1400 PSI (965.27 kPa) after 500 hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572 2.06 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Provide structural sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets , resin-laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking aluminum (thermally broken) I-beams. Adhesive bonding line is to be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp edge. , B. Panel thickness: 2-3/4 inches (69.465 mm). C. Panel U-Factor, by NFRC-Certified laboratory: 0.23 Thermally Broken I-beam. r D. Grid pattern at walls: Verti-Kal. E. Grid pattern at skylights: Shoji. F. Light Transmission: 15% 1 G. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23 H. Panel Deflection: Limit deflection to no more than 1.9" in 10'-0" at 30 p.s.f. without a ' supporting frame when tested per ASTM E-72. (Deflection criteria dependent on application. Consult Manufacturer.) I. Panels shall withstand 1200°F fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming. J. Provide skylight system that passes Class A Roof Burning Brand Test by ASTM E-108. 1 K. Provide Factory Mutual tested and approved Class 1 wall system or roof system in accordance with FM 4411. 1 2.07 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM A. Perimeter Closure System: Extruded 6063-T5 or 6063-T6 aluminum clamp-tite screw ' type. B. Factory install skylight perimeter closures and seal to panels. , Translucent Sandwich Panel System Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 08520-4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I I C. Sealing controlled Gaskets:conditions.Pre-apply flexible sealing tape to closure system under factory I 2.08 FLASHINGS AND CLOSURES IA. 5052 alloy, minimum 0.040 inches thick, formed to make a waterproof pan at all vertical sill connections. 1 2.09 FASTENERS A. Fasteners and anchor bolts per Section 05090. 1 2.10 FINISH A. Exposed aluminum to receive manufacturer's factory-applied finish that meets the I performance requirements of AAMA 2604. 1. Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer's 12 standard colors. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION IA. Install the translucent systems in strict accordance with approved engineered shop drawings. 1. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. I 2. Set sill and curb members in a full bed of non-hardening sealant compound or gaskets to provide weather tight construction. 3. Seal the panel system as recommended by the manufacturer. IB. Install the translucent systems level, plumb and properly aligned with uniform joints and reveals. Remove and replace any components that may be defective or are damaged ' during installation. C. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, carefully inspect the translucent panel installation and make adjustments necessary to insure proper I weather-tight performance. D. Leave the interior and exterior surfaces of the translucent panel systems free of all Iprotective material, identification labels and excess sealant. 3.02 TESTING 1 A. Upon completion of the work, perform a leakage test over all surfaces of each skylight to the satisfaction of the Project Representative. 1. Water Test: Test walls and skylights according to AAMA 501.2. I B. Spray skylights with a garden type hose nozzle for a minimumeriod of p 10 minutes. I C. Trace moisture found on interior surfaces to the point of entry and repair the faulty work. Retest. IEND OF SECTION Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Translucent Sandwich Panel System Project No. 6550 08520-5 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 Permit Set SECTION 09221 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART — GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. The WORK specified in this Section includes the requirements for ' furnishing and installing non-structural metal framing for interior gypsum board assemblies as designated in the Contract. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. References ' 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 653- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. b. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. c. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. d. ASTM C840 — 08 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board e. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drilled Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84mm) in Thickness. f. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self- Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum ' Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. g. ASTM D226 / D226M - 09 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 2. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 2.02 MATERIALS ' A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. National Gypsum Company 2. United States Gypsum Company ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Non Structural Metal Framing Project No. 6550 09221 -1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 I 3. Gold Bond Building Products Division I 4. National Gypsum Company 5. Pacific Coast Building Products 6. Pabco Gypsum Division 7. Or equal. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions I indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. I 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. C. Interior Studs and Ceiling Furring Framing: ASTM C 645, hot-dip I galvanized steel, minimum 20 gauge, 400S125-33 with 400T150-33 runners. D. Bracing members: ASTM C 645, hot-dip galvanized steel shapes. E. Fasteners: 1. General: ASTM C 1002, corrosion resistant, for attachment to metal framing 25 gauge and lighter; ASTM C 954 for attachment to metal framing 20 gauge and heavier. 2. Thread and head designs and lengths as recommended by manufacturer for uses and materials involved. F. Powder actuated fasteners: Type and size suitable for application. I G. Sealant: Polyurethane, as specified in Section 07920. 2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 1 A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced I installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. I B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226/ D226M - 09, Type I ' (No. 15 asphalt felt), non-perforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3— EXECUTION USED) I 3.01 CONSTRUCTION- (NOT 3.02 EXAMINATION I A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including Non-Structural Metal Framing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 09221 -2 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I Iwelded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for I I compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the WORK. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL IA. B. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C840—08 that apply to framing installation. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. ID. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. I 3.04 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. I I I B. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or I I dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor I I clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. c. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inchclearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Non-Structural Metal Framing Project No. 6550 09221 -3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 openings the same as required for door openings unless I otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 111 3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. E. Direct Furring: I 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces ' vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION I 1 t 1 1 I 1 I I 1 Non-Structural Metal Framing Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09221 -4 Project No. 6550 KM Project No. 1376013"70 I 111 SECTION 09290 GYPSUM BOARD 1 PART — GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. The WORK specified in this Section includes the requirements for furnishing and installing interior gypsum board and tile backing panels screw attached to metal framing and furring members,joint treatment and accessories as designated in the Contract. 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. References 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C475 - Standard Specification for Joint Treatment I materials for gypsum Wallboard Construction b. ASTM C840- Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board c. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.33 in. to 0.112 in. in Thickness d. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases e. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for 1 f. Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board g. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber h. ASTM D 3274 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Fungal or Algal Growth, or Soil and Dirt Accumulation ASTM E119 - 10b Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of I Building Construction and Materials j. ASTM C 1178/C 1178M —Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel k. ASTM B 221- Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- Alloy Rolled or Cold Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire 2. Gypsum Association (GA) a. 201 —Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings b. 216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board 3. Oregon Structural Specialty Code (OSSC), 2014 4. Volatile organic compounds (VOC) Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Gypsum Board Project No. 6550 09290- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I t i 5. Environmental Protection Agency- EPA Method 24 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: For each type of product. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for extruded aluminum trim. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Manufacturer qualifications: Provide gypsum board products from single manufacturer or from manufacturers recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board. B. Pre-installation conference: Convene with affected entities to review coordination and sequencing of construction to ensure that everything 111 that will be concealed by gypsum board has been installed, and that chases, openings, supplementary framing and blocking have been completed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Acceptance at Site: Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Verify board and accessories as undamaged. I B. Storage and Protection 1. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. 2. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1 A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Gypsum Board Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09290-2 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 t I 1 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and I 3. discoloration. Maintain uniform room temperature between 55 and 70 degrees Fahrenheit in cold weather during application of wallboard and joint treatment until joint treatment is completely dry or building is I occupied. 4. Provide adequate ventilation. IPART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Gypsum board General 1 1. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. IB. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. I 2. 3. Lafarge North America Inc. National Gypsum Company. 4. PABCO Gypsum. 5. USG Corporation. IC. Moisture-and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. II. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, Type X. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according Ito ASTM D 3274. D. Trim Accessories I1. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. a. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc b. Shapes: 11) Cornerbead. 2) Bullnose bead. 3) LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint I compound. 4) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 5) U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not I receive joint compound. 6) Expansion (control)joint. I 2. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. a. Available Manufacturers: I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Gypsum Board Project No. 6550 09290-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I 1 1) Fry Reglet Corp. 2) Gordon, Inc. 3) Pittcon Industries. 4) Or equal. b. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5. c. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified. 3. Joint Treatment Materials I a. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. b. Joint Tape: 1) Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2) Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. c. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1) Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2) Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. i. Use setting-type compound for installing paper- 111faced metal trim accessories. 3) Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4) Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5) Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting- type, sandable topping compound or drying-type, all- purpose compound. i. High-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer is not acceptable for Level 5 finish. d. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1) Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. , E. Auxiliary Materials 1. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written 111 recommendations. 2. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. a. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). I Gypsum Board Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09290-4 Project No. 6550 KM Project No. 1376013"`70 I I IF. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to I steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick and to plywood panels. 2. Retain subparagraph below for cementitious backer units. 3. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and I size recommended by panel manufacturer. 4. For exterior locations, use fasteners with a rust-proof coating such as "Climaseal" by US Gypsum Co., or equal. I 5. Screws for gypsum board mounted on resilient channels shall have a maximum length of one-inch for one layer and 1-5/8-inch for 2 layers. IPART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) I 3.02 EXAMINATION I A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. IB. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. IC. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 except where specified otherwise, and/or Imanufacturer's instructions are more stringent. B. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between I panels. Do not force into place. C. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications I where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints Iother than control joints at corners of framed openings. D. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Gypsum Board ' Project No. 6550 09290-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I t E. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed ' spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. I F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. G. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of 111 each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I 3.04 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to 1 framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.05 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD I A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 1 1 1 i Gypsum Board Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09290-6 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I IB. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. IC. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints„ except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. 1 D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, as indicated on the Drawings, 1. Level 0: Not Used. I 2. Level 1: Not Used. 3. Level 2: Not Used. 4. Level 3: Not Used. I 5. Level 4: Typical finish for surfaces exposed to view; Use on all other surfaces not otherwise scheduled. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." I6. Level 5: Not used. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's Iwritten instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written Iinstructions. 3.06 FIELD INSPECTION IA. Installer is present at the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S inspection of WORK. Touch up as required and directed subsequent to finish application. I3.07 PROTECTION I A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. IB. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. IC. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and Idiscoloration. END OF SECTION I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Gypsum Board Project No. 6550 09290 7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 SECTION 09900 EXTERIOR AND CONCRETE PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. A painter's finish on all exterior and concrete surfaces B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300: Cast in Place Concrete 2. Section 15800: HVAC 1.02 REFERENCES A. Where standards of surface preparation are described by citing SSPC specification numbers reference is made to the "Steel Structures Painting Manual"Volume 2 ' published by the Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Contractor Qualifications: Submit a list of at least five projects completed in the past five years where High Performance Coatings similar to those required for this project were applied by the Specialty Painting Contractor proposed for this project. C. Product Data: 1. Submit complete technical data on all materials to be used on the project for review prior to ordering material. Include manufacturer's brand name and type of material for each coat of each system to be used. 2. If products manufactured by makers other than the first named product by the first named maker listed in Part 2 of this Section are submitted, submit supporting performance test results prepared by an independent paint testing laboratory for comparison with the performance of the first named product by the first named maker. 3. If the Contractor's second submittal of a proposed equivalent material is not favorably reviewed the Contractor will be back-charged by the Owner for the cost of subsequent reviews. D. Manufacturer's Certification: That products furnished meet applicable Air Quality Management District regulations as to allowable VOC content for the place of application and use intended. E. Samples: For paints submit two 8-1/2 by 11-inch brush-outs of each paint system and each color on cardboard. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Exterior&Concrete Painting Project No. 6550 09900- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 i I 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Contractor Qualifications: The Contractor is cautioned that the application of High Performance Architectural Coatings (HPAC) specified under this Section requires special skill, knowledge and equipment. In submitting his bid, the Contractor represents that he is skilled and experienced applying these coatings, has studied the material manufacturer's application requirements for the materials specified, agrees that the materials is suitable for intended use, and has included in his bid the coat of all labor and material required to achieve a successful coating system meeting the performance requirements of the contract documents. I B. Regulatory Requirements: All work, material, procedures and practices under this Section shall conform with requirements of the Federal Standard 40 CFR on air quality control, and the requirements of the local Air Resources Board or Air Quality Management District having jurisdiction. Coatings or primers applied at locations other than the project site shall be done in accordance with local air quality regulations in effect at the place the coating is applied. I 1.05 WARNING I A. The Contractor is advised that application of paint and finishing material may be hazardous. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of workers and property. 1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials in unopened containers with manufacturer's label. Label shall state VOC content. B. Store in assigned area. Maintain storage area clean and fire safe. Dispose of used rags and clean buckets daily. Store solvents in closed approved storage containers. C. Submerge solvent soaked rags in water. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide ambient temperatures recommended by manufacturer of material to be applied. 2. Provide adequate ventilation. 3. Provide 40-to 50-foot candles of illumination on all surfaces in areas to be painted including floors, walls and ceiling even though they do not require painting. 4. Use temporary dust barriers to close off areas being painted from areas where other work is being performed. 1.08 COLORS AND COLOR SAMPLES 1 A. Before starting work, obtain color schedule and samples of colors selected for this project by the Owner. Exterior&Concrete Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09900-2 Project No.6550 KM Project No. 1376013*70 I I IB. Colors are to be factory or machine mixed, using light-fast colorants proportioned by accurate measurement into a proper tinting base. The color formula for each color IIshall be submitted to facilitate future color matching. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coatings used shall be "top of the line" and of the type recommended by the Imanufacturer for the intended use and substrate. B. Applicable Air Quality Management District regulations prohibit the manufacture, sale or application of Architectural Coatings and Specialty Coatings having greater than stipulated levels of volatile organic compounds. C. The Contractor shall base his bid on using the products specified. If the products specified are not available in formulations that meet applicable Air Quality Management District regulations on maximum VOC levels, the Contractor shall submit products of equivalent quality and function that comply with regulations in Ieffect at that time. D. If the Contractor applies any coatings for which it has not submitted certificates I indicating the VOC content and that the product complies with applicable Air Quality Management District regulations, or if it applies coatings that have been modified or thinned other than as recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall be responsible for any fines, costs, remedies, or legal actions that may result. I E. The Contractor shall not submit or use any material containing Trichlorethylene III because of its potential cancer causing properties. If any of the materials specified I in this Section contain trichlorethylene, they shall be considered deleted from this Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.01 CONDITION OF SURFACES TO BE PAINTED I A. Examine areas to receive work of this Section. Make certain that surfaces are even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, and free from defects or substances that might affect application. 1 B. Arrange for repairs or major cleaning as required. Starting work indicates acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory to achieve required result. 1 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. Wash metal surfaces with solvent or cleaner to remove dirt or grease, and clean off Irust or scale with wire brush or sandpaper. B. Bare or Shop Coated Steel: Remove rust and scale by wire brushing or 1 sandblasting; wash with solvent or cleaner. C. Galvanized Steel: Etch with phosphoric solution such as Galvaprime, Galva-prep, I or equal; flush surface clean with water and allow to dry. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Exterior&Concrete Painting Project No. 6550 09900-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 1 D. Prepare all surfaces in accordance with the more stringent of the coating material manufacturer's recommendations, other requirements in this paragraph 3.02 or referenced or applicable requirements for surface preparation in the Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, published by the Steel Structures Painting Council and summarized below: 1. SSPC-SP1 - Solvent Cleaning: Removal of all oil, grease, soil, drawing compound, cutting compound and other soluble contaminates from the surfaces with solvents and/or commercial cleaners by wiping, dipping, steam cleaning or vapor degreasing. 2. SSPC-SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of all loose mill scale, rust, paint and other loose detrimental foreign matter by the use of non-powered hand tools. 3. SSPC-SP3 - Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of all loose mill scale, rust, paint and other loose detrimental foreign matter by the use of power-operated portable tools. 4. SSPC- SP6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of all oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter by compressed air nozzle blasting, centrifugal wheels or other required methods. Remaining discoloration stains shall not exceed 33-1/3% of each square inch of surface. 5. SSPC-SP7- Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of all oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose-mill scale and loose paint by compressed air nozzle blasting. Centrifugal wheels or other required means. E. Dust all surfaces and wipe clean with a tack rag just prior to coating. 3.03 APPLICATION 11 A. Apply all material in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply first 111 coat immediately after surface preparation. B. Do not apply coatings when temperature is below 55°F. Do not apply exterior coatings in damp or rainy weather. C. Brush out each coat to a uniform, even coating; lay material on in one direction and brush out at right angles. Special application techniques may be required for new coatings with low VOC content. Apply such coatings in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed instructions. Allow material to dry 48 hours between coats unless longer period specified by manufacturer. I D. Sand between coats for enamel and varnish finishes. E. Prime all exposed and concealed surfaces of sheetmetal flashing prior to I installation. F. Paint items and surfaces before installation that will be difficult or impossible to paint after installation. G. Apply not less than the number of coats specified. Apply additional coats if required for uniform coverage and full hiding. Apply finishes in their factory original consistencies. Do not thin unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Exterior&Concrete Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09900-4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 1 ' H. Finish work shall be uniform in color, full coverage, smooth and free of sags and brush marks. Varnish work shall be done so that an entire surface is coated while maintaining a wet edge so that there are no lap marks or areas of uneven color. I. Do all cutting in to a sharp, true line. Repaint if necessary to correct over runs. J. Do not paint over Underwriters' labels, fusible links, sprinkler heads, or fire alarm devices. 3.04 EXISTING WORK TO BE REPAINTED A. Major depressions, chips, holes and so forth in substrates shall be repaired under this Section. Fill all holes and depressions with vinyl spackling compound. Sand the existing finish to remove bumps and ridges and give it an overall tooth. Wash with trisodium phosphate, rinse clean and dry. Spot prime bare areas. Give entire surface an alkyd based bonding coat. Give the entire surface the second coat recommended by the manufacturer and the finish coat of the scheduled system. 3.05 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND COMPLETION A. Protect finish work by suitable covering or other method as job progresses. B. Remove paint or varnish spots from floors, glass and other surfaces, upon completion of work. Remove rubbish, empty containers and other accumulated materials from premises. Leave work in clean, orderly, acceptable condition. C. Check work of this Section at completion of project. Touch-up or refinish marred or damaged surfaces. Replace glass damaged by operations under this Section. Leave entire area with finish free from imperfections. 3.07 PAINTING SYSTEMS AND SCHEDULE: HIGH PERFORMANCE ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS (HPAC) A. See notes on Drawings for location of surfaces to receive paint systems. B. Characteristics of paint materials are described in Part 2 of this Section. C. System "HA": WATERBASED ACRYLIC EPDXY 1. For concrete: a. Surface preparation: Dust off, wipe down, dry. b. First coat: Apply at a dry film thickness of 4 to 5 mils: Water Based Acrylic Epoxy, Tnemec 113-AA90, equivalent product by Amerlock, or equal. I I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Exterior&Concrete Painting Project No. 6550 09900 5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 2. Second Coat: Water-based acrylic epoxy applied at a dry film thickness of 4 to ' 6 mils per coat. Tnemec 113-AA90, equivalent product by Amerlock, or equal. 3. Third Coat: Safety Yellow 02SF. D. System "HC" Gloss or Semi-Gloss EPDXY-POLYAMIDE with an ACRYLIC POLYURETHANE Top Coat 1. For galvanized metal, non ferrous metal and plastic: a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP7, very light brushoff blast cleaning to create a fine tooth. Use superfine blasting medium to avoid cutting into galvanized coatings or over-etching non-ferrous metal. Lightly sand the surface of plastic. b. Repair damaged or removed galvanized surfaces by spot priming with INORGANIC ZINC RICH PRIMER applied at 12 mils dry film thickness. Tnemec 90-E92, Amerlock 25-1, or equal. c. Pre-treat surface with phosphoric solution such as Galva-prep or equal. Flush surface clean with water. 2. For ferrous metal: a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP6 ,commercial blast cleaning. b. First coat: INORGANIC ZINC RICH PRIMER applied at 2 mils dry film thickness. Tnemec 90-E92, Amerlock 25-1, or equal. 3. For field coating over factory-applied finish coats: a. Surface preparation: SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning. b. First and two prime coats: Seal with two coats of sealer recommended by the top-coat manufacturer. Apply each coat to a 1-mil dry film thickness. 4. Second and third coats: Two intermediate coats of POLYAMIDOAMINE EPDXY applied at a dry film thickness of 8 mils per coat. Tnemec Series 69, Amerlock 400 or equal. 5. Fourth coat: Apply a top coat of ACRYLIC POLYURETHANE applied at a dry film thickness of 3 mils. Tnemec Series 75, Amerlock Amershield, or equal. END OF SECTION ' I I I I I Exterior&Concrete Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09900-6 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING I PART 1 —GENERAL I1.01 SUMMARY A. The WORK specified in this Section includes the requirements for I furnishing and installing the surface preparation, painting and finishing of exposed interior architectural items and surfaces as designated in the Contract. 1 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 I degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. II C. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. IE. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to IASTM D 523. G. References I 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D 523- Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss 1.03 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. I B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Provide manufacturer's technical information including label I analysis and instructions for handling, storage and application of each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system and application. Identify each material by the I manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. C. Samples I 1. Submit samples for the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S review. a. Provide 3 samples of each color and each gloss for each material to be finished. aDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Interior Painting Project No. 6550 09912- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I b. Except as otherwise directed by the OWNER'S 1 REPRESENTATIVE, make samples approximately 8 inches by 10 inches in size. I c. If so directed by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, provide field mock-ups during progress of the WORK in the form of actual application of the materials on actual surfaces to be painted for approval by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. Areas are 10 feet by 10 feet. 2. Revise and resubmit each sample or field mock-up as requested until the required gloss, color and texture are achieved. Such samples or field mock-ups, when approved, will become standards of color and finish for accepting or rejecting the WORK of this Section. 3. Do not commence finish painting until approved samples are on file at the job site. D. Quality Control Submittals I 1. Certificates: Provide certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). I 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer I as finish coats. 1. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrates. 2. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used. 3. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers, or remove the primer and re-prime as required. 4. Notify the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coatings supplied under other Sections. B. Qualifications 1. Applicators: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and ' who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the WORK of this Section. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements I 1. Apply water based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturers' printed instructions as approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. Interior Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 09912-2 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I2. Do not apply solvent-thinned paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are I below 45 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturers' printed instructions as approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 3. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist; or when the relative I humidity exceeds 85 percent. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturers' printed instructions as approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. I 4. Applications may be continued during inclement weather only within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer as being suitable for use during application and drying periods. 1 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 A. Performance Requirements 1. Paint exposed surfaces, except where a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifinoe , t hmamaterials or surfaces.callymetin If dc olorpainor tfinishe issamen otas designatedsiilaradj, the I OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will select from standard colors or finishes available. 2. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal I surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts and labels. 3. Do not paint over UL, FM or other code required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating or I nomenclature plates. B. Material Compatibility: I 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by I 2. manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. I1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I A. Acceptance at Site: Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: I 1. 2. Product name or title of material. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 1 4. Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. IB. Storage and Protection IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Interior Painting Project No. 6550 09912-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I 1. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well- I ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit. Maintain containers used in storage in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Protect materials from freezing. 3. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and WORK areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the WORK of this Section, deliver to the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE an extra stock equaling 4 gallons (1 box) or one 5 gallon pail of each color, type and gloss of paint used in the WORK; tightly sealing each container, and clearly labeling with contents and location where used and with color painted on top. 1. Supply extra paints from same production lots or color runs as used in the WORK, in factory sealed and labeled containers and which are properly resealed after adding colorants and mixing. 2. Identify each container with Project name and contents, such as "EXTRA PAINT TYPE INTERIOR GYP.BD. WALLS, EGGSHELL". 3. Deliver, unload, and position in place material to the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S on-site designated storage place. 4. Provide the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE with a signed receipt indicating materials and quantities upon delivery. 1.09 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS I A. General: In accordance with requirements of OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction (29CFR1926) and the applicable requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction; as well as manufacturer's printed instructions and appropriate technical bulletins and manuals; provide and require use of personnel protective equipment for persons working in or about the Site. B. Head and Face Protection and Respiratory Devices: Provide equipment that includes protective helmets, which are worn by all persons while in the vicinity of the WORK. Workers engaged in or near the WORK during sandblasting must also wear OSHA approved eye and face protection devices and air purifying half mask or mouthpiece respirators. Barrier creams may be used on any exposed areas of skin. C. Ventilation: Where ventilation is used to control hazardous exposure, all equipment is explosion-proof. Forced air ventilation is provided to reduce the concentration of air contaminant to a safe limit. Air circulation and exhausting of solvent vapors is continued until coatings have fully cured. D. Sound Levels: Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds maximum allowable sound levels, implement a Hearing Conservation Program including furnishing and requiring the use of approved ear protective devices. Interior Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09912-4 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 E. Illumination: Adequate illumination is provided while WORK is in progress, which may include explosion-proof lights and electrical equipment. Whenever required by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, provide additional illumination to cover all areas to be inspected. The OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will determine the level of illumination for inspection purposes. F. Temporary Ladders and Scaffolding: Ensure all temporary ladders and scaffolding conform to applicable safety requirements. Erected them where requested by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE to facilitate inspection and move to locations as requested. 1.10 WARRANTY INSPECTION A. Attend a warranty inspection that is conducted during the twenty three months following completion of painting WORK. Repair defective WORK in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the OWNER. The OWNER may, by written notice, reschedule the warranty inspection within the correction of defects period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. 1.11 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of the WORK, remove staging, scaffolding and containers from the Site. Remove coating spots and oil or stain upon adjacent surfaces. Clean, repair, or refinish damage to adjacent surfaces or facilities resulting from the WORK performed under this Section to the satisfaction of the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Application 1. Use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer of the particular paint, and as approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 2. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied, and that integrity of the finish is not jeopardized by use of the proposed equipment. ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Metro Latex Paint (503) 222-3881; Tenemec; Sherman Williams; ICI Dulux; Rodda; Miller Paint; Benjamin Moore, or approved equal. ' B. Paint Materials, General: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Interior Painting Project No. 6550 09912-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as 1 demonstrated by the manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint I material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers that do not display the manufacturer's product identification are not I acceptable. D. Volatile Organic Content (VOC) 1. Interior Paint: Less than 10 grams/liter. I E. Colors: See drawings. 1. Apart from the colors identified on the Drawings, the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the WORK, subject to the following: a. Interior WORK: A maximum of 5 different colors are used I with variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous WORK and metal WORK. F. Other Materials: Provide other materials not specifically described but I required for a complete and proper installation, subject to the approval of the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. PART 3— EXECUTION I 3.01 CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) I 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and surface conditions under which WORK of this Section is performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the WORK. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.03 PREPARATION A. General 1. Mix and prepare paint materials in strict accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 2. When materials are not in use, store in tightly covered containers. 3. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free from foreign materials and residue. I B. Stirring 1. Stir materials before application, producing a mixture of uniform density. 2. Do not stir film that may form on the surface into the material. Remove the film and, if necessary, strain the material before using. I Interior Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 09912-6 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I IC. Surface Preparation 1. General I a. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. Ib. Remove items that are in place and are not noted to receive paint finish, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. I c. Following completion of painting in each space or area, reinstall the removed items by using employees who are skilled in the necessary trades. I 2. Clean each surface to be painted prior to applying paint or surface treatment. 3. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvent of I low toxicity and flash point in excess of 200 degrees Fahrenheit prior to start of mechanical cleaning. 4. Schedule the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet I 5. newly painted surfaces. Preparation of Metal Surfaces a. Thoroughly clean surfaces until free from dirt, oil and I b. grease. On galvanized surfaces, use solvent for the initial cleaning, and then treat the surface thoroughly with the phosphoric acid etch. Remove etching solution completely before Iproceeding. c. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of paint. I3.04 INSTALLATION A. Paint Application I 1. General a. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats, which have been damaged, and touch-up bare areas prior to start of finish coats application. I b. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. 1) Do not apply additional coats until the completed coat has been inspected and approved. I 2) Only the inspected and approved coats of paint is considered in determining the number of coats applied. II c. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible to the unaided eye from a distance of 5 feet. d. On removable panels and hinged panels, paint the I backsides to match the exposed sides. 2. Drying a. Allow sufficient drying time between coats, modifying the period as recommended by the material manufacturer to I b. suite adverse weather conditions. Consider oil base and oleo-resinous solvent-type paint as dry for re-coating when the paint feels firm; does not IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Interior Painting Project No. 6550 09912-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the I thumb, and when the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. 3. Brush Applications a. Brush out and WORK the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. b. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface imperfections are not acceptable. 4. Spray Application a. Except as specifically otherwise approved by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brushwork would be inferior. b. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats. c. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of 2 coats in 1 pass. 5. For completed WORK, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint WORK not in compliance with the specified requirements. 6. Miscellaneous Surfaces and Procedures a. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. b. Exposed Mechanical Items, see Section 15 05 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. c. Hardware 1) Paint prime coated hardware to match adjacent surfaces. 2) Paint metal portions of head seals, jamb seals, and astragal seals to match the color of the doorframe unless otherwise directed by the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. d. Wet Areas 1) For oil base paints, use 1 percent phencimercuric or 4 percent tetrachlorophenol. 2) For water emulsion and glue size surfaces, use 4 percent sodium tetrachlorophenate. e. Interior: Use"stipple"finish where enamel is specified. f. Exposed Vents, see Section 15 05 00 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. , C. Protect WORK of other trades against damage from paint application. Interior Painting Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 09912-8 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 1 I Correct damage to WORK of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE ' A. Gypsum Board 1. Semigloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Latex based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. B. Ferrous Metal II. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. a. Primer: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive alkyd based or epoxy ' metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. Tnemec Series 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc or ' equal. b. First and Second Finish Coats: Semigloss, acrylic latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by ' the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. First coat - Tnemec Hi-Build Expoxoline II Series L69 or equal. Second Coat — Tnemec Endura- ' Shield II Series 1080. C. Galvanized Metal 1. Semigloss, Acrylic Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. ' a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. Tnemec Hi-Build Epoxline II Series L69. ' b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic latex interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Both Coats — Tnemec Endura-Shield II Series 1075. END OF SECTION 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Interior Painting Project No. 6550 09912-9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 i 1 ' SECTION 11001 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: The general requirements for all of the Equipment and Mechanical work in the scope of the Project, included in Divisions 11 and 15, and elsewhere wherever specifically mentioned in these Specifications. B. Direct the attention of all subcontractors and suppliers of equipment and related ' appurtenances for the work to the applicable provisions in the Contract Documents wherever they may occur. 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). ' C. Hydraulic Institute. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). ' E. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 1.03 STANDARDS FOR THE WORK A. Complete Systems: Provide duct, pipe, fittings, wiring, and supports to produce complete, operable systems with all elements properly interconnected. If a specific dimensioned location is not shown for interconnections or smaller system elements, select appropriate locations and show them on Shop Drawing submittals for review. B. Provide equipment and material new and without imperfections. Erect in a neat and workmanlike manner; aligned, leveled, cleaned and adjusted for satisfactory operation; installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers and the best standard practices for this type of work so that connecting and disconnecting of piping and accessories can be readily made and so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair. Locate oil and lubrication fittings clear of and away from guards, base, and equipment and within reach from the operating floor. Coordinate location of all motor connections in order to properly orient encased electrical conduits. In order to meet these requirements with equipment as furnished, minor deviation from the Drawings may be made as favorably reviewed by the Engineer. C. The recommendations and instructions of the manufacturers of products used in the work are hereby made part of these Specifications, except as they may be superseded by other requirements of these Specifications. 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 General Equipment& Mechanical Requirements Project No. 6755 11001 - 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. I B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer and receive favorable review prior to fabrication, construction or delivery to the project site in accordance with Section 01300 of these Specifications. Show sizes and arrangement of IIIequipment, foundations, and anchor bolts required; performance characteristics; fan curves curves; control diagrams; wiring diagrams; motor data sheets; methods of assembly; pipe hanging details; ductwork layouts; and connections to other work. Date and sign drawings as certified for use in construction of this project. The I arrangement of mechanical equipment and appurtenant piping shown on the Drawings may be varied as necessary to fit the favorably reviewed certified manufacturer's installation drawings. However, manufacturers' drawings shall not deviate in substance from the Contract Drawings and Specifications as to location, size, type, and design of equipment. The following minimum requirements shall accompany all equipment submissions: III1. Overall dimensions. 2. Mounting arrangement and dimensions. 3. Description of materials. I 4. Connection sizes and orientation. 5. Capacity and location of lifting eyes. 6. Motor arrangement showing location of electrical connections. 7. Rating data - Mechanical and Electrical as applicable. I 8. Detail electrical wiring diagrams, showing component designation and rating. 9. Seismic design certifications and anchorage descriptions as required by Section 01190. 10. Motor data as specified in Section 11002. 11. List of special tools and/or spare parts to be furnished, if any. C. Each piece of equipment, for which certified witnessed or non-witnessed performance tests are required, shall be accompanied by a completed form I containing at least the following information: 1. Owner's name and location of project. 2. Contractor's name and subcontractor if applicable. 3. Name of item being submitted. 4. Specification reference by section, paragraph and page. 5. Data on item (manufacturer, general descriptive data, dimensions, size of connections, speeds, performance curves, serial number). A specific list of the test results plus a list, which shows the values that differ from Specifications. 6. Motor data, type, voltage, frequency, phase, full load amperes, starting method, frame size, enclosure insulation type (NEMA Code letter), dimensions, service , factor, serial number. 7. Date and signature of person certifying the performance. D. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and submit manuals covering installation, operation and maintenance of all equipment and machinery specified in Divisions 11 and 15. Refer to Section 01300. E. Manufacturers' Affidavits: Where called for in the Specifications, each equipment manufacturer, or their authorized representative, shall submit an affidavit conforming to the requirements of Section 01650. General Equipment i ment&Mechanical Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 Permit Set 11001 2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 I 1 1.05 RESPONSIBILITY AND CARE OF EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the equipment included in this Contract until I it has been finally inspected, tested, and accepted in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. B. The Contractor shall make his own provisions for properly storing and protecting all 1 material and equipment against theft, injury, or damage from any and all causes. Damaged material and equipment shall not be used in the work. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN IA. General: Design all equipment for the service intended, of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection, and during continuous or intermittent operation. Adequately stay, brace I and anchor, and install equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner. Give consideration to appearance and safety, as well as utility, in the design of details. Use cathodically compatible materials of construction. IB. Seismic: Refer to Section 01190 of the Specifications for the seismic design criteria. C. Controls: Unless noted otherwise, the design of the electric control of any equipment system and/or equipment package shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer of Ithe equipment system and/or equipment package. The elementary control diagrams as shown on the Electrical Drawings and the diagrams shown on the Instrumentation Drawings are illustrative of control and monitoring requirements pertaining to various I equipment of this project. The manufacturers shall design their own functional electric control devices and circuitry, in consultation with the specific elementary control diagrams and other project specifications, to meet the equipment control I requirements. All such systems and package controls shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer, except that controls shown in motor control centers and process controllers, remote control devices, and their interconnecting wiring shall be provided under Divisions 16 and 17. Provide heating, ventilating, and air I conditioning controls, both 24-volt and line voltage type, by a HVAC controls specialist. I2.02 MATERIALS AND STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A. Materials: Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment and systems with new materials and in accordance with acceptable modern engineering and shop I practices. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gauges so repair parts can be installed in the field. B. Uniformity: Unless otherwise specified, equipment or material of the same type or I classification used for the same purpose shall be the product of the same manufacturer and shall be the same model. I 2.03 LUBRICATION A. Provide lubricants of types recommended by equipment manufacturers, in quantities sufficient for consumption prior to completion, testing and final acceptance. I IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 General Equipment&Mechanical Requirements Project No.6755 11001 -3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 2.04 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING I A. Details of fabrication shall be in accordance with Section 05100 and 05500. 2.05 EQUIPMENT BASES AND BEDPLATES A. Mount equipment assemblies on a single heavy cast iron or welded steel bedplate unless otherwise shown or specified. Provide bases and bedplates with machined support pads, tapered dowels for alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits. Round or chamfer and grind smooth all corners. Continuously weld seams and contact edges between steel plates and shapes, and grind welds smooth. Do not support machinery or piping on bedplates other than that which is factory installed. Provide jacking screws in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in leveling prior to grouting. Mount all equipment bases and baseplates on reinforced concrete pads at least 3 inches high. 2.06 ANCHORS A. Each equipment manufacturer shall furnish an anchor bolt pattern and the required anchor bolts, nuts, and washers of adequate design for securing bases and bedplates to concrete bases. Provide anchor bolts of length to allow for 1-1/2-inch of grout under baseplates and adequate anchorage into structural concrete unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Provide anchor and assembly bolts and nuts of ample size and strength for the , purpose intended. All bolts shall be standard machine bolts, with cold pressed hexagon nuts. Provide suitable degauling compounds for bronze and stainless steel threaded components. Any space wholly or partially underground, or having a wall or ceiling forming part of a water channel, is classified as a moist location. Unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings, provide materials as follows: 1. Bolts and nuts in submerged locations or submerged and embedded in concrete or buried in earth: Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Bolts and nuts for supports or equipment in dry or moist locations: Galvanized steel (hot-dipped), with oversize nuts. 3. Use other bolting materials where specifically called for in the Specifications or on the Drawings. C. Anchor all motor-driven equipment with cast-in-place anchor bolts or drilled-in anchors set with epoxy adhesive. Do not provide expansion type anchors for motor- driven equipment. D. Anchor all non-motor-driven equipment with cast-in-place anchor bolts or drilled-in anchors set with epoxy adhesive except that, where specifically allowed by note on the Drawings, expansion type anchors may be used. E. Refer to Section 05090 for technical specification requirements for cast-in-place and post-installed anchors. 2.07 SAFETY GUARDS A. Cover belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, nip points, exposed shafts, and other moving or rotating parts on all sides with safety guards conforming to all federal, state, and local codes and regulations pertaining; conform to the most restrictive requirement. Design guards for easy installation and removal, complete 1 General Equipment&Mechanical Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 11001 -4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 I I I I Ill with necessary supports, accessories, and fasteners, 1 I all hot-dip galvanized. Design guards in outdoor locations to prevent entrance of rain and dripping water. Provide tachometer test opening in line with ends of shafts. Typically, guards shall be expanded metal on a structural steel frame except that outdoor guards may be of solid material. Provide hinged doors with latch for service and lubrication access. I B. Cover all ducts, pipes, manifolds, heaters, and other surfaces which have a surface temperature sufficient to burn human tissue with a thermal insulating material or otherwise guard against contact. 1 C. Guards to comply with OSHA. 2.08 LIFTING EYES IA. Supply all equipment weighing over 100 pounds with lifting eyes. Parts of equipment assemblies which are normally serviced separately, such as motors, to have lifting eyes of their own. 2.09 DRIVES A. General: Provide all drive units with an AGMA rating and service factor suitable for IIC. 24 hours per day operation under the operating load. B. Electric Motors: Conform to the requirements of Section 11002. C. V-Belt Drives: Equip each V-belt drive with suitable tension adjustment. Provide drives having a service factor of at least 1.6 with arc length correction at maximum torque using nameplate rating of driving motor. 2.10 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Furnish each piece of equipment and its driver with a corrosion-resistant metal nameplate fastened to the item in a readily readable position. This nameplate to contain the manufacturer's name, equipment rating, capacity, size, model, serial number, and speed. All information written or printed to be in English. B. Direction of Rotation: Furnish each piece of rotating equipment with a direction of rotation arrow. Functional Identification: Label each piece of equipment using a plastic laminate label with the functional name and number of the equipment. 1. Fasten labels to the equipment, its base, or other acceptable location: a. Letters: At least 1/2-inch high with the border trim on all sides not less than 1/4-inch. b. Color: Green background with white letters. c. Fasteners: Brass or stainless steel screwed into inserts, anchor shields, or tapped holes in equipment or base. 2.11 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS I A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, provide suitable insulation between adjacent surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. Connections of dissimilar piping materials shall utilize dielectric unions, flanges, couplings, or bushings. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 11001 -5 General Equipment&Mechanical Requirements Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 2.12 SPECIAL TOOLS I A. For each type of equipment to be furnished, provide a complete set of all special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices)which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of such equipment. 111 2.13 FINISHES A. Factory Painting: On HVAC units, pumps, motors, drives, starters, control panels, and other similar self-contained or enclosed components, apply a factory protective paint system unless otherwise noted. Paint or otherwise protect surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly by a method which provides protection for the life of the equipment. B. Shop Priming: Except where field sandblasting is required, apply one or more shop coats of metal primer on surfaces to be finish painted at the site, of sufficient thickness to protect surfaces until finished. Primer shall be compatible with finish coat. ' C. Rust Preventive: Coat machined, polished, other ferrous surfaces, and non-ferrous surfaces which are not to be painted with rust preventive compound. 2.14 NOISE AND VIBRATION 1 A. Mechanical and electrical equipment, as installed in this project, shall not create sound levels that are in excess of that permitted by OSHA for 8 hours per day worker exposure unless otherwise noted for the specific piece of equipment involved. If the required sound level cannot be achieved by bare equipment in its designated environment, provide sound attenuating enclosures. Sound attenuating enclosures I shall have necessary ventilation to prevent equipment overheating and shall be constructed for easy removal to permit maintenance. Devices necessary for day-to- day operation shall pierce the enclosure or otherwise be accessible without need to remove the enclosure. B. Equipment which when operating has obvious excessive vibrations shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. Baseline vibration measurements shall be I made where specified. 2.15 FACTORY TESTS I A. Perform factory tests for each piece of equipment where specifically called for in the section specifying that equipment. Note that factory tests are inherent in many reference standards. The requirement for a factory test in a referenced standard is hereby made a part of these Specifications. Conduct factory tests at the same I speeds and other conditions at which the equipment will operate in the field, except as noted. I B. Where specifically noted, performance tests may be witnessed by the Engineer or his representative. Inform the Engineer in sufficient time to allow arrangements to be made for witness of such tests. When non-witnessed tests are performed, supply certified results. C. Tests of HVAC equipment shall conform to the requirements set forth in these Specifications. 1 General Equipment&Mechanical Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 11001 -6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I iPART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect each item of equipment for damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation before installing. ' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prior to installing equipment, ensure that the areas are clean. Maintain the areas in ' a broom-clean condition during installation operations. Clean, condition, and service equipment in accordance with the approved Instruction Manuals and specific recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Structural Fabrications: Conform to the AISC Code and Specification referenced in ' Article "Structural Steel Fabrications," and conform to Section 05500. B. Equipment: Conform to approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Employ skilled craftsmen experienced in installation of the types of equipment specified. Use ' specialized tools and equipment, such as precision machinist levels, dial indicators, gauges, and micrometers, as applicable. Produce acceptable installations free of vibration or other defects. Align and pin to common bedplate equipment and drivers connected by flexible couplings. C. Anchor Bolts: Deliver bolts with templates or setting drawings and verify that bolts are correctly located before structural concrete is placed. ' D. Base and Bedplate Grouting: Do not place grout until initial fitting and alignment of connected piping is completed. Level and align equipment on the concrete foundations, then entirely fill the space under base or bedplates with grout. Bevel exposed grout at 45 degree angle, except round exposed grout at horizontal surfaces for drainage. Trowel or point exposed grout to a smooth, dense finish and damp cure with burlap for 3 days. When grout is fully hardened, remove jacking ' screws and tighten nuts on anchor bolts. Check the installation for alignment and level, and perform approved corrective work as required to conform to the tolerances given in the applicable Instruction Manual. 1. Make an allowance of at least 1-1/2 inches for grout under the equipment bases, ' whether or not shown on the Drawings. Use steel shims to level and adjust the bases. Shims may be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatlyinconspicuous I work. Unless otheandrwisesoas approvedtobeas, allingroutonspicuoushall beas apossible favorablyin reviewedthecompleted non- shrink, non-metallic grout. 2. Grout: Refer to Section 03300. 3. Where practicable, place the grout through the grout holes in the equipment base and work outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamfer around the top edge of the finished foundation. r3.04 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND ADJUSTMENT A. Arrange for an authorized factory-trained representative of the company or companies supplying the various items of equipment to check the installation and adjust and test the equipment. Said representative shall be experienced and ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 General Equipment&Mechanical Requirements Project No. 6755 11001 -7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I knowledgeable of the equipment being tested. Furthermore, the representative shall I assist and instruct the operating staff in adjusting and operating the equipment during the initial plant operation period. ' 1. Provide initial lubrication for all equipment. 2. Test and demonstrate to the Engineer that all equipment operates properly and specified performance has been attained. Furnish any test equipment or I measuring devices required which are not part of the permanent installation. 3. In addition, demonstrate that the entire facility is in full operating condition prior to the acceptance of the work. Should any equipment or part thereof fail to operate as intended, immediately remove and replace it, all at the Contractor's expense. I Pay for all tests involved in this Section. 4. Pressure test equipment and connections thereto as required by these Specifications. I 3.05 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Upon completion of the work, and after all systems are set and balanced, conduct , performance tests in accordance with Division 1 and other applicable sections of these Specifications. Submit test conditions, test data and results to the Engineer for review. ill3.06 SOUND LEVEL TESTING A. Measure the sound level developed by all mechanical and electrical equipment provided. Perform testing in all rooms and spaces containing such equipment during the final operation test program with all equipment operating. Use OSHA approved instrument and record the highest sound level developed when measured according to OSHA standards in each room and space. Deliver a copy of records to the I Engineer. 3.07 TOOLS, LOOSE PARTS, AND LUBRICANTS 11A. Tools and Loose Parts Supplied: Provide an inventory of tools and loose parts required to be supplied under the project. Turn over inventory and parts to the Owner. The Owner's written acknowledgment of receipt is required for project I completion. Loose parts are defined as items such as special tools, keys, safety equipment, and portable equipment. Refer to relevant technical sections of these Specifications for additional instructions. B. Recommended Spare Parts: Furnish a complete list of recommended spare parts and supplies for each equipment furnished with current prices and a source of supply. I C. Provide a list of all recommended lubricants not listed in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. END OF SECTION I I General Equipment&Mechanical Requirements Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 111 Permit Set 11001 -8 Project No.6755 KM Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 SECTION 11002 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide motors to drive equipment specified in other sections and Divisions, including, but not limited to, Divisions 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16. Refer to driven equipment sections for additional requirements. Requirements of the driven equipment Specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section, where conflict occurs. This Section applies to all electric motors furnished for this project, unless otherwise noted. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 2. Section 15800: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 3. Section 16010: Electrical Work, General ' 4. Section 16262: Variable Frequency Drives 5. Section 16422: Motor Starters 6. Section 16444: Low Voltage Motor Control Center 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard: 1. MG 1 Motors and Generators B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Standard: 1 1. 112 Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publication: Recognized Component Directory 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. For each motor, include the following data in the shop drawing submittal for the driven equipment: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Manufacturer's type and frame designation. 3. Horsepower output. 4. Time rating. 5. Maximum ambient temperature rating. 6. Insulation system designation. 7. Rpm at full load. 8. Voltage, number of phases, frequency and full load amperes. 9. Code letter for locked rotor kVA. 10. Service factor at 40°C ambient. 11. NEMA design letter. 12. Enclosure type. ' 13. Lubrication requirements, including type and frequency. 14. KW input power and power factor at 75% and 100% of rated horsepower output. 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electric Motor Drives Project No. 6755 11002-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 1 15. Guaranteed minimum efficiency and nominal efficiency per MG1-12.55. 16. Nominal efficiency. B. Provide installation, operation and maintenance instructions, and renewal parts list ' as required for maintenance manuals under Section 01300. 1.04 COORDINATION , A. General: Coordinate motors with driven equipment requirements. Unless otherwise specified, equipment manufacturers or suppliers shall select and provide motors for their equipment in conformance with these Specifications. Give particular attention to coordination of requirements for: 1. Power. 2. Starting torque. 3. Speed. 4. Bearing load. 5. Ambient temperature. 6. Frequency of starting. 7. Moisture exposure. 8. Adjustable speed control, where applicable. 1 B. Suppliers of motors to be used with adjustable speed systems shall: 1. Provide all relevant motor data to the adjustable speed control manufacturer for analysis. Provide motors in conformance with and compatible with the adjustable speed control manufacturer's equipment and requirements. 2. Provide all relevant motor data to the pump manufacturer for vibration, reed critical frequency and other required analyses. ' 1.05 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS A. The following motor characteristics are specified with the driven equipment in all 1 cases: 1. Speed. 2. Horsepower or supplier responsibility to determine. 3. Horizontal or vertical arrangement. 4. Indoor or outdoor location. B. Additional motor characteristics are specified with the driven equipment only where the required motor differs from the typical characteristics described below or where additional properties or characteristics are required that are not specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Motors shall be designed, built, and installed in the driven equipment, to provide long, trouble-free life in industrial service and shall be rated in conformance with NEMA MG1. Motors rated 100 horsepower or less and rated 600V or less shall be listed in UL Recognized Component Directory or shall be listed and labeled by other organizations acceptable to the authority having code enforcement jurisdiction. Electric Motor Drive Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 11002-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 111 B. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, r p ovlde motors with the following typical characteristics: 1. Motors shall be single speed, and designed for continuous duty and full voltage starting. Motors shall provide standard starting torque. 2. Voltage Ratings: a. 1/2 horsepower or less: 115 volts, single phase, 60 Hz, capacitor start. Small fan motors may be split phase or shaded pole type if standard for the equipment. b. Above 1/2 horsepower: 460 volts, three phase, 60 Hz, squirrel cage induction motors. 3. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 in an ambient temperature of 40°C. a. Exceptions: Motors, which have special enclosures or winding configurations, may carry a Unity (1.0) Service Factor. Examples are totally enclosed, explosion proof, or submersible motors. 4. Windings shall be copper. 5. Provide ground lug inside the terminal box. 6. Provide lifting eye on each motor weighing more than 50 pounds. 7. Each motor shall be suitable for six starts per hour(5 minutes on and 5 minutes off, continuously) when powering the specific driven equipment required for this project. 8. Each motor shall have an overall sound power level at no load not greater than given in NEMA MG1-12.49. 9. Motors, which have special operating characteristics such as multi-speed, high torque/high slip, short time intermittent ratings shall be nameplated to show how these characteristics differ from standard design. C. Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall have inverter duty complying with NEMA MG-1, Section IV, Part 31. 2.02 NAMEPLATE A. Provide stainless steel nameplate for each motor, attached to the motor by stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly the information required by NEMA MG1, Part 10 and Part 12. 2.03 ENCLOSURE TYPE BY LOCATION A. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with the following typical enclosures: 1. Indoors: Horizontal motors shall be open, drip-proof; vertical motors shall be drip-proof with guard. 2. Outdoors: Vertical motors shall be weather-protected type I. Horizontal motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled. All motors shall have the following features: a. Bearing protection. 111 b. Anti-corrosion treatment of external hardware and internal metal parts. c. Weatherproof terminal box with gaskets between the motor, terminal box and terminal box cover. d. Guard screens on ventilation openings. e. Moderate moisture resistant insulation, specified hereinafter. f. Interior and exterior corrosion protection coatings. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 Electric Motor Drives 11002-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I g. Special attention to leads into terminal box. I B. When specifically called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment or 111required by Code, provide the following enclosure types: 1. Hazardous locations: Motors shall be explosion-proof and shall be UL listed for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D locations; motors shall bear the UL label. 2. Severe duty: Motors shall have the following features: a. Totally enclosed, fan cooled enclosure. b. Stainless steel nameplate. c. Cast iron housing, bearing brackets and fan guard. d. Cast iron conduit box with threaded conduit entrance. 111 e. Corrosion resistant fan. f. Corrosion resistant hardware. g. Automatic breather/drain. h. Ground lug. i. Regreasable bearings. I j. Provision for excluding water and dust from bearings. k. Class F insulation. I. Service factor of 1.15. m. Epoxy coating on all external surfaces. I 2.04 INSULATION A. Unless otherwise specified with the driven equipment, provide motors with Class 1 or F insulation, non-hygroscopic. In single phase motors 1/2 horsepower or smalle , provide Class A insulation or better. B. Where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide the following type of insulation: 1. Moderate Moisture Resistant: Provide extra dip and bake of epoxy or polyester varnish to resist somewhat higher than normal moisture in the atmosphere. 2.05 MOTOR HORSEPOWER I A. The maximum permissible motor loading: 1. Motors with service factor 1.15 or greater: 100% of nameplate horsepower. 2. Motors with service factor less than 1.15: 90% of nameplate horsepower. I TABLE 11002-1 MOTOR NOMINAL EFFICIENCIES AT FULL LOAD I HP I 900 RPM ( 1,200 RPM I 1,800 RPM I 3,600 RPM I Open Drip-Proof and Weather Protected Type 1 Motors 1 78.5 78.5 82.5 80.0 1.5 80.0 80.0 84.0 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 82.5 85.5 3 85.5 82.5 82.5 84.0 5 86.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 7.5 87.5 89.5 87.5 88.5 10 90.2 90.2 89.5 86.5 Electric Motor Drive Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 11111002-4 Project No.6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 111 HP 900 RPM 1,200 RPM 1,800 RPM 3,600 RPM 15 90.2 91.7 90.2 89.5 I 20 91.7 91.7 91.0 90.2 25 91.7 92.4 91.7 90.2 30 92.4 93.0 92.4 92.4 I 40 91.7 93.0 93.6 93.6 50 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 60 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1 I 75 94.1 93.6 94.1 93.6 100 94.5 94.5 94.5 94.1 125 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.1 1 150 95.0 94.5 95.0 94.1 200 95.0 95.0 95.0 94.1 250 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 1 300-500 95.0 95.8 95.8 94.5 Total Enclosed Fan Cooled Motors 1 78.5 78.5 82.5 80.0 1 1.5 80.0 80.0 84.0 81.5 2 85.5 82.5 82.5 85.5 3 86.5 86.5 82.5 84.0 1 5 88.5 87.5 85.5 86.5 7.5 89.5 90.2 87.5 88.5 10 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 I15 90.2 92.4 91.0 91.7 20 91.7 92.4 91.0 91.7 25 91.7 93.0 92.4 92.4 I 30 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.0 40 92.4 93.6 94.1 94.1 ISO 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1 60 93.6 94.1 94.1 94.1 75 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.5 I 100 94.5 95.0 95.0 94.5 125 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.0 150 94.5 95.0 95.4 95.4 I 200 95.0 95.0 95.4 95.8 95.4 250 95.0 95.4 95.8 300-500 95.0 95.8 95.8 95.8 IB. Probable motor horsepower ratings have been specified or shown on the Drawings. Changes from the specified horsepower may be accepted, if necessary to assure that motors do not exceed their maximum permissible loading, as defined above, Iunder normal operation. Motor horsepowers shall not be less than those specified in driven equipment sections. If a larger horsepower rating is required by the driven equipment, provide all changes required to motor starting and control equipment I and to the conduit and wiring system without any additional cost to the Owner. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electric Motor Drives Project No. 6755 11002-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 2.06 EFFICIENCY ' A. For motors 1 Horsepower and Larger: 1. Provide premium efficiency motors unless otherwise specified. Premium efficiency motors shall have nominal efficiencies at full load not less than those listed in Table 11002-1. 2. Guaranteed minimum efficiencies of premium efficiency motors shall correspond to nominal values as tabulated in NEMA MG-1, Table 12-8. B. Efficiencies shall be determined by using the IEEE 112, Test Method B using segregated loss determination. C. Single-phase fractional horsepower motors 1/4 HP through 3/4 HP motors shall be high-efficiency split-capacitor types having minimum efficiency ratings of not less than 64% and power factors of not less than 94.5%. 2.07 LOCKED ROTOR KVA-CODE LETTER I A. Provide motors with locked rotor kVA values less than or equal to those corresponding to the following: Horsepower Code Letter <5 M 7-1/2-10 H 2.08 THERMAL PROTECTION A. In each motor to be used with adjustable speed drives, in all motors 60 horsepower and larger, or where called for in the Specifications for the driven equipment, provide integral thermostats or other approved devices to protect the motor from overheating. Thermostats or other devices shall be normally closed and rated ' 125 Vac, 1 amp. 2.09 FACTORY TESTS A. Conduct factory tests on all motors in conformance with NEMA MG 1-12.55. All 111 tests shall be made in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install motors in driven equipment in conformance with motor manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. Motor nameplate shall be visible when installed on the driven equipment. END OF SECTION I Electric Motor Drive Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 11002-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I ISection 15050 1 PIPING, VALVES, AND ACCESSORIES I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY IA. Section includes: Provide all piping, including fittings, valves, supports, and accessories as shown on the Drawings, described in the Specifications and as required to completely interconnect all equipment with piping for complete and operable systems, including equipment drains. I B. Related Sections Including Work Provided in this Section: 1. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 1 Certain additional valves, piping, and accessories specified in Section 15800 2. Section 15510: Hot Water Heating Coils 3. Section 15800: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 1 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) I B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) C. ASTM International (ASTM) I D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IF. American Water Works Association (AWWA) G. American Welding Society (AWS) I H. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) I. U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) J. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) 1 K. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.03 SUBMITTALS IA. Shop Drawings: 1. Verify by excavation, inspection and measurement all installation conditions, 1 including existing utilities and structures, for all pipe before preparation of Shop Drawings. Submit field measurements and photos with Shop Drawings where exposed conditions are significantly different than indicated on the Drawings. 2. Layouts and Schematics: Submit detailed installation drawings of all piping. I Schematics may be submitted for piping 4 inches and smaller. The Drawings and schematics shall include: pipe support locations and types, fittings, valves, other appurtenances. (Product Review) I 3. Submit data to show that the following items conform to the Specification requirements: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping,Valves and Accessories I Project No. 6550 15050 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I a. Pipe, fittings, and accessories (Product Review). , b. Fabricated pipe supports and other pipe supports (Product Review). c. Pipe couplings and flexible pipe pieces (Product Review). d. Valves and Accessories (Product Review). e. Thermal insulation (Product Review). 4. Pipe, fittings and joint fabrication details for welded steel pipe (T.M-2P and T.W-1 P) (Product Review). 5. Submit reinforcement calculations for T.M-2P to demonstrate compliance with AWWA M11. 6. Submit procedures for welding field joints of welded steel pipe (T.M-2P and T.W-1P) and welder qualifications (Product Review). 7. Submit samples of gaskets and other materials where required by the detailed specifications. 8. Submit certified test reports as required herein and by the referenced standard specifications (Product Information). B. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation and operation manuals, bulletins, and spare parts lists for the following items: 1. Valves 3 inches and larger and all actuated valves. C. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturers for the following equipment: 1. All motorized or calibrated equipment. D. Field test reports as required in Part 3. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Materials and equipment furnished under this Section shall be of manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the materials and equipment for a period of at least 5 years. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to the materials and equipment made by the manufacturers specifically named herein, if an alternate manufacturer is proposed. B. Factory Quality Control: The Contractor shall test all products as noted herein and by the reference specifications. 1 C. Field Quality Control: 1. The Owner will: a. Inspect field welds and test the welds if it is deemed necessary. 2. The Contractor shall: a. Perform leakage tests. b. Be responsible for the costs of additional inspection and retesting by the Owner resulting from non-compliance. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING/SEQUENCING I A. Construction under this Contract may involve expansion and/or modification of an existing piping system which must continue to provide service to all buildings during construction. B. Connections and utilities changes must be programmed to provide the least possible interruptions of service. Prior to any shutdown, all materials, fittings, supports, equipment and tools shall be on the site and all necessary labor I Piping,Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-2 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 Ischeduled prior to starting any connection work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer in writing at least 7 days in advance of any required I shutdowns. In general, shutdowns shall not exceed four hours in duration unless specifically authorized or indicated in the suggested construction sequence. If a shutdown of more than four hours is required, the Contractor shall first install temporary service connections to all affected houses and other buildings. I 1.06 PIPING SYSTEMS IA. The various piping systems are identified by a multi-letter code on the Drawings. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, each system shall be constructed using the materials indicated for that system in the Pipe Schedule. Piping materials are I identified by type designation in the schedule unless otherwise noted, and most valves and accessories are identified by a valve and accessory system unless otherwise noted. I 1.07 APPURTENANCES A. Furnish and install all necessary guides, inserts, anchors and assembly bolts, I washers and nuts, hangers, supports, gaskets, couplings and flanges; all other appurtenant items shown on the Drawings, specified or required for the proper installation and operation of the piping; devices included in or on the piping equipment; and piping accessories. I1.08 PIPE SUPPORTS IA. General: 1. Piping Less Than 6 Inches: Pipe supports are generally not shown for piping less than 6 inches in diameter. Where supports are not shown, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to support all such piping in accordance with the I design criteria stated hereinafter and the support details shown on the Drawings. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger and all piping for hazardous chemicals shall be supported with pipe supports designed to resist seismic loads. Piping smaller I than 2-1/2 inches with non-hazardous contents may be supported with non- seismic resistant supports. 2. Where not detailed or otherwise indicated, pipe support types and spacing shall 1 be in accordance with the Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS) Standard Practice No. SP-58 and No. SP-69, except as superseded by the requirements of these Specifications. IB. Pipe Support System Design: 1. Design Loads: Pipe suspension shall be such as to prevent excessive stress or excessive variation in supporting force while system is in operation. Pipe 1 supports shall support the sum of the weight of the pipe, fittings, appurtenances, and contents. In addition, the pipe shall be anchored to resist internal pressure forces tending to separate any unrestrained joint at pressures I 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure for the applicable service. 2. Seismic Loads: Pipe supports shall meet the seismic design requirements of Section 01190. 3. Location: All piping shall be supported in a manner that will prevent undue I strain on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping, Valves and Accessories I Project No. 6550 15050-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 I shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, adjacent to flexible I couplings, at all non-rigid joints, at hose bibs, and where otherwise shown. Where piping connects to equipment, it shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment. a. Maximum support spacing shall conform to the following table: Pipe Size Inches Pipe Material Maximum Spacing Feet I 1" &smaller Iron or Steel 6 Copper 4-1/2 • Plastic continuous Tubing continuous 1-1/4 to 2" Iron or Steel 8 Copper or Plastic 5 2-1/2 to 4" Iron or Steel 10 I Copper or Plastic 6 b. Piping penetrations through concrete walls and slabs are considered to resist seismic loading, provided penetrations for pipes 3 inches in diameter and larger are complete with a wall flange. c. Branch piping is not considered to provide resistance to seismic forces. I 4. Anchors: Anchors for connecting pipe supports to concrete shall be in accordance with Sections 05090. 5. Thermal Expansion Allowance: I a. Provide one rigid pipe support for each straight run of pipe and between each pair of flexible couplings, flexible connectors, or expansion loops for pipes listed below. Provide other supports at the required spacing that allow sliding or rolling, as noted, along the pipe axis: 1) PVC pipe larger than 1-inch in diameter(sliding inside PVC sleeve). b. Provide vertical support only, that is, no lateral support, within 4 feet of an angle or tee for pipes listed above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Pipe and valve sizes are nominal inside diameter unless otherwise noted. B. Construct vents of materials specified for the pipe system for which they serve. I C. All materials delivered to the job site shall be new, free from defects, and marked to identify the material, class, and other appropriate data such as thickness for piping. 1 D. Acceptance of materials shall be subject to strength and quality testing in addition to inspection of the completed product. Acceptance of installed piping systems shall be based on inspection and leakage tests as specified hereinafter. 2.02 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Gaskets: Except where specified otherwise, gaskets shall be Styrene-Butadiene Rubber(SBR). Use Hypalon or Viton for hypochlorite solution service. I Piping,Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-4 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 111 B. Bolts and Tie Rods: Unless specified otherwise herein, flange bolts and nuts, coupling bolts and nuts, tie rods and other hardware shall be as follows: I 1. Exposed: Electroplated zinc or cadmium steel. 2. Submerged: Type 304 stainless steel, minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi. 3. Concrete Encased: Steel. 4. Buried: Type 304 stainless steel, minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi. 1 5. Apply an anti-galling compound to the threads of stainless steel bolts. C. Flexible Sealant: Flexible sealant for pipe joints, where shown on the Drawings, Ishall be a two-component polysulfide, non-sag; Sikaflex 2C, Dualthane, or equal. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS IA. Pipe and Fitting Designation: Piping materials are identified by a "Type" designation in these Specifications. The "Type" designation identifies not only the I pipe itself but the associated fittings and appurtenances and the installation and test procedures described for that"Type."The designation of a particular type shall indicate a complete installation including fittings,joints, cleaning and testing. The I pipe and fitting materials for each type designation shall be as specified herein and summarized in the Pipe Type Schedule. B. Piping Schedule: Piping systems and their corresponding piping and valve systems I are listed on the Drawings. C. Pipe Type Schedule: Pipe material,joints and fittings shall be as summarized below. A detailed specification of each pipe type follows. (The detailed specification 1 supersedes the schedule in case of any conflicts.) Pipe Material Pipe Description Field Joints Fittings I BS80 X-1 Black Steel, Schedule 80 Screwed Steel PVC-1 V-1 PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded or Solvent PVC, Sch 80 Weld I PVC-6 PVCT V-6 PVC, Drain, Waste and Vent B&S PVC U-4 PVC Tube Compression PVC Barb SSP W-1 Stainless Steel Pipe Flanged or Weld Stainless Steel 1 D. BS80 (Type X-1 Pipe]: 1. Pipe: Schedule 80 black steel, ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless. I 2. Joints: Screwed, flanged where shown or valves are required. 3. Fittings: 124 lb., cast iron, screwed, conforming to ANSI B16.4. 4. Flanges: Where required to connect to flanged equipment or valves, shall be I slip-on or weld-neck type conforming to ASTM A105 or ASTM A181. Flange drilling and facing shall match that of the flanged valves or equipment to which the pipe connects. I E. PVC-1 (Type V-1 Pipet 1. Pipe: Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), gray, normal impact, Type 12454 B, ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall bear the National li 1 Sanitation Foundation (NSF) label. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping,Valves and Accessories I Project No. 6550 15050-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 2. Joints: Solvent weld, except flanged permitted where required at equipment connections and where required on the Drawings. Use Military Specification T 27730A tape for threaded joints. 3. Fittings: Solvent weld, socket type, of same material as the pipe, Schedule 80, ASTM D2467. 4. Cement: Solvent weld, ASTM F-493, IPS 724 for CPVC as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the schedule and size to be joined. 5. Pipe Cleaner: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the schedule and size to be joined. F. PVC-6 [Type V-6 Pipel: I 1. Pipe and Fittings: Polyvinyl chloride drain, waste and vent, ASTM D2665. Fitting patterns, ASTM D3311. 2. Joints: Solvent weld. 3. Cement: Solvent cement, ASTM D2564, as recommended by the manufacturer. G. PVCT [Type U-4 Pipel: 1 1. Tube: Unpigmented reinforced PVC, Nalgene 980; Norton Tygon B-44-4X; or equal. 2. Fittings: PVC barbed. 3. Minimum working pressure 115 psi, 25% of burst pressure. H. SSP [Type W-1 Pipel: 1. Pipe: Stainless steel, ASTM A312 or A778 TP 316L. a. Exposed: Schedule 10S, except Schedule 40S for screwed joints and pipe 2 '/2 inches and smaller. 2. Joints: a. Pipe sizes 2 '/-inches and smaller, threaded or welded as indicated on the drawings. 3. Fittings: Wrought stainless steel, ASTM A774, TP316L, ANSI B16.9 for dimensions. 2.04 PIPE COUPLINGS AND FLEXIBLE PIPE PIECES A. General: For typical pipe joints refer to pipe material specifications. Other joint I devices shall be furnished where called for on the Drawings and as specified below. B. Flexible Connectors: 1. Up to 12-inch-Diameter: a. Type: Built-up, single arch (unless otherwise shown on Drawings) rubber expansion joints with full rubber flanges and retainer rings. Provide filled arch-type or wide flowing arches on raw sewage, sludge, and grit service. b. Materials: Neoprene cover over nitrile tube, reinforced with nylon or polyester body and galvanized steel retainer rings. c. Pressure Rating: 190 psi. d. Manufacturers: 1) Standard: Proco Series 230; Holz Type 200; Garlock Style 200HP; or equal. 2) Concentric Reducers: Proco RC Series; Holz 200TC 3) Eccentric Reducers: Proco RE Series; Holz 200TE Piping, Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-6 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 r 1 4) For connections to plastic piping systems provide connectors with additional flexibility as recommended by the manufacturer. Proco Series 261 R; Holz Type 320EZ; or equal. 2. Restraint: Provide galvanized steel control rod-compression sleeve assemblies for all flexible spools, except where pipelines cross structural expansion joints or where specifically omitted by note in the Drawings. Number and size of control rods shall be as required for the test pressure of the pipe system or 50 psi, whichever is greater. 3. Provide full size intermediate metal pipe flanges where rubber spool connects 1 with wafer style valves, lug style valves or other pipeline items that do not have full-face metal flanges. B. Flexible Expansion Joints: 1. Type: Single ball joints with integral expansion sleeves. Minimum 15 degrees deflection and 4 inches expansion. 2. Materials: Ductile iron conforming to AWWA C153. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psi minimum. 4. Lining: Fusion epoxy. 5. Connections: Flanges. 6. Manufacturer: EBBA Iron Flex-Tend; equivalent by U.S. Pipe; or equal. 2.05 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES 1 A. Valve and Accessory System Designation: Most valves and accessories to be furnished and installed are identified by a valve and accessory system designated by a letter symbol in the Piping Identification Schedule. B. General Requirements for Valves: 1. All valves of each type shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2. All exposed valves shall be furnished with operators, handwheels, levers, or other suitable type wrench including handles as specified herein or as shown on the Drawings. Valves 4-inch and larger located more than 7 feet above the floor level shall be furnished with chain operators. Chains shall be galvanized and shall extend to within 3 feet of the floor. Provide hook so that chain may be stored clear of walkways. 3. All threaded stem valves shall open by turning the valve stem counter- clockwise. 1 4. All exposed valves and valve operators shall have a non-bleeding shop coat, unless otherwise specified. C. Valve and Accessory Systems: See Piping Schedule on Sheet M001 111 1. Valve and Accessory System A: Applicable Service Condition: Clean Water/Hot Water. a. Ball Valves through size 4-inch in metal piping: 1) Rating: 400 psi WOG. 2) Type: Lever. 3) Connections: Threaded. 4) Materials: Bronze body ASTM B584 Alloy 83600 or 84400, chrome-plated ball, teflon seats. 5) Manufacturers: Apollo 70-100; Watts B-6000; or equal. 1 6) Actuator: See Section 15800. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping, Valves and Accessories Project No. 6550 15050 7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I b. Strainers: I 1) Rating: 125 psi. 2) Type: Y-type basket strainers, 20-mesh. 3) Connections: Threaded or flanged. 4) Materials: Iron body, stainless steel screen. 5) Manufacturers: Bailey 100A; Hoffman Series 400, 450; or equal. 6) Installation: Each to be complete with ball valve on blowoff. 2. Valve and Accessory System B: Applicable Service Condition: Sodium hypochlorite solution. a. Ball Valves Through 4-inch Size: 1) Rating: 150 psi at 73°F. 2) Type: Vented, Double true union. 3) Connections: Socket. 4) Materials: PVC body, teflon seats and EPDM 0-ring seals, except Viton 0-ring seals with chlorine solution. 5) Manufacturers: Chemtrol Trublock by Nibco, Asahi/America Pro Block, or equal. b. Rotameters: Provide Type 316 stainless steel housing or frame and a calibrated borosilicate glass metering tube with float. The float shall be of a material and shape suitable for process fluid. The tube shall be readily field removable for cleaning. All other wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, except 0-rings shall be Teflon unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer for the process fluid specified. End fittings shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The metering scale shall be a nominal 250 mm in length with GPM graduations. Meters shall have a minimum rangeability of 10:1. Accuracy shall be ±2% of full scale for flow rates in the upper 90% of the maximum flow range specified. Rotameters shall be manufactured by Brooks Instrument; SK Instrument; Wallace &Tiernan; Fischer& Porter; or equal. D. Miscellaneous Valves and Accessories: 1. Odor Control Nozzle: Shall be pre-purchased by the Owner from Integrity Municipal Systems, no equal. 2. Below Roof Caps: All pipes removed above roof shall be capped approximately 24-inches below the using Fernco Qwik Caps or approved equal. 3. Link-Type Seals: Link-type seals shall be interlocking synthetic rubber links connected by stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous belt. Tightening of the bolts shall expand the rubber to form a watertight seal of the annular space between a pipe and the hole or sleeve in the wall. 4. Valve Tags: Plastic, fiberglass, or plastic material, 2-inch square with grommeted hole. The tags shall be attached to valves with a brass jack chain. Lettering shall be stamped or cut into the tag at least 3/16-inch high. 5. Pipe Escutcheons: a. Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; cast brass, polished chrome plated, with set-screw, deep pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. b. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. Piping,Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 1 III I 111 I Permit Set 15050-8 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I c. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. d. One-piece design for piping to plumbing fixtures and to equipment in finished spaces. e. Split, concealed hinge type for piping not serving plumbing fixtures or equipment in finished spaces. 2.06 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING A. General: ' 1. Delivery: Deliver insulation materials to the job in original packages with manufacturer's "R"values clearly shown. Provide certification of compliance. 2. Warning: The Contractor is warned that working with fiberglass or rock wool materials may constitute a serious health hazard. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure the safety of the workers. 3. Shields: Insulation protection shields are required per paragraph 2.07C. 4. The following table summarizes the insulation system by use and service: rInsulation Insulation System Location Service System Thickness (Inches) All exposed HWS & HWR pipe in buildings All A 1/2-inch Exposed Pipe HWS & HWR Outside All C 3/8-inch Buildings Exposed Pipe OSH Outside All C 3/8-inch Buildings B. Insulation System A: 1. Material: Insulation shall be a pre-molded fiberglass with a maximum "K"factor of 0.25 at 70°F and having a factory-applied jacket. Fittings shall be insulated with insulating cement or mitered section of pre-molded fiberglass. 2. Fittings shall be covered with a Zeston, Thermazip, or equal jacket. Pipe I insulation shall be Johns Manville "Micro-Lok"with foil scrim kraft jacket, with laps and butt straps secured with Benjamin Foster or Arobol adhesive; Owens-Corning Fiberglass Type 25 ASJ/SSL; or equal. 3. Insulation exposed to the weather shall have, in addition, an aluminum waterproof jacket alloy 3003(0.024-inch); Childers, Alcorjac, or equal. C. Insulation System C: 1. Material: Insulation shall be nominal 3/8-inch wall thickness flexible closed celled foamed plastic. Insulation shall have a "K"factor of not more than 0.30 at 170°F. Insulation shall have a usage range from -30°F to 220°F. Insulation shall be Armstrong Armaflex 22; Johns-Manville Aerotube; or equal. 1. Application: Seal all slit and butt joints with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. Fittings shall be covered with mitered insulation according to manufacturer's recommended procedures and sealed with adhesive. Insulation shall have first class appearance. 2. Finish: Finish all exposed insulation with two coats of manufacturer supplied finish in a color selected by the Owner's representative. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping,Valves and Accessories Project No. 6550 15050 9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 2.07 PIPE SUPPORTS I A. Manufacture and Design: Pipe supports shall to the maximum extent possible and be standard factory fabricated units conforming to the typical supports and braces shown in the Drawings and as specified below. Where required support cannot be provided by standard factory fabricated units, and is not detailed on the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide special pipe supports. Supports shall be manufactured or special fabrications or combination as shown on the Drawings or specified. Special fabrications shall be in conformance with Section 05500. Provide 3/-inch chamfer on corners of all support elements and file or grind smooth. Supports designated to allow axial pipe movement shall have smooth and even contact surfaces. B. Materials: All support systems shall be galvanized steel except that those that are supporting SS pipe, submerged, or that are located within a tank, channel, or other structure designed to hold water, below the top of surrounding walkway elevation or tank wall top, or otherwise called out on the Drawings, shall be Type 304 OR 316 stainless steel. Trays for continuous support of plastic pipe or tubing shall be made of 20-gauge galvanized steel. C. Insulation Protection Shields: Provide insulation protection shields at all pipe supports for insulated piping. D. Provide plastic caps with rounded corners on all exposed ends of channels. 2.08 ROOF DRAINS I A. Roof drains shall be Zurn RD2130-NH2; Wade W-3041; or equal. Provide accessories required by roofing contractor to lock and seal at roof penetrations. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION I A. General Handling and Placing: 1. Exercise great care to prevent injury to or scoring of the pipe lining and coating, as applicable, during handling, transportation or storage. Handle fusion epoxy coated pipe and ceramic epoxy lined pipe in accordance with AWWA C213. Do not store pipe on rough ground and do not roll the pipe on the coating. Any damaged pipe sections, specials, or fittings shall be repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor as satisfactory to the Engineer. 2. Carefully inspect each pipe, fitting, valve and accessory before installation to insure there is no defective workmanship or obstructions. Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings and patch all damaged areas in the field or replace to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. Place or erect all piping to accurate line and grade and backfill, support, hang, or brace against movement as specified or shown on the Drawings, or as required for proper installation. Remove all dirt and foreign matter from the pipe interior prior to installation and thoroughly clean all joints before joining. 4. Use reducing fittings where any change in pipe size occurs. Do not use bushings unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Use eccentric reducing fittings wherever necessary to provide free drainage of lines. 5. Cast all metallic pipes and sleeves 6-inch and larger into new concrete walls without blockout. Pipes 5 inches and smaller may be cast in place or installed in Piping, Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-10 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 1 I 1 a smooth core drilled hole using a link type seal at the Contractor's p for s option. Maintain at least 1/2-inch clearance between reinforcing steel and metal pipe in I penetrations. 6. Cover polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe stored outside for more than two months I with canvas or other opaque material. Provide for air circulation under the covering. B. General Exposed Piping Installation: 1. Unless shown otherwise, install piping parallel to building lines, plumb and I level. Install piping without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner that would set up stresses in the pipe, valves, or connected equipment. 3. Set all pipe flanges level, plumb, and aligned. All flanged fittings shall be true I and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. All bolt holes in flanges shall straddle vertical centerline of pipes. 4. Flexibility and Expansion: Provide flexible couplings, flexible hose, or flexible I spools for all piping connections to motor driven equipment and where otherwise shown. The Contractor may install additional flexible couplings at favorably reviewed locations to facilitate piping installation, provided that he I submits complete details describing location, pipe supports, and hydraulic thrust protection. Anchor piping subject to expansion or contraction in a manner permitting strains to be evenly distributed. Sleeves for branches through walls from adjacent mains shall be of sufficient size to allow for free I side motion of covered pipe in sleeves. 5. Install unions or flexible connections where shown on the Drawings, and at all non-motor-driven equipment to facilitate removal of the equipment. I 6. Provide valves wherever equipment drain connections are furnished and carry the discharge pipe to the nearest floor drain, drain trench or sump. Where no receptacle for drain exists, install drain piping to 1-inch above the I floor. Drain piping and valve materials shall conform to the requirements of the system served. 7. Where piping conveying liquids passes over motor control centers, electrical panels and other electrical devices, install a protective drainage tray below I the piping. C. Pipe Welding: 1. General: Unless specified otherwise, shop and field welding of pipe shall I conform to ANSI B31.1 as amended by this paragraph. 2. All field and shop welding shall be done by the electric arc process unless otherwise specified. All field welding shall be done in passes not thicker than I 1/4-inch. Size and type of electrodes, and current and voltages used, shall be subject to the favorable review of the Engineer. Give particular attention to the alignment of edges to be joined, so that complete fusion and penetration I will be effected throughout the bottom of the weld. Welds shall contain no valleys or undercuts in the center or edges of the weld. Thoroughly clean each pass, except the final one, of dirt, slag, and flux before the succeeding bead is applied. 3. Clean completed field welds of pipe joints of dirt, slag and flux, and then visually inspect. Completely chip out all defects in welds discovered during field inspection in a manner that will permit proper and complete repair by 1 welding subject to the favorable review of the Engineer. Under no circumstances will caulking of defective welds be permitted. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping, Valves and Accessories 1 Project No. 6550 15050-11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 I in shall be done b experienced, skilled operators familiar with the 4. All wed g Y methods and materials to be used. Hand welding will be done only by welders qualified under the standard qualification procedure of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 5. Field welds shall follow as closely as possible to the laying operation. All field welds shall be complete before lining or coating of the joints in steel pipe is begun. Where pipe is fusion epoxy lined and/or coated, follow AWWA C-213 procedures for field welded joints. 6. A single, continuous, watertight, full fillet weld shall be the minimum required at all field joints. Double welded joints are required on all piping specifically I noted to be double welded. 7. See also installation specifics for welding of pipe. D. Installation Specifics: I 1. BS80 Type X-1: a. Install and weld in accordance with ANSI B31.1. b. Threaded joints shall have connections metal-to-metal tight. Remove all burrs from the ends of the pipe and clean threads of all oil and chips. Coat male threads with a joint lubricant. 2. PVC-1 & PVC-6 (Type V-1 &V-6 Pipe]: a. Place PVC pipe within the installation areas at least 24 hours prior to installation to permit temperature equalization. b. Cut pipe ends squarely, ream and deburr inside and out. c. Solvent Weld Joints: Clean pipe ends and sockets and join in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Make joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. Handle solvent cements and primers in accordance with ASTM F402. d. PVC-1 [Type V-1 Pipe]: Threaded connections shall use a short nipple, threaded at one end, socket at the other. Provide thread sealant in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Take care not to overtighten the connection. 3. PVCT Type U-4 Pipe: a. Install in accordance with tube and fitting manufactures' instructions. 4. SSP Type W-1 Pipe: b. Install and weld in accordance with CGA G-4.4 and ANSI B31.1. Back purge all welds with cover gas. Seal weld all slip-on flanges. c. Provide anti-seize compound on threaded connections. d. Temporarily plug or cap all points of connection to exclude moisture, dust or other contaminants or impurities prior to being connected. I I I Piping,Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-12 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70111 1 I 3.02 COUPLING INSTALLATION 1 A. Flexible Couplings and Flange Coupling Adaptors: Prior to installation, thoroughly clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from the pipe to provide a clean seat for the gasket. 1 Wipe gaskets clean before they are installed. If necessary, flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter gaskets may be lubricated with soapy water or manufacturer,'s standarddrawingup lubricanton beforeopposite installationsidesalittle aton the a pipetime enduntils.all Installbolts inhave I accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten bolts progressivelybolt a uniform tightness. Workers tightening bolts shall be equipped with torque-limiting wrenches or other favorably reviewed type. B. Flexible Rubber Spools: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, install flat with %the maximum expansion. ' 2. Connect rubber spools only to full-face metal flanges. 3. Install control rod-compression sleeve assemblies with control rod nuts snug, to relieve stress on adjacent pipe, except at buried locations. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. Install valves and accessories such that all parts are easily accessible for maintenance and operation. B. Where valve handwheels are shown on the Drawings, valve orientation shall be as shown. Where valve handwheels are not shown, orient valves to permit easy access to the handwheels or handles and to avoid interferences. C. Provide a union adjacent to each screwed end valve and accessory with additional unions as necessary to facilitate removal. ' D. Connections between ferrous and non-ferrous piping, valves, accessories or pipe supports shall be made using a dielectric coupling, union, or flange. E. Where valves or other pipeline items require metal full-face connecting flanges, provide intermediate flanges if the connecting flange is not adequate. F. All insulated piping passing through walls or slabs shall be sleeved and insulation shall run continuously through the sleeves and shall allow for 1/8-inch annular clearance between outside of insulation and sleeve wall. G. Provide a suitable chrome plated escutcheon on pipes passing through walls, floors, ceilings and partitions in finished areas. F. Install link-type seals in cast-in-place metal sleeves or in smooth core drilled holes. Grout both sides flush with non-shrink grout unless otherwise shown on the plans. H. Install butterfly valves in accordance with AWWA C504, Appendix A, Sections A.2 through A.5, inclusive. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping,Valves and Accessories Project No. 6550 15050-13 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I I. s oems in t coils, andProvide wheretest indicatedplugon onall Drawings.closedht Locatewater testsystplugs wherelocated theyinlewill and be easily outlet of accessible and have adequate clearance. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION A. General: Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed instructions. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, and anchors. Keep insulation material dry during application. Apply vapor barrier on seams, joints, over staples, and at end butt to fittings. B. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with the I top of the roof flashing. Seal with vapor barrier coating. Apply insulation for exterior applications butted tightly to interior insulation ends. Extend metal jacket for exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor barrier coating. C. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetration: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls. Apply aluminum jacket with factory- applied moisture barrier over insulation. Extend 2 inches from both surfaces of wall on partition. Secure aluminum jacket with metal bands at both ends. Seal ends of jacket with vapor barrier coating. Seal around penetration with joint sealer. D. Whenever possible, slip insulation on pipe before making connections. Seal joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive. E. Cover exterior insulation, except for metal-jacketed insulation with PVC fitting covers and seal circumferential joints with butt strips. Paint all exterior PVC covering. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Install and adjust supports for each pipeline such that the pipeline is true to the indicated line and grade. 2. Locate anchors and braces for any single support on a continuous structure; that is, not on two sides of a structural expansion joint. 3. Tighten clamps to develop full friction along the pipeline except where loose fitting clamps are called for, as is the case for supports on aeration piping. 3.06 PIPE AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. General: Identify all exposed piping in this project by painting, banding, system name labels, and direction arrows. The color and banding shall be as selected by the Owner. Identify all exposed valves with tags as specified below. t Piping,Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-14 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 1 B. Exposed Pipe Identification: Before banding and labeling, pipes shall be identified by the Contractor with temporary wired-on cardboard tags showing the proposed Imarking for review by the Owner. C. Valves: Provide each valve with a valve tagidentifying the pipeline contents, and fy 9 p p either its valve number, or the area or item served by the valve for valves without a Ivalve number. Contents shall be as designated in the Piping Schedule. D. Provide access panel markers for valves and control devices concealed behind I access panels and above suspended ceilings. Locate markers on access doors and on ceiling T-bars. 1. Markers For Ceiling T-bar Installation: Blue, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, I at least 3 mils thick, 3/8-inch diameter. 2. Markers for Access Doors: 1/16-inch thick, engraved plastic-laminate, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to the concealed item. Provide 1/8-inch center attachment hole. I3.07 CLEANING I A. Prior to testing, thoroughly clean the inside of each completed piping system of all dirt, loose scale, sand and other foreign material. Cleaning shall be by sweeping, flushing with water or blowing with compressed air as appropriate for the size and I type of pipe. Flushing shall achieve a velocity of at least 3 feet per second. The Contractor shall install temporary strainers, temporarily disconnect equipment or take other appropriate measures to protect equipment while cleaning piping. I3.08 FIELD TESTING A. General: Perform leakage tests on all pipe installed in this project. Furnish all I equipment, material, personnel and supplies to perform the tests and make all taps and other necessary temporary connections. The test pressure, allowable leakage and test medium shall be as specified and as shown in the Piping Schedule on the I drawings. Test pressure shall be measured at the highest point on the line, except that pressure at lowest point shall not exceed pipe manufacturer's rated test pressure, unless specifically noted otherwise. Leakage tests shall be performed on all piping at a time agreed upon and in the presence of the Engineer. B. Exposed Piping: All supports, anchors and blocks shall be installed prior to the leakage test. No temporary supports or blocking shall be installed for final test. IC. Accessories: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to block off or remove equipment, valves, gauges, etc., which are not designed to withstand the full test Ipressure. D. Testing Apparatus: Provide pipe taps, nozzles and connections as necessary in piping to permit testing including valves to isolate the new system, addition of test I media, and draining lines and disposal of water, as is necessary. These openings shall be plugged in a manner favorably reviewed by the Engineer after use. Provide all required temporary bulkheads. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Piping,Valves and Accessories I Project No. 6550 15050-15 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I E. Correction of Defects: If leakage exceeds the allowable, the installation shall be repaired or replaced and leakage tests shall be repeated as necessary until conformance to the leakage test requirements specified herein have been fulfilled. All visible leaks shall be repaired even if the pipeline passes the allowable leakage test. F. Reports: The Contractor shall keep records of each piping test, including: I 1. Description and identification of piping tested. 2. Test pressure. 3. Date of test. I 4. Witnessing by Contractor and Engineer. 5. Test evaluation. 6. Remarks, to include such items as: a. Leaks (type, location). b. Repairs made on leaks. 7. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. G. Draining and Venting: The Contractor shall install valved drains at all low points and vents at all high points on piping to permit draining of system and venting of air. Drains and vents shall be 1/2 inch ball valve with hose thread adapter. Hose thread adapter shall be capped after testing is completed. H. Testing Specifics: Piping shall be tested as indicated in the Piping Schedule on Drawing M001. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I I I I Piping, Valves and Accessories Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15050-16 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 1 ' SECTION 15510 HOT WATER HEATING COILS ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the Hot Water Heating Coils (HW Coils). ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Submit catalog data, construction details, performance characteristics for each type and size of equipment. C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings and/or technical brochures of all work prior to fabrication. Indicate size, design, dimensional and capacity characteristics and pressure loss through the coil for both water and air at the ' flow rates shown in the HVAC Schedules Also submit with shop drawings all equipment wiring and control diagrams, installation instructions. D. Provide submittals for the following: 1. Heating Coils. 2. Piping drawings of hot water supply (HWS) and hot water return (HWR) to HW coils. Provide piping drawings, to scale. Drawings to indicate routing of piping, equipment locations, fittings, valves and other piping devices and hanger locations. 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Standard, nationally recognized manufacturers of 1 products listed by ANSI or ASTM quality standards as specified or approved. B. Labels: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labeled or certification by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory having the facilities for testing, factory inspection and field inspection as required by the National Electrical Code is required for all fans, controls, all electrically-operated equipment and other ' electrical items incidental to the work specified, as required by code. C. Codes: Comply with applicable sections of the State Mechanical Code. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC), State of Oregon modifications to the NEC, and all local ordinances applicable to electrical wiring, contacts, controls, etc., included with or contained within manufactured items. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Hot Water Heating Coils Project No. 6755 15510- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 D. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. Bring to the attention of the Owner in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and/or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. Comply with requirements of Section 16120. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING t A. Deliver product to site and store/protect per Section 01605. B. Store insulation in original shipping container with labeling in place. Do not install damaged insulation. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA I A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01730. B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.01 HW COILS A. Coils: 1/2-inch OD copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes, 5/8-inch OD male sweat fittings. Coils are leak tested at 150 PSIG minimum air pressure, suitable for working pressures up to 100 PSI with air 111 vents. B. Headers: Nonferrous seamless copper outside the airstream and provided with tobin bronze brazed steel male pipe connections. C. Casings: Minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel with double formed face and stacking flanges on the side plates and with flanges on tube sheets having extruded tube holes. D. 750SF5090: Coil shall be 24X24-inches, 1 row blow through, completely encased in minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel cabinet coil headers may be past outside dimension of casing. E. 750MAU5030: Coil shall be integral to packaged unit. ' F. Manufacturers: Carrier, USA Coil, Trane or approved equal. G. See schedules on Mechanical Drawings for additional information. I 1 Hot Water Heating Coils Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15510-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I 1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE CLEANING A. Heating Water: Flush the closed loop water immediately after pressure testing and chemically clean, passivate and treat. There is to be no delay in the cleaning procedure which may cause corrosion problems in the loop. B. Cleaning Treatment: 1. Prior to precleaning chemical addition to the loop, the low point drain is to be utilized for discharge and the loop is to be flushed free of construction I dirt and debris. After the initial flush, the strainers if present, are to be cleaned. 2. Precleaner to be added into the loop. The water quality to be calculated 1 and add an appropriate amount of cleaner recommended by water treatment representative. 3. Circulate the cleaning agent for no less than 4 and no more than 24 hours. At this point the water treatment representative adjusts the pH of the loop water to ensure the water can be discharged to sanitary in accordance with local guidelines for discharge. 4. Discharge 100 percent of the systems water. All strainers are to be ' cleaned. Refill and discharge the loop as a rinse flush. The loop to be refilled. 5. The loop to be charged with 500 to 1000 PPM of Polyquest to ensure I proper passivation. Circulate the loop for a period of 4 to 24 hours with the Polyquest. The loop to be discharged and strainers cleaned. 6. The loop will then be charged by water treatment representative with 800 Ito 1200 PPM of Corstop or Inhibitor No. 34. This borate Nitrite solution is to be retested monthly for a period of the 1-year warranty. If levels are found low, the Water Treatment Representative is to recharge the loop, insuring the levels stay within Specification. ' 7. Chemicals: Closed loop corrosion control. Perlolin 336, Mogul, Chemax, or approved. 8. Equipment:PSITION One-shot feeder of 2 gallon capacity supplied with fill and drain valves, filling funnel and miscellaneous fittings for connection of fill and drain accessories. 1-inch pipe connection for inlet and outlet piping. 3.02 PIPING INSTAL125 LA A. Refer to applicable Sections for Piping, Valves, Insulation, etc. 1. Cleaning of Piping Systems a. Provide complete preservice cleaning of new heating water piping, chilled water piping, boiler and all other miscellaneous mechanical systems. Provide all chemicals, equipment and personnel. b. Cleaning compound to be composed of 90% by wt. trisodium phosphate (dodecahydrate), 9% sodium hydroxide, and 1% nonyl phenol 4ethoxylate (with 9 moles ethylene oxide.) Ic. Determine volume of water in system to be cleaned. Calculate amount of cleaning compound to be used (to be used at 0.5% by wt. of water in system). Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Hot Water Heating Coils Project No. 6755 15510-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 1 d. Completely dissolve the cleaning compound prior to injecting into system. e. For closed systems with closed system circulating pump operating, inject cleaning solution into system. If proper amount of chemical has been used, P-alkalinity test should now read between 1500 and 1700 ppm. Continue to circulate cleaning solution for four(4) hours. f. Drain system, clean all strainers and flush with fresh water. Repeat procedure until P-alkalinity test equals zero. g. Cleaned systems shall be filled with fresh water and appropriate closed water corrosion inhibitors added. h. Charge chilled water system with 30% by weight inhibited propylene glycol. "Dowfrost" by Dow Chemical Company or approved equal. Mix glycol with distilled water of total hardness per glycol supplier's recommendations. Confirm all chemicals specified and used are acceptable to all governing agencies, prior to use of any cleaning or treatment materials. 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Manual Air Vents: Conduct 1/4"copper tubing from high end of air chambers to the nearest floor drain. B. Provide permanent supports for all piping with pipe guides and anchored supports. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 Hot Water Heating Coils Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15510-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I ISECTION 15800 I HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING IPART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES IA. ' Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, and incidentals required to provide complete, integrated, and operating, Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems for the buildings and structures in this project. Materials and equipment to be supplied shall be new, of the best quality as specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. Work Included in This Section: 1. Ductwork, and ductwork support systems 2. Dampers 3. Fans 4. Make-up air units I5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing C. Related Sections: II. Section 01190: Seismic Requirements 2. Section 01300: Submittals I 3. Section 11001: General Equipment and Mechanical Requirements 4. Section 11002: Electric Motor Drives 5. Section 15050: Piping, Valves and Accessories 6. Section 15510: Hot Water Coils 7. Section 15950: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing I 8. Section 15955: Piping Leak Testing 9. Section 16262: Variable Speed Drives 10. Section 17050: Basic Measurement and Control 11. Section 17100: HVAC Instruments 12. Section 17331: Control Loop Description I II I I 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide shop drawings and technical literature covering all equipment and accessories being furnished under this Section and in accordance with Sections 01330 and 11001. The data shall include information to demonstrate compliance with all of the requirements of these Specifications. B. Provide seismic anchorage design for HVAC equipment, including layout and calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Oregon, and conforming to the requirements of Section 01190. C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer's installation, lubrication and maintenance manuals, bulletins, and parts lists. Furnish separate list of recommended spare parts. D. Affidavits: Furnish affidavits from the manufacturers stating that the equipment has been properly installed and tested and each is ready for full time operation. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Project No. 6755 15800 1 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning K/J Project No. 1376013*70 Permit Set i E. Submit fabrication drawings for ductwork, including duct supports. I F. Submit electrical data, wiring diagrams with interconnection terminals and control panel layout drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes: Comply with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work specified herein. B. Permits and inspection shall be in accordance with General Conditions. C. All equipment furnished under this Section shall 1) be of a design and manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of the equipment and 2) be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the quality is equal to equipment made by those manufacturers specifically named herein. D. The Drawings shall be taken in a sense as diagrammatic. Size of ducts and pipes including general method of running them are shown, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every piping, conduit and/or structural interference that may be encountered. 1.04 SEISMIC PROTECTION I A. Equipment specified in this Section is classified as essential for seismic protection as specified in Division 1. Conform to the seismic requirements in Section 01190. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK A. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel of the gauge and fabrication that conforms to SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards." Roof top ducting shall be painted per Section 09900. B. Galvanized steel ductwork shall have not less than 1-1/4 ounces of galvanized coating (total for both sides) per square foot of sheet. , C. Flexible Duct Connections: Flexible connections in ducts shall be made of neoprene fiberglass cloth, installed in folds, and of sufficient length to accommodate the maximum deflection resulting from vibration and contraction without causing strain. Minimum length in folded position shall be 4 inches. Flexible duct connections shall be Ventfabrics Inc. "Ventglas;" Duro-Dyne Corp.; "Neoprene;" or equal. D. Duct sealant(for sealing joints) shall be Arabol and Canvas; Hardcast; or equal. E. Duct Supports: Duct support details and spacing shall conform to SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards". The specific support detail utilized shall be as appropriate for each particular duct and location, except as otherwise shown. Duct supports shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15800-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 F. Interior Duct Insulation 1. Duct Insulation: All new rooftop ducting shall have interior insulation. 2. Duct liner: ASTM 1071; flexible blanket. 'K' Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 at 75°F. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting." Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 FPM. Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened. Mold, humidity, and erosion resistant surfaces: UL 181. 2.02 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCT AND ACCESSORIES ' A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with the "Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual" of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). 1. The fabricating firm shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience in the fabrication of FRP ductwork. 2. Prior to fabrication, the fabricator shall provide certification to the Engineer from an ' independent testing laboratory of the following: a. The fabricated duct will have a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in Tach with SM b. The fabricatedcordance ductAwillTmeetE84-69.UL Standard 181. c. The test shall be based on the same material to be used in the fabrication of the ducts. ' 3. The resin shall be a biphenyl A polyester that provides high chemical resistance. A certificate from the resin manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition and characteristics of the resin being used in the ductwork shall be provided by the Contractor. This certificate shall also indicate the expected resistance to acids, alkalines, organic compounds, and UV exposure. 4. The FRP ductwork shall be rated to withstand a minimum of 10-inch water vacuum using the same safety and design factors and minimum properties of the duct materials as listed in the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual. 5. The FRP duct shall be flanged where required to mate with devices, equipment or to provide flanges for supporting the ducts. Provide chlorine-resistant flange ' gaskets to make ductwork gas-tight. Gaskets shall be Viton. 6. All duct joints shall be of the butt type where not flanged. B. Duct Joining: `Butt-weld' type joints shall, in general, be used in FRP duct assemblies. Flanged joints shall be used where specifically noted on the Drawings and where ductwork is to be joined to flanged equipment. Joints shall be formed according to the duct manufacturer's specifications, and in accordance with the latest version of the ' SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual. C. Duct Hangers and Supports: FRP ductwork shall be supported in accordance with the latest version of the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual. Where noted on the Drawings, support bracing for seismic loads has been incorporated into the duct layout. ' D. Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints: 1. Rating: 5 psig a. Type: Molded single arch (unless otherwise shown on Drawings)with full rubber flanges and retaining rings. Flanges to match pattern of adjoining ductwork. b. Materials: EPDM, unless ammonia is present, then BUNA-N. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Project No. 6755 15800 3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 1 c. Manufacturers: Proco Series 530; Garlock; or equal. 1 E. FRP Volume Dampers: 1. Construction: Volume dampers shall balancing type, manufactured in accordance with the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual, in addition to the following: a. Blade shall be of molded FRP construction with stiffeners, as directed by manufacturer. b. Shaft: 316 Stainless steel. c. Bearings: Fiber reinforced thermoplastic. 2. Dampers shall be provided with manual operators. Operator shall provide visual indication of valve position. 3. Dampers shall be supplied with flanged connections for mating to connecting FRP ductwork. See the Drawings for more information. 4. Manufacturer: Hartzell Model FCO; or equal. F. FRP Backdraft Dampers: , 1. Construction: Backdraft dampers shall be gravity type, manufactured in accordance with the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual, in addition to the following: a. Blade: Blade shall be of molded FRP construction with stiffeners, as directed by manufacturer. b. Seat: FRP with vinyl ester resin. c. Shaft: 316 Stainless steel. 2. Dampers shall be supplied with flanged connections for mating to connecting FRP ductwork. See the Drawings for more information. 3. Manufacturer: Swartwout Model 426AF; Hartzell Model FEP; or equal. 2.03 DAMPERS A. Volume Dampers: All volume dampers shall be made of material (same as the ductwork ' where installed) two gauges thicker than the duct in which the damper is located. Each damper shall have an operator with indicator handle and a locking mechanism. Damper operator shall be Young Regulator Company"Valcalox" No. 403B; Ventfabrics Inc. "Ventloc" No. 637; or equal. B. Backdraft Dampers: 1. All welded 14-gauge aluminum construction. 2. Blades: Pivoted off center in ball bearings, double crimped front and rear, fitted with polyurethane seals, and linked to work in unison; equipped with adjustable counterweights attached to blades. 3. Frames: Channel type with flanges to facilitate mounting. 4. Backdraft dampers shall be sized and located as indicated on the Drawings. Backdraft dampers shall be counterbalanced for vertical or horizontal airflow as shown on the Drawings. 5. Greenheck, Ruskin; or equal. 2.04 GRILLES AND REGISTERS A. Wall or Duct-Mounted Supply Grilles (WSG): Wall supply grilles and registers shall be ' adjustable louver or double deflection type with volume dampers. Supply grilles installed Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15800-4 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I ' in wall openings shall have an overlap margin to cover wall opening. Double-deflection louvered type with individually adjustable bars that allow 45° adjustment spread. Bars ' shall be on 3/4-inch centers, with horizontal face bars and vertical rear bars. Titus Model 300RL (steel)/300 FL (aluminum)/300 RL-SS (stainless steel); Price Model 520 (steel)/610 (aluminum)/720 (stainless steel); or equal. B. Wall- or Duct-Mounted Exhaust Air Grilles (WEG): Wall exhaust air grilles shall have volume dampers and sizes as specified on the Drawings. Grille blades shall be set horizontally and on 3/4-inch to 35-45 degrees unless otherwise noted. Louvered return grilles for rectangular ductwork shall be Titus Model 350RL (steel)/ 350FL (aluminum)/355RL (stainless steel); Price Model 530 (steel)/630 (aluminum)/730 (stainless steel); or equal. ' 2.05 FANS A. Centrifugal Roof Exhaust& Supply Fans: Roof exhaust and supply fans shall be factory fabricated assemblies, having a fan, fan-motor, aluminum bird screen, and roof curbs. Fans shall have a spun aluminum hood. Fan capacities, electrical characteristics, special features, and accessories shall be as indicated in the fan schedules on the ' drawings. Provide a NEMA 4X motor rated disconnect switch integral to the fan assembly. Fans shall have corrosion-resistant, factory applied coatings shall be Heresite or Hi-Pro Polyester applied in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer's ' instructions. Fans shall bear the AMCA seal and shall be furnished with automatic (gravity) backdraft dampers or motorized (electric motor operated) where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Roof Curb: Contractor shall provide roof curbs and submit shop drawings on proposed roof curb, which shall be Contractor designed, Manufacturer designed or Prefabricated. Provide seismic restraints to secure unit in accordance with Section 01190. Roof membrane flashing shall be provided per Architectural Drawings. Roof penetrations shall be reinforced per Structural Drawings. a. Centrifugal upblast belt-drive roof exhaust fans shall be Hartzell or Equal. B. Inline Centrifugal Fans: Inline centrifugal fans shall be factory fabricated, belt-driven assemblies having fan, fan motor, and fan housing. Fan capacities, electrical characteristics, special features and accessories shall be as indicated in the fan schedules on the Drawings. Fans shall have a fiberglass reinforced hood. Fans shall bear the AMCA seal and shall be furnished with automatic (gravity) backdraft dampers. Fans shall be rated as Class 1, Division 2 and Type B spark proof. 1 1. Fans shall be Hartzell or equal. 2.06 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS ' A. Make-up Air Units General: Make-up air unit shall be factory fabricated and assembled and consist of an insulated metal cabinet, service receptacle, filter assembly for intake air, supply air blower assembly and motor rated safety switch in accordance with Section ' 16050, (single fan indoor unit shall be 3 pole single throw, dual fan outdoor units shall be 6 pole single throw). Units provided for outdoor installation shall be provided with outdoor air intake weatherhood with %inch bird screen, aluminum mesh filter and curb assembly. Units provided for indoor installation shall be provided with a hot water coil per Section 15510 and Makeup Air Unit Schedule on the Drawings. All specified components and internal accessories factory installed and tested and prepared for Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Project No. 6755 15800-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I single-point power connection. MAU Unit capacities, electrical characteristics, special ' features and accessories shall be as indicated in the MAU Schedules on the Drawings. B. Make-up Air Unit Components: , 1. Cabinet: Formed, double-walled insulated metal cabinet, fabricated to permit access to internal components for maintenance. a. Outside casing: 18 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel meeting ASTM A653 for components that do not receive a painted finish. b. Internal assemblies: 24 gauge, galvanized (G90) steel except for motor supports which shall be minimum 14 gauge galvanized (G90) steel. c. Cabinet Insulation: Interior of entire unit shall be insulated. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and erosion requirements of UL 181. Insulation shall be minimum 1-inch thickness with a maximum flame spread rating of 25 of smoke development rating of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM C411. d. Access panels: Unit shall be equipped with insulated, hinged access panels to provide access to all major components. Access panels shall be fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized G90 steel. 2. Fan: Fan shall consist of a belt driven, double width, double inlet forward curve blower. Assembly shall be mounted on heavy gauge galvanized rails and further mounted on minimum 1-1/8 inch thick neoprene vibration isolators. Fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and horsepower. 3. Motors: Motors shall be in accordance with Section 11002, inverter duty rated, for the type identified in the Make-up Air Unit Schedules. Motors shall be heavy- duty, permanently lubricated type to match the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Drivetrain shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower and pulleys shall be fully machined cast-type, keyed and fully secured to the fan wheel and motor shafts. Electric motors of ten horsepower or less shall be supplied with an adjustable drive pulley. Motor leads shall be wired to terminals at motor rated disconnect as specified above and in Section 16050. 4. Electrical: Electrical requirements shall be as shown on the Equipment Schedules shown on the Drawings. Provide for connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch, where required, accessible from outside unit and control circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker. Step down transformers, and other elements required for the control of the makeup air units shall be provided by the supplier of this section. Unit wiring to comply with NEC requirements with applicable UL standards. Electrical components to be UL recognized where applicable. Roof-mounted units shall be provided with a 120 VAC GFCI service outlet. 5. Variable Speed Drive: Shall not be integral to the outdoor makeup units. The Variable Speed Drives shall be a standalone unit, and shall be supplied by the makeup equipment manufacture. VFD requirements shall follow Section 16262. 6. Constant Speed Drive: Motor starter shall not be integral to the indoor makeup unit. An existing MCC motor starter shall be repurposed for the unit. 7. Filters: Units shall have 2-inch MERV 6 (24"X24" preferred) disposable filters located in the outdoor air intake and shall be accessible from the exterior of the 111 unit. 8. Instrumentation: Provide all instrumentation required for complete control and monitoring of the units as shown on the P&ID Drawings. Instrumentation to be provided integral to the unit includes but is not limited to the following: Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15800-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I Ia. Dirty Filter Sensor: Shall be temperature compensated with variable output voltage with change in differential pressure. The voltage shall be I linear from 0 to 10V dc with differential pressure between high and low pressure ports. Unit shall be compatible with 14 to3OV dc power supply voltage range and be pressure rated to 150 percent of rated pressure. I Switches on chemical odor scrubber fans shall be rated Class 1, Div 2. Manufacturer of unit shall be Dwyer, no substitute. b. Coil type Freeze stat: Shall be digital with 20 feet of 10K ohm thermistor probe, open board construction with conformal coating and metal cover I that has an alarm light. It shall operate on 24VAC and comply with UL 873.Honeywell Low Limit Controller L428A, no substitute. 9. Equipment Skid: Provide a skid for mounting unit to the curbs. Design skid for I loads in accordance with Section 01190. 10. Roof Curbs: Contractor shall provide roof curbs and submit shop drawings on proposed roof curb, which shall be Contractor designed, Manufacturer designed I or Prefabricated. Provide seismic restraints to secure unit in accordance with Section 01190. Roof membrane flashing shall be provided per Architectural Drawings. Roof penetrations shall be reinforced per Structural Drawings. 11. Spare Parts: The following spare parts shall be provided: I a. One extra set of filters for each unit. b. One set of fan belts for each unit. 12. Manufacturers: Trane; Carrier; or Equal. 1 2.07 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Split System: Air conditioning systems shall be split, ducted systems with discharge I plenum. The indoor fan unit shall be designed for floor mounting as indicated on the Drawings. The compressor unit shall be designed for outdoor service. Capacities, electrical characteristics, special features and accessories shall be as indicated in the I Air Conditioning Schedule on the Drawings. Both units shall be 480V. Refrigerant piping between the indoor fan unit and compressor unit shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Integral accessories shall include: I 1. Freeze-up, high discharge temperature, and self-diagnostics on the indoor fan unit. 2. High and low pressure safety switches, low voltage startup capability, and fluid line filter drier on the condenser unit. Refrigerant charge shall be Puron R-410A. 3. Low ambient kit with crankcase heater on the outdoor compressor unit. I B. Manufacturer: Indoor fan unit shall be Carrier 40 RU with Carrier 38AUZ outdoor air conditioning unit; or equal. IC. See the Split System Air Conditioning Schedule on the Drawings for specific requirements. 1 2.08 HOT WATER COIL Refer to Section 15510. IA. 2.09 RECEPTACLE AND DISCONNECT SWITCH I A. Receptacle and Disconnect Switch Assembly for all HVAC Equipment: Devices shall be UL listed. Units shall be factory sealed types, where available, and shall contain disconnecting mechanisms which must function prior to plug withdrawal I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Project No.6755 15800 7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1111 or after insertion. Units shall be of the amperage and voltage rating, number of I poles and number of pilot contacts as shown on the drawings. Units shall be supplied with matching plugs as required and junction boxes as shown on the I Drawings. Provide Meltric, DSN series; or equal. Provide with auxiliary contact as shown on the drawings. 2.10 CONTROL COMPONENTS (NOT INTEGRAL TO HVAC UNIT) I A. Automatic Hot Water Control Valve Actuator: Shall be fully proportioning with modulating plugs for equal percentage of linear flow characteristics rated at 150 psig. I Valve shall be a cast brass body, screwed ends, Type 306 stem with removable cage, bonnet, stem and plug assembly. Cage shall provide valve plug guiding throughout the entire travel range. Valve actuator shall have sufficient power to open/close against I differential pressure of 50 psig and fail open upon loss of control signal. Manufacturer of actuator shall be Auma, no substitute. B. Automatic Hot Water Control Valve: Shall be Type V320 Vee-Ball Valve ASME B16.1 I Class 150-pound screwed ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 3 inch and larger. Carbon steel with 316 SS ball, splined type 17-4 PH SS shaft, reinforced PTFE flow ring seal and V-ring packing. Valve shall have 300:1 rangeability and equal I percentage characteristics. C. Room Thermostat: See Section 17100. D. Duct Temperature (Intake and Discharge): See Section 17100. E. Differential Pressure: See Section 17100. 1 PART 3- EXECUTION I 3.01 GENERAL A. Protection: Fully protect all unfinished parts of the materials and equipment against IIdamage from whatever cause during the progress of the work and until final completion. All materials and equipment shall be covered while in storage and during construction in such manner that no finished surfaces shall be damaged or marred and all moving parts shall be kept perfectly clean and dry. I B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the best practice of the respective trades and with the respective manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Installation IIshall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. For MAUs 750MAU5010 and 750MAU5020, the air outlet shall be same size as existing HW coil face and shall be configured so existing I HW coil can be attached directly to the MAU. C. All sheet metal ductwork shall be erected in a workmanlike manner and shall be in I accordance with the SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and as specified above. No ductwork shall be fabricated or installed until it has been carefully coordinated with other trades. All transverse duct joints shall be taped gastight. Duct dimensions shown are "net" inside clear. Each air supply outlet and each outside air l intake shall have either an integral volume control device or shall be furnished with a volume damper. Heating,Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15800-8 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I ' D. All FRP ductwork shall be erected in a workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the SMACNA Thermoset FRP Duct Construction Manual. No ductwork shall be ' fabricated or installed until it has been carefully coordinated with other trades. Duct dimensions shown are "net" inside clear. Each air supply outlet and outside air intake shall have either an integral volume control device or shall be furnished with a volume damper. ' E. Testing and Adjusting Equipment and Controls: 1. The equipment and controls of this Section shall be completely tested, adjusted, ' and placed in operating condition. 2. Retest equipment and controls, as necessary, during the progress of the work. No work shall be covered until it is properly tested and made tight. ' 3. Supply the testing apparatus and make all necessary connections for applying the tests. 4. When about to turn the apparatus over to the Owner, put all parts of the apparatus in perfect working order and thoroughly clean out all parts of the equipment. F. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems: Refer to Section 15950. t3.02 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL A. Install all instrumentation and controls in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and per Section 17050 and 17100. END OF SECTION 11 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Project No.6755 15800 9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I ISECTION 15950 IITESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC IPART I GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES IA. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section: 1. Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA): 203, Field Performance I Measurement of Fan Systems. 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): HVAC Applications Handbook. 3. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for Field Management and Instrumentation Total System Balance. 4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): a. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental I Systems. b. Procedural Standards for Measuring Sound and Vibration. 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): IHVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Manual. 1.02 SUBMITTALS IA. Submittals: 1. Documentation of experience record of testing authority. 2. Documentation of current AABC or NEBB certifications for those technicians in I responsible charge of the work under this Contract. 3. Submit a detailed test and balance plan written specifically to address the requirements of the Project, including procedures and test conditions for I systems to be tested. Generic, blank forms without identification of test conditions are unacceptable. Approval of plan is required prior to beginning the Work. IB. Informational Submittals: 1. Written verification of calibration of testing and balancing equipment. 2. Balancing Log Report following completion of system adjustments including test Iresults, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE IA. Air Balancing and Test Agency Qualifications: 1. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC systems. I 2. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority. 3. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of HVAC I equipment being tested. 4. Have a proven record of at least five similar projects. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Project No.6755 15950- 1 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 Permit Set I 1 I engaged 5. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly in testing, adjusting I and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials, tools, test equipment, computers and instrumentation required to complete the work included. B. Test Hole Plugs: Plug test holes in ducts with plugs made for that purpose and replace any insulation removed to specified conditions. C. Drives for Belt-Driven Fans: 1 1. Furnish cast iron or flanged steel sheaves. 2. Sheaves and belt combination shall be capable of providing 150 percent of motor horsepower. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Adjust and balance air and water systems in accordance with standard procedures and recognized practices of the AABC or SMACNA. B. Adjust and balance the following systems: 1. Supply and exhaust air systems. I 2. Foul air exhaust. 3. Heating water systems. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING AIR SIDE , A. Preparation: 1. Prior to beginning the Work, perform the following activities: a. Review Shop Drawings and installed system for adequate balancing devices and test points. Field drilling of test points in double wall and foul air ductwork shall not be allowed. All test point installations in foul air ductwork shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 111 b. Recommend to Engineer dampers that need to be added or replaced in order to obtain proper air control. c. Verify proper startup procedures have been completed on the system d. Verify controls installation is complete and system is in stable operation under automatic control. e. Verify test instruments have been calibrated to a recognized standard and are within manufacturer's recommended calibration interval before beginning the Work. B. General: 1 1. When adjustments are made to a portion of a fan system, reread other portions of that same system to determine effects imposed by adjustments. Readjust as necessary. 2. Lock and mark final positions of balancing dampers with permanent felt pen. 1 Testing,Adjusting&Balancing for HVAC Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15950-2 Project No.6755 111K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 C. Equipment Data: 1. Collect the following data and included in final report : a. Type of unit. ' b. Equipment identification number. c. Equipment nameplate data (including manufacturer, model, size, type, and serial number). d. Motor data (frame, hp, volts, FLA rpm, and service factor). 1 e. Sheave manufacturer, size, and bore. f. Belt size and number. g. Sheave centerline distance and adjustment limits. ' h. Starter and motor overload protection data. i. Air filter size and quantity. j. Include changes made during course of system balancing. D. Fan Systems: 1. Measure fan system performance in accordance with AMCA 203. 2. In each system at least one airpath from fan to final branch duct termination ' shall have dampers fully open. Achieve final air quantities by adjusting fan speed. 3. Adjust Fan Air Volumes: ' a. Adjust fan speeds and motor drives for required equipment air volumes, with allowable variation of plus 10 percent minus 0 percent. c. After final adjustments, do not operate motor above nameplate amperage on any phase. d. After final adjustments, do not operate fan above maximum rated speed. e. Perform airflow test readings under simulated or actual conditions, full heating, full outside air and exhaust air. ' f. Provide and make drive and belt changes on motors or fans as required to adjust equipment to specified conditions. Drives shall be able to deliver 150 percent of motor horsepower. Provide written notice to air handling unit manufacturer and Owner and Engineer if drive or belt changes were made. Include a formal calculation of belt drive service factor associated with all drive changes. ' 4. Adjust outside air dampers, return air dampers, relief air dampers, exhaust air dampers, and motorized louvers for maximum and minimum air requirements. 5. Read and record static pressures at unit inlet and discharge, each filterset, coils, dampers, and plenums, on every supply, return, and exhaust fan for each ' test condition. 6. Read and record motor amperage on all phases for each test condition. ' E. Air Outlets and Inlets: 1. In each system at least one air path from fan to final branch duct termination shall have dampers fully open. 2. Adjust air volumes on supply diffusers and grilles, and on return and exhaust grilles, to the quantity shown, with allowable variation of plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Adjust diffusers and grilles for proper deflection, throw, and coverage. Eliminate ' drafts and noise where possible. 4. After final adjustments are made secure dampers to prevent movement and mark final positions with permanent felt pen. ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Project No. 6755 15950-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013''70 I I 3.03 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING WATER SIDE A Preparation: Prior to beginning the Work, perform the following activities: I 1. Review Shop Drawings and installed system for adequate and accessible balancing devices and test ports. I 2. Recommend to Engineer devices needed to be added or replaced in order to obtain proper water control. 3. Verify proper startup procedures have been completed on system. 4. Verify controls installation is complete and system is in stable operation under automatic control. 5. Verify hydronic systems have been filled and are clean. Examine a sample of strainers to ensure cleanliness. I 6. Verify manual air vents have been bled and expansion tanks and automatic air vents are functioning. 7. Verify control valves and coil connections are complete and properly installed. B. General: 1. When adjustments are made to a portion of a water system, reread other portions of that same system to determine effects imposed by adjustments. I Readjust as necessary. 2. Correctly adjust water flow readings for mixtures other than pure water. 3. Throttling of butterfly and other nonbalancing device valves shall not be I allowed. 4. Lock and mark final positions of balancing devices with a centerpunch or permanent felt pen. I C. Equipment Data: 1. Collect the following data and include in final report: I a. Type of pump. b. Equipment identification number. c. Equipment nameplate data (including manufacturer, model, size, type, impeller size and serial number). I d. Pump capacity (flow rate and differential pressure). e. Drive data. f. Motor data (frame, hp, volts, FLA rpm, and service factor). I g. Starter and motor overload protection data. h. Include changes made during course of system balancing. D. Pumps: I 1. Verify impeller size through a "dead-head"test. Do not perform on positive displacement pumps. 2. Adjust water to achieve design flows at all modes of operation during single and I multiple pump operation. 3. Test redundant and stand-by pumps. 4. After final adjustments, do not operate motor above nameplate amperage on any phase. 5. Read and record pressures at pump inlet and discharge for each test condition. 6. Read and record motor amperage on all phases for each test condition. 7. Record and mark final position of balancing cocks, valves, and operators with a 1 permanent felt pen or centerpunch. I Testing,Adjusting&Balancing for HVAC Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15950-4 Project No.6755 I K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 1 E. Terminal Flow Devices: 1. Adjust water systems for required flow rates at each coil, connection, and I terminal device. 2. Provide proper flow through individual fin tube sections, evaporator and condenser circuits, each boiler loop, each pump, and recirculation loops. 3. Measure and adjust flow through valves and valve bypass lines. 1 4. Record and mark final position of balancing cocks, valves, and operators with a permanent felt pen or centerpunch. 5. Read and record differential pressures across coils, control valves, chiller Ibundles, boilers, and heat exchanges. F. Tolerances: I1. Heating Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL IA. General: Perform functional tests as required by Section 01650 Commissioning and Startup. I B. Performance Testing : 1. Heating Coil Testing: a. Adjust system as required to achieve design flow conditions for both air Iand water sides of coil. b. Measure and record airflow rate, water flow rate, entering air temperature, entering water temperature, leaving air temperature and leaving water Itemperature. C. Balancing Log Report Requirements: 1. Include narrative description for each system explaining TAB methodology I and assumptions used. Clearly identify test conditions for tests performed. Include control setp6int. 2. Log and record operational information from every test for each system, as I necessary to accomplish services described. 3. Include equipment data for units tested. 4. Include reduced set of HVAC Drawings or system schematic diagrams with each element uniquely identified and indexed to balance log. I 5. Indicate recorded site values, and velocity and mass correction factors used to provide equivalent standard airquantities. 6. Include separate section inlog, if necessary, describing operating difficulties in I air or water systems that could not be eliminated by specified procedures. Identify these problems by system and location within building; include outline or summary of condition and its effect on building, and describe corrective Iactions attempted and recommended. D. Quality Control Verification: 1. After adjustments have been completed and balance logs submitted, balancing and testing agency shall be available to demonstrate the following: a. Air and water balancing procedures, vibration tests, and verification of test results. Ib. Perform spot tests on a maximum of 20 percent of total diffusers and grilles, on two air handling fan devices per building, and on 10 percent of IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Project No. 6755 15950-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 total water balance fittings, with measuring equipment used in original tests, at random points selected by Engineer. c. Results of these spot tests shall agree with balance logs within plus or minus 10 percent. Where this accuracy cannot be verified, rebalance portions of system as requested by Engineer. d. At completion of rebalance procedures, perform another spot test if required to verify results. END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 Testing,Adjusting&Balancing for HVAC Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 15950-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 111 SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL IPART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS I A. The Contractor shall provide electrical Work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. IB. The provisions of this Section apply to all sections in Division 16, Electrical, except as indicated otherwise. IC. The Work of this Section is required for operation of electrically-driven equipment provided under specifications in other Divisions. The Contractor's I attention is directed to the requirement for proper coordination of the Work of this Section with the Work of equipment specifications; the Work of Instrumentation sections and the Work of Section 11002, Electric Motor Drives. ID. Concrete, excavation, backfill, and steel reinforcement required for encasement, installation, or construction of the Work of the various sections I of Division 16, Electrical is included as a part of the Work under the respective sections, including duct banks, manholes, handholes, equipment housekeeping pads, and light pole bases. IE. The Contractor shall provide temporary power to equipment as required in order to maintain treatment processes.. I1.02 REFERENCES A. Electrical equipment shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the I local code enforcement agency having jurisdiction. B. Installation of electrical equipment and materials shall comply with OSHA I Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, as applicable), state building standards, and applicable local codes and regulations. IC. Where the requirements of the specifications conflict with UL, NEMA, NFPA, or other applicable standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. Code compliance is mandatory. Work shall be in complete conformance with I applicable codes. I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Work-General Project No. 6755 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 16010- 1 I I 1 1.03 SIGNAGE AND MARKINGS A. Identification: Provide identification in accordance with Section 16075, III Electrical Identification. 1.04 PERMITS AND INSPECTION I A. Permits shall be obtained and inspection fees shall be paid according to the General Conditions. I 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC. I B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label. I C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for class, division, and group of hazardous area indicated. I 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300, Submittal Procedures. I B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: I 1. Complete bill of material lists stating quantity, manufacturer and part number of each item of material. a. Submitted Shop Drawing: Arrangement drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams, bill of materials, nameplate schedules, manufacturer information on each component. 1) Bill of Materials for each submitted Shop Drawing shall I include: a) Equipment item number. b) Quantity. 111c) Tag number. d) Description. e) Manufacturer. f) Model No. or Part No. I g) Serial No. h) Vendor/Supplier. i) Vendor Phone Number. 2. Shop Drawings for all grounding work not specifically indicated. 3. Front, side, rear elevations, and top views with dimensional data. 4. Location of conduit entrances and access plates. I 5. Component data. Electrical Work-General Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 16010-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"'70 I 1 6. Connection diagrams, terminal numbers, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, and cable numbers. Provide complete, actual, internal wiring diagrams. All internal wiring shall be assigned wire numbers. All field terminal blocks shall be assigned numbers. Include all such numbering on submittals. Numbering shall conform to Division 17, ' lnstrumention and Controls, and Section 16015, Electrical Identification, requirements. 7. Method of anchoring, seismic requirements, weight. 8. Types of materials and finish. 9. Nameplates. 10. Temperature limitations, as applicable. 11. Voltage requirement, phase, and current, as applicable. 12. Front and rear access requirements. 13. Test Reports. a. Factory and field test reports include the following: 1 1) A description of the test. 2) List of equipment used. 3) Name of the person conducting the test. ' 4) Date and time the test was conducted. 5) All raw data collected. 6) Calculated results. b. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test. 14. Grounding requirements. 15. Catalog cuts or photocopies of applicable pages of bulletins or brochures for mass produced, noncustom manufactured material. ' Catalog data sheets shall be stamped to indicate the project name, applicable section and paragraph, model number, and options. This information shall be marked in spaces designated for such data in the Engineer's stamp. C. Shop Drawings shall be custom prepared. Drawings or data indicating ' "optional"or"as required"equipment are not acceptable. Options not proposed shall be crossed out or deleted from Shop Drawings. D. Owner's Manuals: Complete, original information in accordance with Section 01300, Submittal Procedures. E. Record Drawings: r1. The Contractor shall show invert and top elevations and routing of all duct banks and concealed below grade electrical installations. Record drawings shall be prepared, be available to the Engineer, and be submitted according to Section 01300, Submittal Procedures. Preliminary field mark-up as-builts, including Project-Wide Wiring Drawings, shall be submitted 7 calendar days after all equipment has ' successfully completed ORT-1, ORT-2 and Performance Test. 2. The Contractor(Integrator) shall prepare as-built loop and control diagrams in accordance with Division 17, Instrumentation and Controls, requirements. The Contractor will generate and maintain the master set of Project-Wide Wiring Drawings as required and described in ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Work-General Project No. 6755 16010-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 r 1 Section 17050, Basic Measurement and Control, from Initial set of Drawings to construction set and as-built set of detailed analog loop diagrams, elementary/interconnection wiring diagrams, and control panel power distribution diagrams per Owner's standard templates. The project-wide wiring Drawings will not include field routing information of wires, cable trays, pullboxes, or other similar items. The field routing information is included elsewhere in Division 16, Electrical, and is the responsibility of Division 16, Electrical. F. Calculations: Anchor bolt calculations are required for all equipment as I specified in Section 01190, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. The calculations shall be signed and stamped by and engineer registered in the State of Oregon. G. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation where required by I individual equipment specification. 2. Contractor's certification of satisfied field testing. 1.07 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. Electrical plan drawings are diagrammatic and show only general locations of equipment, devices, and raceways, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for the complete raceway system. Provide as a minimum what is shown on the Drawings, and provide additional raceways, devices, fittings, boxes, etc., needed to fit the equipment size and/or configuration as supplied subject to the approval of the Engineer and at the Contractor's own expense. B. In general, the background on electrical drawings has been screened. Electrical work under this Contract is shown heavier by contrast. C. Details are typical for all locations which apply, regardless of whether a callout is shown on the Drawing or not. 1.08 AREA DESIGNATIONS I A. Location Definitions: 1. General Purpose Locations: Work installed in areas defined as NEMA 1 Areas below shall be considered General Purpose Locations. These areas are indoor, dry locations. 2. Indoor Wet/Outdoor/Corrosive Locations: Work installed in areas defined as NEMA 4X areas below shall be considered as Indoor Wet/Outdoor/Corrosive Locations. 3. Indoor Damp: Work installed in areas defined as NEMA 12 areas below 111 shall be considered as Indoor Damp Locations. B. General: I Electrical Work-General Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16010-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 r I 1. Raceway system and enclosures shall comply with Section 16130, ' Raceway and Boxes. 2. Electric Work specifically indicated in sections within any of the Specifications shall comply with those requirements. 3. Other Work shall comply with the following table: . I NEMA CLASSIFICATION IAREA 1 3R 4X 7 9 12 Notes Electrical Rooms X I All Outdoor X Locations I 4. Areas not specifically defined above shall be considered to be NEMA 4X locations. C. Material Requirements: I1. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures shall be steel coated with ANSI 61 Igrey paint. NEMA 4X shall not be coated. 1.09 TESTS IA. The Contractor shall be responsible for factory and field tests required by specifications in Division 16, Electrical, and by the Engineer or other authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall furnish necessary testing 1 equipment and pay costs of tests, including replacement parts and labor, due to damage resulting from damaged equipment or from testing and correction of faulty installation. IB. Where test reports are indicated, proof of design test reports for mass- produced equipment shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings, and factory performance test reports for custom-manufactured equipment shall be I submitted and be approved prior to shipment. Field test reports shall be submitted for review prior to Substantial Completion. IC. Equipment or material that fails a test shall be removed and replaced. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING IA. Refer to Section 01014, Work Sequence and Schedule Constraints, for additional requirements. I B. Switching, safety tagging, etc., required for plant shutdown or to isolate existing equipment shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner. In no case shall the Contractor begin any work in, on, or adjacent I to existing equipment without written authorization by the Engineer. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Work-General Project No. 6755 16010-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 1 C. The Contractor shall make modifications or alterations to existing electrical facilities required to successfully install and integrate the new electrical equipment as indicated. Modifications to existing equipment, panels, or cabinets shall be made in a professional manner with coatings repaired to match existing. The costs for modifications to existing electrical facilities that are required for a complete and operating system shall be included in the , Contractor's Bid, and no additional payment for this Work will be authorized. Extreme caution shall be exercised by the Contractor in digging trenches in order not to damage existing underground utilities. Cost of repairs of damages caused during construction shall be the Contractor's responsibility as a part of the Work. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying available existing circuit I breakers in existing distribution equipment for the intended use as required by the Drawings. Contractor shall also be responsible for field verifying the available space in existing distribution equipment to integrate new power IIIcircuit breakers. Costs for this Work shall be included in the Contractor's Bid. E. The Contractor shall visit the Site before submitting a Bid to better acquaint itself with the Work of this Contract. Lack of knowledge will not be accepted as a reason for granting extra compensation to perform the Work. 1. Before submitting a Bid, visit the site and determine conditions at the I site and at all existing structures in order to become familiar with all existing conditions and electrical systems which will, in any way or manner, affect the work required under this Contract. No subsequent increase in Contract cost will be allowed for additional work required because of the Contractor's failure to fulfill this requirement. 2. After award of Contract, confer with Owner to verify at each area of construction activity the location of existing underground utilities. Protect all existing underground utilities during construction. Pay for all required repairs without increase in Contract cost should damage to underground I utilities occur during construction. 3. Contractor shall note that Operational Readiness Testing (ORT) is required as part of the contract and may impact the construction schedule. See Division 17, Instrumentation and Controls, for more information. Operational Readiness testing shall be taken into account at time of bid. 4. Presubmittal Conference: Before producing any submittals, schedule a I pre-submittal conference for the purposes of reviewing the entire project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and submittal requirements. This meeting may be combined with the pre-submittal conference required in Division 1, General Requirements and Division 17, Instrumentation and Controls, with Engineer's approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS i 2.01 GENERAL A. Equipment and materials shall be new, shall be listed by UL, and shall bear 1 the UL label where UL requirements apply. Equipment and materials shall be Electrical Work-General Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16010-6 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 I I the products of experienced and reputable manufacturers in the industry. Similar items in the Work shall be products of the same manufacturer. I Equipment and materials shall be of industrial grade standard of construction. B. Where a NEMA enclosure type is indicated in a nonhazardous location, the I Contractor shall utilize that type of enclosure, despite the fact that certain modifications such as cutouts for control devices may negate the NEMA rating. IC. On devices indicated to display dates, the year shall be displayed as four digits. 1 2.02 MOUNTING HARDWARE A. Miscellaneous Hardware: 1 1. Nuts, bolts, and washers in all locations shall be stainless steel. 2. Threaded rods for trapeze supports in all locations shall be continuous I threaded, stainless steel, 3/8-inch diameter minimum. 3. Channel supports for mounting of conduits and equipment in all locations shall be stainless steel as defined in Section 16050, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 1 2.03 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION I A. Provide electrical identification in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification, requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.01 GENERAL A. Incidentals: The Contractor shall provide all materials and incidentals required for a complete and operable system, even if not required explicitly by the Specifications or the Drawings. Typical incidentals are terminal lugs not I furnished with vendor supplied equipment, compression connectors for cables, splices,junction and terminal boxes, and control wiring required by vendor furnished equipment to connect with other equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. IB. Field Control of Location and Arrangement: The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, I equipment, and other items. Exact locations shall be determined by the Contractor in the field based on the physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and other obstructions. Locations on the IDrawings, however, shall be followed as closely as possible. 1. Where conduit development drawings or"home runs" are shown, the Contractor shall route the conduits in accordance with the indicated Iinstallation requirements. Routings shall be exposed or encased as I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Work-General Project No. 6755 16010 7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 indicated, except that conduit in finished areas shall be concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conduits encased in a slab shall be sized for conduit OD to not exceed one-third of the slab thickness and be laid out and spaced to not impede concrete flow. 2. Conduit and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve head room and keep openings and passageways clear. Lighting fixtures, switches, convenience outlets, and similar items shall be located within finished rooms as indicated. Where the Drawings do not indicate exact locations, such locations shall be determined by the Engineer. If equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, it shall be moved without additional cost to the Owner. Lighting fixture locations shall be adjusted slightly to avoid obstructions and to minimize shadows based on actual field conditions. 3. Wherever conduits and wiring for lighting and receptacles are not indicated, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide lighting and receptacle-related conduits and wiring as required, based on the actual installed fixture layout and the circuit designations as indicated. C. Workmanship: Materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance I with printed recommendations of the manufacturer. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in the work. Installation shall be coordinated in the field with other trades to avoid interferences. 111 D. Protection of Equipment and Materials: The Contractor shall fully protect materials and equipment against damage from any cause until final acceptance. Materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, shall be covered in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint. Moving parts shall be kept clean and dry. The Contractor shall replace or refinish damaged materials or equipment, including faceplates of panels and switchboard sections as part of the Work. E. Coordinate and perform Operational Readiness Testing as required in Division 17, Instrumentation and Controls. 3.02 COMBINING CIRCUITS IN RACEWAY A. Drawings show each homerun circuit to be provided. Do not combine circuits into common raceways without written authorization from the Engineer. 3.03 CORE DRILLING A. The Contractor shall perform core drilling required for installation of raceways 1 through concrete walls and floors. Locations of floor penetrations, as may be required, shall be based on field conditions. Verify all exact core drilling locations based on equipment actually furnished as well as exact field placement. To the extent possible, identify the existence and locations of encased raceways and other piping in existing walls and floors with the Owner prior to any core drilling activities. Damage to any encased conduits, wiring, and piping shall be repaired as part of the Work. Electrical Work-General Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16010-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 i I 1 3.04 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS IA. Concrete housekeeping pads shall be provided for indoor floor standing electrical equipment. Housekeeping pads for equipment, including future units, shall be 3-1/2 inches above surrounding finished floor or grade and 2 inches larger in both dimensions than the equipment, unless otherwise indicated. I B. Concrete housekeeping curbs shall be provided for conduit stub-ups in indoor damp or wet locations that are not concealed by equipment enclosures. Such curbing shall be 3-1/2 inches above finished floor or grade. I3.05 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING A. Refer to Section 01190, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing, for requirements. IB. Floor supported, wall, or ceiling hung equipment and conductors shall be anchored in place by methods that will meet seismic requirements in the area where the project is located. See Structural Drawings for additional seismic I information. Wall-mounted panels that weigh more than 400 pounds or that are within 18 inches of the floor shall be provided with fabricated steel support pedestals. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet enclosed I within removable side plates, it shall match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions. I C. Equipment Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, equipment supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, and seismic loads as stated in 2012 IBC. Submitted design calculations for equipment supports and anchorage shall bear the signature and seal of an I Engineer registered in the State of Oregon, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchor Bolts: Refer to Section 05090, Structural Metal Fasteners, for Irequirements. E. Leveling channels anchored to the concrete pad shall be provided for Iswitchgear and pad-mounted transformer installations. F. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria in the printed recommendations of the equipment manufacturers are a part of the Work of this Contract. Such I recommendations shall be submitted as Shop Drawings under Section 01300, Submittal Procedures. I3.06 CLEANING A. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal fillings, surplus insulation and any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the I equipment or system startup. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Work-General I Project No. 6755 16010-9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 1 B. Before final acceptance, the electrical Work shall be thoroughly cleaned. Exposed parts shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other materials. Oil and grease spots shall be removed with a non-flammable cleaning solvent. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and cracks and corners scraped out. Touch-up paint shall be applied to scratches on panels and cabinets. Electrical cabinets or enclosures shall be vacuum-cleaned. I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I Electrical Work-General Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16010-10 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I SECTION 16050 ' BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Provide manufacturers' data for all equipment provided under this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER THERMAL MAGNETIC, LOW VOLTAGE ' A. General: 1. Type: Molded case. 2. Trip Ratings: 15 to 800 amps. 3. Voltage Ratings: 120, 240, 277, 480, and 600V ac. 4. Suitable for mounting and operating in any position. 5. NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. ' B. Operating Mechanism: 1. Overcenter, trip-free, toggle type handle. 2. Quick-make, quick-break action. 3. Locking provisions for padlocking breaker in open position. 4. ON/OFF and TRIPPED indicating positions of operating handle. 5. Operating handle to assume a center position when tripped. C. Trip Mechanism: ' 1. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. 2. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X ' to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps. 3. Two and three pole, common trip. 4. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. 5. Test button on cover. 6. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise. 7. Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where multi- pole circuit breakers are shown. ' D. Short Circuit Interrupting Ratings: 1. Equal to, or greater than, available fault current or interrupting rating shown. 2. Where installed in existing equipment, rating shall be equal to or greater than rating of existing equipment. ' 3. Series Connected Ratings: Do not apply series connected short circuit ratings. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods I Project No. 6755 16050-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 1 E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). 1. Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. 2. Push-to-test button. F. Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter(EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker ' specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground fault(UL-listed for equipment ground fault protection). G. Magnetic Only Type Breakers: Where shown; instantaneous trip adjustment which simultaneously sets magnetic trip level of each individual pole continuously through a 3X to 10X trip range. ' H. Accessories: Shunt trip, auxiliary switches, handle lock ON devices, mechanical interlocks, key interlocks, unit mounting bases, double lugs as shown or otherwise required. Shunt trip operators shall be continuous duty rated or have coil-clearing contacts. I. Connections: , 1. Supply (line side) at either end. 2. Mechanical wire lugs, except crimp compression lugs where shown. 3. Lugs removable/replaceable for breaker frames greater than 100 amperes. 4. Suitable for 75 degrees C rated conductors without derating breaker or conductor ampacity. J. Enclosures for Independent Mounting: 1. See Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. 2. Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover with switch in the ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel. 2.02 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE A. NEMA KS 1. B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions. Number of poles as shown on the Drawings. C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C I ampacity. D. Auxiliary Contact: Provide only where indicated on Drawings. , Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16050-2 Project No. 6755 KM Project No. 1376013"`70 1 r 1 1. Operation: Make before power contacts make and break before power contacts break. 2. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 1 Designation A600. E. Enclosures: See Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. F. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. ' 2.03 FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT A. Power Distribution, General: 1. Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating. 2. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches. ' 3. UL 248. B. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps: 1. Class: RK-1. 2. Type: Dual element, with time delay. 3. Manufacturers and Products: ' a. Bussmann; Types LPS-RK(600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts). b. Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK(600 volts) and LLN-RK(250 volts). C. Ferrule: 1. 600V or less; rated for applied voltage, small dimension. 2. Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps. 3. Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or nontime-delay as required. 4. Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and use. ' 5. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann. b. Littlefuse, Inc. 1 2.04 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH A. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 ' Designation A600. B. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard. C. Indicating Light: Push-to-test, LED, full voltage. D. Pushbutton Color: As shown on Drawings. E. Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated. ' F. Legend Plate: 1. Material: Aluminum. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Project No. 6755 16050 3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 2. Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color. 3. Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function. 4. Letter Height: 7/64-inch. ' G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Heavy-Duty, Oil-Tight Type: 1 a. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P. b. Square D Co.; Type T. c. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type 10250T. 2. Heavy-Duty, Watertight, and Corrosion-Resistant Type: a. Square D Co.; Type SK. b. General Electric Co.; Type CR 104P. c. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type E34. d. Crouse-Hinds; Type NCS. 2.05 TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS ' A. UL 486E and UL 1059. B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes. C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes. D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke. E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal. I F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal. G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection. ' H. Terminals: 1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than 1 stripping. 2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space. 3. Individual, rail mounted. I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags. J. Manufacturers: 1. Weidmuller, Inc. 2. Ideal. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16050-4 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I r3. Electrovert USA Corp. 2.06 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY A. Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break. B. NEMA ICS 2, Designation: A600 (600 volts). C. Time Delay Relay Attachment: 1. Pneumatic type, timer adjustable as shown. 2. Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa. D. Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch, having unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts. E. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Or approved equal. 2.07 TIME DELAY RELAY A. Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make, 360VA break. B. NEMA ICS 2 Designation: B150 (150 volts). C. Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay. D. One normally open and one normally closed contact(minimum). E. Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent. F. Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Square D Co.; Type F. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric Co. 2.08 ELAPSED TIME METER ' A. Drive: Synchronous motor. B. Range: 0 hour to 99,999.9 hours, nonreset type. C. Mounting: Semiflush panel. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1 Project No. 6755 16050-5 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013'70 1 I t D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. General Electric Co.; Type 240, 2-1/2-inch Big Look. 2. Eagle Signal Controls; Bulletin 705. 2.09 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS ' A. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel, 12-gauge minimum. B. Accessories: 1. Where contact with concrete or dissimilar metals may cause galvanic corrosion, suitable nonmetallic insulators shall be utilized to prevent such corrosion. 2. Plastic protective end caps shall be furnished and installed for all exposed strut ends. Plastic protective end caps shall be Unistrut Model P2860, or equal. 3. Anchors for attaching equipment to concrete walls, floors and ceilings shall be Type 316 stainless steel expansion anchors, such as "Rawl- Bolt," "Rawl-Stud," or"Lok-Bolt" as manufactured by Rawl; similar by Star, or equal. Wood plugs shall not be permitted. I C. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 1 2. Unistrut Corp. 3. Aickinstrut. 2.10 FIRES TOPS A. General: I 1. Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire-rating equal to, or greater than, the assembly penetrated. 2. Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and after exposure to flame. 3. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16050-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I ' 3.02 PUSHBUTTON, INDICATING LIGHT, AND SELECTOR SWITCH A. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including motor control centers, control panels, and individual stations. B. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion- resistant type in nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas. 3.03 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray systems. 1 3.04 FIRESTOPS A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency. B. Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. ' END OF SECTION I 1 1 I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Project No. 6755 16050-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Product data for the following: a. Exothermic weld connectors. b. Mechanical connectors. c. Compression connectors. 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall ' be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. ' 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. As specified in Section 16120, Conductors. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Exothermic Weld Type: 1. Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial. 2. Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld and Cadweld Exolon. b. Thermoweld. B. Compression Type: 1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material. 2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller. 3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and larger. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Project No. 6755 16060- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and antiseizing compound and sealed. 5. Manufacturers: a. Burndy Corp. b. Thomas and Betts Co. c. ILSCO. C. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy Corp. b. Thomas and Betts Co. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 GENERAL A. Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2. , B. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary grounding electrodes. ' C. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member or separate grounding electrode. D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems. E. Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in111 accordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer. F. Shielded Instrumentation Cables: 1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal. 2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and apply heat shrink tube. 3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point. 3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control circuits above 50 volts. B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus. C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings. 1 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16060-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground bus. E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus. ' F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus. G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to 1 intermediate metallic enclosures. H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws. Where hinged doors are provided, ensure door is bonded to equipment ground conductor. ' 3.03 MOTOR GROUNDING A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor ' feeder raceway; connect to motor frame. B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Conduit: Install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus. C. Motors Less Than 10 hp: Furnish compression, ring terminal connected to conduit box mounting screw. ' D. Motors 10 hp and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish compression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch brass threaded stud with bolt and washer. 3.04 CONNECTIONS ' A. General: 1. Abovegrade Connections: Install exothermic weld, mechanical, or compression-type connectors. 2. Belowgrade Connections: Install exothermic weld or compression type connectors. 3. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to ' allow good metal-to-metal contact. 4. Notify Engineer and electrical inspector prior to backfilling ground connections. B. Exothermic Weld Type: 1. Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface. 111 2. Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Avoid using badly worn molds. 4. Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Project No. 6755 16060-3 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013"70 5. After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and thoroughly clean joint. C. Compression Type: 1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground rods specified. 3. Install using connector manufacturer's compression tool having proper sized dies. D. Mechanical Type: 1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion inhibitor before making connection. 111 2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Connect surge protective devices ground terminals to equipment ground bus. END OF SECTION ' 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16060-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I SECTION 16075 IELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION IPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY IA. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and 1 components. 2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices. B. Related Specifications: I 1. Division 11. 2. Division 15. 3. Division 16. I4. Division 17. 1.02 REFERENCES IA. Refer to Section 16010. 1.03 DEFINITIONS IA. Refer to Section 16010. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION IA. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of mechanical equipment, process I equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch, receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually I mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch, bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any other control device or major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels. 2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the I facility. B. Wire Numbers: I 1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system: a. Control and Instrumentation wires and cables shall be assigned a unique I identification number following OWNER standards and the loop drawings as specified in Division 17. b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they are attached in the control panel. I c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Identification Project No.6755 16075 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 1 d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above: 1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number following the requirements for conduit markers in Section 16130. e. Spare wiring and terminals shall be tagged as spares. 2. Power cables and wires shall be assigned a unique identification number as specified by OWNER. I 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16050. 1 B. Product Data: 1. Nameplates: a. Color. b. Size: 1) Outside dimensions. 2) Lettering. c. Material. d. Mounting means. 2. Equipment Nameplate Schedule: a. Show exact wording for each nameplate. b. Include nameplate and letter sizes. c. Schedule format shall match equipment nameplate schedule attached at the end of this section. d. Submit equipment nameplate schedule for approval before engraving nameplates. 3. Wire Numbers: a. Manufacturer's catalog data for wire labels and label printer. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples for each type of Electrical Identification device intended to be provided for this project for review and approval. Samples of the materials and colors proposed for the WORK and application instructions shall be included. Devices shall indicate proposed text sizes, lettering and background coloring and related information. 1 C. Record Documents: 1. Update the circuit/raceway block diagrams to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers including spares and destination points for all wires. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Schedule a pre-installation conference in accordance with Section 16050 in order to clearly define the requirements specified for equipment identification: 1. Representatives of the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ENGINEER shall convene before any major purchases of cable or conductors and before the installation or termination of any cables or conductors. 1 Electrical Identification Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16075-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I IIIPART 2 PRODUCTS I2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Nameplates and Signs: 1. One of the following or equal: I a. Brady. b. Seton. I B. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Heat-Shrinkable Tubing: a. One of the following or equal: 1 1) Raychem. 2) Brady. 3) Thomas & Betts. 4) Kroy. I 2. Marker Printer: a. One of the following or equal: 1) Brady XC Plus. IC. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. One of the following or equal: a. Panduit. 111 b. Almetek. 2.02 MATERIALS IA. Nameplates: 1. General: I a. Identification tags shall utilize the OWNER standard numbering system for equipment supplied and installed as part of this project. Identification tags installed for outdoor equipment shall be rated for weatherproof type. b. When identifying a power source for equipment, the tag shall include the I source name and circuit or compartment number (i.e., "100MCC0101-4F" or"1001P0101, CKT. #1"). c. For all equipment, and on all flex connections to motors, identification I shall include the descriptive name on the first line, the CWS standard tag number and tabware number on the second line and the power source on the third line (e.g., I Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump#1 46P1801 Power Source 100MCC0101-4F). d. Text shall be centered on all nameplates and identification devices. 11 2. Electrical Equipment: a. Disconnect Switches: Each local power disconnect switch and circuit breaker for motors, instrument transmitters, controllers, and other I equipment shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate. The nameplate shall identify the load served by equipment name and tag number, and the power source. Nameplates shall be not less than 1 inch high with lettering I not smaller than 1/4 inch. Nameplates shall be attached using self-tapping S.S. screws. b. Switchgear and MCC: Each switchgear/MCC shall be identified with a I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Identification Project No.6755 16075-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 phenolic nameplate (e.g. "100SWGRO101" or"100MCC0101"). Each switchgear/MCC compartment/bucket shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate (e.g., "1A" or"4F"). The nameplate shall identify the load served by name and tag number. Stand-alone starters, drives, and similar equipment shall also identify the power source for the starter, drive, etc. Nameplates shall be attached using S.S. self-tapping screws. Nameplates shall be not less than 2.25 inches high, with 1 inch high lettering and 1/2 inch high tag number lettering. c. Switchgear/MCC compartments/buckets, VFDs, enclosed starter panels, and similar electrical equipment: Each compartment/bucket shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate for the load it serves (e.g., "Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump#1, 46P1801"). Stand-alone starters, drives, and similar equipment shall also identify the power source for the starter, drive, etc. Nameplates shall be attached using S.S. self-tapping screws. Nameplates shall be not less than 2 inches high, with 1/2 inch high lettering and 1/2 inch high tag number lettering. d. Local Control Panels (LCP), Control Stations (CS), and field instruments: Each LCP/CS/Field instrument shall include a nameplate on the enclosure face identifying the panel name and tag number. Include the power source for each panel. Each panel-mounted device (internal and external) shall be identified. Pilot devices shall utilize collar-type, oversize nameplates provided with the pilot devices. Non-pilot devices shall have phenolic nameplates, attached using permanent adhesive. Internal panel devices shall have phenolic identification plates (hand markings not permitted), and shall be attached using permanent adhesive. Wiring and terminal blocks 1) LCP/CS/Field instrument master nameplate shall be not less than 1 inch high with not less than 1/2 inch lettering. 2) External and internal panel devices shall have nameplates not less than 1/2 inch high with not less than 3/16 inch lettering. 3) Where field instruments do not permit installation of phenolic nameplates, provide a round, stamped, stainless steel nameplate using not less than 1/4 inch high lettering, neatly fastened by means of stainless steel wire. B. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs: a. Suitable for exterior use. b. In accordance with OSHA regulations. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: I 1. Machine printed black characters on white tubing. 2. 10 point type or larger. D. Conduit and Raceway Markers: I 1. 12 GA stainless steel, 3/4-inch by 2-inch minimum. 2. Stamped or engraved lettering. 3. Minimum 1/4-inch high letters. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1 Electrical Identification Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16075-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 A. Nameplates: 1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (i.e., pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, etc.): a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 16010. B. Nameplates: 1. Attach nameplates to equipment with self-tapping stainless steel screws, approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment as specified for each equipment. 2. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire length: a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new enclosures at the discretion of the ENGINEER. C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination. 2. Non Heat-Shrinkable Tubing: a. Tubing shall be sized for the wire and insulation on which it is to be placed. b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire. c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top to bottom. d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point. e. Identification labels shall be installed at each conductor termination. 3. Conductor numbers shall be named based on the equipment tag of the field device utilizing the electrical power source. The form of the tag shall be 406P1205C2 where '406P1205' represents the equipment designation; 'C' 1 indicated a control cable and 2 is a sequential number developed as part of the circuit design. Cable type designations shall follow the designations listed below: a. C- Control b. S - Signal (below 80 volts AC or DC) c. P- Power d. N - Network (Ethernet, Profibus ...) D. Conduit Markers: 1. Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system or part of the process system. Conduits shall be identified as indicated on the circuit/raceway block diagrams a. Conduit markings shall match the circuit/raceway block diagrams. b. For conduits not shown on circuit/raceway block diagrams, provide conduit markings as described below: 1) Start with a prefix letter that designates its purpose ("C" for control, Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Identification Project No. 6755 16075-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 "P" for power, "S" for Signal, and "PC"for combined power and control), followed by a facility code, followed by a sequence number. e.g., C-100P0101 is a control conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. P-100P0101 is a power conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. S- 100P0101 is a signal conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. PC- 340FV1301 is a combined power and control conduit in PEPS facility for control valve (Combined circuit allowed per OWNER approval only). 2) If the conduit is a continuation or branch of another conduit, the last space is a letter, such as A,B,C, etc. 3) When a single loop network circuit is utilized among equipment, conduit number for coming and leaving the equipment shall be assigned a prefix from and to. e.g. NFR: 100P0101 is a communication network from IPS Facility Pump 1. NTO:100P0102 is a communication network to IPS Facility Pump 2. 2. Mark Conduits at the Following Locations: a. Each end and every 50 feet for conduits greater than 10 feet in length. b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure. c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc. d. The middle of conduits that are 10 feet or less in length. 3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted. 4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor. a. 5. 12-gauge stainless steel tags 3/4-inch by 2-inch minimum - conduit tags shall be attached to the raceway with Type 316 stainless steel wires. 6. Mark conduits before construction review by ENGINEER for punch list purposes. 7. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). E. Labeling: I 1. Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically or from remote locations: a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to Operations Personnel. 2. Furnish and install permanent and conspicuous warning signs on equipment (front and back), doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, and where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. 3. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has more than one source of power. Use warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the disconnecting means all external power sources: a. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking. b. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage source disconnecting means. 4. Each switch, receptacle and similar device shall include a nameplate indicating the power source and circuit number providing power to the switch or receptacle. For circuits other than 120V, identify the voltage and phase (e.g. 277V, 10 or 480V, 30). 5. Each panelboard shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate. The nameplate shall include the panel name and tag number, voltage, phase, ampere rating Electrical Identification Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16075-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 and power source. Nameplate shall be 2.25 inches high with g 1/2 inch high lettering, and attached using self-tapping stainless steel screws. 7. Aboveground pull boxes, junction boxes and terminal boxes shall be identified using a stainless steel tag attached to the enclosure using S.S. self-tapping screws. Identify the box as "Power", "Control", "Signal" or"Fiber Optic" as applicable. Assign unique box numbers in accordance with OWNER standards. 9. Provide arc flash labeling in accordance with NEC. 10. Provide labeling indicating short circuit ratings for all power distribution equipment and control panels in accordance with the NEC and UL requirements. F. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs: a. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. Locate and mount warning signs in a suitable manner that is acceptable to the ENGINEER. b. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on the front and back of equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, and manholes where the voltage exceeds 600 volts. c. Place warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power: 1) Warning sign to identify every power source. d. Place warning signs on equipment that has a 120 VAC control voltage ' source used for interlocking. 2. Provide room signage at Electrical room entrances indicating "Warning-High- Voltage". 3. Provide additional signage in accordance with applicable NEC requirements. 4. Provide 20 placard-style signs (7 inch by 10 inch) with warnings to be selected by the OWNER during construction. Placard signs shall be W.H. Brady B-302 style, or approved equal. 111 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway labels that in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER do not meet the requirements of this Section. 111 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Submit nameplate schedules on 11 by 17 inch sheets. END OF SECTION 1 I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Electrical Identification Project No.6755 16075-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 1 SECTION 16080 ICOMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS IPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS IA. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. IB. Informational Submittals: 1. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests: I a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests. b. List of references to be used for each test. c. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). d. Sample copy of individual device test form. IIIe. Sample copy of individual system test form. 2. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within 30 days after completion of test: I 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. In accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data. b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Firm Qualifications: 1 1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority. I 2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical equipment and systems being tested. 3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems. I 4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by NICET or NETA and having a minimum of 5 years testing experience on similar projects. I 5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA. 6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice. I 7. Oregon Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report outlining services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and opinions. 8. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation Iof testing laboratories or a full member company of NETA. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Commissioning of Electrical Systems I Project No. 6755 16080 1 Permit Set KM Project No. 137601370 I 1 I B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements established by NETA ATS. C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING I A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment here in listed has been installed. B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible. C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be: 1. Scheduled with Owner prior to de-energization. 2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment. D. Notify Owner at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized I electrical equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL i A. Tests specified in this section shall be performed in accordance with requirements of Section 01650, Commissioning and Startup. I B. Tests and inspections shall establish: 1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's i tolerances and standards. 2. Installation operates properly. 3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 111 4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2. C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry I standards, and manufacturer's recommendations. D. Set, test, and calibrate circuit breakers, fuses power monitoring meters, and 1 other applicable devices. E. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement. F. Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer. Commissioning of Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16080-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I G. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved ISubmittals. H. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness. I. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored. J. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA ATS. K. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer. L. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts. M. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70. N. Investigate and repair or replace: 1. Electrical items that fail tests. 2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Damaged electrical equipment. O. Electrical Enclosures: 1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 4. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer door and panel sections having dented surfaces. 5. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer poor fitting doors and panel sections. 6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices. 7. Replace missing or damaged hardware. 8. Finish: a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. b. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by Engineer, refinish entire assembly. 1 P. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals. 3.02 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP A. Voltage Field Test: I 1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to project when installation is essentially complete and is in operation. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Commissioning of Electrical Systems Project No. 6755 16080-3 Permit Set IVJ Project No. 1376013`70 I I I 2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded conditions. B. Equipment Line Current Tests: I 1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. 2. If any phase current for any piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken. 3.03 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 6 and larger for: a. Physical damage. b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram. c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable. d. Color coding conformance with Specifications. e. Proper circuit identification. 2. Mechanical Connections For: a. Proper lug type for conductor material. b. Proper lug installation. c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For: a. Proper shield grounding. b. Proper terminations. c. Proper circuit identification. 4. Control Cables For: a. Proper termination. b. Proper circuit identification. 5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices. I B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 6 and Larger: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000V dc megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors. b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute. c. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type. 1 d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections. i Commissioning of Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16080-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 C. Low voltage cable tests may be performed by installer in lieu of independent testing firm. 111 3.04 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM ' A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: I1. Proper blade pressure and alignment. 2. Proper operation of switch operating handle. 3. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 4. Proper phase barrier material and installation. 5. Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing. ' B. Electrical Tests: ' 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches. 3.05 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 70 amperes and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper mounting. 2. Proper conductor size. 3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram. 4. Cracked casings. 5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation. ' 7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram. 8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Commissioning of Electrical Systems Project No. 6755 16080-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000V dc megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers and 500V dc megohmmeter for 240-volt circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short-time pickup and delay. c. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. d. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. e. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS Table 100.7. f. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS Table 100.8. 3.06 GROUNDING SYSTEMS , A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control center and panelboard assemblies for proper connection and tightness. 2. Ground bus connections in motor control center and panelboard assemblies for proper termination and tightness. 3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding. 4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness. 5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Fall-of-Potential Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground system's resistance. b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 3 ohms. Commissioning of Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16080-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 2. Two-Point Direct Method Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points. b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by more than 0.50 ohm. 3.07 AC INDUCTION MOTORS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 hp and larger. 1 B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper electrical and grounding connections. 2. Shaft alignment. 3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways. 4. Operate motor and check for: a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. ' b. Overheating. c. Correct rotation. d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS Table 100.10. 5. Check operation of space heaters. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 and 60 seconds. b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers. 2. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes. 3.08 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices. 3. Proper overload protection for each motor. 4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 7. Check door and device interlocking system by: a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Commissioning of Electrical Systems Project No. 6755 16080-7 Permit Set KM Project No. 1376013*70 1 I b. Opening attempt of door when device is in CLOSED position. 8. Check key interlocking systems for: a. Key captivity when device is in CLOSED position. b. Key removal when device is in OPEN position. c. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders. e. Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders; destroy duplicate sets of keys. 9. Check nameplates for proper identification of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. b. Pushbuttons. 111 c. Control switches. d. Pilot lights. e. Control relays. f. Circuit breakers. g. Instrumentation. 10. Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 11. Verify current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents. 12. Check bus connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints. a. Ohmic value to be zero. b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 13. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by: a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. c. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions. 14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of motor control center. 15. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling. c. Check for proper conductor identification. d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections. 16. Exercise active components. 17. Inspect contactors for: a. Correct mechanical operations. b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure. c. Correct torque of all connections. 18. Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size. 19. Compare motor circuit protector with motor characteristics for proper size. 20. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus phasing from each source. Commissioning of Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16080-8 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 I B. Electrical Tests: I1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. I b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase. c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for I 1 minute on each phase. d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter contacts closed and protective devices open. e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. I 2. Current Injection Through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current and Monitor Trip Time: a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. I b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds. 3. Control Wiring Tests: a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. I b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts dc on control wiring except that connected to solid state components: Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum. 4. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation. 1 3.09 MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1 1. Check doors and panels for proper interlocking. 2. Check connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter and calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints. I 3. Check positive mechanical and electrical interlock between normal and alternate sources. 4. Check for proper operation of manual transfer function switch. I5. Verify settings and operation of control devices. B. Electrical Tests: I1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for each phase with switch CLOSED in both source I positions. b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. c. Test values in accordance with manufacturer's published data. I 2. Contact Resistance Test: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade for both source positions. b. Investigate values exceeding 500 micro-ohms. c. Investigate values deviating from adjacent pole by more than 50 percent. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Commissioning of Electrical Systems Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 16080-9 Permit Set I I 3.10 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Adequate clearances between devices and enclosures. 2. Ground connections to ground bus. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Varistor Type Devices: a. Clamping voltage test. b. Rated RMS voltage test. c. Rated dc voltage test. d. Varistor test values in accordance with IEEE C62.33, Sections 4.4 and 4.9. 1 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I Commissioning of Electrical Systems Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16080-10 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I I SECTION 16120 ICONDUCTORS IPART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS IA. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. IB. Action Submittals: 1. Wire and cable descriptive product information. 2. Wire and cable accessories descriptive product information. 3. Cable Pulling Calculations: Provide cable pulling calculations for I medium voltage cable runs that cannot be hand pulled. 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or I other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those Istandards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. B. Terminations and Splices for Conductors above 600 Volts: Work shall be Idone by Journeyman Lineman with splicing credentials. PART 2 PRODUCTS I2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70. IB. Conductor Type: 1. 120-Volt and 277-Volt Lighting, 12 AWG: Stranded copper. 2. 120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, 12 AWG: Stranded copper. 3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper. I C. Insulation: Type XHHW-2 insulation for power conductors. THWN-2 insulation for all nonpower (control, signal) conductors. I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Conductors Project No.6755 16120-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I I 2.02 600-VOLT RATED CABLE A. General: 1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. 5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant. B. Type 1, Multiconductor Control Cable: I 1. Conductors: a. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper. b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon. c. UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-1. d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape. e. Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2. Table 1 2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test. 3. Cable Sizes: Max. Outside I Diameter Jacket Thickness No. of Conductors (Inches) (Mils) 3 0.41 45 5 0.48 45 7 0.52 45 9 0.64 60 4. Manufacturers: I a. Okonite Co. b. Southwire. C. Type 2, Multiconductor Power Cable: I 1. General: a. Meet or exceed UL 1581 for cable tray use. b. Meet or exceed UL 1277 for direct burial and sunlight-resistance. c. Overall jacket: PVC. 2. Conductors: a. Class B stranded, coated copper. Conductors Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16120-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I b. Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene-propylene or cross- linked polyethylene. I c. UL rated VW-1 or listed Type XHHW-2. d. Color Code: 1) Conductors, size 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors, I ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2 2) Conductors, size 6 AWG and larger, ICEA S-73-532, Method 4. I 3. Cable shall pass ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test. 4. Cable Sizes: INo. of Max. Nominal Minimum Current Outside Jacket Conductor Ground Carrying Diameter Thickness Size Wire Size Conductors (Inches) (Mils) 12 12 2 0.42 45 3 0.45 45 4 0.49 45 10 10 2 0.54 60 3 0.58 60 4 0.63 60 8 10 3 0.66 60 4 0.75 6 8 3 0.74 60 4 0.88 N2/0 4 3 1.32 80 5. Manufacturers: I a. Okonite Co. b. Southwire. D. Type 3, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, I designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. II. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: I a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. I e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black for negative and white for positive. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Conductors Project No. 6755 0 3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1612 1 I I 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. c. Belden. E. Type 4, 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, 111 designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. I 1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. 111 b. 20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. I d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, white, and red. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. c. Belden. F. Type 8, Multi-Conductor Variable Frequency Drive Power Cable: 1 1. Conductors: a. Class B, stranded coated copper. b. Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW-2. c. Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper. 2. Sheath: a. UL 1277 Type TC, 90 degrees C. b. Continuous shield, Al/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper braid. 3. Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569. 4. Cable Sizes: F1 Minimum Max. Minimum Ground No. of Outside Jacket Conductor Wire Size Insulated Diameter Thickness Size (AWG) Conductors (Inches) (Mils) I 12 AWG 12 4 0.655 50 10 AWG 10 4 0.769 50 1 8 AWG 8 4 0.940 50 5. Manufacturers and Products: 1 a. Alpha Wire, Series V. Conductors Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16120-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 I b. Belden, Series 29500. 1 2.03 SPECIAL CABLES A. Category 6 Unshielded Twisted-Pair, Ethernet Cable: 1 1. Shall meet the requirements of TIA/EIA 568-B.2, 100-ohm UTP cable. 2. Conductors: WECO color-coded 24 AWG solid copper thermoplastic- insulated conductors twisted together in pairs; rated 60 degrees C and 300 volts. 3. Assembly: Pairs formed together into multipair groups and enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket. 4. Four-pair cable sheaths must be clearly factory colored or color labeled at intervals snot greater than 1 foot to easily differentiate between up to four cables. 1 2.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type XHHW, insulation. B. Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper. 1 2.05 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Tape: 1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88. B. Identification Devices: Refer to Section 16075, Electrical Identification, for labeling requirements. C. Connectors and Terminations: 1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO. 2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Seamless. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulink. 3) ILSCO; ILSCONS. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Conductors Project No. 6755 16120-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'"70 I I 3. Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector(Wire Nuts): a. UL 486C. b. Plated steel, square wire springs. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts. 11 2) Ideal; Twister. D. Cable Lugs: I 1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. 2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 2) Burndy, Hydent. 3) ILSCO. 4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators: 111 a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 2) Burndy; Quiklug. 3) ILSCO. E. Cable Ties: I 1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and weather(ultraviolet) resistant. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP. F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: 1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief. 3. Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON. b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000. 2.06 PULLING COMPOUND 1 A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant; UL listed. I B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and cable. C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer. D. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and I fiberglass raceways. Conductors Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16120-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I E. Manufacturers: ' 1. Ideal Co. 2. Polywater, Inc. 3. Cable Grip Co. 1 2.07 WARNING TAPE ' A. As specified in Section 16130, Raceway and Boxes. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854. B. Conductors Above 600 Volts: Test in accordance with NEMA WC 71 and AEIC CS 6 partial discharge level test for EPR insulated cable. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 GENERAL A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted otherwise. C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. Furnish and use a dynamometer on all conductors and cables requiring a mechanical pulling device for installation. The dynamometer shall verify the pull does not exceed the conductor/cable manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension. D. Terminate all conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for copper conductors. F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to- center spacing as required by equipment terminals. G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, t vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on Icenter. H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables. Clean all conduits with a swab prior to pulling a mandrel through them. The mandrel diameter shall be 90 percent of the inside diameter of the conduit. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Conductors Project No. 6755 16120-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 3.02 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING I A. Meet the requirements of Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 3.03 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION 1 A. Circuit Identification shall meet the requirements of Section 16075, Electrical Identification. 3.04 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Connections and Terminations: 1 1. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control, circuit conductors. 2. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller. 3. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors 4 AWG through 2/0 AWG. 4. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger. 5. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors 10 AWG and larger. 111 6. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection. 7. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer. 8. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used. 9. Compression Lugs: a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is complete. 111 b. Do not use plier type crimpers. B. Do not use soldered mechanical joints. I C. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps. D. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers: I 1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure. 2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. E. Control and Instrumentation Wiring: 1 1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring with insulated, locking-fork compression lugs. Conductors Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16120-8 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions. 3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. 4. Cable Protection: a. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. b. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over the shield. ' 5. Shielded Instrumentation Cable Terminations: a. Strip insulation and foil back 4 inches from end of the cable. b. Install a 1-inch section of heat-shrink tubing to overlap wires and ' insulation. c. If the shield wire is not connected (as in the field end of a cable), it should be cut off and insulated so that the shield does not show at the end. d. Install wire markers and connect. F. Extra Conductor Length: 1. For conductors to be connected by others in freestanding panels, provide an extra length of each conductor and control cable in the panel equal to the full vertical height and horizontal width of the panel plus 6 feet. 2. Inside nonfreestanding panels, provide an extra length of each conductor and control cable in the panel equal to the vertical height and 1 horizontal width of the panel plus 2 feet. END OF SECTION 1 i 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Conductors Project No. 6755 16120-9 Permit Set KMProject No. 1376013*70 1 SECTION 16130 ' RACEWAY AND BOXES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall provide electrical raceway systems, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. ' B. In the event that individual equipment loads provided are larger than indicated in the Contract Documents, raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors shall be revised as necessary to control and protect the increased connected load in conformance to NEC requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.02 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300, Submittal Procedures, and Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. ' B. Action Submittals: 1. Complete catalog cuts of raceways, fittings, boxes, supports, and mounting hardware, marked where applicable to show proposed materials and finishes. 2. Complete scaled drawings of proposed routings for encased, concealed and exposed raceways and ducts. Drawings shall include raceways, junction boxes, pull boxes, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and appropriate tag numbers. The Contractor shall clearly document the proposed routing of encased conduits prior to placement of concrete. 3. Complete record drawings of exposed, encased and concealed raceways indicating the as-built condition of all drawings submitted in Item 2 above. 4. Dimensioned layout drawings of cable tray routings, including ' elevations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Pull and junction boxes, fittings, and other indicated enclosures that are dedicated to the raceway system shall comply with this Section. 1 ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Raceway and Boxes Project No. 6755 16130-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 1 2.02 CONDUIT A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit: I 1. Rigid steel conduit shall be mild steel, hot-dip galvanized inside and out. I 2. Rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated, and UL 6. 3. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. Triangle. b. Wheatland Tube. B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: I 1. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC as indicated, sunlight resistant. I 2. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC-2, Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit, and UL 651, Standard for Rigid Non-metallic Conduit. I 3. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. Carlon. b. Cantex. I C. Rigid PVC Coated Galvanized Steel (RPGS) Conduit: 1. The conduit, prior to PVC coating, shall meet the requirements for RGS conduit above. 2. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the outer surface of the galvanized conduit. The bond between the coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the coating. The inside surfaces and threads of the conduit shall have a 2-mil urethane coating. 3. PVC coating thickness shall be not less than 40 mils. 4. PVC coated RGS shall be manufactured in accordance with the I following standards: a. UL 6. b. ANSI C80.1. c. Federal Specification WW-C-581 E. d. NEMA RN1, PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. I 5. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. Robroy. b. Perma-Cote. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit: 1. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit shall be constructed of a flexible galvanized metal core with a sunlight resistant thermoplastic outer jacket. 2. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with UL 360, Steel Conduits, Liquid-Tight Flexible. I 3. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. Anaconda, Sealtite. I b. Electriflex, Liquatite. Raceway and Boxes Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16130-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I 1 E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), liquid-tight flexible nonmetallic conduit, or Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) will not be accepted. I 2.03 FITTINGS AND BOXES IA. General: 1. Cast and malleable iron fittings for use with metallic conduit shall be the I threaded type with five full threads. 2. Fittings and boxes shall have neoprene gaskets and nonmagnetic stainless steel screws. Covers shall be attached by means of holes tapped into the body of the fitting. Covers for fittings attached by means of clips or clamps will not be acceptable. 3. Boxes larger than standard cast or malleable types shall be Type 304 stainless steel, NEMA 4X, hinged, sized 30 percent larger than NEC I requirements. 4. Conduits shall be terminated at panels in raintight hubs with grounding locknuts as manufactured by Myers, O.Z. Gedney, Appleton, or equal. I Sealing locknuts will not be permitted to be used in lieu of hubs. Provide PVC coated hubs when used with PVC coated rigid steel conduit. 5. Conduit, fittings, and boxes in hazardous locations shall be approved I for the class and division indicated on the Drawings. B. Malleable Iron Fittings and Boxes: 1 1. Fittings and boxes for use with galvanized steel conduit shall be of malleable iron or gray-iron alloy with zinc plating. I 2. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. O.Z. Gedney. b. Crouse-Hinds. Appleton. Ic. C. PVC Fittings and Boxes: I 1. Fittings for use with rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be PVC, solvent welded type. 2. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. Carlon. b. Cantex. c. Hoffman. 3. Provide welding solvent as required for installation of nonmetallic Iconduit and fittings. D. PVC Coated Fittings: 1 1. Fittings for use with PVC coated RGS shall be PVC coated and shall be products of the same manufacturer as the conduit. 2. Male and female threads and internal surfaces shall have a 2-mil 1 urethane coating. IDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Raceway and Boxes Project No. 6755 16130-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 3. Where flex fittings are used where PVC-coated RGS raceways are required, flex fittings shall also be PVC-coated and shall be products of the same manufacturer as the flex. E. Stainless Steel Boxes: 1. Stainless steel boxes shall be used with PVC coated RGS conduit and where indicated. 2. Stainless steel boxes shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316, unless NEMA Type 7 is required. 3. Stainless steel shall be minimum 14-gauge thickness, with a brushed finish. 4. Doors shall have full-length stainless steel piano hinges. Nonhinged boxes are not acceptable. 5. Manufacturers, or Equal: a. Hoffman. b. Rohn. c. Hammond. 2.04 WARNING TAPE I A. Warning Tape: 1. Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip. 2. Color: Red. 3. Width: Minimum 3 inches. 4. Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below tape. 5. Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch high permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Panduit; Type HTDU. b. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 GENERAL A. Wiring shall be run in raceway. I B. Raceways shall be installed between equipment as indicated. Raceway systems shall be electrically and mechanically complete before conductors are installed. Bends and offsets shall be smooth and symmetrical, and shall be accomplished with tools designed for this purpose. Factory elbows shall be utilized wherever possible. I C. Where raceway routings are indicated on plan views, follow those routings to the extent possible. D. Where raceways are indicated but routing is not indicated, such as home runs or on conduit developments and schedules, raceway routings shall be the Contractor's choice and in strict accordance with the NEC and customary installation practice. Raceway shall be encased, exposed, concealed, or under floor as indicated, except that conduit in finished areas shall be concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise. Raceway and Boxes Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16130-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 E. Routings shall be adjusted to avoid obstructions and shall not inhibit installation, maintenance and removal of equipment. Coordinate between trades and consult with the Engineer prior to installation of raceways and equipment when conflicts are first perceived to occur. Lack of such coordination shall not be justification for extra compensation, and removal ' and re-installation to resolve conflicts shall be by the Contractor as part of the Work. ' F. Support rod attachment for ceiling-hung trapeze installations shall meet the seismic requirements in the area where the project is located (see Section 16010, Electrical Work, General). Ceiling-hung conduit support 1 systems shall be designed by the Contractor and the designs shall be approved by the permitting authority having jurisdiction before installation. G. Exposed raceways shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to structural beams. H. Install expansion fittings with bonding jumpers wherever raceways cross ' building expansion joints. I. Exposed raceways shall be installed at least 1/2 inch from walls or ceilings except that at locations above finished grade where damp conditions do not prevail, exposed raceways shall be installed 1/4 inch minimum from the face of walls or ceilings by the use of clamp backs or struts. J. Wherever contact with concrete or dissimilar metals can produce galvanic corrosion of equipment, suitable insulating means shall be provided to prevent such corrosion. K. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete-encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of runs. 1 3.02 CONDUIT A. Exposed conduit, adapters, and fittings installed in indoor, dry locations (see Section 16010, Electrical Work, General) shall be rigid galvanized steel. B. Exposed conduit, adapters, and fittings installed in classified areas/indoor ' wet/corrosive areas/outdoor areas (see Section 16010, Electrical Work, General) shall be PVC coated RGS. 1. Boxes in indoor wet/corrosive/outdoor areas shall be stainless steel. 2. Boxes in classified areas shall be cast iron and shall be listed for use in the classified area. rC. Power conduit encased in concrete shall be Schedule 40 PVC. Analog control or instrumentation encased conduit shall be PVC-coated RGS. Where either PVC or RGS conduit stubs up from concrete encasement, a PVC- coated RGS factory elbow shall be utilized. Conduit shall emerge from the concrete perpendicular to the surface whenever possible. Where conduits emerge into hazardous (classified) locations, utilize PVC-coated RGS Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Raceway and Boxes Project No. 6755 16130 5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 conduits. In all cases, conduit emerging from the earth or concrete shall be PVC-coated RGS from at least 12 inches under the surface to at least 6 inches above the surface of the earth or concrete. D. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch trade size minimum. Supports for exposed conduits shall be installed at distances required by the NEC. I E. Conduit shall not be encased in the bottom floor slab below grade. F. Concrete cover for conduit and fittings shall not be less than 1-1/2 inches. In 1 all cases, raceways shall be routed between steel reinforcement bars, as applicable. G. Conduits passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of the construction. H. Conduits embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those merely 1 passing through) shall satisfy the following: 1. Conduits with their fittings embedded within a column shall not displace , more than 4 percent of the gross area of cross section. 2. Conduits shall not be larger in outside dimension than one third the overall thickness of slab, wall, or beam in which embedded. 3. Conduits shall not be spaced closer than 3 outside diameters on centers. I. Conduit shall be placed so that cutting, bending, or displacing reinforcement I from its proper location will not be required. J. Threads shall be coated with a conductive lubricant such as Kopr-Shield before assembly. K. Joints shall be tight, thoroughly grounded, secure, and free of obstructions in the pipe. Conduit shall be adequately reamed to prevent damage to the wires and cables inside. Strap wrenches and vises shall be used to install conduit to prevent wrench marks on conduit. Conduit with wrench marks shall be replaced. L. Wherever possible, conduit runs shall slope to drain at one or both ends of run. Wherever conduit enters substructures below grade, the conduit shall be sloped to drain water away from the structure. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid pockets or depressions in conduit. M. Installation of any type of rigid steel conduit though a core-drilled hole in an ' exterior wall below grade shall utilize a sealing device as manufactured by Link Seal or equal. N. Connections to motors and other equipment subject to vibration shall be made with liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit not exceeding 3 feet in length. Equipment subject to vibration that is normally provided with wiring leads shall be provided with a junction box for the make-up of connections. Raceway and Boxes Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 111 Permit Set 16130-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 O. Conduit passing through walls or floors shall have plastic sleeves if the 1 penetration is not fire-rated. Core drilling shall be performed in accordance with Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. UL-approved fire stopping shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions in the annular spaces to maintain fire ratings between rooms where the wall or floor is fire-rated. Where the wall ' or floor is not fire-rated dry grout shall be used. P. Provide conduit seal fittings at the following locations: In hazardous classified locations, in strict accordance with the NEC. Q. Conduit, fittings, and boxes required for installation in hazardous classified areas shall be approved for the application and installed in strict accordance with NEC requirements. R. Empty conduits shall be tagged at both ends to indicate the final destination. A 1/8-inch polypropylene pull-cord shall also be installed in each empty conduit. Empty conduits that terminate below grade, in vaults, manholes, handholes, and junction or pullboxes shall have a removable plug installed. 1 1. Neatly attach markers to the raceway with Type 316 stainless steel wire. S. Provide identification in accordance with Section 16075, Electrical Identification. ' T. Conduit for data cables shall be provided in accordance with theequipment manufacturer's recommendations, particularly regarding separation from low and medium voltage power raceways. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Raceway and Boxes Project No. 6755 16130-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 111 I1 SECTION 16262 IVARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 0.50-50 HORSEPOWER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Variable frequency drives (VFD) 0.5 to 50 horsepower for control of NEMA ' Design B squirrel cage induction motors installed in: a. Standalone enclosures. b. Motor control centers. 1 c. Vendor furnished equipment. B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures. b. Section 16010 - Electrical Work, General. c. Section 16444 - Low Voltage Motor Control Center 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16010. B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1 1. 9001 - Quality Management Systems -Requirements. C. Underwriters' Laboratories(UL): 1 1. 508C - Power Conversion Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16010. B. Specific definitions: ' 1. Point of common coupling: the point of common coupling for all harmonic calculation and field measurements for both voltage and current distortions is defined as the closest directly connected panelboard or motor control center bus supplying power to the VFD. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No.6755 16262-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 111 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1 1. Each VFD system consists of all components required to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing, and certification criteria of this Section. 2. The VFD system: a. Is a fully integrated package. b. Includes all material necessary to interconnect all VFD system elements, even if shipped separately. B. Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this Section shall be made only by the VFD manufacturer: 1 1. Each VFD shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled, and then tested as a complete system by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system. 2. The VFD shall be capable of operating standard NEMA Design B motors. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will not damage motor insulation due to high carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dtor other drive electrical characteristics based upon the installed conditions: a. Provide equipment necessary to mitigate potential damage to motor insulation. 3. Operate two identical motors simultaneously in the driven equipment. C. Performance: 1. Operating envelope: a. Speed and torque requirements: 1) Provide a constant torque VFD regardless of the driven load. 2) The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable alternating voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the 40 to 200 percent (25 to 120 hertz) speed range. b. Current requirements: 1) Full rated current output on a continuous basis. 2) Constant torque VFD: a) Minimum 150 percent current overload for 1 minute. b) Minimum continuous rating of 1.16% of motor nameplate full load current. 2. Minimum VFD system efficiency: a. Ninety-six percent. b. VFD system efficiency shall be calculated as follows: Power(Load) Efficiency (%)- x 100 Power(Supply) 1 Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 I Power(Load) is the total power measured at the output terminals of the drive system, including VFD, output filters or transformers. Power(Supply) is the total power measured at the input terminals of the VFD including input filters, line reactors, isolation transformers, harmonic distortion ' attenuation equipment and auxiliary equipment (e.g., controls, fans) for complete system operation. 3. Total power factor: a. Minimum of 0.96 lagging across the entire speed range. b. At no speed shall the VFD have a leading power factor. 4. Frequency accuracy: a. Minimum of within 0.01 percent. 5. Speed regulation: a. Minimum of within 0.5 percent across the entire speed range. 6. Duty Cycle: 6 starts per hour. 7. Speed Range: 34% to 100% full speed, with adjustable minimum and maximum speeds. ' 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01300 and 16010: ' 1. Custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer and specific for the equipment furnished. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of the VFD. 2. Manufacturer of all components of the VFD. 3. Dimensions: a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight. 4. Nameplate schedule. a. Provide in accordance with Section 16075 5. Bill of material, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone, and spare part list with unit price.Bills of material shall include all items within enclosure. a. Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format. 6. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. ' c. Input current. d. Output current. e. Interrupting rating. f. Momentary current rating. ' 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Catalog cut sheets for major components. 9. Design data: a. Efficiency and power factor values. b. Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor horsepower and current of the driven load at the installed altitude and ' ambient temperature. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No. 6550 16262-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 c. Certification that based upon VFD design, cable length to motor, and motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor insulation due to carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD produced characteristics. d. Certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformally coated. 10. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design categoryC, D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 16050: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. C. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. Shop drawings: 1. Complete plan and elevation drawings showing: a. All dimensions. b. Panel, sub-panel and component layout indexed to the bill of material. c. Conduit connections. 2. Block diagram showing the basic control and protection systems specifying the protection, control, trip and alarm functions, the reference signals and commands and the auxiliary devices. 3. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing connections to both internal and external devices: a. Include terminal number and wire numbers. 4. Complete single-line and 3-line diagrams including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, contactors, instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control devices, and other equipment comprising the complete system: a. Clearly indicate device electrical ratings on the drawings. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design categoryA or B: a. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. 3. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050. b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Spare parts list with supplier names and part numbers. 2. Startup and commissioning instructions and data. 3. Operating manuals: a. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under this Contract. 4. Operating instructions: a. Written descriptions detailing the operational functions of all controls on Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262-4 Project No. 6550 KJJ Project No. 1376013*70 the front panel. 5. Maintenance manual: a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as identifying ' all parts. b. Manuals shall include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the initial test, adjustment and start-up procedures. 2) Detailed control instructions which outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation. 3) All schematic wiring and external diagrams: ' a) Furnish drawings in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch format that are fully legible at that size. F. Test reports. G. Manufacturer's field reports: 1. Certification letter from the VFD manufacturer that the VFD(s) has been ' inspected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 2. Report listing the setting of all VFD adjustable parameters and their values after start-up. H. Record Documents: 1. Certified Record Documents of equipment with information listed above. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16010. rB. Qualifications: 1. Any third party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable. 2. VFD systems shall be UL 508C listed and labeled. 3. Variable frequency drives shall be manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at its own facility which shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in conformance with ISO 9001. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Refer to Section 01014 ' B. Prior to issuance of any submittal, manufacturer(not a manufacturer's representative) shall actively participate in a pre-submittal coordination meeting with ' the HVAC Equipment supplier, to be held at the OWNER'S office. Contractor shall coordinate the date and time of the pre-submittal meeting with OWNER, providing no less than 14 days prior notice, and ensure that both the pump and variable frequency drive suppliers will be present simultaneously. C. Submit equipment for review. tDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No.6550 16262-5 q y Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 D. Following approved submittal, conduct internal factory test to ensure that all systems and equipment are functional and submit certified test results for Engineer's review. E. Conduct factory acceptance test. F. Ship equipment to project site after successful completion of factory acceptance test. G. Install equipment in the field. I H. Submit manufacturer's certification that all equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for Engineer's review. I. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineer's review. J. Conduct Owner's training sessions. I K. Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment. 1111.08 WARRANTY A. Supplier shall coordinate warranties for pumps, motors, and drives such that supplier acts as a single point of contact for all warranties B. OWNER shall be listed as recipient of all warranties t C. At no additional charge the Manufacturer shall replace any work or material they have provided which develops defects within 2 years from date of final acceptance of installed equipment by OWNER. 1. Manufacturer's service and repair support during and afterwarranty. 2. Correction of Defective Work: During the warranty period, SUPPLIER shall respond to telephone notification of defective work or equipment malfunction from the OWNER by dispatching a competent authorized representative to the project site within 24 hours. SUPPLIER's representative shall have access to all necessary parties (if necessary) within 24 hours following notification of defective work or equipment malfunction. Repairs and adjustments involving parts shall start within 48 hours of said notification. D. All materials and equipment shall be warranted against defective materials, design and workmanship. E. During the warranty period, the Manufacturer or his authorized dealer is required to make the necessary repairs or replacements on site. F. Warranties which mention that the part must be returned to the factory are not acceptable. G. During the warranty period, the Owner will not accept charges for: 1. Travel time. 111 2. Mileage. 3. Materials 4. On-site repair labor. Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262-6 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 1 H. Warranty shall list any and all items excluded. I. If necessary, as determined by the Owner, any repairs must be made on a premium time basis. 1 1.09 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16080. B. The VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for start up of the VFDs in the presence ' of the equipment suppliers, Contractor, Engineer and Owner. 1.10 COMMISSIONING A. After startup and training has been completed, the VFDs shall be commissioned by the VFD manufacturer: 1. The VFDs shall operate the driven load without failure under normal operating conditions for a period of 30 days. 2. Any failures shall be repaired by the VFD manufacturer. 3. Following repair, the commissioning period shall be restarted.Commissioning shall only be complete once an uninterrupted 30-day period has been ' completed. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Spare parts: 1. The following spare parts shall be furnished: a. One set of all power and control fuses for each VFD. b. One complete main control key pad for each type and rated size of VFD. c. One spare fan for each VFD unit. d. Two sets of ventilation filters for each VFD unit (if applicable in VFD cabinet louvers). e. Any special dedicated tools for emergency service and troubleshooting. f. One set of thyristors or power electronics for each type and rated size of U VFD. g. All hardware and software required for configuration,maintenance, troubleshooting and inquiry of all drive parameters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS IA. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton. ' 2. Allen-Bradley. 3. General Electric. 4. Schneider Electric/Square D. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: tDurham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No. 6550 16262-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 1 1. Sinusoidal pulse width modulated (PWM) type drive. a. Six-pulse insulated gate bipolar transistor(IGBT) power section. b. Microprocessor based controls. c. Line and load reactors. B. Ratings: ' 1. Voltage: a. Input voltage: 480 volts within 10 percent, 3-phase, 60 hertz. C. Operational features: I 1. Protective features: a. Provide the following minimum protective features: 1) Motor overload protection. 2) Instantaneous overcurrent. 3) Instantaneous overvoltage. 4) Undervoltage. 5) Power unit overtemperature. 6) Phase loss. 7) VFD output short circuit. 2. Control mode: a. Operation in either a constant volts/hertz or sensorless vector mode: 1) The control mode selectable using the programming keypad. 3. Frequency control: a. Minimum of 3 selectable skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths. b. Programmable minimum frequency. c. Programmable maximum frequency. 4. Acceleration/deceleration: a. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration rates: 1) Each rate adjustable from 0.01 to 3,600 seconds. 5. Spinning load: a. The VFD shall be capable of determining the speed and direction of a spinning load, "catch" the load and accelerate or decelerate it without damage to the load. 6. Programmable loss of signal: a. Upon loss of speed reference the VFD shall be programmable to either: 1) Stop. 2) Maintain current speed. 3) Default to pre-selected speed. 7. Power interrupt ride-through: a. The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation in the event of a power loss of 5 cycles or less. 8. Inputs/Outputs: a. Manufacturer's standard number of the following: 1) Analog inputs: a) Configurable as either 0 to 10 volts or 4 to 20 milliamperes. 2) Analog outputs: a) Programmable 4 to 20 milliamperes isolated. 3) Discrete inputs: a) Programmable. 4) Discrete outputs: 111 a) Programmable. b) Form C relay contacts. 5) Potentiometer 3-wire input. Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262-8 Project No. 6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 r b. Provide additional inputs/outputs as required to meet the control functions ' indicated on the Drawings. 9. Communications: a. Provide each VFD with a Ethernet communications interface module. b. Auxiliary contacts for remote indication of"Run", "Motor Fail" and "AFD Fail." 1 (I/O shall be communicated via the Ethernet connections specified below.) 10. Diagnostics: a. Store a minimum of 4 fault conditions in non-volatile memory on a first in- first out basis. b. Operational parameters stored at the time of a the fault: 1) Operating frequency. 2) Drive status. 3) Power mode. c. Fault memory accessible via RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485. 11. Automatic restart: a. User selectable automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault: ' 1) Programmable for up to 9 restart attempts. 2) Adjustable time delay between restart attempts. 12. Additional provisions as needed to interface with SCADA control system as shown on the Drawings. 13. Adjustable time delay for delaying motor drive restart after power failure; timer range shall be 0 to 120 seconds; provide module which allows multiple attempts to restart. 14. Provision for automatic emergency shutdown in any mode, actuated by the following: a. Motor thermal protection 15. Any additional abnormal conditions as shown on the Drawings. Provide for manual restart. 16. AFD operable with motor disconnected, in order to test AFD. 17. Linearity and repeatability accuracy of the 3 phase output of 1% of analog input control signal regardless of input power voltage fluctuations between 437 and 505 volts. 18. Independent acceleration and deceleration controls, adjustable from 2 to 30 Hz per second. 19. Separate motor circuit protective device and overload relays for each of two identical motors in the driven equipment. Failure of either motor shall shut down the VFD, as shown on the Drawings. 20. Provide separate load terminals for each of the two motors. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Provide cooling devices . B. Provide front accessible air filters. C. Thermostat controlled air-cooling with a long-life, low noise cooling fans, sized for 1250 percent capacity cooling. D. Provide power and fuse protection for the VFD cooling fans. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No. 6550 16262-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 E. Fans shall start when the VFD power disconnect is in the ON position and be controlled by thermostats in the VFD enclosure. F. Furnished washable filters on ventilation intake openings accessible from the front of the panel. Enclosures that do not have front accessible air filters are not acceptable. I G. Enclosure: 1. Wall mounted. 2. . H. Power disconnect: 1. Flange mounted thermal magnetic circuit breaker. 2. Lockable in the OFF position. I. Reactors: 1. Line reactors: 3 percent input and 3 percent output. J. Keypad: 1. Provide each VFD with a keypad for programming only. a. Control shall be through pilot devices 2. Keypad requirements: a. Password security to protect drive parameters. b. Mounted on the door of the motor control center. c. Back-lit LCD: 1) Minimum of 2 lines with a minimum of 16 characters per line. d. Programming and display features language: English. e. Capable of displaying the following parameters: 1) Speed (percent). 2) Output current(amperes). 3) Output frequency(hertz). 4) Input voltage. 5) Output voltage. 6) Total 3-phase kilowatt. 7) Kilowatt-hour meter. 8) Elapsed run time meter. 9) Revolutions per minute. 10) Direct current bus voltage. 3. In addition to all keys required for programming, provide the following controls on the keypad: a. ON-OFF selector switch. b. Speed control potentiometerRun LED indicator. c. Fault LED indicator. 4. Provide the VFD with the hardwired controls as indicated on the Drawings. K. Control power transformer: 1. Furnish a control power transformer mounted and wired inside the VFD enclosure. 2. With primary and secondary fusing. 3. Sized to power all VFD controls and options as well as any external devices indicated on the Drawings including the motor winding heater. 2.04 ACCESSORIES I Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262-10 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"'70 I A. Metal oxide varistors: 1. Provide protection for the VFD against: a. Line transients: 5,000 volt peak minimum. b. Line to ground transients: 7,000 peak minimum. B. Conformal coating: 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as a protection against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine. 2.05 FINISHES A. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer's standard gray. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. VFDs, factory testing: 1. Tests shall be observed by the OWNER. Tests may be observed by the Electrical ENGINEER and the Project ENGINEER. 2. The OWNER shall bear costs associated with travel for this test including, but not limited to: lodging, meals, travel time, time to witness tests, etc., for up to 3 ' representatives of the OWNER. 3. Costs associated with accommodation of the witness testing at the testing facility shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. 4. The ENGINEER shall be reimbursed by the OWNER for all costs associated with these tests. 5. Control Strategies described in specification 17331 shall be reviewed and understood by supplier prior to commencement of the Factory Test. 6. Provide a certified copy of the test results to the OWNER: a. Include in the results any minor adjustments made during the test. b. If major changes must be made, the test must be repeated. 7. General: a. Incoming inspection of components and raw materials based on strategic supplier base and experience. b. All VFDs furnished under this Section shall be tested and inspected as specified below. Testing of VFDs based on sampling plans is not allowed. c. The testing procedures specified are the minimum acceptable requirements. The manufacturer may perform additional tests at its 1 discretion. 8. Failure of any component during testing requires repair of the faulted component and complete retest. 9. Testing sequence: a. Submit a detailed test procedure for the VFD factory test: 1) A minimum of 8 weeks in advance of the proposed testing date. 2) No tests shall be performed until the test procedure is reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 10. Component tests: a. Preliminary inspection: 1) Verify that all components are correct. 2) Verify that all connections are properly torqued. b. Printed circuit boards: II) Test for correct component placement and value and complete board Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No.6550 16262-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 functional test to ensure proper performance with specified tolerances. 2) Heat cycle test for 48 hours at 60 degrees Celsius. 3) Apply control power to microprocessors, printed circuit boards, diagnostic boards, and similar devices including software to test for proper operation, sequencing, logic, and diagnostics. 4) Test operation of all analog and discrete inputs and outputs. c. Wiring: 1) Control and power wiring continuity verified point-to-point. 2) Hi-pot power and control wiring at manufacturer's recommended levels. 3) Verify ground bond resistance. 111d. Load testing: 1) No load testing in accordance with the manufacturer's standard factory test procedure. 2) Full load testing: a) Test each VFD and a representative motor with the system logic and a dynamometer load to simulate field operation conditions at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent full load current. b) Load test each VFD at a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. (1) Monitor and record temperature rise. (2) Once temperature rise stops continue to operate the VFD for a minimum of 2 hours. (a) If operating temperature exceeds the rated value, repair or replace the VFD and retest. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16010 and Section 16444. , B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. I C. General: 1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other accessories needed to complete the installation of the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center). 2. Assemble and install the VFD in the locations and with the layouts indicated on the Drawings. 3. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. 4. Furnish components and equipment as required to complete the installation. 5. Replace any hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to provide a complete installation. 6. Install free-standing enclosures on 3-1/2 inch raised concrete house keeping pad: a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. b. Weld and/or bolt the VFD frame to the leveling channels. Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262-12 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I 7. Provide openings in top or bottom of the VFD (free-standing or within motor 1 control center) enclosure for conduit only, no additional openings will be allowed: a. Improperly cut holes will require that the entire panel be replaced: 1) No hole closers or patches will be allowed. 8. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit: a. Tie with nylon wire ties. b. Label all wires at each end with wire numbers shown on the approved control drawings. c. All connections to and from the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center) enclosure must be made via terminal blocks. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16010. B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer representative for startup assistance and training: 1. Inspection and field adjustment: a. Supervise the following and submit written certification that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied for operation. 2. Startup field testing: a. Provide technical direction for testing, checkout, and startup of the VFD equipment in the field. b. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative. 3. Following installation and manufacturer's field test, perform a field test under utility operation. Operate the drive from no load to full load and perform a spectrum analysis to verify that the waveform on the line side of the line reactors and filters is in compliance with IEEE 519 for general systems. Submit a complete certified test report for review by the Engineer. If compliance has not been attained, provide additional equipment as specified herein and perform the test again. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, 1 Engineer, or testing firm. B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer factory technician to make all drive parameters and protective device settings: 1. Protective device settings provided by the VFD manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer of the driven equipment requirements. 2. Provide documentation of VFD settings included but not limited to: a. Minimum speed. b. Maximum speed. c. Skip speeds. d. Current limit. e. Acceleration time. f. Deceleration time. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Variable Frequency Drives Project No. 6550 16262-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 1 3.04 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16010. 1 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16010. B. The authorized representative shall instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step by step troubleshooting with test equipment for two (2) Days, with the first half day in classroom setting and the rest with actual equipment furnished. Instructions shall be specific to the VFD models provided in this project. C. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of four (4) weeks in advance of the first session. Training dates and time shall be determined by the OWNER. Training shall include individual sessions for up to ten (10)personnel. 1. Proposed training materials shall be submitted for review a minimum offour (4) weeks in advance, and comments shall be incorporated prior to training. Training materials shall remain with the trainees. The OWNER may videotape the training for later use with the OWNER's personnel. 3.06 PROTECTION i A. As specified in Section 16010. 1 END OF SECTION t I 1 t I 1 I 1 Variable Frequency Drives Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16262- 14 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 r l ISECTION 16412 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Related sections: I1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures. b. Section 16010 - Electrical Work, General. c. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16010. B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. AB 3. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application. C. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): 1. 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit- Breaker Enclosures. 2. 943 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16010. B. In accordance with UL 489. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Molded case thermal magnetic or motor circuit protector type circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and connected to form a completed system. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Project No.6755 16412 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 r 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01300 and 16010. 1 B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Manufacturer's time-current curves for all molded case circuit breakers furnished. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. As specified in Section 16010. B. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled. I 1.07 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16080. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 111 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Schneider Electric/Square D Company. 4. ABB. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS I A. General: 1. Conforming to UL 489. 2. Operating mechanism: a. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts. b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles open and close simultaneously. c. Mechanically trip free from the handle. d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped. e. Lockable in the "OFF" position. 3. Arc extinction: a. In arc chutes. 111 4. Voltage and current ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum frame size 100A. 5. Interrupting ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Modify as required to meet requirements of the short circuit fault analysis-as specified in Section 16305. c. Not less than the rating of the assembly (panelboard, switchboard, motor control center, etc.) Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16412-2 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I IB. Motor circuit protectors: 1. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor Icontroller. 2. Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with `LO' and 'HI' settings factory calibrated. I2.03 COMPONENTS A. Terminals: I1. Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of conductors in accordance with UL 489. 1 B. Case: 1. Molded polyester glass reinforced. 2. Ratings clearly marked. C. Trip units: 1. Provide thermal magnetic or solid-state trip units as indicated on the Drawings. 2. 1111 Thermal magnetic: a. Instantaneous short circuit protection. b. Inverse time delay overload. c. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element. 3. Solid state: a. With the following settings as indicated on the Drawings. 1) Adjustable long time current setting. 2) Adjustable long time delay. 3) I Adjustable short time pickup. 4) Adjustable short time delay. 5) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. I 6) Adjustable ground fault pickup as indicated on the Drawings. 7) Adjustable ground fault delay as indicated on the Drawings. I D. Molded case circuit breakers for use in panelboards: 1. Bolt-on type. a. Plug-in type breakers are not acceptable. 2. Ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings. 1 2.04 ACCESSORIES I A. Lockable handle: 1. Provide assembly to lock operating handle in `OPEN' position. 2. Where a molded case circuit breaker is located in a dedicated enclosure, provide a lockable handle. Reference the Electrical Specifications for I additional locking requirements associated with other mounting installations. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL IA. Test breakers in accordance with: 1. UL 489. I2. Manufacturer's standard testing procedures. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Project No. 6755 16412-3 Permit Set KA) Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install breakers to correspond to the accepted shop drawings. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. As specified in Section 16010. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study as accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturer's I recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor. 3.04 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16010. END OF SECTION 1 I 1 I I 1 I Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16412-4 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I I SECTION 16422 MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1 1. Motor starters and contactors. B. Related sections: 1 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only 1 and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures. b. Section 01650 - Commissioning and Startup. c. Section 16010- Electrical Work, General. d. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification. e. Section 16120— Conductors. f. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. g. Section 16444 - Low Voltage Motor Control Centers. 1 1.02 REFERENCES A. As specified in Section 16010. B. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): 1. 60 947-4 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear. 1 2. 801-1 - Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial-Process Measurement and Control Equipment- Part 1: General Information. C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1 1. ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V. 1 D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 508A- Standard for Industrial Control Panels. 1 1.03 DEFINITIONS Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Motor Starters Project No. 6755 16422-1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I A. As specified in Section 16010. B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. FVNR: Full voltage non-reversing. 2. Overload relay class: A classification of an overload relay time current characteristic by means of a number which designates the maximum time in seconds at which it will operate when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its current rating. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. General requirements: 1. Starters for motor control centers, individual enclosed starters, or control panels. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01300 and 16010: 1. Submit motor starter data with equipment submittal. B. Product data: I 1. Manufacturer. 2. Catalog cut sheets. 3. Technical information. 4. Complete nameplate schedule. 5. Complete bill of material. 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Confirmation that the overload relay class for each starter meets the requirements of the equipment and motor supplier. 8. Electrical ratings: a. Phase. b. Wire. c. Voltage. d. Ampacity. e. Horsepower. 9. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412. C. Shop drawings: 111 1. Elementary and schematic diagrams: a. Provide 1 diagram for every starter and contactor. b. Indicate wire numbers for all control wires on the diagrams: 1) Wire numbering as specified in Section 16075. c. Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the drawings. D. Installation instructions: 1. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring Motor Starters Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16422-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050. b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of equipment furnished or installed under this Section. Including but not limited to: a. Electrical ratings: 1) Phase. 2) Wire. 3) Voltage. 4) Ampacity. b. Complete bill of material. c. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions starter and/or contactor component parts, including: 1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater elements, etc.). 2) Pilot devices. d. Complete renewal parts list. e. As-built drawings: 1) Furnish as-built drawings for each starter and contactor indicating final: a) Wire numbers. b) Interfaces with other equipment. 2) 11-inch by 17-inch format. F. Certifications: 1. Provide manufacturer's certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformally coated. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16010. B. Regulatory requirements: 1. All starters and components shall be UL listed and labeled: a. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. b. UL 508A- Industrial Control Panels. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and System Controllers; Contactors and Overload Relays Rated: 600 Volts. 3. Combination starters shall be UL listed and labeled. 1 1.07 SYSTEM START-UP A. As specified in Section 16080. 1.08 MAINTENANCE Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Motor Starters Project No.6755 16422-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 I I A. Spare parts: 1. Provide the following spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the corresponding equipment number: a. One spare fuse of each size and type per starter. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1 1. NEMA starters and contactors: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Schneider Electric/Square D. c. General Electric. d. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. General: 1. Provide combination type starters with motor circuit protector or thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and control power transformer with ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. NEMA size, design, and rated: a. NEMA Size 1 minimum: 3. Coordinate motor circuit protector, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or fusible disconnect, and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and current ratings of the installed motor: a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide starters coordinated to the actual motors furnished. 4. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking contacts. 5. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without opening starter enclosure door. B. Full voltage starters (FVNR): 1. Across-the-line full voltage magnetic starters. 2. Rated for 600 volts. 3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Provide positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, pad lockable enclosure doors. 5. Furnish starter with bi-metallic or solid state electronic overload relays. 6. Double-break silver alloy contacts. 7. Reversing starters provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocks to prevent line shorts and energizing both contactors simultaneously. I 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Molded case circuit breakers: j 1. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Motor Starters Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16422-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 2. Provide as specified in Section 16412. B. Contactors: 1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrically held: a. For lighting loads designed to withstand the initial inrush currents of ballast and lamp loads. 3. Factory adjusted and chatter free. 4. Auxiliary contacts: a. Contact ratings as per NEMA A 600 rating: 1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amps at 600 volts. b. Provide all contacts indicated on the Drawings, and any additional contacts required for proper operation. c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary contact. 5. Constructed in accordance with the following standards: a. UL 508. b. IEC 947-4. 1) Type 1 coordination when protected by a circuit breaker. 2) Type 2 coordination when protected by a suitable UL listed fuse. c. IEC 801-1 parts 2 through 6. C. Overloads: 1. Bi-metallic overload relay: a. Class 20 protection. b. Ambient compensated. c. Interchangeable heater pack: 1) One heater per phase. 2) Coordinate with installed motor full load amps and service factor. d. Visible trip indicator. e. Push-to-trip test. f. Isolated normally open alarm contact. g. Normally closed trip contacts. h. Manual reset. 2. Solid state electronic: a. Selectable Class 10, 20, 30 protection. b. Ambient insensitive: 1) Operating temperature: -20 to 70 degrees Celsius. c. Thermal memory. d. Protective functions: II) Motor overcurrent. 2) Phase unbalance (adjustable.) 3) Phase loss. 4) Ground fault protection. e. Self-powered. f. Provide current transformers for metering of motor current. g. Visible trip indicator. h. Push-to-trip test. i. Isolated normally open alarm contact. j. Normally closed trip contact. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Motor Starters Project No.6755 16422-5 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I k. Manual reset. D. Control power transformer: 1. Furnish integral control power transformer capacity to power: a. All motor controls indicated on the Drawings. b. Motor winding heaters, through a normally closed auxiliary contact on the starter. 2. Primary and secondary fusing as indicated on the Drawings: a. Fusing sized by the manufacturer for the rating of the transformer furnished. 3. Control power transformer secondary voltage: a. 120 VAC. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Lugs and terminals: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG and larger. 2. UL listed for either copper or aluminum conductors. B. Surge protective devices: 1. Furnish surge protection devices across the coil of each starter, contactor, and relay. C. Pilot devices: 1 1. Provide pilot lights, switches, elapsed time meters, and other devices as specified or as indicated on the Drawings. D. Nameplates and wire markers: 1. As specified in Section 16075. E. Conformal coating: I 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as protection against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16010. I B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site. C. Starters in motor control centers: 1. Install as specified in Section 16444. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. As specified in Section 16010. Motor Starters Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16422-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 i I I3.03 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. B. Set all overloads and motor circuit protectors based on the nameplate I values of the installed motor. 3.04 CLEANING IA. As specified in Section 16010. I3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16010. IB. Demonstrate operation of equipment as specified in Section 01650: 1. Demonstrate the operation of every motor starter to the Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction. IC. Training: 1. Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative for training purposes. 111 3.06 PROTECTION I A. As specified in Section 16010. IIIEND OF SECTION I I I I I I 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Motor Starters Project No. 6755 16422-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I SECTION 16444 ILOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY IA. Section includes: 1. Low voltage motor control centers. IB. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. I2. It is the Contractor's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor's Work. I 3. The following sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of related sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the I completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures. b. Section 16010 - Electrical Work, General. c. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification. d. Section 16120 - Conductors. e. Section 16262 -Variable Frequency Drives 0.50-50 Horsepower. f. Section 16305 - Electrical System Studies. I g. Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers. h. Section 16422 - Motor Starters. 1.02 REFERENCES I A. As specified in Section 16010. I B. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 18-2001 - Motor Control Centers. IC. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 845 - Motor Control Centers. D. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Publication: I 1. ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment and Systems I1.03 DEFINITIONS A. As specified in Section 16010. I I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Project No. 6755 16444- 11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I I 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Factory assembled, factory wired and factory tested motor control centers: 1. Motor control centers and major components to be products of a single manufacturer including, but not limited: I a. Starters. b. VFD. c. Related equipment specified in the Contract Documents or indicated on the Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01300 and 16010. 1 B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of motor control center. 2. Manufacturer of motor control center parts. 3. Nameplate schedule. 4. Bill of material. 5. Enclosure: 111 a. NEMA rating. b. Finish color. 6. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Current: 1) Horizontal bus ampacity. 2) Vertical bus ampacity. 3) Ground bus ampacity. I d. Short circuit withstand rating. e. Protective device interrupting rating. 7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Catalog cut sheets: III a. Submit complete manufacturer's catalog information: 1) Clearly indicate the features of the equipment including any options necessary to meet the required functionality. 9. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412. 10. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 16010: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. C. Shop drawings: 1. Layout drawings: a. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale layout drawings which include: 1) Dimensions: a) Overall length. b) Overall width. c) Overall height. d) Overall weight and weight of individual shipping splits. Low Voltage Motor Control Center Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16444-12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 1 2. Interfaces to other equipment. 3. Shipping splits. 4. Allowable top and bottom conduit windows. 5. Complete component and unit layout drawings. 6. Indicate lug sizes, type, and manufacturer based on the cable size specified in ' the Contract Documents and as indicated on the Drawings. 7. Elementary schematics: a. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment: 1) Include all remote devices. 2) Show wire numbers on the schematics: a) Provide wire numbering as specified in Section 16075. 8. External connection diagram showing the wiring to the external controls and devices associated with the motor control center. 9. One-line diagrams: a. Provide complete one-line diagrams for each motor control center, including but not limited to: protective devices, starters, drives, metering, and other equipment. b. Indicate electrical ratings of the equipment shown on the one-line diagrams. D. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. 3. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050. b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Provide complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for care and maintenance of all types of equipment furnished and/or installed under this Section. Include the following: a. Electrical ratings: 1) Phase. 2) Wire. 3) Voltage. 4) Ampacity. 5) Bus bracing and protective device interrupting ratings. b. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions for the motor control center and all component parts, including: 1) Starters. 2) Overload relays and heater elements. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Project No. 6755 16444- 11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I 3) Variable frequency drives. 4) Protective devices including, but not limited to, fuses, circuit breakers and protective relays. 5) Pilot devices. c. Complete renewal parts list. F. Record Documents: 1. Elementary schematics: a. Furnish as-built elementary schematics indicating final: 1) Wire numbers. 111 2) Interfaces with other equipment. b. Provide one custom schematic diagram for each compartment: 1) Include all remote devices. 2) Show wire numbers on the schematics. c. Layout drawings: Provide complete dimensioned component and unit layout drawings. 2. The Record Documents shall reflect all modifications made during the submittal review process and during construction. G. Calculations: I 1. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the motor control center to prove the motor control center is suitable for the seismic requirements at the Project Site. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. As specified in Section 16010. B. All portions of the motor control center, vertical bays, and components shall be UL listed and labeled. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Conduct the initial fault current study as specified in Section 16305 and submit results for Engineer's review. B. After successful review of the initial fault current study, submit complete equipment submittal as specified in the Submittals article of this Section for Engineer's review. C. Conduct internal factory test to ensure that systems and equipment are functional and submit certified test results for Engineer's review. D. Conduct factory acceptance test, to be witnessed by Owner and Owner's representative. E. Ship equipment to the Project Site after successful completion of factory acceptance test. I F. Assemble equipment in the field. G. Conduct field acceptance test and submit results for Engineer's review. I Low Voltage Motor Control Center Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16444-12 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 I I H. Submit manufacturer's certification that the equipment has been properly installed and is fully functional for Engineer's review. I. Conduct Owner's training sessions. J. Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment. 1.08 SYSTEM START-UP IA. As specified in Section 16080. 111 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton 111 2. Allen-Bradley 3. General Electric. 4. Schneider Electric/Square D. 2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS A. Existing motor control centers: I1. Provide complete motor control center vertical sections or individual motor control center units to be added to existing motor control centers as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Drawings. I 2. Provide additions that are of the same manufacturer, type, rating, and color as the existing motor control centers: a. Provide all hardware necessary to connect the busses of the new and existing motor control centers, including ground and neutral busses. 3. Provide enclosures to match the NEMA ratings and colors of the existing motor control centers. 4. The Electrical Schematics are based on Ethernet wiring between the MCC and the SCADA Control System for AFDs. Provide a single Ethernet network in each MCC shown on the Drawings. a. Per the National Electrical Code the Ethernet cable shall have an insulating rating equal to at least the maximum circuit voltage applied to any conductor within the enclosure or raceway, i.e., no special separation, barriers, or internal conduit shall be required for the Ethernet conductors. b. The Ethernet cable used to connect a Ethernet unit to a Ethernet port in the vertical wireway shall be round cable rated 8 amperes, 600V, Class 1. c. The addition or removal of a unit from the Ethernet system shall not interrupt I the operation of other units within the system. d. The Ethernet cables shall be routed through the center of the MCC line-up, behind barriers that isolate the cables from the unit space and wireways I to prevent accidental mechanical damage during MCC installation. e. Six Ethernet ports shall be provided in the rear of each vertical wireway to simplify installation, relocation, and addition of plug-in MCC units. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Project No.6755 16444 11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I IJ I 5. Ethernet power supplies, and system performance: a. The MCC manufacturer shall ensure adequate power supplies are installed to conform to Ethernet requirements. b. The Ethernet system shall be designed to operate at not less than 10 Mbps. c. Configure all Ethernet devices supplied in the MCC prior to completion of MCC installation. d. Configuration includes motor load data, Ethernet node addressing, module I/O configuration and communication setup. 2.03 EQUIPMENT I A. General: 1. Furnish motor control centers as specified in the Contract Documents and indicated on the Drawings. 2. Arrange the equipped sections side by side and/or back-to-back to form continuous motor control center lineups as indicated on the Drawings: a. Identify any deviations from the Drawings in writing and submit for approval. 3. Provide wire markers at each end of every wire as specified in Section 16075. 4. Provide complete and functional motor control centers. 5. Provide devices or accessories not specified in this Section but necessary for the proper installation and operation of the equipment. 6. Provide new components of the latest construction series available from the manufacturer. B. Design and construct motor control center to operate at the voltage level and configuration indicated on the Drawings. C. Bus system: 1. Material: a. Tin-plated copper. b. Short-circuit rating: 1) As indicated on the Drawings. c. Bus bar supports: 1) High impact strength, non-tracking glass-polyester material that is impervious to moisture and gases. 2. Horizontal power bus: a. Current-carrying capacity as indicated on the Drawings. b. Mounting: 1) Mount horizontal bus bars edgewise, one above the other, and fully isolated from all wireways and units. c. Temperature rise: 1) In accordance with UL 845. 1 2) De-rate the temperature rating of the bus for the specified conditions of ambient temperature and altitude as specified in Section 16050. 3. Vertical power bus: a. Current-carrying capacity of not less than 300 amps. b. Mounting: 1) Enclose the vertical bus in a polyester-glass cover with small openings to permit unit stabs to mate with the bus: a) Provide a shutter mechanism to cover the stab openings when Low Voltage Motor Control Center Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16444- 12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I 1 plug-in units are removed. 2) Provide top and bottom bus covers for insulation and isolation of the ends of the bus. c. Isolated from the unit compartments by a full height barrier. 4. Ground bus: a. Horizontal ground bus: 1) Current-carrying capacity of not less than 300 amps. 2) Mounting: a) Full-width, firmly secured to each vertical section structure: (1) Located in the top or bottom wireway. b) Pre-drilled and furnished with lugs for connection to equipment ground wires: (1) Furnish a minimum of 10 lugs per vertical section of MCC. b. Vertical ground bus. 1) Mounting: a) Furnish in each vertical section. b) Bolted to the horizontal ground bus. c) Install parallel to the vertical power bus. ' d) Mount vertical ground bus such that plug-in units engage the ground bus before any connection to the power bus is made. Upon removal of plug-in units, ground stabs are disconnected from the ground bus after the power stabs have been disconnected. 5. Bus splice bars: a. Provided to join the bus at the splits. b. Connected to each horizontal bus bar with a minimum of two bolts. c. Employ conical or spring washers at connections, designed to maintain constant pressure against the splice joint. ' d. Same ampacity rating as the horizontal bus. 6. Provide bus system configured for back-to-back MCCs, where required. D. Enclosures: 1. Each motor control center shall consist of 1 or more vertical sections bolted together: a. Freestanding. b. Totally enclosed. c. Dead front assembly. d. Designed for modification and/or addition of future vertical sections. e. Form each vertical section of heavy gauge steel. f. Designed for back-to-back arrangement installation, where required and/or as indicated on the Drawings. 111 2. Enclosure rating: a. Indoor: 1) NEMA Type 1 gasketed. 3. Standard section dimensions: a. Nominal height: 90 inches. b. Nominal depth: 20 inches. c. Vertical section width as indicated on the Drawings. ' 4. Wireways: a. Provide each vertical section with a horizontal wireway at the top and I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Project No.6755 16444- 11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 bottom of the section: 1) Arranged to provide a full-width metal enclosed wiring trough across the entire motor control center assembly. b. Provide each vertical section with a full-height vertical wireway. c. Completely isolated from the vertical and horizontal bus bars. d. Provide a removable, hinged door. 5. Shipping splits: a. No more than 3 vertical sections and not more than 60 inches in width. b. Solid bussing between vertical sections in a shipping split is not acceptable. 6. Lifting angles: a. Furnish each vertical section and/or shipping split with a removable lifting angle mounted to the top of the enclosure: 1) Extending the entire width of the shipping split. 7. Mounting channels: a. Mount each vertical section and/or shipping split on an external 1.5-inch by 3-inch mounting channel. E. Units: 1. A plug-in unit consists of: a. Unit assembly. b. Unit support pan. c. Unit door assembly. 2. Completely enclosed and isolated from adjacent units, buses, and wireways, except for conductor entries into the unit, by a metal enclosure. 3. Constructed so that any fault will be contained in the unit compartment. 4. Supported and guided by a removable unit support pan: a. Re-arrangement of units and the removal of a unit so that a new and possibly larger unit can be added without the removal of an in-service unit to gain access to the unit support pan. 5. Held in place by screws or other positive locking means after insertion. 6. Provide a test position with the unit supported in the structure but disengaged from the bus. 7. Integral plug-in ground stab. 8. Stabs: a. Free floating. b. Self-aligning. c. Backed by spring steel clips to ensure high pressure contacts: d. Electrolytically tin-plated copper. 9. Handle: a. Provide a flange mounted handle mechanism to operate each disconnect switch or circuit breaker. b. Door mounted operators or operator handles are not acceptable. c. Engaged with the disconnect device at all times as an integral part of the unit independent of the door position. d. Lockable in the "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks. e. Mechanically interlocked so that the door cannot be opened with the handle in the"ON" position. 1) Provide a means for qualified personnel to defeat this interlock. f. Interlocked so the unit cannot be inserted or withdrawn with the handle in the "ON" position. Low Voltage Motor Control Center Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16444-12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 g. Lockable in the "ON" position: ' 1) This shall not prevent the circuit breaker from operating and opening the contacts in the event of a fault condition. h. Color-coded to indicate position. i. Located so the center of the grip when it is in its highest position is not ' more than 6 feet 7 inches above the finished floor, including the height of the housekeeping pad and mounting channels. 10. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide units for spaces and future equipment: a. Equip these units to accept a future plug-in unit without modification to the vertical sections. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Provide components contained within the motor control center as specified in: ' 1. Section 16075. 2. Section 16120. 3. Section 16262. 4. Section 16412. 5. Section 16422. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Wiring: 1. Wire the motor control center in accordance with the following NEMA Class ' and Type as defined by NEMA ICS 18-2001: a. NEMA Class II-S: 1) Furnish wiring diagrams for individual units consisting of drawings ' that identify electrical devices, electrical connections, and indicate terminal numbering designations. 2) Furnish individual unit diagrams with each unit and include inter- wiring between units, i.e. electrical interlocking, etc., as specifically specified in the Contract Documents. 3) Provide custom drawings with unique terminal numbering designations in lieu of standard manufacturer drawings. ' b. NEMA Type B wiring: 1) Control wiring: a) Type B-T pull-apart terminal blocks. ' 2) Power wiring: a) Type B-T for Size 1 starters. b) Type B-T or B-D for Size 2 and 3 starters. c) Type B for Size 4 and larger starters and feeder units. 2. All wiring entirely within the motor control center shall be completely factory installed and shall be thermoplastic machine tool wiring rated 600 volts. B. Lugs and terminals: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG wire or larger: a. UL listed for copper or aluminum conductors. ' 2. Compression type, requiring a hydraulic press and die for installation. 3. Provide 20 percent spare control block terminals. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Project No. 6755 16444-11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 C. Nameplates: 1. Provide nameplates as specified in Section 16075: a. Identifying the motor control center designation as indicated on the Drawings. b. On each cubicle door in the motor control center, provide an identifying nameplate inscribed as shown on the Drawings. c. In those cases where integral legend plates cannot be used, install additional special nameplates on doors to identify selector switches, pushbuttons or other devices, as required by the Drawings or as specified herein. All integral legend plates shall be uniform for all doors. 2. Identifying each vertical section: ' a. Mounted and centered on the top horizontal wireway of the vertical section. 3. Furnish individual nameplates for each unit indicated on the Drawings: a. 1 nameplate to identify the unit designation. b. 1 nameplate to identify the load served. c. Furnish space units with blank nameplates. 4. Manufacturer's labels: a. Furnish each vertical section with a label identifying: 1) Serial number. 2) Bus rating. 3) Vertical section reference number. 4) Date of manufacture. 5) Catalog number of section. D. Pilot devices: a. Provide 30mm size for all pilot devices. b. Provide LED push to test for all pilot lights. 2.06 FINISHES A. Finish metal surfaces and structural parts with phosphatizing, or equal,treatment before painting. B. Finish interior surfaces including bus support angles, control unit back plates,and ' top and bottom barrier plates with baked white enamel. C. Finish exterior of enclosure with manufacturer's standard gray. ' D. Paint finish shall be ANSI 61 and the dry film thickness shall be not less than 3 mils. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. As specified in Section 16010. 1 B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and Low Voltage Motor Control Center Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16444-12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 I Ianchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project I site. C. General: 1. Furnish all cables, conduit, lugs, bolts, expansion anchors, sealants, and other accessories necessary to completely install the motor control center for the line, load, and control connections. 2. Assemble and install the motor control center in the locations and with the I I I layouts as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Make bus splice connections. 4. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instruction and shop drawings. 5. Furnish all components, and equipment necessary to complete the installation. 6. Replace hardware, lost or damaged during installation or handling, in order to provide a complete installation. 7. Install the MCC on a 3-1/2-inch raised concrete housekeeping pad: a. Provide structural leveling channels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide proper alignment of the units. II)' Remove the manufacturer's supplied mounting channels as required by the manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Weld and/or bolt the motor control center frame to leveling channels. D. Provide openings in the top or bottom of the motor control center for conduit only. 1. No additional openings will be accepted: a. Mis-cut holes will require that the entire vertical section or removable panel be replaced. b. No hole closers or patches will be accepted. I II E. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit: 1. Tie with nylon wire ties as specified in Section 16120. 2. Label all wires at each end with wire markers as specified in Section 16075 as shown on the approved elementary schematics. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I II.IIA. As specified in Section 16010. B. Provide the services of a manufacturer's representative to: Inspect, verify, and certify that the motor control center installation meets the manufacturer's requirements. C. Test the motor control center per NETA. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Project No.6755 16444-11 Permit K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I 1 111 3.04 CLEANING A. As specified in Section 16010. , 3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. As specified in Section 16010. B. Demonstrate the operation of the motor control center to the Engineer's and Owner's satisfaction. C. Training: 1. Provide training for motor control center components as specified in the individual component specifications. 3.06 PROTECTION A. As specified in Section 16010. END OF SECTION I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 Low Voltage Motor Control Center Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 16444-12 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 1 I I ISECTION 17050 BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION IMATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This Section includes general design, material, equipment fabrication, calibration, testing, commissioning, training, and documentation requirements I for instrumentation and control systems. 2. Additional or more stringent requirements, when given in other Sections, shall prevail. I1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Ii. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. B. American National Standards Institute/American Petroleum Institute (ANSI/API): 1. API RP550- Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control I Systems. 2. ANSI/API 551-1992 - Process Measurement Instrumentation. I C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. ID. International Society for Measurement and Control (ISA): 1. ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2. ISA S5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display IInstrumentation, Logic and Computer Systems. 3. ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 4. ISA S5.5- Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. I 5. ISA RP7.1 - Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test. 6. ISA S7.3 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. 7. ISA S12.4 - Instrument Purging for Reduction of Hazardous Area Classification. I 8. ISA S18.1 -Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 9. ISA S20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. I 10. ISA S51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology. 11. ISA RP60.3- Human Engineering for Control Centers. 12. ISA S71.04- Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control ISystems: Airborne Contaminants. E. Milspec: 1. MIL-I-46058C - Electrical Insulating Compound. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-1 Permit Set IIIKJJ Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 F. National Manufacturers (NEMA): I 1. NEMAElectrical 250- Enclosures for ElectricalAssociation Equipment(1,000 volts maximum). G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70- National Electric Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 496- Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 3. NFPA 820- Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities. H. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA): 1. SAMA PMC-5 - Resistance Thermometers. 2. SAMA PMC-6 - Filled System Thermometers. 3. SAMA PMC-8 -Thermocouple Thermometers. 4. SAMA PMC-17 - Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing Elements. I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1 1. UL 508- Industrial Control Equipment. 1.03 DEFINITIONS I A. Where a term is used in Division 17 relating to instrumentation, and the meaning is not defined therein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the meaning of the term shall be as defined in ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology, or if not contained in ISA 51.1, as defined in listed reference standards under"References". B. Control Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at 80 volts AC or DC or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. I C. PAT: 1. Performance Acceptance Test. D. Panel: 1. An instrument support system, which may be either a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term "panel" in these Contract Documents shall be interpreted as a general term, which includes flat panels, enclosures, cabinets,and consoles. , E. Power Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at 80 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device. F. SCADA: 1. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. G. Signal Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at less than 80 volts AC or DC. Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 H. Two-Wire Transmitter: 1. A transmitter, which derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and therefore requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this Specification, two-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter, which provides a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulation of signal in a series circuit with an external 24 volt direct current driving potential and a ' maximum external circuit resistance of 600 ohms. I. WAN: 1. Wide Area Network. ' 1.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Overview: 1. Work on this project includes instrumentation and control work, as required, to support the installation of new Odor Control systems and related systems in the Solids Building. 2. The Odor Control and related systems includes three makeup air units, five exhaust fans, one supply fan, one air conditioning system and associated instrumentation. 3. Cooling for the electrical rooms is provided by room exhaust fans at lower outside temperatures. Air Conditioning Units providecooling when the outside air is not cool enough to maintain the room temperature. ' 4. Refer to Section 17331 for Control Descriptions. B. Work Includes: 1. Instrumentation and control work shall include, but not be limited to, field ' instrumentation and controls, control panel installation and wiring, testing, documentation, and related items. The CONTRACTOR shall take receipt of the PLC panel from the OWNER at the project site, install the PLC panel as shown on the Drawings and land for field wiring terminations in the PLC panel. Installation of the PLC panel includes refurbishment of the equipment curb as specified on the Drawings. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, through the services of a qualified l&C Subcontractor, a complete and functioning control system. The l&C Subcontractor shall be responsible for all control work, except as excluded in this paragraph. See paragraph 1.07B for qualifications. 3. Work by Others-The OWNER shall provide the PLC Control panel, PLC I/O cards, wiring between the I/O cards and filed terminals, and application programming for the PLC and the SCADA workstations.. 4. Programming and configuration of the Adjustable Frequency Drives shall be by CONTRACTOR. Refer to Section 16262. C. Field testing of the control programs shall be performed per Section "3.02 Field Quality Control." 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS jA. Review other Sections and Divisions of the Contract Documents for full compliance with the total Contract Documents. In the event of a conflict between Sections, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly seek clarification from the ENGINEER. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No. 6755 17050-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 B. Unless different requirements are clearly specified or shown elsewhere, instrumentation and control design, materials, equipment, installation, and testing 1 shall comply with the requirements of Division 16. C. Completeness: 1. Provide a complete and fully functional instrumentation and control system ready for use. 2. Components which are not identified on the Drawings and Specifications, but necessary to meet the full functional operation and performance requirements, shall be provided. 3. Equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, and instructions and recommendations of the related equipment manufacturer. D. Connections and Appurtenances: 1. The instrumentation and control systems shall include all necessary connections to sources of electrical power, air, water, drains, vents, all required valves, switches, and accessories, as specified or as recommended for best operation by the manufacturer of the equipment furnished. 2. All necessary mounting panels, stands, hangers, and brackets shall be furnished and installed and shall comply with the relevant Sections of these Specifications. I E. Coordination: 1. Systems and equipment provided under this Section shall be designed and coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and materials provided under other Sections of these Specifications, and where applicable, under other referenced contracts, and with identified existing equipment. 2. Coordinate all aspects of the Work between CONTRACTOR and all subcontractors before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the CONTRACTOR, the System Supplier, the other subcontractors or suppliers. F. Control Functions: 1. Control functions are provided in Section 17331, Control Descriptions. G. Instrument Tagging: 1. All field mounted instruments shall be provided with stainless steel tags stamped or engraved with the instrument's full tag number. Tags shall be affixed with stainless steel wire fasteners. 2. All back of panel instruments shall be provided with black-white-black plastic laminate nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number. Nameplates shall be secured to the panel with stainless steel screws. 3. All front of panel instruments shall include the instrument's full tag number and service description in the nameplate legend. Unless it is part of the instrument, the nameplate shall be engraved black-white-black plastic laminate, secured with stainless steel screws. H. Equipment Locations: I 1. The monitoring and control system configurations are diagrammatic. The locations of the equipment are approximate. The exact locations and routing of Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-4 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical I interference and by the electrical terminations on the equipment. 2. Equipment shall be located and installed so that it is readily accessible for operations and maintenance, but does not obstruct the removal of equipment. I 3. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in approximated locations and arrangements, or when the OWNER exercises the right to require changes in location of equipment which do not impact material quantities or I cause material rework, the CONTRACTOR shall make such changes without additional cost to the OWNER. I. Documentation to be provided: 1. All aspects of the instrumentation and control systems design shall be fully documented, and subsequently revised to conform with the "As-Built" installation. I 2. The numbering of all instruments, equipment, terminal blocks, conductors, and cables shall be shown on all related documents. 3. Where an existing installation is subject to minor modifications, a comprehensive upgrade of existing documentation may satisfy the I documentation requirements; however, prior acceptance by the ENGINEER shall be obtained. 1 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. General: I 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 2. Submittal data shall be grouped in a logical manner to facilitate review of subsystems and each submittal shall be substantially complete. Individual I drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals shall not be accepted for review. 3. Incomplete submittals shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR without the ENGINEER's review and without contract time extension. I 4. Design Data submittals shall be reviewed and returned with resubmittal not required, before fabrication is started. 5. All panel drawings and loop drawings shall be produced with latest version of I AutoCAD software. 6. Variations: A notice of variation shall be included in any submittal deviating from the plans or Specifications. 7. Hardware submittals shall be provided within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed. IB. Pre-submittal Conference: 1. The ENGINEER shall arrange and conduct a Presubmittal Conference within I 60 days after award of the Contract. The purpose of the Presubmittal Conference is to review and approve the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to carry out its responsibilities for Shop Drawing submittal on the I WORK to be provided under this Section. The CONTRACTOR, the Instrumentation Supplier, and the ENGINEER shall attend. Both the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER may invite additional parties at their discretion. I 2. The CONTRACTOR shall allot one, 4-hour half day for the Conference. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall present the following for discussion at the Conference: I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-5 Permit Set 1 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I a. A list of equipment and materials required for the PCIS and the manufacturer's name and model number for each proposed item. See I Division 01300. b. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Documents along with a brief explanation of each. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the ENGINEER. c. An exact one-to-one sample of each type of submittal herein, including control loop drawings, as described in Project-Wide Wiring Drawing I Submittal. d. A flow chart showing the steps to be taken in preparing and coordinating each submittal to the ENGINEER. e. A bar-chart type schedule for all system related activities from the I Presubmittal Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design, fabrication, programming (by others), factory testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same schedule. f. An overview of the proposed training plan. The OWNER's staff and ENGINEER will review the overview and may request changes. All changes to the proposed training shall be resolved at the pre-submittal conference. The overview shall include the following for each proposed I course. 1) Course title and objectives. 2) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. Il 3) Course content- a topical outline. 4) Course duration. 5) Course format- lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc. ' 4. Provide all items to be discussed at the Pre-submittal Conference for review to the ENGINEER and OWNER a minimum 14 days prior to the Pre-submittal Conference. I 5. The ENGINEER shall take minutes of the Conference, including all events, questions, and resolutions. Prior to adjournment, all parties shall concur with the accuracy of the minutes and sign accordingly. C. Schedule of Values: I 1. Purpose: Supplements the overall Project Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule to provide a basis for partial payment for Work completed. 2. Content: Summary of major Milestones and associated partial payments for Work provided under PICS Subsystems. 3. Requests for partial payment shall be considered providing: a. Milestone activity is completed in accordance with criteria in paragraph Activity Completion. b. Prerequisite activities are completed in accordance with criteria in paragraph Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times, and in conformance with Progress Schedule. 111 D. Product Data: 1. General: a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings. I Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-6 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 137601370 I b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed ' material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications. c. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. ' 5) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification section, and paragraph. 6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being furnished. d. Legibly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to be supplied. 1 2. Material and Equipment Schedules: a. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and instruments that are proposed. b. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, such other information required to identify the items. 3. Instrument Data Sheets and Cut Sheets: a. Partially completed data sheets are provided at the end of each instrument specification. The Contractor shall use the Specifications and Drawings to complete the Instrument Data Sheets. 1) The partially completed data sheets are not intended to be used as a take off list. The Contractor shall provide instruments as indicated on the drawings. b. Furnish fully completed data sheets, both electronically in Microsoft Word or Excel and in hardcopy, for each instrument and component according to ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. The data sheets provided with the instrument specifications are preliminary and are not complete. They are provided to assist with the completion of final instrument data sheets. Additional data sheets may be required. Include the following information on the data sheet: 1) Component functional description used herein and on the Drawings. 2) Manufacturers model number or other product designation. 3) Tag number used herein and on the Drawings. 4) System or loop of which the component is a part. 5) Location or assembly at which the component is to be installed. 6) Input and output characteristics. 7) Scale range with units and multiplier. ' 8) Requirements for electric supply. 9) Requirements for air supply. 10) Power consumption. 11) Response timing. 12) Materials of construction and of component parts that are in contact with, or otherwise exposed to, process media, and or corrosive ambient air. 13) Special requirements or features, such as specifications for ambient operating conditions. 14) Features and options that are furnished. ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No. 6755 17050-7 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 c. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin ("cut sheet")for each instrument on the project. Submit with the corresponding data sheets: 1) Where the same make and model of instrument is used in 2 or more applications on the project, and the process applications are nearly identical, and the materials, features and options are identical, submit one brochure or bulletin for the set of identical instruments. 2) Include a list of tag numbers for which it applies, with each brochure or bulletin. 3) Furnish technical product brochures that are complete enough to verify conformance with all Contract Document requirements and reflect only those features supplied with the device. 4) Cross out models, features, options, or accessories that are not being provided. 5) Clearly mark and identify special options and features. d. Organization: Index the data sheets and brochures in the submittal by systems or loops. 4. Control Panel Hardware Submittal: a. Submit the following in one submittal package. b. Complete and detailed bills of materials: 1) A bill of material list, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone, and spare part list, with unit price where required, shall be submitted for each of the PCIS system components. Bills of material shall include all items within an enclosure. 2) Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format. c. Complete grounding requirements for each system component including any requirements for PLCs, process LANs, and SCADA equipment. d. Requirements for physical separation between control system components and 120 VAC, 480 VAC, and medium voltage power cables. e. UPS and battery load calculations to show that the backup capacity and time meet the specified requirements. f. Provide a data sheet for each control system component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin, which include: 1) The manufacturer's model number or other identifying product designation. 2) Tag and loop number. 3) System to which it belongs. 4) Site to which it applies. 5) Input and output characteristics. 6) Requirements for electric power. 7) Requirements for air supply (if any). 8) Device ambient operating requirements. 9) Materials of construction. 10) Component functional description used in the Contract Documents. 11) Scale, range, units, and multiplier(if any). 12) Materials of component parts in contact with or otherwise exposed to process media and corrosive ambient air. 13) Special requirements or features. g. Priced list of spare parts for all devices. Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-8 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 1 E. Shop Drawings: 1. General: a. Preparation of Shop Drawings shall not commence until adjournment of ' the Presubmittal Conference. b. Coordinate all aspects of the Work such that a complete instrumentation, computer, and control system for the facility is supported by accurate shop and record drawings: 1 1) Clearly show every wire, circuit, and terminal provided under this contract on one or more submitted wiring diagrams. c. Show all interfaces between any of the following: instruments, vendor control panels, motor starters, variable speed drives, control valves, flow meters, chemical feeders, and other equipment related to the PCIS. d. Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing AutoCAD by Auto Desk Version 2000 or later: 1) Furnish on CD-ROM disks, as well as hard copies on 11 inch by 17 inch plain bond paper. e. Organize the shop drawing submittals for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1) Furnish the initial shop drawing submittal bound in one or more standard size, 3-ring, D-ring, loose leaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. 2) Binder ring size: Not to exceed 3 inches. f. Include the letterhead and/or title block of the firm responsible for the ' preparation of all shop drawings. Include the following information in the title block, as a minimum: 1) The firm's registered business name. ' 2) Firm's physical address, email address, and phone number. 3) OWNER's name. 4) Project name and location. 5) Drawing name. 6) Revision level. 7) Personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. 8) Date. 2. Shop drawing requirements: a. Front, side, and rear elevations, top and bottom views, showing all dimensions. b. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c. Component layout and identification. d. Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal identification. ' e. Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams, and conductor size. f. Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's recommendations for the seismic and wind conditions specified in the drawings. g. Weight. h. Finish. i. Nameplates: 1) Refer to Section 16075. j. Temperature limitations, as applicable. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-9 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 1 1 k. Interfaces between instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable speed drives, flow meters, chemical feeders, and other equipment related to the PCIS shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal. 3. Project-Wide Wiring Drawing Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a Project-wide Wiring Drawing Submittal (PWDS)which completely defines and documents the contents of each monitoring, alarming, interlock, and control loop associated with equipment provided under Division 17 sections. Equipment provided under sections in other Divisions, existing, and OWNER furnished equipment, which is to be incorporated into the PCIS. Wiring diagram templates are provided in the contract Drawings. The Contractor shall use these templates to produce complete wiring diagrams. The System Supplier shall provide: a. A complete index in the front of each bound volume. The loop drawings shall be indexed by systems or process areas. Loops shall be tagged in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. Loop drawings shall be submitted for every analog and discrete monitoring and control loop. b. Drawings showing definitive wiring diagrams for every analog and discrete instrumentation loop system. These diagrams shall show and identify each component of each loop or system using legend and symbols from ANSI/ISA S5.4- Instrument Loop Drawings, using the format as shown on the drawings, per Owner standards. Panel drawings showing PLC I/O card wiring and field terminations are not acceptable as loop drawings. Each wiring diagram shall be drawn with no more than one loop per drawing. Wiring drawings shall be developed for loops in equipment vendor supplied packages, equipment provided under Division 17, and OWNER furnished equipment. In addition to the expanded ISA S5.4 requirements, the wiring diagrams shall show the following details: 1) Equipment name of each loop with tagname as applicable. 2) Reference name, drawing, and wiring diagram numbers for any signal continuing off the wiring diagram sheet. 3) Panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for power feeds to the loops and instrumentation. 4) Designation terminal assignments associated with every manhole, puilbox,junction box, conduit, and panel through which the loop circuits pass. 5) Vendor panel, instrument panel, conduit,junction boxes, equipment, and PLC terminations, termination identification wire numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications. c. The System Supplier shall submit wiring diagrams for approval by the ENGINEER and OWNER at the following three stages; 1) Initial wiring diagrams shall be submitted 90 days after notice to proceed. The templates included in the contract documents shall be used to document each and every loop on the project. All control panel wiring and terminal block numbering shall be shown, including any power wiring. The diagrams at the initial stage are not required to include any non-PCIS equipment terminal information or actual wiring numbers. After this submittal is approved satisfactorily, the control panel fabrication can proceed. 2) Construction Wiring Diagrams shall be submitted (30 days) after approval of Initial Wiring Diagrams and the approval of all the equipment submittals that have connections to PCIS equipment, Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050- 10 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 including valve actuators, VFD's, and vendor provided control panels. This set of wiring diagrams shall be used throughout the construction phase of the project and shall include all termination information for all equipment, packaged equipment, and instruments provided for the project. Each diagram will also include complete wiring numbers that comply with specification 17050, 3.01, and as indicated on the Instrument Drawings. These diagrams do not include electrical power ' distribution system or HVAC systems, or the internal wiring of equipment, such as valve actuators, VFD drives, or other equipment not supplied as part of the PCIS. After this set of wiring diagrams have been successfully reviewed by the ENGINEER, they shall be tused as a construction tool by the Electrical Subcontractor, System Supplier, and the CONTRACTOR, for field wiring, testing, and startup activities. The System Supplier shall be responsible for maintaining the diagrams throughout the construction phase of the project by incorporating any "as-built" information and changes from the Electrical Subcontractor and CONTRACTOR as the construction phase progresses. These construction wiring diagrams may be submitted in subsets to better align with the actual construction sequence. 3) Preliminary field mark-up as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted ' 5 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2, and Performance Tests. The wiring diagrams shall fully document any changes that have occurred during the construction phase of the project. Final as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted 30 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2, and Performance Testing. ' d. Itemized instrument summary: The summary shall be prepared with Microsoft Excel software and shall be submitted on hard copy. The instrument summary shall list all of the key attributes of each instrument provided under this Contract. As a minimum, attributes shall include: 1) Tag number 2) Manufacturer 3) Model number 4) Service 5) Area location 6) Calibrated range 7) Loop drawing number 8) Associated LCP, or PLC 4. Instrument Installation Drawings: a. Submit instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details for all ' components and assemblies in an electronic AutoCAD and hard copy format, including access requirements and conduit connection or entry details. a. Furnish for each instrument a dedicated 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch installation detail that pertains to the specific instrument by tag number. b. For each detail, provide certification and the hard copies, by the instrument manufacturer, that the proposed installation is in accordance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations and is fully warrantable. c. For each detail, provide, as a minimum, the following contents: 111 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No. 6755 17050- 11 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I 1) Necessarysns voweufitrument location by referencingectioand tankeleati , buildingn vie, ors equipmentrqired to namesdene an ns numbers, and geographical qualities, such as north, south, east, west, basement or, first floor. 2) Ambient temperature and humidity where the instrument is to be installed. 3) Corrosive qualities of the environment where the instrument is to be installed. 4) Hazardous rating of the environment where the instrument is to be installed. 5) Process line pipe or tank size and material. 6) Process tap elevation and location 7) Upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument installation and pipe fittings or valves. 8) Routing of tubing and identification of supports. 9) Mounting brackets, stands, anchoring devices, and sun shades. 10) Conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power and signal. 11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and all components. 12) Clearances required for instrument servicing. 13) List itemizing all manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities, lengths required, and materials of each item. I I I I 5. Control Panel Drawings: a. Layout Drawings: 1) Submit panel, enclosure, console, furniture, and cabinet layout drawings for all items provided. 2) As a minimum, include the following information: a) To scale front, side, and plan views. b) Dimensions. c) Interior and exterior arrangements. d) Mounting information, including conduit entrance location. e) Finish data. f) Tag number and functional name of items mounted in and on each panel, console, and cabinet. g) Nameplate legend, including text, letter size, and colors. b. Wiring and Piping Diagrams: 1) Submit panel wiring and piping diagrams for every panel that contains wiring and/or piping. 2) Include the following information: a) Name of panel. b) Wiring and piping sizes and types. c) Terminal strip numbers. d) Wire tags and labels. e) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for items to which wiring and piping are connected. I f) Electrical control schematics in accordance with ANSI standards. c. Installation drawings: 1) Provide site-specific installation drawings for all control equipment panels, including dimensions. 2) Provide scaled drawings and show the position of the equipment at its intended installation location. I Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050- 12 Project No.6755 I 111 Project No. 1376013*70 I I I 3) Show the placement of all equipment being provided under this I Contract and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. 4) Show all required access and clearances associated with the Ieciip ument with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes. 6. Schematic Diagrams: a. Submit schematic diagrams for all electrical equipment in ladder diagram format. b. Include device and field connection terminal numbers on all schematic diagrams. Ic. Incorporate equipment manufacturer's shop drawing information into the schematic diagrams in order to document the entire control system. 7. Control System Diagram: I a. Submit a complete set of control system diagrams, including the following information: 1) All PLCs, workstations, printers, communication devices, and communication links: a) Show all PLCs, with their current I/O allocation, future I/O allocation, spares, and maximum potential I/O based on available slots. I2) All cables required for communication requirements. 3) Show each component fully annotated, with conduit size and number, and associated power source. IF. Record Drawings: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall keep current a set of complete loop and schematic I diagrams, which shall include all field and panel wiring, piping and tubing runs, routing, mounting details, point-to-point diagrams, with cable, wire, tube, and termination numbers. These drawings shall include all instruments and instrument elements. One set of drawings electronically formatted in AutoCAD 1 and 2 hard copies shall be submitted after completion of all Precommissioning tasks, but prior to Performance Testing. All such drawings shall be submitted for review prior to acceptance of the completed WORK by the OWNER. I 2. Instrumentation and Control System Contractor Statement of Qualifications: a. Submit statement of qualifications of the proposed PCIS in accordance with subsequent requirements of this Section. IG. Testing, Calibration, and Start-up Submittal: 1. General testing submittal requirements are specified in this Section. Additional requirements are specified in Section 01650 and other Sections. I2. Test Procedure Submittals: a. Submit the proposed procedures to be followed during tests of the PCIS and its components in two parts: 1) Preliminary Submittal: Outline of the specific proposed tests and examples of proposed forms and checklists. 2) Detailed Submittal: After successful review of the Preliminary Submittal, submit the proposed detailed test procedures, forms, and checklists. Include a statement of test objectives with the test procedures. 3. Provide certified and witnessed test and calibration checklists for each of the Ifollowing tests: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No. 6755 17050-13 Permit Set I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 I a. Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all components and systems. b. Factory Acceptance Tests. c. Loop Validation Tests: 1) Loop Validation Certifications: a) After the field device loop tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments, all separate analog control networks, all valves, all VCPs, all motors and, all local operator interface panels, submit a certified copy of all test forms signed by the CONTRACTOR, System Supplier, and the OWNER's Representative, with test data entered, together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. d. Pre-commissioning Test. e. Performance Test. 4. Factory Acceptance Test: a. Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during the test. 5. Operational Readiness Test 1 (ORT Part 1) a. Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during the test. 6. Operational Readiness Test 2 (ORT Part 2) a. Include complete test procedures and forms to be used during the test. H. Technical Manuals/Operation and Maintenance Manuals: III1. Manuals shall be based upon the successfully reviewed Shop Drawing submittals, as modified for the conditions encountered in the field. 2. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete preliminary set of written Operation and Maintenance Manuals 8 weeks before calibration, start-up, and testing. 3. Furnish in accordance with Section 01300 and the following additional requirements. 4. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the ENGINEER for review of format and content: a. ENGINEER will return 1 set with comments. b. Revise, as required, and submit the requisite number of copies to the ENGINEER 15 days before Pre-commissioning of the systems. 5. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the final manuals. 6. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable 111 operation, service, maintenance, and repair. 7. Include Record Documents and the successfully reviewed shop drawing submittals, modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work. 8. Include signed results from Calibration, Loop Validation Tests, Pre- commissioning, and Performance Testing. 9. Provide installation, connection, operating, calibration, setpoints (e.g., pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.), adjustment, test, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail. 10. Provide detailed views of all instruments, assemblies, accessory components, complete parts lists, and ordering instructions. 11. Spare Parts List: a. Include a priced list of recommended spare parts for all the equipment furnished under this Contract: 1) Include recommended quantities sufficient to maintain the furnished system for a period of 5 years. Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050- 14 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013`70 I I b. Annotate the list to indicate which items are furnished as part of this IContract. c. Provide the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and manufacturer's local service representative of these parts. I 12. Organize the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each process in the following manner: a. Section A- Process and Instrumentation Diagrams. b. Section C - Loop Drawings. I c. Section D- Instrument Summary. d. Section E - Instrument Data Sheets and Brochures. e. Section F -Sizing Calculations. I f. Section G - Instrumentation Installation Details. g. Section H - Test Results. h. Section I - Operational Manual. Ii. Section J - Spare Parts List. I. Training Submittals: 1. The Training Submittal shall be based on the preliminary submittal provided at the Presubmittal Conference. a. Develop and submit for review a General Training Plan. Include complete descriptions of all planned training classes, preliminary training schedule, Ilist of proposed instructors along with resumes, examples of proposed training manuals, and description of any special training tools to be used (simulators, self-paced modules, personal computer-based training). I b. The ENGINEER will review the General Training Plan. Special emphasis will be placed on review of the qualifications of the proposed instructors and the timing of the individual courses to maximize their effectiveness. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the proposed instructors are not I sufficiently qualified to conduct the specified training courses, or lack experience, on the specific configuration of the system, provide better qualified instructors. Ic. Training Course Plan submittals: 1) For each training course or other training activity, submit a detailed, outline and agenda for each lesson. I 2) Describe any student pre-requisites for the course or training activity. 3) Provide an updated schedule for all sessions of the course, including dates, times, durations, and locations. 4) Submit training materials. I d. Incorporate all submittal review comments into the course. e. Do not conduct training courses before review and acceptance of the Course Plan submittal for the course. IJ. Record Documents: 1. Furnish in accordance with Section 01720. I 2. Provide Record Documents of all instrumentation Drawings. 3. Record Drawing requirements: a. Update Record Drawings weekly. I b. Record Drawings shall be fully updated as a condition of the monthly progress payments. c. Submit final fully updated Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. Id. Clearly show all changes in accordance with the following: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-15 Permit Set 1 KU Project No. 1376013'70 I I 1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments, or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction. 4. Shop Drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems: I 1) Should an error be found in a shop drawing during installation or startup of equipment, note the correction, including any field changes found necessary, on the drawing and submit the corrections in the I Record Documents. 2) Update, check, and revise all wiring drawings and other submitted drawings and documents to show final installed conditions. b. Provide "As-Built" Shop Drawings for all instrumentation equipment on 11 inch by 17-inch paper. 1) Provide actual field markups (redlines) upon substantial completion. c. Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in AutoCad Version 2000 by Autodesk and .pdf. Size all Drawings to be Il readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media. 5. Submittal Documents: I a. Provide an interim submittal of Record Documents after the PCIS system Pre-commissioning. b. Submit final Record Documents before Substantial Completion or earlier if so specified in Section 01720 or the General Requirements. 6. Review and Corrections: a. Correct any Record Documents or other documents found to be incomplete, not accurate, poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit Record Documents returned for correction. K. Testing Submittals: 1. Test plan: 70 days prior to scheduled start of testing. 2. Test procedures: 70 days prior to scheduled start of testing. 3. Factory test data records, certified. 4. Field testing submittals. ,1: a. Operational Readiness Test: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed test, forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed forms and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Completed component calibration sheets with O&M manuals. b. Performance Acceptance Test: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Proposed tests, forms, and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed tests, forms, and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed. c. Refer to Part 3 of this section for additional requirements. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Procurement Restriction: 111 1. Certain equipment manufacturers with marketing operations based on local agents, have terms where the selling agent has responsibility for after sales service. In such cases, the SUPPLIER's procurement of such equipment is Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-16 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 t t restricted to the selling agent within whose service area the equipment will be finally installed, thus assuring the OWNER of the availability of local after sales service. B. Qualifications: 1. Instrumentation and Control Systems shall be provided under the supervision of a single CONTRACTOR or subcontractor, with the following qualifications: ' a. Five years or successful experience on similar projects, including experience on municipal wastewater treatment plants. b. A production facility equipped to perform factory testing within 250 miles of the job site. c. Capability to list and label control panels, as a unit, in accordance with UL 508 and UL 694. 2. The Contractor shall deliver a detailed statement of qualifications of the proposed Subcontractor to the Engineer prior to the development of any technical submittals. As a minimum, the statement shall include: a. Description and location of the company. 1 b. Resumes of key employees. c. Description of control system projects of similar scope and complexity that were designed, assembled, and installed by the PICS in the last five years. Include project name, description, and customer reference. 3. Supervision shall include responsibility for, but not be limited to design, procurement, fabrication, installation, field loop integrity, calibration, testing, commissioning, training, documentation, and interfacing requirements. 4. Minimum Subcontract's Work Scope: a. For l&C equipment and ancillaries required under PICS Subsystem sections: 1) Required Submittals. 2) Attendance at meetings specified under Division 17. 3) Equipment and ancillaries. 4) Panel fabrication, except those provided as part of packaged systems. 5) Factory Testing. 6) Verification of any existing field circuits interfaced or altered under this Scope of Work. 7) Instructions, details, and recommendations to, and coordination with CONTRACTOR for Certificate of Proper Installation. 8) Control Panels and PLC Hardware. 9) OWNER training. 10) Verify readiness for operation. 1 11) Verify the correctness of final power and signal connections (lugging and connecting). 12) Adjusting and calibrating. 13) Start up. 14) Test Plans, including ORT-1 and ORT-2. 15) Testing and coordination of testing. 16) Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the Process Control and Instrumentation system and the interfacing devices. 17) Coordination with third party programmer. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050- 17 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"`70 1 r b. Verify following Work, not performed by the PICS Subcontractor, is provided: 1) Correct type, size, and number of signal wires, with their raceways. 2) Correct electrical power circuits and raceways. 3) Correct size, type, and number of PICS related pipes, valves, fittings, and tubes. 4) Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process mechanical piping for in-line primary elements. c. For equipment not provided under MC Subsystems, but directly connected to equipment required by l&C Subsystems: 1) Obtain from CONTRACTOR, manufacturers' information on installation, interface, function, and adjustment. 2) Coordinate with CONTRACTOR to allow required interface and 111 operation with MC Subsystem. 3) For operation and control, verify that installations, interfacing signal terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4) Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PICS. 5) Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the following: a) Valve operators, position switches, and controls. Refer to and coordinate with other Sections. b) Adjustable speed drive systems. c) Package system control stations. d) Equipment control interlocks. d. Additional requirements in this and other Specification Sections that are described as the responsibility of the Contractor may, at the discretion of the Contractor and l&C Subcontractor, be included in the l&C Subcontractor's scope of work. C. Quality Assurance Procedure: 111 1. A quality assurance procedure shall be defined and implemented by the CONTRACTOR supervising instrumentation and control systems. The procedure shall: a. Require that the project manager schedule and budget for in-house and inter-Contractor checking. b. Specify qualifications required for engineering and technical personnel in the execution and checking of specific tasks. c. Identify the responsibilities of the executor and the checker. d. Provide quality assurance data sheets listing specific tasks and stages of tasks, with space for the printed names of the executor and checker, and the checker's signature and date. 2. The quality assurance procedure shall form part of the contractual requirements for subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers with unit responsibility. 3. The quality assurance data sheets shall be maintained current and shall be available for inspection upon request. D. Substitutes and "Or-Equals": 1. Substitutes and "Or-Equals" may be proposed in accordance with the General Conditions. 2. Where manufacturers of instrumentation and control system products, other than those specified, are proposed, they shall have a minimum of 5 years I Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050- 18 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I experience in the manufacture of comparable equipment used in similar I applications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide manufacturers' references to existing installations upon request of the ENGINEER. Noncompliance shall be a basis for rejection. IE. Instrumentation and Control Systems Installation Supervisor: 1. Installation and wiring of instrumentation and controls shall be supervised by an on-site experienced Electrical Engineer or Control Systems Engineer. 2. The supervisor shall be subject to acceptance by the ENGINEER. The supervisor's resume shall be submitted showing relevant and sufficient experience. If so required, the supervisor shall attend an interview at the IENGINEER's facility. The ENGINEER's decisions shall be final. F. Coordination Meetings: I 1. General: In accordance with Section 01010, Summary of Work. a. Attendees shall Include: ENGINEER, OWNER, CONTACTOR, and l&C Subcontractor. b. First Meeting: Schedule per the requirements of Section 01014. I Thereafter, monthly, prior to first startup activity and weekly during startup activities. Include meetings on progress schedule. 2. Other Coordination Meetings: Ia. Refer to I&C Subsystem for additional meeting requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING IA. Storage: 1. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately I protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. If any apparatus has besect to ble injury w , it be uly I puten throughubjtestspossias directed by the by ENGINEER.atershall If suchthorotestsghrevealdried out defectsand , the equipment shall be replaced. 2. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will Inot interfere with the construction or the OWNER's operations. B. Delivery Timing: 1. No instrumentation or control system equipment shall be delivered to the job I site until required for integration with other construction, and all necessary environmental preparations have been made. I C. Intermediate Storage and Handling: 1. When the CONTRACTOR is obliged to take delivery in advance of this time, the CONTRACTOR shall do so at a bonded air-conditioned warehouse. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for storage at the warehouse and transport I of the equipment to the jobsite by suitably qualified movers with moving equipment(e.g., floating bed truck), as recommended by the manufacturer. I D. Non-compliance: 1. Should the equipment be delivered to the jobsite and be stored in adverse conditions or installed in improper environmental conditions, then at the IENGINEER's discretion, prior testing may be declared void. Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-19 Permit Set IK/J Project No. 1376013"70 i I 2. The prior testing (e.g., factory acceptance testing) shall be repeated and/or, at the discretion of the ENGINEER, a reduced value dollar credit shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. 3. The equipment shall still be required to satisfy site testing performance criteria. 1.09 SITE CONDITIONS I A. General: Instrumentation and control systems equipment shall be suitable, or made suitable, for site conditions at the project location. B. Temperature: 1. Electrical and Control Room Temperature: 60 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Field Locations Temperature: 20 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Above temperatures do not include affects of direct sunlight or wind chill. C. Relative Humidity (RH): 1 1. Electrical and Control Rooms RH: 20 to 80 percent. . 2. Field Locations RH: 10 to 100 percent. D. Atmospheric Contaminants: 1. Atmospheric contaminants include hydrogen-sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, and dust in indeterminate concentrations. 2. Corrosive atmosphere testing shall be conducted, where specified. E. Electromagnetic Radiation: 1. Electromagnetic radiation: 27 to 500 MHz: 10 volts/m. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. General: I 1. Coordinate system delivery and installation supervision with other portions of the Work. B. Special Planning: 1. Planning or work shall include allowance for testing requirements detailed in Part 3. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to other instrumentation and control Sections. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL I A. Factory Testing: 1. Tests shall be observed by the OWNER. Tests may be observed by the Electrical ENGINEER and the Project ENGINEER. Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-20 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 I I 2. The OWNER shall bear costs associated with travel for this test including, but I not limited to: lodging, meals, travel time and time to witness tests for up to 3 representatives of the OWNER. 3. Costs associated with accommodation of the witness testing at the testing I facility shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR. 4. The ENGINEER shall be reimbursed by the OWNER for all costs associated with these tests. 5. Prerequisites to Factory Testing: I a. Approved test plan. b. Notice to the OWNER given 21 working days prior to the start of testing. 6. Instrumentation and control systems shall be factory tested and calibrated. I7. Factory test/calibration records shall be submitted to the ENGINEER which show that the equipment has achieved the specified performance and accuracy. I 8. Additional Factory Testing: Refer to other instrumentation and control Sections. EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: I 1. Install instrumentation and control systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications, final submittals, manufacturer's instructions, and (where applicable)American Petroleum Institute RP550/551. I 2. Install field tags on all instruments with the following information: a. Description b. Unit#/Tabware# c. Power Feed Id. I/O Point(s) B. Electrical: 111 1. Install cable and wiring in accordance with applicable Sections in Division 16. C. Piping: 1. Install piping and fittings in accordance with applicable Sections of Divisions 15. D. Wiring Identification Numbers: Each wire shall be labeled per the Clean Water Services standards, as demonstrated on the example wiring diagrams, provided as part of the Plans and as summarized below: 1. Cable numbers shall be named based on the equipment tag of the field device I utilizing the electrical power source. The form of the tag shall be 406P1205C2 where '406P1205' represents the equipment designation, 'C' indicated a control cable and 2 is a sequential number developed as part of the circuit design. Cable type designations shall follow the designations listed below: I a. C- Control b. S - Signal (below 80 volts AC or DC) c. P - Power Id. N - Network (Ethernet, Profibus) 2. Within PLC cabinets, control and signal wiring shall be labeled at both ends based on the software address of the I/O point. Tags shall take the following form: Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-21 Permit Set IK/J Project No. 137601370 I I a. Rack= R-x b. Slot= S-x c. Point= P-x d. Example: Point 5 of Slot 6 of Rack 3 = "R3S6P5" E. Ancillary Devices: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any I additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing the work. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra work or delay. F. Installation Criteria and Validation: Field-mounted components and assemblies shall be installed and connected according to the requirements below: 1. Installation personnel have been instructed on installation requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Technical assistance is available to installation personnel at least by telephone. I 3. Installation personnel have at least one copy of the approved Shop Drawings and data. 4. Instrument process sensing lines shall be installed in conduit under Section 16050 - Electrical General Provisions. Individual tubes shall run parallel and III near the surfaces from which they are supported. Supports shall be used at intervals of not more than 3 feet of rigid tubing. 5. Bends shall be formed to uniform radii with the proper tool without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing. Plastic clips shall be used to hold individual plastic tubes parallel. Ends of tubing shall be square cut and cleaned before being inserted in the fittings. Bulkhead fittings shall be provided at panels requiring pipe or tubing entries. 6. Flexible cables and capillary tubing shall be installed in flexible conduits. The lengths shall be sufficient to withdraw the element for periodic maintenance. 7. Air line connectors shall be 2 piece Swagelok type. 8. Power and signal wires shall be terminated with crimped type ferrules. 9. Connectors shall be, as a minimum, water tight. 10. Wires shall be mounted clearly with an identification tag that is of a permanent and reusable nature. 11. Wire and cable shall be arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in cable groups and connected from terminal to terminal without splices, unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. Wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and corners. 12. Mounting stands and bracket materials and workmanship shall comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. III 13. Verify the correctness of each installation, including polarity of electric power and signal connections, and make sure process connections are free of leaks. The CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that discrepancies have been corrected for each loop or system checked out. 14. The OWNER shall not be responsible for any additional cost of rework attributable to actions of the CONTRACTOR or the Instrumentation Supplier. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing - General: I Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-22 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I I I 1. The requirements given in this Section are a minimum and may be I augmented, but not replaced, by more specific requirements in subsequent Sections. 2. 70 days before the commencement of any testing activity, the CONTRACTOR I shall submit a detailed test plan and detailed step-by-step test procedures, complete with forms for the recording of test results, testing equipment used, and space for signature identification of the individual witnessing the test. 3. No required test shall be applied without prior notice to the OWNER. Testing I shall not be conducted without being witnessed unless with the prior acceptance of the OWNER or OWNER's representative. The Contractor shall check the installed work to extent possible prior to formal testing to ensure that I formal testing can be expeditiously performed. 4. Each unit of test equipment used shall have a certified calibration report traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), and I issued within 6 months of the testing date. These calibration reports shall be submitted with the test records. Test instruments shall have an accuracy 3 times better than that of the device under test. Analog devices shall be tested I at 5 equally spread points over the full range. 5. Provide onsite supervision for startup and testing activities. Provide sufficient resources to complete all onsite testing, calibration, and adjustment during the scheduled startup period. Provide assistance to OWNER during the startup of Ithe facility. B. Operational Readiness Test (ORT): Prior to startup test period and PAT for each I facility, inspect, test, and document that the associated PICS equipment is ready for operation. Break the ORT for each facility into two parts: 1. ORT Part 1 - Purpose: Part 1 of the ORT shall demonstrate that the physical I m instrumentsinstallationis shallcobe calibratedpleteandthe andsystem receiveisready final adjforustmentssoftwaretesting.as partField of th ORT. Through loop tests, the accuracy of all wiring shall be demonstrated as well as, hardwired interlocks and alarms. I 2. ORT Part 1 - Prerequisites: The following activities shall be completed prior to the start of ORT 1: a. Electrical and equipment installation complete, including equipment tags I and wire/conduit labeling. b. Accurate wiring diagrams, loop drawings, and interconnect diagrams. c. An approved ORT 1 procedure. d. Manufacturer approval of the mechanical installation or a confirmation that a manufacturer's representative shall be present during the testing. e. Notification of the Contractor's intent to perform ORT 1 submitted 30 days prior to the scheduled start of the ORT. III 3. ORT- Part 1 - Description of Test: The PICS Subcontractor shall test and document that the Process, Instrumentation, and Control system, excluding OWNER provided applications software, is ready for operation. For PICS I equipment for which the OWNER provides applications software, provide sufficient temporary software configuration to allow testing of this equipment. a. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: 1) Check PICS for proper installation, calibration, and adjustment on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis. Work with Division 16, Electrical, to troubleshoot any loops failing tests. Division 16, I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-23 Permit Set 111 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 1 t Electrical, is responsible for field wiring between control panels and PICS equipment. 2) Structure tests to include circuits internal to valves and control panels. Tests shall include vendor provided controls and equipment. 3) Provide space on forms for signoff by PICS Subcontractor. ' 4) Use loop status report to organize and track inspection, adjustment, and calibration of each loop and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Tag number for each component. d) Check-offs/Sign-offs for each component: (1) Tag/identification. (2) Installation. (3) Termination wiring. (4) Termination tubing. (5) Calibration/adjustment. e) Check-offs/Signs-offs for the Loop: (1) Panel interface terminations. (2) I/O interface terminations with PLC's. f) I/O Signals for PLCs are Operational: Received/sent, processed, adjusted. g) Total loop operational. h) Space for comments. 5) Component calibration sheet for each active control system component(except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items) and each PLCs I/O module and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Component tag number or I/O module number. d) Component code number for control system elements. e) Manufacturer for control system elements. f) Model number/serial number for control system elements. g) Summary of Functional Requirements, for example: (1) Indicators and recorders, scale, and chart ranges. (2) Transmitters/converters, input and output ranges. (3) Computing elements' function. (4) Switching elements, unit range, differential (fixed/adjustable), reset(auto/manual). (5) I/O Modules: Input or output. h) Calibrations, for example, but not limited to: (1) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs at 0, 25, 50, 75 and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (2) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. (3) I/O Modules: Actual inputs or outputs of 0, 25, 50,75 and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. i) Space for comments. 6) Maintain loop status reports, valve adjustment sheets, and component calibration sheets at site and make them available to ENGINEER at all times. 7) Full testing by PICS Subcontractor shall be completed prior to verification of ORT-1 by ENGINEER. PICS Subcontractor shall Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-24 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I tta involvementprovidewrien with ORT-1confirmtion testing.oftesting Thesecompletion inspections andpriorto tests shallENGINEER then be spot checked by ENGINEER. 8) ENGINEER reviews loop status sheets and component calibration I sheets and spot-check their entries periodically, and upon completion of ORT. Correct deficiencies found. b. ORT Forms: Example ORT forms referenced in Article Supplements. 4. ORT-Part 2: Combined effort between PICS Subcontractor and OWNER shall I confirm that PICS, including applications software, is ready for operation. a. ORT, Part 2 - Purpose: Each control function and operating condition shall be tested. End-to-end loop test from field devices and equipment to the I SCADA HMI shall be performed. Test shall be performed using actual equipment and conditions with a minimum of simulated conditions. Set points, time delay, and tuning constants shall be adjusted as part of this Itesting. b. Prerequisites for ORT 2: 1) Completion of ORT-Part 1, all forms signed off by ENGINEER. 2) Approved ORT-Part 2 testing plans. I 3) All equipment shall be available for operation. All manufacturer inspections and certifications completed. 4) Testing schedule coordinated with the programmer. Allow a minimum I of two weeks between the completion of ORT 1 and any scheduled ORT, Part 2 testing. c. Joint test with OWNER. Plant interlocks and communication with PLC's I and PMCS equipment tested on a loop-by-loop basis. d. Test procedures provided by OWNER based on ORT-1 and on application software tests. IC. Specialty Equipment: 1. For certain components or systems provided under this Section but not manufactured by PICS Subcontractor, provide services of qualified Imanufacturer's representative during installation, startup, demonstration testing, and OWNER training. Refer to Article Manufacturer's Services in PICS Subsystems for specific requirements. 1 3.03 TRAINING A. On-Site Training: I1. Provide on-site training for all instrumentation and control systems. On-site training shall include: testing and maintenance techniques, set up, calibration, operation, application programming, system reconfiguration, a thorough Idescription and explanation of the on site control system, failure and recovery procedures (inducing failures), and operation during failures. Both theory and hands on training shall be provided. 2. Allow for 4 hours of operational training with no limitation on the number of I allowable attendees. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean area during construction and after completion of construction. structlon. I Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 17050-25 Permit Set I K/J Project No. 1376013*70 I B. Vacuum panels, cabinets, and enclosures to remove dust and debris. Wipe surfaces clean. 3.05 SUPPLEMENTS A. Supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION" are part of this Specification. 1. ORT Forms: a. ORT-1 Form and Example. b. ORT-2 Form and Example c. Instrument Calibration Sheet and Example: Provides detailed information on each instrument(except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items). 111 2. Performance Acceptance Test Sheet(Example): Describes the PAT for a given loop. The format is mostly free form. a. Lists the requirements of the loop. b. Briefly describes the test. c. Cites expedited results. d. Provides space for check-off by witness. END OF SECTION 1 I I I I 1 I I I Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-26 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 — In — r INN E EN T — r N OM 1 — SO MI MN r r Durham Odor Control Phase 2, PN 6755 Operational Readiness Testing (OTR— Part 1) lop 'o. ag 'o. r twice 1 teen n ,on MI I Thi •, , s or ',nge M.""rum 1 iagram [y�i"a all Loon Ho. Ta! No. Lo n n Desert n ion Hi!h Ra !e PLC Rack Slot Point IMMI P&ID Wiri Dial am ItO Check op'o. T'ire'a op I escn n ion _, .,, to ion 171=511C7-1-11� 16 , • ermine ,o. TT ring rlagram yi'a!77.1.11 ORT-Part 1:Test Procedures 1.Verify component tagAdentification. 2.Verify correct%Sire terminations and instrument installation. 3.Instrument calibrations completed.(Fill out calibration sheet for each instrument) 4.Verify I/O signalstotrom PLC,using the actual field devicesW-Ien possible.(limit svutch,hand snitch,etc.) 5.Verify loop is ready for operation. Loop Checkout CormrentsMotesaproblerrrs ORT-Part 1 Loop Testing Completed: Date: SAMPLE [PICS Name] ORT-Part 1 Loop Testing Completed: Date: Loop No.50-05301 [Dv 16 Subcontractor Name] Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Basic Measurement and Control Project No.6755 K 17050-27 Permit SetKMProject No. 1376013"`70 Durham Odor Control Phase 2, PN 6755 Operational Readiness Testing (OTR—Part 2) r Panel Loop No. Tag No. Device Description P&ID Wiring Cal.Sheet Status or Range Diagram Loop No. Tag No. Loop Description High Range PLC Rack Slot Point Type P&ID Wiring Diagram Panel Manual See#1 Command 0/, 50/, 100% 50/ 0/ Auto See#4 ORT-Part 2:Test Procedures 1.Place devices in Remote&SCADA Manual.Verify SCADA Manual Control(0-50-100-50-0%),Record Valve response and Loop PV(if possible) 2.Verify correct loop response during manual actuation. 3.Verify SCADA loop response matches device within tolerence. 4.Place loop in Auto mode(s),verify loop control responds correctly to SP and PV changes. 5.Verify loop is ready for operation. Loop Checkout Comments/Notes/Problems ORT-Part 2 Loop Testing Completed: Date: I I (Integrator-Company Name) SAMPLE ORT-Part 2 Loop Testing Completed: Date: Team Electric Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Bas Measurement and Control Set 17050 28 Project No.6755 PermitK/J Project No. 1376013*70 MN 11111 11111 11111 an OM EN MN OM 11111 11111 M 11111 MI NM NM 111111 INN MI I I CWS INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION SHEET- TEMPLATE IOwner Project No. (if applicable): Project Name: I Project Owner: Regulatory Agency Project No (if applicable) Project No.: Date: Control Loop No: IInstrument Tag No. Transmitter/gauge span: Manufacturer: Switch set- point: Model No.: Switch dead band I Serial No: Switch range : TRANSMITTERS AND INDICATORS I Increasing Input Decreasing Input % of Span Input Output Error Input Output Error (% of span) 0% 1 25% 50% 75% I 100% Other(if applicable) Other(if applicable) ISWITCHES Actuation point Increasing Input Decreasing Input IInput Output Error Input Output Error (% of span) High (increasing input) I Low (increasing input) IMaximum allowable error(per Contact Documents): Remarks: I CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT UTILIZED IDevice Type MFR/Model No. Accuracy Nist Traceability? I Certified by: Date Certified: I IlBasic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-29 Project No. 6755 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 Project Name: CWS INSTRUMENTATION CALIBRATION SHEET- SAMPLE Owner Project No. (if applicable): Project Owner: ABC Company Regulatory Agency Project No (if applicable) Project No.: 10050-211-133 Date: 04/20/03 Control Loop No: 106 Instrument Tag No. PIT- 106A Transmitter/gauge span: I Manufacturer: ACE, Inc. Switch set- point: Model No.: 1275-X Switch dead band Serial No: 3049569TSH Switch range : TRANSMITTERS AND INDICATORS Increasing Input Decreasing Input % of Span Input Output Error Input Output Error I (% of span) 0% 0.00 psi 4.02 mA 0.13 0.00 psi 4.00 mA 0.00 25% 50.00 psi 8.00 mA 0.00 50.00 psi 8.01 mA 0.06 50% 100.00 psi 12.01 mA 0.06 100.00 psi 12.00 mA 0.00 75% 150.00 psi 16.00 mA 0.00 150.00 psi 16.01 mA 0.06 100% 200.00 psi 20.00 mA 0.00 200.00 psi 19.99 mA 0.06 Other(if applicable) Other (if applicable) SWITCHES Actuation point Increasing Input Decreasing Input Input Output Error Input Output Error span) High (increasing input) Low(increasing input) Maximum allowable error(per Contact Documents): 0.15% Span Remarks: Adjusted zero- otherwise no adjustments required. CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT UTILIZED (% of Device Type MFR/Model No. Accuracy Nist Traceability? Pressure calibrator Hathaway/Beta XL 5946P 0.025% Full Scale Yes Pressure module Hathaway/Beta XL 5948P-6:0- 0.025% Full Scale Yes 150 psi Certified by: Date Certified: I I Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 I Permit Set 17050-30 Project No.6550 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 I 1 1 PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET 1 Example 1 ProjectName: Project No.: Demonstrationtest(s): For reach functional requirement of the loop: (a) List and number the requirement. (b)Breifly describe the purpose and steps for each test. (c) Record results. (d) Sign off. 1L d,. i 1 Forms/Sheets Verified By Date Owner Sign-Off Loop D rav ingsOOR T Results Instrument Calibration Sheets 1 Performance Acceptance Test t By Date i Performed ■ Witnessed Loop No.: 1 Basic Measurement and Control Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17050-31 Project No. 6755 1 K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 SECTION 17100 HVAC INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Requirements of Division 1 and Section 17050 form a part of this Section. This Section specifies temperature and pressure measurement devices for process instrumentation, auxiliary equipment and supplies directly related to the installation of and operation of these measurement devices, to perform the required functions in conjunction with information and equipment specified in Section 15800 and other sections of 17. Schedules indicating required information are attached at the end of this Section, but shall not be construed as Bills of Material or as a complete listing of ' all required devices. 1.02 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Shop drawings to be submitted in this Section shall be made in one package under Product Review category of shop drawings. 1 B. Shop Drawings: In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, shop drawings shall include for each type of instrument the supply voltage and frequency, electrical load, accuracy, description of operation, operating instructions, and calibration 1 procedure. C. Installation Method: The proposed method of mounting sensors and instruments 1 shall accompany all shop drawings. D. Parts List: Submit a parts list with current net prices and a list of recommended 1 spares. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: In addition to the requirements of Section 17050, temperature measurement devices furnished shall be manufactured by firms regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar equipment. All equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. B. Maintainability: All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and 1 repair, and access to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible upon removal of a panel or cover. 1 C. Materials and Installation: Materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the current editions of referenced electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment supplied and installed. All equipment of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer. Capacities of all equipment shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings or specified. ' Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 HVAC Instruments Project No. 6755 17100- 1 Permit Set K/J Project No. 1376013"70 1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. General: Temperature sensors shall 100 ohm platinum-resistance element per SAMA Standard RC21-4 corrected for IPTS 68. B. Construction: Temperature sensors shall be equipped with transmitters as specified on the Schedule. Room temperature sensors shall be integrally mounted with transmitters. Transmitters shall be as specified elsewhere in this Section. C. Duct Temperature (Intake and Discharge): Temperature shall be sensed with a 12 inch long probe inserted through a sealed opening in the duct wall. The range shall be 40 to 140 degrees F with a plus or minus accuracy of 2 degrees. D. Quality: Sensors shall be as manufactured by Rosemount, Burns Engineering, or equal. 2.02 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS - ELECTRONIC A. General: Electric transmitters shall be integrally mounted with temperature sensors. Transmitters shall convert the temperature measurement to a 4-20 mAdc signal capable of transmission into at least a 500-ohm load at 50-volt or less. Signal and power transmission shall be provided by a single pair of wires. Operating ambient temperature shall be at least-40° to +82°C. Reference accuracy shall be±0.2% of span or better. A process variable indicating meter shall be provided. Transmitters shall have automatic reference junction temperature compensation. B. Construction: Transmitter enclosures shall be NEMA 4 rated except where explosion-proof is specified. The sensor shall be mounted to the transmitter enclosure by threaded coupling. C. Manufacturer: Transmitters shall be as manufactured by Rosemount, or equal. 2.03 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES ' A. Pressure switches shall incorporate bourdon tubes, diaphragms, or bellows as the sensing and actuating element. The actuating element shall be Type 316 stainless steel or phosphorous bronze, depending on compatibility with the process fluid. The actuating point shall be readily field-adjustable in the range specified with adjustable dead band. Switches shall be SPDT, rated at 5 ampere minimum at 120 Vac. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X unless specified explosion-proof as shown on the Drawings. Process connection shall be to HVAC ductwork in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation for sensing differential pressure across the fan(s). B. There shall be calibrated external adjustments for set point and differential. Element shall be rated for at least 50% over range pressure. Switches used for alarm shall have manual reset. C. Adjustable differential switches shall be as manufactured by ASCO; Mercoid; or equal. I HVAC Instruments Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 Permit Set 17100-2 Project No.6755 K/J Project No. 1376013*70 1 1 ' D. Adjustable differential switches on the chemical odor scrubber fans shall be rated Class 1, Div 2. Manufacturer shall be Dwyer, no substitute. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation, testing, calibration, validation, startup, and instruction shall be in accordance with Section 17050. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 HVAC Instruments Project No. 6755 17100-3 Permit Set K/J Project No. 137601370 1 1 SECTION 17901 I SCHEDULES - FIELD INSTRUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Schedules - Field Instruments is not a take-off list. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for additional information. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&IDs shall govern. I B. Abbreviations used in the Instrument Index are defined on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCHEDULES FIELD INSTRUMENTS A. Schedules Field Instruments attached. END OF SECTION I I 1 1 1 I 1 Field Instruments — Durham Odor Control Improvements Phase 2 SchedulesPermit Set Project No.6755 17901 - 1 K/J Project No. 1376013'70 MO MO — M M N r M M I M M i M r aw M N M Clean Water Services Specification Section 17901 -Instrument Index Tag Description Device Type P&ID Mounting Specification Application Data 750TIT5017 Solids Building Dewatering Centrifuge Room Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 750TIT5027 Solids Building Upper Basement Electrical Room Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 750TIT5037 Solids Building Thickening Centrifuge Room Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 750TIT5097 Solids Building Fermenter Tunnel Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-103 Field 17100 750TIT5016 Solids Building MAU5010 Discharge Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 750T115026 Solids Building MAU5020 Discharge Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 7501115036 Solids Building MAU5030 Discharge Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 750TIT5031 Solids Building MAU5030 Intake Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-101 Field 17100 750TIT5096 Solids Building SF5090 Discharge Air Temp Temperature Transmitter 1-103 Field 17100 750DPI5012 Solids Building MAU5010 Filter Differential Pressure Pressure Gauge 1-101 Field 15800 750DPI5022 Solids Building MAU5020 Filter Differential Pressure Pressure Gauge 1-101 Field 15800 750DPI5032 Solids Building MAU5030 Filter Differential Pressure Pressure Gauge 1-101 Field 15800 750DPSL5013 Solids Building MAU5010 Differential Pressure Pressure Switch 1-101 Field 17100 750DPSL5023 Solids Building MAU5020 Differential Pressure Pressure Switch 1-101 Field 17100 750DPSL5033 Solids Building MAU5030 Differential Pressure Pressure Switch 1-101 Field 17100 750DPSL5093 Solids Building SF5090 Differential Air Pressure Pressure Switch 1-102 Field 17100 930DPSL5041 Solids Building EF5040 Differential Air Pressure Pressure Switch 1-102 Field 17100 930DPSL5051 Solids Building EF5050 Differential Air Pressure Pressure Switch 1-102 Field 17100 7500PSL5061 Solids Building EF5060 Differential Air Pressure Pressure Switch I-102 Field 17100 750DPSL5071 Solids Building EF5070 Differential Air Pressure Pressure Switch 1-102 Field 17100 750DPSL5081 Solids Building EF5080 Differential Air Pressure Pressure Switch 1-102 Field 17100 750TSL5014 Solids Building MAU5010 Freeze Stat Temperature Switch 1-101 Field 15800 750TSL5024 Solids Building MAU5020 Freeze Stat Temperature Switch 1-101 Field 15800 750TSL5034 Solids Building MAU5030 Freeze Stat Temperature Switch 1-101 Field 15800 17901-2